Project: Cooper High School 2019 Renovations – Bid Package 3

Addendum No. 2

Cooper High School 2019 Renovations Page 1 of 1

New Hope, MN 00 9100 KA Addendum Template 04/4/19

Addendum 2

Project: Cooper High School 2019 Renovations – Bid Package 3

Owner: Robbinsdale Area Schools

Project No.: 1910026

Issue Date: April 4, 2019

Bid Date: March 14, 2019

To: Prospective Bidders From: Kraus-Anderson Construction Company 501 South 8th Street Minneapolis, MN 55404

1.01 INTRODUCTION

A. This Addendum is a Contract Document that modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 2-25-2019 including Addendum No. 1. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject Bid to disqualification.

B. Use descriptions of changes to Specifications and Drawings in this Document only as a guide only. When Specification Sections or Drawings are issued or reissued with this Addendum the changes made in Specification or on Drawings take precedence over narrative description. When the Specification Section or Drawing is not reissued, the narrative description in this Addendum will communicate the revisions. Each Bidder shall make an independent determination of the work affected by Addendum items.

C. This Addendum consists of 1 page, plus attachments listed below. Specification Sections and Drawings are not attached unless specifically indicated as (Attached).

D. Specification Revisions: When Specification Sections are reissued, they will be replaced in their entirety. Revisions will be identified by a “Revision Note” that identifies which paragraph was revised, deleted or added. Revised text will be highlighted by overstriking deleted text and underlining new text.

E. Drawing Revisions: Drawings replaced in their entirety with revisions identified by clouding changes and adding a “Revision Delta” near the cloud. The Revision ledger will indicate the date of the revision.

1.02 CHANGES TO DOCUMENTS

Modifications to Specifications 1. 01 1220-06-A – Carpentry: Revised and Re-issued in its entirety. 2. Refer to LSE Addendum 2 attached.

Modifications to Project Drawings 1. Refer to LSE Addendum 2 attached.

-- End of Addendum --

Work Scope 06-A – Carpentry

Cooper High School 2019 Renovations – Bid Package 3 Addendum #2 Page 1 of 3

New Hope, MN 4/5/19

1.01 CARPENTRY

A. Scope of Work: This Work Scope consists of the Work directly and indirectly required by the specification sections listed below, plus all project drawings, addenda, and other documents identified as part of the Agreement, regardless of design discipline, drawing sheet identification, or jurisdictional requirements. 1. Specific Specifications Sections that are the responsibility of the Work Scope:

00 0000 Division 00 – Procurement Requirements & Conditions of the Contract As it applies 01 0000 Division 01 - General Requirements As it applies 02 4119.13 Selective Demolition As it applies 05 5000 Metal Fabrications As it applies 06 1100 Rough Carpentry As it applies 06 2000 Finished Carpentry Complete 06 6116 Solid Surfacing Fabrications Complete 06 6119 Quartz Surfacing Fabrications Complete 06 8316 FRP Wall Paneling Complete 07 4243 Phenolic Composite Wall Panels Complete 08 1113.13 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Complete 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors Complete 08 3313 Coiling Counter Doors Complete 08 7100 Door Hardware As it applies DIV 10 Specialties Complete 12 2413 Roller Window Shades Complete 12 3216 Manufactured Plastic Laminate –Clad Casework Complete 07 8400 Firestopping Complete 07 9200 Joint Sealants Complete

1.02 PROJECT SPECIFIC SCOPE CLARIFICATIONS

A. General Requirements for All Work Scope Categories: Refer to Section 01 1210 for additional requirements affecting this Work Scope.

B. Demolition: Perform general interior building demolition per Section 02 4119.13 including, but not limited to: 1. Removal of existing theater seating, including hardware, fasteners and anchors. 2. Demolition of interior walls associated with new entry and renovations. Includes demolition of North interior entry

wall and features after exterior demo is completed. 3. General interior demolition not included in demolition requirements of other Work Scopes. 4. Salvage of theater stairs for re-finishing and reinstallation.

C. Rough Carpentry: Provide (furnish and install) carpentry and related work items in accordance with Section 06 1000 including, but not limited to: 1. Wood backing/blocking material exposed and concealed within walls and ceilings where indicated and as

required. a. Install in-wall blocking for wall and ceiling mounted monitor brackets. b. Includes required in-wall blocking for installation of finish carpentry items.

2. Dimension lumber and wood sheathing indicated on the documents. 3. Roof Blocking: by Roofing Work Scope.

D. Finish Carpentry: Provide and install all finish carpentry as shown and specified in section 06 2000 including but not limited to: 1. Millwork 2. Wall panel system at stage and stage edge. 3. Hardware

E. Solid Surfacing: Provide solid surfacing fabrications per Section 06 6116, including metal supports and brackets, hardware and joint sealants for a finished assembly.

F. Quartz Surfacing Fabrications: Provide quartz surfacing fabrications per Section 06 6119, including metal supports and brackets, hardware and joint sealants for a finished assembly.



New Hope, MN 4/5/19

G. FRP Wall Paneling: Provide FRP wall paneling per Section 06 8316, accessories, adhesives, hardware and joint sealants for a finished assembly.

H. Phenolic Composite Wall Panel: Provide phenolic composite wall panel per Section 07 4243, sub-framing, , hardware, accessories and joint sealants for a finished assembly.

I. Provide labor and miscellaneous mounting hardware/fasteners required for a complete installation, including but not limited to the following: 1. Responsible to receive, unload, store, and maintain material to be installed under this Work Scope. 2. Installation of finish carpentry , casework and millwork

a. Wood paneling, included fire blocking as required behind paneling. b. Scribe extended stiles to adjacent surfaces. c. Installation of running and standing trim.

3. Installation of casework and countertops. 4. Installation of hollow metal and wood doors. 5. Installation of door hardware

a. Include unloading, inventory, and controlled secured storage (inventory control). b. Include necessary time to adjust doors and hardware within the 1-year corrective period.

6. Installation of Coiling Counter Doors. 7. Installation of Division 10 Specialties. 8. Installation of Roller window shades. 9. Install Owner furnished accessories and equipment to be “Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed”.

a. Soap dispensers, paper towel dispensers, mounted waste receptacles, recycling stations

J. In-wall Blocking and Support Drawings: This Work Scope is responsible to coordinate with Kraus-Anderson, Owner and other trade contractors to identify concealed in-wall blocking requirements, and prepare installation drawings to identify extent, type, and location for in-wall blocking and supports.

K. Complete Assembly: Provide fasteners, sealant, trim, and miscellaneous components for a complete installation. 1. This Work Scope recognizes the contract documents do not reflect every detail necessary to provide a complete

working system, and therefore has included additional materials and related labor to provide a complete assembly as per the intent of the documents.

L. Temporary Enclosures and Barricades: This Work Scope is responsible to coordinate with Kraus-Anderson to determine scope and configuration of temporary enclosures, guardrails, barricades, and ladders. 1. This Work Scope is responsible to provide and install temporary coverings on all exterior openings. This shall consist

of wood framing and reinforced poly on window openings and wood framing and plywood of door openings. The doors shall include operable hardware typical of construction openings. Also, include removal of such temporary openings prior to final opening windows or doors. Note that this will require close coordination with install contractors, as only enough temporary openings can be removed as final door or windows can be installed. Coordinate with Kraus-Anderson to determine scope and final configuration of temporary enclosures.

2. This Work Scope shall provide dust, noise and occupant barriers within and surrounding the construction areas, including provisions for temporary occupancy during school while work if finishing.

3. Removal of all temporary protection and barriers, including restoration of remaining surfaces.

1.03 SPECIAL COORDINATION OR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Field Engineering: Kraus-Anderson will provide benchmarks and control line in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 1210 - General Requirements for All Work Scopes. 1. This Work Scope is responsible for remaining layout for their Work.

B. Acceptance of Substrates and Existing Conditions: Starting work constitutes acceptances of existing conditions, preparatory work, and substrates that may affect the performance of this Work Scope.

C. Special Coordination at Exterior Envelope (Vapor Barriers / Thermal Enclosure): Construction exterior enclosure to ensure continuous thermal insulation and vapor barrier as indicated or required.

1.04 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance: Include $ 25,000 for labor/material allowance to be assigned by Kraus-Anderson for unforeseen conditions or non-defined Work Scope items.

1.05 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Delivery and Receiving of Materials: Refer to Section 01 1210 for additional requirements.



New Hope, MN 4/5/19

B. Scaffolding: Work Scope is responsibility for your own working platforms, scaffolding, and equipment necessary to access Work. Coordinate scope and timing of scaffold with Kraus-Anderson Construction Company.

-- End --

ADDENDUM No. 2 to Bid Package No. 3

Robbinsdale Area Schools Cooper High School – Auditorium and Entry Renovation 8230 47th Ave N New Hope, MN 55428 Bid Package No. 3 (BP-3)

LSE Project Number: 17.1044.03

LSE ARCHITECTS, INC. 100 PORTLAND AVENUE SOUTH, SUITE 100 MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55401 April 4, 2019 This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated March 11, 2019. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject Bidder to disqualification. This Addendum consists of Nine (9) pages, plus attachments. Reference made to the Project Manual and Drawings shall be used as a guide only. Bidders shall determine the work affected by Addendum items. CHANGES TO PROJECT MANUAL – VOLUME 1 OF 2 - ARCHITECTURAL

MATERIAL, PRODUCT AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS The following approvals are granted with the understanding that each either meets or exceeds the respective specifications. Materials, products and equipment listed herein and subsequently incorporated in the Work which do not comply with the Specifications will be removed from the

Bid Package No. 3, Addendum No. 2 Page 2 of 9 April 4, 2019

Work and replaced with the specified material, product or equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. ARCHITECTURAL PRIOR APPROVALS: Section # Section / Product Description Prior Approval 07 42 13.16 Aluminum Plate Wall Panels Dry Design 11 61 43 Theatrical Drapery Systems Fred Krieger Fabrics

1. DOCUMENT 00 01 10 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

a. DIVISION 05 – METALS

i. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

1. ADD note to read: Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2

b. DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

i. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry


ii. Section 06 61 16 – Solid Surfacing Fabrications


iii. Section 06 61 19 – Quartz Surfacing Fabrications


iv. Section 06 83 16 – FRP Wall Paneling


c. DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

i. Section 07 42 13.16 – Aluminum Plate Wall Panels


d. DIVISION 09 – INTERIOR FINISHES

i. Section 09 01 60.91 – Wood Strip Stage Flooring Restoration

1. Add this Section in its entirety.

ii. Section 09 30 00 – Tiling


iii. Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories


iv. Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring


v. Section 09 68 00 – Carpeting


vi. Section 09 84 14 – Acoustic Stretch Fabric Systems


vii. Section 09 91 00 – Painting


e. DIVISION 11 – FURNISHINGS

i. Section 11 61 43 – Theatrical Drapery Systems


f. DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

i. Section 12 32 16 – Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework


ii. Section 12 61 00 – Fixed Theatrical Seating

1. ADD note to read: (By Owner – For Reference Only)


2. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

a. MODIFY Subparagraph 2.02.P to read as follows:

P. Perforated Metal and Hardware for Phenolic Composite Access Panels:

Comply with the following requirements, and as otherwise Interior Applications:

a. Manufacturer: McNichols

b. Item Number: 1631141241

c. Panel Type: Perforated 12 gauge steel

d. Opening Area: 51 percent

e. Finish: Paint Black

Door Fabrication / Hardware

a. Door Material (by others): Phenolic Composite – per Section 07 42 43

b. Hinge: Continuous Hinge

c. Lock: Provide cylindrical locks

3. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry

a. MODIFY Subparagraph 2.02.D reading “Front Finish: Wood pattern - to be selected by

Architect” to read: D. Front Finish: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color

selections.

4. Section 06 61 16 – Solid Surfacing Fabrications

a. MODIFY Subparagraph 2.02.B reading “1. SSM-1: (Gray Black)” to read: 1. SSM-1: See

Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

5. Section 06 61 19 – Quartz Surfacing Fabrications

a. MODIFY Subparagraph 2.01.A reading “1. Product / Color: ‘Willow White’ “to read: 1.

Product / Color: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

6. Section 06 83 16 – FRP Wall Paneling

a. DELETE Subparagraph 2.03.A.5

7. Section 07 42 13.16 – Aluminum Plate Wall Panels

a. ADD Subparagraph 2.01.A.1 to read: 4. Dri-Design; Aluminum Wall Panel System

8. Section 07 42 43 – Phenolic Composite Wall Panel

a. ADD Subparagraph 1.01.A.4 to read: 4. Solid phenolic composite access panels

b. ADD Subparagraph 1.02.B to read: B. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications – for

perforated metal and hardware for phenolic composite access panels.

c. ADD Subparagraph 2.05.F to read as follows:

F. Access Panels:

1. Provide phenolic access panel doors with cut-out for perforated metal panel specified

in 05 50 00.

2. Provide trim, frame or other support and construction as required at door perimeter.

3. Access panel will include hinges and locks as specified in 05 50 00.

9. Section 09 01 60.91 – Wood Strip Stage Flooring Restoration

a. Add this Section in its entirety.

10. Section 09 30 00 – Tiling

a. MODIFY Materials references to refer to Materials Finish Schedule


11. Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories


12. Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring


13. Section 09 68 00 – Carpeting


14. Section 09 84 14 – Acoustic Stretch Fabric Systems


15. Section 09 91 00 – Painting


16. Section 11 61 43 – Theatrical Drapery Systems

a. ADD Fred Krieger 25oz. Epic and 22oz. Prism listed as approved drapery fabric

b. DELETE Unpainted muslin drops not required

c. REVISE Main curtain will be bi-part manual operation only

17. Section 12 32 16 – Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework


18. Section 12 61 00 – Fixed Theatrical Seating

a. ADD note to read: (By Owner – For Reference Only)

CHANGES TO THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS

1. SHEET A002 – SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND CODE RECORD

a. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE REVIEW SUMMARY

i. ADD Code Review Summary in its entirety, note Fire-Resistive Requirements by

Type Of Construction as follows:

b. LIFE SAFETY PLAN SYMBOL KEY

i. MODIFY 1 HOUR RATED BARRIER WITH 90 MINUTE RATED to read: FIRE 2 HOUR

RATED FIRE BARRIER WITH 90 MINUTE RATED OPENINGS

ii. MODIFY 1 HOUR RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY to read: 2 HOUR RATED FLOOR

ASSEMBLY

iii. ADD 2 HOUR RATED CEILING ASSEMBLY

iv. Delete EXISTING NON-COMPLIANT ON HOUR RATED CORRIDOR. 20 MINUTE

DOORS; 45 MINUTE GLAZING.

D. FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS BY TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION

[Table 601]

CONSTRUCTION TYPE: Type 1B Fully Sprinkled

CONDITION: Type 1B NOTES

1. STRUCTURAL FRAME 2 hrs

2. BEARING WALLS-EXTERIOR 2 hrs

3. BEARING WALLS-INTERIOR 2 hrs

4. NONBEARING WALLS-EXTERIOR See Item E.

5. NONBEARING WALLS-INTERIOR 0 hrs

6. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 2 hrs

7. ROOF CONSTRUCTION 1 hr


v. ADD 1 HOUR RATED ROOF ASSEMBLY

c. 01/A002 – Life Safety Plan

i. ADD EXISTING NON-COMPLIANT ON HOUR RATED CORRIDOR. 20 MINUTE

DOORS; 45 MINUTE GLAZING at existing corridor.

ii. ADD 2 HOUR RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY SYMBOL at existing supported floor slab

in Room A108 – Auditorium.

iii. ADD 2 HOUR RATED CEILING ASSEMBLY at Room A133 – Administration.

iv. ADD 1 HOUR RATED ROOF ASSEMBLY symbol at Canopy Roof.

2. SHEET A100 – MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - AREA A1

a. Reflected Ceiling Plan Keynotes and Legend

i. Keynote No. 8:

1. REVISE Keynote reading “NEW WOOD STAGE FLOORING – SEE ROOM

FINISH SCHEDULE to read: PATCH / REPAIR / REFINISH EXISTING

WOOD FLOORING - REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

ii. Drawing 01/ A100 – Main Level Reflected Ceiling Plan

1. Modify Seating in Room A108 – Auditorium to dashed – By Owner.

3. SHEET A200 – MAIN LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA A1


i. Keynote No. 3:

1. REVISE to indicate to paint only any exposed structure, mechanical and

electrical components to match adjacent ceiling.

ii. Keynote No. 5:

1. REVISE to relate to acoustical wall panels, instead of both wall and

ceiling panels.

iii. Keynote No. 6:

1. REVISE to paint only the underside of catwalk instead of painting the

catwalk.

iv. Keynote No. 8:

1. ADD to plan indicating new acoustical ceiling panel locations.

b. Drawing 01/A200 – Main Level Reflected Ceiling Plan

i. PT-5, noted to underside of ceilings on side aisles

ii. Concessions NACP-1 noted instead of ACP-2

4. SHEET A210 – UPPER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA A1


i. Keynote No. 3:

1. REVISE to indicate to paint only any exposed structure, mechanical and

electrical components to match adjacent ceiling.

ii. Keynote No. 5:

1. REVISE to relate to acoustical wall panels, instead of both wall and

ceiling panels.

iii. Keynote No. 6:

1. REVISE to paint only the underside of catwalk instead of painting the

catwalk.

iv. Keynote No. 8:

1. ADD to plan indicating new acoustical ceiling panel locations.

b. Drawing 01/A200 – Main Level Reflected Ceiling Plan


i. PT-5, noted to underside of ceilings on side aisles

ii. Concessions NACP-1 noted instead of ACP-2

5. SHEET A400 – BUILDING SECTIONS

a. Drawing 01/A400 – BUILDING SECTION @ VESTIBULE

i. FOR CLARIFICATION PURPOSES ONLY Modify Roof Control Joint to match

Roofing Drawings.

b. Drawing 06/A400 – WALL SECTION @ VESTIBULE

i. FOR CLARIFICATION PURPOSES ONLY Modify Roof Control Joint to match

Roofing Drawings.

6. SHEET A420 – BUILDING DETAILS

a. FOR CLARIFICATION PURPOSES ONLY, reissue this sheet to address weight issues.

7. SHEET A500 – INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS

a. Drawing 01/A500 – INTERIOR ELEVATION

i. AWP-1,2,3 changed to AWP-1

ii. Wall Paint to be PT-6.

iii. Location of existing ceramic base noted.

b. Drawing 03/A500 – Interior Elevation


ii. Location width and length of AWP-1 panels revised. Same amount of sq. footage.


c. Drawing 03/A500 – INTERIOR ELEVATION


ii. Wall Paint to be PT-6.


d. Drawing 07/A500 – Interior Elevation

i. CTW-2 on Lobby Elevation Instead of PNL-1.

ii. TR-1, located at bottom edge, side edges and outside corners of CTW-2, TYP.

iii. ADD 8” Dimensional Letter Signage as follows:

1. ADD 8” Dimensional Letters above Opening 106B to read: TICKETS

2. ADD 8” Dimensional Letters above Opening 107B to read:

CONCESSIONS

3. ADD 8” Dimensional Letters above Opening 108A to read: AUDITORIUM

4. ADD 8” Dimensional Letters above Opening 108C to read: AUDITORIUM

e. Drawing 08/A500 – Interior Elevation

i. CTW-2 on 4 sides on lobby columns.

ii. TR-1, located at bottom edge, side edges and outside corners of CTW-2, TYP.

f. Detail 10A/A500 – Soffit Detail at Entrance Vestibule

i. Modify Detail to ADD dimensions.

g. Detail 10B/A500 – Soffit Detail at Administration Entrance

i. Modify Detail to ADD dimensions.

h. Detail 12/A500 – Control Booth Detail

i. Modify Detail to ADD dimensions and material callouts.

i. Detail 13/A500 – Section @ Admin Entrance

i. ADD Detail Callout 10B/A500 at soffit.

ii. MODIFY Soffit profile to accommodate Structure / acoustical treatments.

j. Drawing 14/A500 – Stage Elevation Detail


i. MODIFY Detail to change material from P-LAM to Trespa.

ii. MODIFY Perforated Metal Panel to accommodate 50% Free Area.

k. Drawing 15/A500 – Section at Stage

i. MODIFY Detail to change material from P-LAM to Trespa.

ii. MODIFY Perforated Metal Panel to accommodate 50% Free Area

8. SHEET A700 – MAIN LEVEL FINISH PLAN - AREA A1

a. Finish Plan Key Notes

i. Keynote No. 3:

1. REVISE to ADD TR-5 on all outside corners

ii. Keynote No. 5:

1. REVISE to ADD detail reference.

b. Drawing 01/A700 – Main Level Finish Plan - Area A1

i. At South Lobby, CPT-M-1 becomes CPT-M-2.

ii. Termination of CPT-M-2 on the existing terrazzo has changed. Length of TERR_T-

1 has changed.

iii. ADD Keynote No. 3 at Lobby columns

9. SHEET A701 - INTERIOR FINISH AND MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

a. Interior Finish and Material SCHEDULE

i. Note: Any changes, corrections, additions are shown in bold, also under the

Revision Column it is dated 4.4.19.

ii. ACP-2, FAB-2 replaces FAB-4

iii. ACP-3, is added, due to ½ the ACP panels on the ceiling are divided between

ACP-2 and ACP-3. No additional panels where added.

iv. AWP-1, FAB-1 replaces FAB-4. No additional panels have been added. All wall

panels are AWP-1.

v. AWP-2 deleted

vi. AWP-3 deleted

vii. CPT-M-1, Tighter spec

viii. CPT-M-2, Additional spec, no additional material was added, this replaces a

portion of CPT-M-1.

ix. CTW-2, this replaces the PNL-1 at the Lobby West Wall

x. FAB-1, fabric spec updated

xi. FAB-2, fabric spec updated

xii. FAB-3, deleted

xiii. FAB-4, deleted

xiv. GR-1, GR-2, GR-3, color specified

xv. NACP-1, panel specified

xvi. PNL-1, color updated

xvii. PNL-2, deleted

xviii. PL-1, laminate color specified for ST-1 matching

xix. PT-1, PT-2, PT-3, PT-4, PT-5, PT-6, PT-7, colors selected

xx. RB-1, color selected

xxi. RB-2, deleted.

xxii. RFT-1, color selected

xxiii. ST-1, ST-2, color selected

xxiv. SSM-1, color selected


xxv. TERR-T-1, manufacturer and color selected, stage apron base added.

xxvi. TERR-T-B-1, spec added, was located on plans previously

xxvii. TR-1, finish reselected due to CTW-2 reselection

xxviii. TR-2, TR-3 and TR-4, deleted

xxix. TR-5, finish reselected due to CTW-2 reselection

xxx. UPH-1 & UPH-2 noted as by owner

xxxi. UPH-3, deleted

xxxii. WD-1, wood species indicated

10. SHEET A750 - WALL FINISH PLAN

a. Finish Plan Key Notes

i. Keynote No. 3: ADD Column wrap finishes in more detail. PNL-1 on column,

TERR-T-1 at base, TR-5 @ outside corners.

ii. Keynote No. 10: added for additional information, stating the individual

columns finishes to match adjacent wall and base finishes.

CHANGES TO THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

1. Refer to attached BP-3 Addendum No. 2 Narrative issued by BKBM dated April 4, 2019.

CHANGES TO THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

1. Refer to attached BP-3 Addendum No. 2 Narrative issued by KFI dated April 4, 2019.

CHANGES TO THE THEATRICAL DRAWINGS

1. SHEET TL100 – THEATRICAL LIGHTING PLAN -MAIN LEVEL

a. MODIFY Circuit Location at Control Booth

2. SHEET TS100 – THEATRICAL SEATING PLAN – MAIN LEVEL

a. MODIFY Seating Clearances at Front Row

3. SHEET TX200 – THEATRICAL DEMOLITION -UPPER LEVEL PLAN

a. MODIFY Key Note No. 6 to read: EXISTING THEATRICAL LIGHTING PLUGGING STRIPS

AND TERMINAL BOXES TO BE DEMO'D. DEMO CONDUIT AND SOFT CABLE

DISTRIBUTION - PIPE BATTENS TO BE DEMO'D AS WORK OF 116133, G.C. TO

COORDINATE DEMOLITION. -STRIP LIGHT FICTURES TO BE DEMO'D

4. SHEET TX210 – THEATRICAL DEMOLITION -UPPER LEVEL RCP

a. MODIFY Key Note No. 9 to read: EXISTING THEATRICAL LIGHTING PLUGGING STRIPS

AT CATWALK TO BE DEMO'D. DEMO CONDUIT AND SOFT CABLE. LIGHTING FIXTURES

TO BE TURNED OVER TO OWNER.

CHANGES TO THE AUDIO VIDEO DRAWINGS

1. Refer to attached BP-3 Addendum No. 2 Narrative issued by Peterson A/V Consulting dated April

4, 2019.

CHANGES TO THE ROOFING DRAWINGS

1. Refer to attached BP-3 Addendum No. 2 Narrative issued by Roof Spec, Inc. dated April 4, 2019.


ATTACHMENTS

1. BP-3 Addendum No. 1 Narrative Issued by BKBM Dated March 28, 2019

2. BP-3 Addendum No. 1 Narrative Issued by KFI Dated March 28, 2019

3. BP-3 Addendum No. 2 Narrative issued by Peterson A/V Consulting dated April 4, 2019.

4. BP-3 Addendum No. 2 Narrative issued by Roof Spec, Inc. dated April 4, 2019.

5. Document 00 01 10 – Table of Contents

6. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

7. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry

8. Section 06 61 16 – Solid Surfacing Fabrications

9. Section 06 61 19 – Quartz Surfacing Fabrications

10. Section 06 83 16 – FRP Wall Paneling

11. Section 07 42 13.16 – Aluminum Plate Wall Panels

12. Section 07 42 43 – Phenolic Composite Wall Panel

13. Section 09 01 60.91 – Wood Strip Stage Flooring Restoration

14. Section 09 30 00 – Tiling

15. Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories

16. Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring

17. Section 09 68 00 – Carpeting

18. Section 09 84 14 – Acoustic Stretch Fabric Systems

19. Section 09 91 00 – Painting

20. Section 11 61 43 – Theatrical Drapery Systems

21. Section 12 32 16 – Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework

22. Section 12 61 00 – Fixed Theatrical Seating

23. Sheet A002 – Symbols, Abbreviations and Code Record

24. Sheet A100 – Main Level Floor Plan - Area A1

25. Sheet A200 – Main Level Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area A1

26. Sheet A210 – Upper Level Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area A1

27. Sheet A400 – Building Sections

28. Sheet A420 – Building Details

29. Sheet A500 – Interior Elevations and Details

30. Sheet A700 – Main Level Finish Plan - Area A1

31. Sheet A701 - Interior Finish and Material Identification Schedule

32. Sheet A750 - Wall Finish Plan

33. Sheet TL100 – Theatrical Lighting Plan -Main Level

34. Sheet TS100 – Theatrical Seating Plan – Main Level

35. Sheet TX200 – Theatrical Demolition -Upper Level Plan

36. Sheet TX210 – Theatrical Demolition -Upper Level RCP

END OF ADDENDUM

6120 Earle Brown Drive, Suite 700, Minneapolis, MN 55430 763-843-0420 3507 Ringsby Court, Suite 105, Denver, CO 80216 720-515-9807

www.bkbm.com

Cooper High School Auditorium/Entry Renovation BKBM Project No. 18521.00

April 4, 2019

BP-3 Addendum No. 2

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS:

1. DRAWING S2.10 a. 1/S2.10 – Added structural framing for CMU wall opening as shown. b. 2/S2.10 – Added structural framing for CMU wall opening as shown. c. 3/S2.10 – Revised structural framing for CMU wall openings as shown.

2. DRAWING S3.00 a. Revised 12/S3.00 as shown. b. Added 27/S3.00 as shown.

3. DRAWING S4.00 a. Revised 13/S4.00 as shown. b. Revised 22/S4.00 as shown. c. Revised 24/S4.00 as shown.

4. DRAWING S5.00 a. Revised LINTEL SCHEDULE as shown.

END OF DOCUMENT

ADDENDUM

QMF 03-001 Find a way.

Date: April 4, 2019

Project: Robbinsdale Area Schools – Cooper HS 2019 Auditorium Renovations BP3

KFI Project Number: 18-192.01

Addendum Number: 002

THIS ADDENDUM IS A CONTRACT DOCUMENT AND MAY APPLY TO ANY OR ALL CONTRACTS AND SUBCONTRACTS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED HEREIN

OR SHOWN ON THE ATTACHED DRAWINGS (IF ANY). ALL WORK REQUIRED BY THIS ADDENDUM SHALL BE IN COMPLETE ACCORD WITH THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS AND SUBSEQUENT ADDENDA THERETO. THE ITEMS LISTED IN THIS ADDENDUM ARE NOT IN ANY ORDER IN REGARD TO THE DRAWINGS

OR THE SPECIFICATIONS. ALL CONTRACTORS ARE CAUTIONED TO EXAMINE EACH AND EVERY ITEM OF THIS ADDENDUM.

THE FOLLOWING CHANGES OR CLARIFICATIONS TO THE PLANS & SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENT

CLARIFICATIONS:

1. None

PRODUCT PRIOR APPROVALS:

1. None

SPECIFICATION CHANGES:

1. None

PLAN SHEET CHANGES:

1. Sheet E121 Demolition Plan – Main Level – Area 1: Revised keyed notes, existing indirect wall mounted

luminaires in Lobby A200 shall remain.

2. Sheet E131 Demolition Plan – Upper Level – Area 1: Revised key notes, remove existing electrical

equipment mounted on the east wall of the mechanical room A305.

3. Sheet E221 Lighting Plan – Main Level – Area 1: Revised keyed notes, existing indirect wall mounted

luminaires in Lobby A200 shall remain, added additional auditorium isle lighting.

4. Sheet E331 Power Plan – Upper Level – Area1: Revised keyed notes, reinstall existing electrical

equipment mounted on the east wall of the mechanical room A305.

5. Sheet E421 Technology Plan – Main Level – Area 1: Revised keyed notes, provide six (6) additional

security cameras in the Auditorium.

6. Sheet E700 Electrical Schedules: Revise luminaire schedule.

ATTACHMENTS:

1. Sheet E121 Demolition Plan – Main Level – Area 1

2. Sheet E131 Demolition Plan – Upper Level – Area 1

3. Sheet E221 Lighting Plan – Main Level – Area 1

4. Sheet E331 Power Plan – Upper Level – Area 1

5. Sheet E421 Technology Plan – Main Level – Area 1

6. Sheet E700 Lighting / Motor and Equipment Schedule

END OF ADDENDUM

ADDENDUM

Date: April 4, 2019

Project: Robbinsdale Area Schools, Cooper High School – Auditorium and Entry Renovation

Bid Package BP-3

Project No. 17.1044.03

Addm No. 2

The following items represent changes or clarifications that shall become part of the contract

documents

CHANGES TO THE PROJECT MANUAL

1. Specification Section 27 41 01 – Audio Visual Systems General Conditions

a. Item 1.4, A, 4. Pre-Approval

i. Add AV Contractor

1. Diversified, St Paul, MN 952-486-6551

2. Specification Section 27 41 31 – Auditorium Audio Visual Systems

a. Item 2.8, H. Rolltop Desktop

i. The HSA Stainless Steel Tambour Option shall be provided with

institutional lock option.

ii. Cores for the locks shall be coordinated with the Owners Locksets

iii. Provide a quantity of (2) Two

b. Add Flight Case for Lighting Console

c. Item J, Work Tables

i. Omit work tables

CHANGES TO THE AUDIO VISUAL DRAWINGS

1. SHEET AV001

a. AV SYSTEMS – DEFINITION OF SCOPE OF WORK

i. Note above stating the “AV Plans are for Infrastructure Only” shall be

omitted

ii. The Projection Screen and controls shown as “provided by AV Contractor”

shall be omitted, the projection screen is existing and shall remain

2. SHEET AV003

a. Demolition Notes

i. To be added

1. AV EQUIPMENT RACK TO BE REMOVED AND REUSED

2. EXTRON TRANSMITTER TO BE RELOCATED, REFER TO SCHEMATIC

DIAGRAM

3. WALL CONTROL TO BE REMOVED

APRIL 4, 2019

ADDENDUM #2

COOPER HIGH SCHOOL

AUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATION

RSI PROJECT #19-9627-02

1. Sheet A 6.00 Roof Plan

A. Re-issued this addendum with revisions to detail locations.

2. Sheet A 6.01 Roof Details

A. Re-issued this addendum adding detail 7/A6.01.

3. Sheet A 6.03 Roof Details

A. Re-issued this addendum modifying detail 2/A6.03.

If you should have any questions or require further information, please contact our office.

Respectfully,

ROOF SPEC, INC.

Kurt Reed

Senior Consultant

Roof Spec Inc. 2400 Prior Avenue North St. Paul, MN 55113 (651) 639-0644 (651) 639-1828 (fax) 800-494-4085 www.roofspec.com

• BUILDING ENVELOPE CONSULTING • SPECIFICATIONS • DESIGN • CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT • INSPECTIONS • TESTING •

All information is submitted as the confidential property of our clients. Any copies or extractions are reserved pending our written approval.

Page 2 of 2

4. WALL CONNECTIVITY TO BE REMOVED

5. LOUDSPEAKERS TO BE REMOVED AND TURNED OVER TO OWNER

6. PROJECTION SCREEN TO REMAIN

7. VIDEO PROJECTOR TO REMAIN, CABLING TO BE REVISED PER SCHEMATIC

DIAGRAM

3. SHEET AV101

a. Wall plates E, F and G

i. The designation for rough-in to be changed from SC8 to SC12

4. SHEET AV103C

a. Wall plates E, F and G

i. The designation for rough-in to be changed from SC8 to SC12

5. SHEET AV203

a. Building Page Mute

i. The DPDT mute switch shown for the building page input to DSP 1 shall be

located at equipment rack ER 1.

ii. Provide a 1 RU Rack panel for this switch at the 25th RU space,

approximately 43.75” above the bottom of the rack rails.

PRODUCT PRIOR APPROVALS

1. None

ATTACHMENTS

1. SPECIFICATION SECTION 27 41 01 – AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS GENERAL CONDITIONS

2. SPECIFICATION SECTION 27 41 31 – AUDITORIUM AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

3. SHEET AV001 – AUDITORIUM AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS – TITLE PAGE

4. SHEET AV003 – AV DEMOLITION

5. SHEET AV101 – MAIN FLOOR PLAN – AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

6. SHEET AV103 – MAIN FLOOR PLAN – AV INFRASTRUCTURE

7. SHEET AV203 – AUDIO OUTPUTS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

End of Addendum

LSE Architects, Inc. ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS LSE Project No.: 17.1044.03 COOPER HIGH SCHOOL AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION NEW HOPE, MN

Construction Documents BP-3 00 01 10 - 1 Addendum No. 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS - VOL 1 Addendum No. 02

DOCUMENT 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 2 – ARCHITECTURAL

This specification Section is revised and re-issued in its entirety to the Construction Documents BP-3 for this Project via Addendum No. 02.

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Introductory Information

00 01 05 Certifications Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents – VOL 1 Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2

Procurement Requirements

00 1110 Advertisement for Bids 00 2100 Instructions to Bidders 00 26 00 Procurement Substitution Procedures with Attachments

1. Procurement Substitution Request Form 00 31 26 Existing Hazardous Materials Information

1. Hazardous Materials Report (ACM & Lead paint – Auditorium, Stage, etc.) 2. Hazardous Materials Report (ACM & Lead paint – Front Lobby)

00 31 32 Geotechnical Data with Attachments

1. Geotechnical Evaluation Report

Contracting Requirements

00 4100 Bid Form 00 5110 List of Contract Forms With Attachment

1. KA PCO Request Form 00 7200 General Conditions With Attachment

1. AIA Document A232 – 2009: General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Construction Manage as Advisor Addition

00 7343 Wage Determination With Attachment

1. Prevailing Wage Schedule – Hennepin County

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 1100 Project Summary 00 1200 List of Work Scope Categories With Attachment

1. Work Scopes

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS LSE Architects, Inc. COOPER HIGH SCHOOL LSE Project No.: 17.1044.03

AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION

NEW HOPE, MN

00 01 10 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS - VOL 1 Addendum No. 01 Addendum No. 02

01 22 00 Unit Prices 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 3100 Project Management & Coordination Procedures 01 3210 Project Schedule Requirements With Attachment

1. Project Schedule Chart 01 3253 Project Safety Requirements 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 33 33 Electronic Documents 01 4400 Quality Assurance Procedures 01 45 23 Testing and Inspections (By LSE - Fireproofing) With Attachment

1. Structural Testing and Special Inspection Statement of Special Inspections 2. Structural Testing and Special Inspection Program Summary Schedule

01 45 33 Testing and Inspections (By BKBM - Struct) With Attachment

1. Structural Testing and Special Inspection Statement of Special Inspections 2. Structural Testing and Special Inspection Program Summary Schedule

01 5110 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 6200 Product Options 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 7710 Procedures for Project Closeout

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19.13 Selective Building Demolition

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 01 30.71 Concrete Repair 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 10 Post-Installed Anchors Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 19 Stained Colored Concrete Finishing

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 05 00 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 27 31 Reinforced Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies 05 31 00 Steel Decking Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2



DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 06 61 16 Solid Surfacing Fabrications Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 06 61 19 Quartz Surfacing Fabrications Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 06 83 16 FRP Wall Paneling Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation (By Roof-Spec) 07 26 13 Vapor Retarder (By Roof-Spec) 07 27 13 Modified Bituminous Vapor/Air Barrier Membrane 07 42 13.16 Aluminum Plate Wall Panels Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 07 42 13.23 Aluminum Composite Wall Panels 07 42 43 Phenolic Composite Wall Panel Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 07 53 23 Fully Adhered EPDM Roofing (By Roof-Spec) 07 62 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal (By Roof-Spec) 07 72 36 Smoke Vents 07 81 16 Cementitious Fireproofing 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13.13 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 33 13 Coiling Counter Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies 08 71 00 Door Hardware Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies 08 80 00 Glazing Issued previously in BP-2 – as applies

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 01 20.91 Plaster Repair 09 01 60.91 Wood Strip Stage Flooring Restoration Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 05 61.01 Moisture Vapor Emission Control 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 Tiling Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 51 13 Suspended Lay-In Panel Ceilings 09 66 16 Terrazzo Floor Tile Issued by Addendum No. 1 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 68 00 Carpeting Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 81 16 Acoustic Blanket Insulation 09 84 14 Acoustic Stretch Fabric Systems Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 91 00 Painting Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 09 96 46 Intumescent Coating 09 96 72 Fluid-Applied Insulative Coatings



NEW HOPE, MN


DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 19.13 Exterior Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 23 Interior Panel Signage 10 26 13.13 Stainless Steel Corner Guards 10 41 16 Emergency Key Cabinets

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 61 33 – Theatrical Rigging Systems 11 61 43 – Theatrical Drapery Systems Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 11 61 63 – Theatrical Lighting Control Systems 11 61 73 – Theatrical Lighting Fixtures

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 32 16 Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework Revised and Re-Issued by Addendum No. 2 12 61 00 Fixed Theatrical Seating (By Owner – For Reference Only)

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION None

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT None



DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work



NEW HOPE, MN


DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Refer to Project Manual - Volume 2 of 2 - Engineering for Specifications to this Division of the Work (Not Used)

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


Construction Documents BP-3 05 50 00 - 1 Addendum No. 02 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

This specification Section is revised and re-issued in its entirety to the Construction Documents BP-3 for this Project via Addendum No. 02. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Steel elements fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, and pipes

which are not a part of structural steel frame work systems in other Sections of these Specifications, including but not limited to: a. Metal railings b. Miscellaneous framing and support

1) Vanities, countertops, and work surfaces unsupported by base cabinets. 2) Overhead doors and shutters. 3) Miscellaneous mechanical and electrical equipment.

c. Auditorium lighting ladders d. Loose lintels and lintel beams e. Loose bearing and leveling plates f. Miscellaneous steel trim g. Shelf angles h. Perforated metal and hardware for Phenolic Composite access panels

2. Fasteners 3. Protective primers and coatings. 4. Grout for installation of materials and products specified herein. 5. Prefabricated metal products specified herein. 6. Erection 7. Structural testing and special inspection.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 61 16 - Solid Surfacing Fabrications: For solid surface vanities and work surfaces requiring support by metal brackets.

B. Section 07 42 43 – Phenolic Composite Wall Panels C. Section 08 33 13 - Overhead Coiling Doors D. Section 07 95 13 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A14.3-1992, American National Standard for Ladders-Fixed-Safety Requirements

B. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A53-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless 3. ASTM A108-07, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard

Quality 4. ASTM A123-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS LSE Architects, Inc. COOPER HIGH SCHOOL LSE Project No.: 17.1044.03 AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION

NEW HOPE, MN

05 50 00 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 METAL FABRICATIONS Addendum No. 02

5. ASTM A203-97(2007)e1, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel

6. ASTM A276-10, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 7. ASTM A283-03(2007), Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength

Carbon Steel Plates 8. ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI

Tensile Strength 9. ASTM A385-09, Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) 10. ASTM A500-13, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 11. ASTM A501-07, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing 12. ASTM A653-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron 13. ASTM A666-10, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless

Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar 14. ASTM C1107-15, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink) 15. ASTM D1187-97(2011)e1, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as

Protective Coatings for Metal 16. ASTM E894-88(2010), Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing

Systems and Rails for Buildings 17. ASTM E935-00(2006), Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing

Systems and Rails for Buildings 18. ASTM E985-00(2006), Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and

Rails for Buildings 19. ASTM F1554-07ae1, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi

Yield Strength

C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1-2010, Structural Welding Code - Steel 2. AWS D1.3-2008, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

D. International Building Code (IBC), 2012 edition. E. Minnesota State Building Code, 2015 edition (MSBC), incorporating the IBC listed above. F. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

1. Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs in NAAMM Architectural Metal Products (AMP) AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual, 5th Edition (1992)

G. National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (NOMMA)

1. Guideline 1: Joint Finishes, 1994

H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), latest editions. 1. SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning 2. SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning 3. SSPC-PA 1, Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel 4. SSPC-Paint 20, Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic) 5. SSPC-Paint 25, Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel,

Type I and Type II 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data

a. Material description and installation instructions for products.



b. Manufacturer's literature, including materials description, and application and maintenance instructions.

2. Shop Drawings: Layout and detail of each miscellaneous metal item shown and specified.

a. Include design calculations for guardrails, railings, lighting ladders, countertop supports. 1) Certify calculations by an Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota

3. Field Quality Control Submittal

a. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete and masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1 - Steel 2. AWS D1.3 - Steel Sheet

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver iron and steel fabrications to the Project site and store to avoid damage and distortion of materials.

B. Deliver prefabricated products in their original wrappings or cartons clearly marked for identification and bearing manufacturers name, and model or part number if applicable. Identify pieces with suitable mark for easy location.

C. Store protected from damage and the elements. D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials when so

determined and replaced with new at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

B. Shop primers: Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

C. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Load Capacities for Stairs and Ladders 1. Framing Members: Maximum live load deflection of L/480. 2. Individual Stair Treads, Ladder Rungs, and Landings a. Uniform Load: Minimum live load of 100 psf b. Concentrated Load: Minimum 300 pounds applied on an area of 4 sq. in. placed

in a position that would cause maximum stress. c. Limit Live Load Deflection: L/600. d. Uniform and concentrated loads need not act concurrently.


NEW HOPE, MN


B. Load Capacities for Railings 1. Handrails, and Top Rails of Guardrails: Comply with requirements of ASTM E985 for

structural performance based on testing performed in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935, except use the following test loading. a. Uniform Loads: Minimum 50 lbs. per linear foot applied in any direction at the top of

the railing and transferred through the assembly to the building structure. b. Concentrated Loads: Minimum 200 lbs. per foot applied in any direction at any

point along the top of the railing and transferred through the assembly to the building structure.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guardrails a. Concentrated Loads: 50 psf applied horizontally. b. Infill load and other loads need not act concurrently.

C. Load Capacities for Support Members for Vanities and Work Surfaces without Base Cabinets

1. Uniform Load: Minimum live load of 50 psf 2. Concentrated Load: Minimum 200 pounds applied on an area of 4 sq. in. placed in a

position that would cause maximum stress. 3. Limit Live Load Deflection: L/480. 4. Uniform and concentrated loads need not act concurrently.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36 B. Steel Plates to be Bent or Formed Cold: ASTM A203 C. Cold-finished Steel Bars: ASTM A108 D. Steel Pipe: Welded or seamless, ASTM A53, black and hot dipped galvanized. E. Steel Tubing (Hollow Steel Sections HSS): Cold-formed ASTM A500, or hot-rolled ASTM A501. F. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653 G. Steel Wire

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A580, Type 304 stainless steel wire, 0.1920" wire diameter, 1.08 lbs per sq. ft.

H. Bolts and Anchors

1. Bolts, Studs and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, galvanized. 2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade A, galvanized; for concrete embedment.

I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. J. Coatings and Primers

1. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt emulsion ASTM D1187. 2. Ferrous Metal Primer Typical for Interior, Normally Dry Environment (unless otherwise

specified): Iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil or alkyd rust-inhibiting primer, Type I or Type II in accordance with SSPC-Paint 25, containing no-lead-bearing components, and having a VOC content as calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

3. Galvanized Primer: Zinc-rich, rust-inhibiting primer, Type I Inorganic or Type II Organic, in accordance with SSPC-Paint 20, containing 95% metallic zinc in the dry film, containing no-lead-bearing components, and having a VOC content as calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). One of the following: a. "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound", (ZRC Worldwide) b. "7000 System", Cold Galvanizing Compound", (Rust-Oleum) c. Approved substitutions.

K. Setting Grout: Nonshrink, nonmetallic, nongaseous type, premixed grout, complying with ASTM

C1107 or CRD-C 621. 1. "MasterFlow 100", (formerly Construction Grout), (BASF Building Systems - Master

Builders Technologies)



2. "NS Grout", (Euclid Chemical Co.) 3. "Five Star Grout", (Five Star Products, Inc.) 4. "Duragrout", (L&M Construction Chemicals Co.) 5. "SikaGrout 212", (Sika Corp.)

L. Anchoring Grout: Nonshrink, fast-setting, nonmetallic, nongaseous type, premixed grout,

hydraulic cementitious grout, complying with ASTM C1107 or CRD-C 621, and recommended by the manufacturer for interior and exterior use. 1. "MasterFlow 110AN", (formerly Sonopost), (BASF Building Systems - Master Builders

Technologies) 2. "Euro Rock" (Euclid Chemical Co.) 3. "Five Star Instant Grout" (Five Star Products, Inc.) 4. "Rocktite" (Hartline Products Co. Inc.) 5. "Sika AnchorFix-1", (Sika Corp.) 6. Bearing Surfaces: Open rectangular bar bearing surfaces with Serrated top finish.

a. Type GW, (McNichols Co.) b. Bearing bar size and spacing as required to meet the specified Performance

Requirements.

7. Finish: Factory applied hot-dipped galvanized with temporary protective coating. 8. Tread and landing dimensions as shown on the Drawings.

M. Brackets for Steel Handrails: Cast iron handrail brackets with factory-applied primer suitable for

field painting. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Julius Blum, Co.: As a Basis-of-Design Julius Blum products and model numbers

are specified. b. Wagner Companies (R&R Wagner, J.G. Braun, Wagner International)

2. Bracket Model: No. 306 or 382 (Julius Blum & Co., Inc.); or approved substitution. 3. Inserts and Anchors

a. Devices for connecting railings to wall structures or other work, capable of withstanding imposed loads imposed. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

b. Fillers or spacers of crush-resistant material to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

c. Furnish hex head bolts for anchoring into wall sleeves. Furnish acorn style nuts for threaded studs.

N. Woven Wire Fabric Infill Panels

1. Interior Applications: ASTM A580, Type 304 stainless steel wire for open woven wire mesh. a. Item No.: 3802190051, (McNichols) b. Construction Type: Square Lockcrimp Weave. c. Opening Spacing: 2" square. d. Opening Area: 83 percent. e. Wire Diameter: 0.1920" f. Weight: 1.08 lbs per sq. ft. g. Edge Trim: "U" shaped edging.

1) Item No. 4080040110, (McNichols) 2) Stainless Steel Sheet or Strip: ASTM A666, Type 304. 3) Gauge: 18 4) "U" Opening: 0.250" crimped to wire thickness. 5) Width: 1"


NEW HOPE, MN


6) Weight: 0.35 lbs per sq. ft.

O. Welding for Metal Fabrications: Comply with the following requirements, and as otherwise specified in this section, in accordance with NOMMA Guideline 1: Joint Finishes, Examples A, B, C, and D for applicable profiles, in Finish #1, #2, #3 and #4: 1. Finish #1 - No evidence of a welded joint. 2. Finish #2 - Completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay. 3. Finish #3 - Partially dressed weld with spatter removed. 4. Finish #4 - Good quality, uniform dressed weld with minimal splatter.

P. Perforated Metal and Hardware for Phenolic Composite Access Panels:

Comply with the following requirements, and as otherwise Interior Applications:

a. Manufacturer: McNichols b. Item Number: 1631141241 c. Panel Type: Perforated 12 gauge steel d. Opening Area: 51 percent e. Finish: Paint Black

Door Fabrication / Hardware

a. Door Material (by others): Phenolic Composite – per Section 07 42 43 b. Hinge: Continuous Hinge c. Lock: Provide cylindrical locks

2.03 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. General 1. Fabricate and assemble loose items in the shop and, if necessary, mark to ensure proper

installation at the Project site. Disassemble for shipment only to the extent required by shipping limitations.

2. Ease exposed edges of steel shapes. 3. Join parts with hairline contact, flush and smooth with adjacent surfaces, using concealed

welds and fasteners where possible. Where exposed fastenings are unavoidable, countersink screws and bolts. Grind exposed weld areas smooth to match and blend with finished surfaces.

4. Weld in accordance with the recommendations of the AWS. 5. Galvanizing Steel and Iron Fabrications

a. Hot-dipped galvanize steel and iron fabrications indicated for exterior application. b. Hot-dipped galvanize other steel elements where indicated on Drawings and where

specified. c. Hot-dipped galvanize after fabrication, unless size is impractical, in which case

galvanize individual components.

B. Metal Railings 1. Provide railings of design and dimensions shown, located where shown or required for

safety. Fabricate with flush welded joints and fittings for bends, wall returns, cap tees and crosses. Comply with welding guidelines specified in this Section.

2. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, no exceptions.

3. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Auditorium Lighting Ladder

1. Steel pipe frame, mounting brackets, fixtures, and anchors as shown. 2. Prepare, prime, and paint.



D. Miscellaneous Framing and Support

1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete work.

2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings, fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

3. Anchors: Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. Anchor Sizes: Minimum 1-1/4" x 1/4"x 8" steel straps. b. Anchor Spacing: 24" o .c. maximum.

E. Loose Lintels and Lintel Beams: Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings in masonry

walls unless otherwise detailed, including openings for mechanical and electrical work. Fabricate for a minimum bearing of 1" per foot of span, but not less than 8", unless otherwise indicated.

F. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry and concrete construction. Make flat, free form warps and twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.

G. Rough Hardware: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting wood work, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete and other structures. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

H. Closure Ends 1. Exterior Members: Provide closed ends and cover plates for members exposed to the

exterior and not covered by applied finishes. Provide drain holes at inconspicuous locations for water and moisture drainage and for draining after hot-dip galvanizing.

2. Interior Members: Provide closed ends and cover plates for members where exposed to view in the finish work, fully welded around edges and ground smooth.

3. Provide close ends of hollow members exposed to view and members abutting but not connected to other construction, with prefabricated, fully welded end fittings.

4. Members include, but are not limited to: a. Railings; b. Tubes; c. Pipes; d. Stringers; e. Channels; f. Wall returns, and; g. Other open ended members

I. Welding: Welds for metal work shall meet requirements specified and shown in accordance

with NOMMA Guideline 1: Joint Finishes, Examples A, B, C, and D for applicable profiles, Finishes: 1. Public Exposure: For welds exposed to public view in the finished work employ weld

Finish #1 - No evidence of a welded joint. 2. Finished Area: For welds exposed to view in the finished work, but not public areas

employ weld Finish #2 - Completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay. 3. Utilitarian Spaces: For welds exposed on steel elements, such as ships ladders, employ

weld Finish #3 - Partially dressed weld with spatter removed. 4. Concealed: For welds concealed from view in the finished work employ Finish #4 - Good

quality, uniform dressed weld with minimal splatter.


NEW HOPE, MN


2.04 PRIMING AND PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Cleaning 1. Ferrous metals shown or specified to be concealed from view in the finish work, not

considered AESE, and specified to receive primer coating: a. Clean of rust, mill scale, dirt and foreign matter in accordance with applicable

requirements of SPC-SP 1, followed by cleaning with applicable requirements of SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3.

B. Priming

1. General a. Paint structural steel with one smooth coat of primer specified. Apply 2 coats on

surfaces not accessible after erection. b. Do not prime steel items to be embedded in concrete. c. Do not prime steel to receive field welded connections of primary structural

importance; prime this steel in the field instead with specified primers. 1) Spray touch-up primers for field application will not be accepted.

2. Ferrous Metals

a. Shop Coat Thickness: 2 mil (minimum) dry film thickness (DFT) b. Apply specified primers in accordance with SSPC-PA 1.

C. Protective Coatings

1. Bituminous Paint a. Paint metal work which is to be in contact with, but not fully embedded in concrete

and masonry with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. b. Coat dissimilar metals which are or will be in contact with one another with a heavy

coat of bituminous paint. Do not extend onto surfaces which will be exposed. c. Apply 2 heavy coats of bituminous coating to steel surfaces in contact with soil.

D. Galvanized Fabrications

1. For ferrous metal fabrications scheduled or detailed for exterior applications, and where indicated for interior applications, hot-dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A385as applicable.

2. Provide hot-dipped galvanized metal fabrications in the following locations, but not necessarily limited to: a. Exterior wall assemblies; b. interior wet areas exposed to moisture (such as toilet rooms); c. mechanical rooms; d. items cast into concrete; e. exterior exposed steel fabrications, and; f. where indicated on Drawings and details.

3. Touch-up hot-dipped galvanized surfaces with 1 (one) coat of specified primer, by brush

application only. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify the Construction Manager of conditions detrimental to performance of the Work and recommended corrections. Where the installation and its completion may be delayed due to



existing conditions, follow notification immediately with a written report. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.

B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instruction and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete and masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, throughbolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required.

2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry and similar construction.

3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitation. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat and screwed field connections.

4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Section 05 12 00 for testing of welds. B. Improper welds shall be corrected and re-inspected at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and galvanizing, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION


NEW HOPE, MN


This page intentionally left blank


Construction Documents BP-3 06 20 00 - 1 Addendum No. 02 FINISH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Section Includes 1. Millwork fabrication and installation. 2. Modification of Stage edge with hardwood trim and refinishing stage floor 3. Wall panel system at Stage. 4. Miscellaneous products specified herein. 5. Installation of products specified elsewhere.

1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Wood doors are specified in Section 08 14 16.13. B. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08 71 00. C. Exterior dimensional signage is specified in Section 10 14 19.13. D. Interior panel signage is specified in Section 10 14 23. E. Wall guards, corner guards and door/frame edge protectors are specified in Section 10 26 13. F. Emergency Key Cabinets is specified in Section 10 41 16


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants C. Section 09 91 00 - Painting

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials descriptions, installation and operating

instructions for completely assembled manufactured items other than wood millwork fabricated under this Section.

2. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations and details of all wood millwork, indicating materials, species of wood, applied finishes, matching of panels, arrangement, profiles, thicknesses, construction fastenings, blocking clearances, assembly and erection details, built-in hardware and necessary connections to other work.

3. Samples: Three 6" lengths of prefinished door and window casings, and base. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Install interior architectural woodwork in compliance with the applicable requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) established by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

B. Do not deliver materials until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations which could damage, soil and deteriorate materials, have been completed in installation areas. If, due to

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS LSE Architects, Inc. COOPER HIGH SCHOOL LSE Project No.: 17.1044.03 AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION NEW HOPE, MN

06 20 00 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 FINISH CARPENTRY Addendum No. 02

unforeseen circumstances, materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements specified for installation areas.

C. Receive and store finish hardware. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the Project but not yet installed. Properly sort, tag, and file tags.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install finish carpentry work until interior concrete and masonry work, and other wet operations are complete, the building is adequately ventilated, and proper temperature and humidity conditions can be maintained during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Hardwood lumber for a paint finish shall be clear with no visible defects which must be filled before painting. May be unselected for color and grain.

B. Hardwood lumber for transparent finish shall be clear, with no visible defects, and well matched for color and grain. 1. Interior exposed millwork and trim shown on the Drawings as hardwood shall be vertical

grain Red Oak. 2. Trim Profiles: Door and window casings, and other trim moulding patterns selected from

industry standards and as shown on the Drawings.

C. Softwood lumber shall be Ponderosa Pine, Idaho White Pine, Sugar Pine or Northern White Pine. Softwood lumber shall conform to the requirements of Product Standards PS 20-70 (1986).

D. Hardwood plywood and veneer for transparent finish shall be clear, with no visible defects, and well matched for color and grain, conforming to Product Standard PS 51-71. 1. Exposed Veneer shall be plain sliced Red Oak.

E. Softwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 1-95. F. Particle board shall conform to the requirements of Interim Standard for Mat-Formed Wood

Particle Board by the National Particle Board Association, Type 2, Density A (high density) and Class 2.

G. Fasteners 1. Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for

application indicated, to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. Provide corrosion-resistant coatings or stainless steel fasteners in areas of high humidity.

2. Use fasteners furnished with the material or product when applicable, unless inappropriate for the application as specified above.

H. Construction Adhesives: One component, polyurethane based, moisture curing adhesive, VOC

compliant, containing no chlorinated solvents or water, waterproof, and paintable, formulation complying with APA AFG-01, or ASTM D3498, for interior or exterior construction.

2.02 PANEL SYSTEM – BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Manufacturer: Marlite; www.marlite.com B. Product: Induro FRP C. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets

D. Front Finish: Wood pattern - to be selected by Architect D. Front Finish: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

E. Substrate: 3/8” Plywood F. Fire Rating: Class A

http://www.marlite.com/

http://www.marlite.com/


Construction Documents BP-3 06 20 00 - 3 Addendum No. 02 FINISH CARPENTRY

G. Trim: Anodized aluminum 2.03 FABRICATION

A. In general, millwork shall be fabricated in the shop in largest units possible and delivered to the Project site for installation. Where necessary to fit units at the Project site, allowance shall be made for cutting and fitting.

B. Not all details of millwork are shown on the Drawings. The fabricator shall utilize the most advantageous manufacturing processes to achieve the quality of millwork indicated herein by reference to AWI Quality Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify the Construction Manager of conditions detrimental to performance of the Work and recommended corrections. Where the installation and its completion may be delayed due to existing conditions, follow notification immediately with a written report. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Verify measurements at the building and provide necessary closures and trim to fit the items to

enclosing walls. Provide other trades with information necessary or proper completion of related work.

B. Condition work to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Work shall be installed by experienced finish carpenters only. Work shall be erected plumb,

true and square in a substantial manner. Finished work hall be neatly installed, free of slivers, open joints, hammer and tool marks. Blind nail finished work insofar as possible, and set surface nails.

2. Woodwork: Install, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Cut to fit unless specified to be hop-fabricated or shop-cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best over-all advantage, when installing job assembled woodwork items.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A. Trim and Mouldings: Install in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10 feet. For longer runs, use only 1 (one) piece less than 10 feet in any straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members. Cope at returns and mitre at corners. 1. Attach securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. 2. Nailing: Blind nail where possible. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed

nail heads and fill nail holes with matching wood filler. 3. Anchoring: Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to

substrates. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF DOORS


06 20 00 - 4 Construction Documents BP-3 FINISH CARPENTRY Addendum No. 02

A. Seal field cut-outs and field-trimmed tops and bottoms of wood veneered and plastic laminate faced wood doors, with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer (pigmented to be easily identifiable) when hardware installation or final painting is delayed for more than 24 hours.

B. Hang doors with hardware specified. Provide clearances at jambs and heads not to exceed 1/8" an at bottoms not to exceed 3/8", except where indicated to be undercut or where required to clear thresholds.

C. Install doors to operate easily and close accurately against stops without binding or rubbing he frame. Doors shall engage positively with the strikes when doors are closed with moderate force.

D. Install vision lite kits with screw fasteners ONLY on the side opposite the keyed (entry) side of interior doors. Verify special conditions or room functions with Architect before proceeding.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF FINISH DOOR HARDWARE

A. Apply finish hardware as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit lock and latch sets in their respective doors and remove before finishing of doors. Reinstall hardware after finishing of doors is completed. Upon completion, adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS, COUNTERTOPS

A. Install cabinets plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Where wood kitchen cabinets abutt other finished work, cribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strip and mouldings as indicated or required, and in finish to match cabinet face.

B. Anchor cabinets securely in place with concealed (when doors and drawers are closed) fasteners, anchored into structural support members of wall construction. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for support of units.

C. Complete hardware installation and adjust doors and drawers for proper operation. D. Attach countertops securely to base units. Spline and glue joints in countertops; provide

concealed mechanical clamping of joint. Provide cutouts for fixtures and appliances as indicated; drill pilot holes at corners before making cutouts. Smooth cut edges and coat with waterproof coating or adhesive.

E. Attach vanity tops securely to blocking and provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures and in-counter soap dispenser. Smooth cut edges of cutouts and coat with waterproof coating or adhesive. Scribe vanity tops to walls.

3.08 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION

A. Install items specified in Article 1.02, miscellaneous specialties, and other items furnished by others requiring fasteners, cutting, trimming, and scribing of furnished materials or finished substrate. 1. Install plumb, level, true and straight. 2. Install according to manufacturer's printed instructions and in accordance with

recommendations under the respective Sections.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 06 61 16 - 1 Addendum No. 02 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS


A. Section Includes 1. Molded solid surfacing wall caps, countertops and work surfaces 2. Setting and installation materials and accessories.


A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: For metal brackets for countertop support B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: For coordination with wall blocking C. Section 06 61 19 – Quartz Surfacing Fabrications: For countertops and work surfaces D. Section 12 32 16 – Manufactured Plastic-Laminate Clad Casework

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM A666-15, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless

Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar 2. ASTM D5767-17, Standard Test Methods for Instrumental Measurement of

Distinctness-of-Image Gloss of Coating Surfaces 3. ASTM F593-17, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs 4. ASTM F594-09(2015), Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

B. International Surface Fabricators Association (ISFA)

1. ISFA 2-01 (2013), Classification and Standards For Solid Surfacing Material 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-Bid Prior Approval Substitution Request Submittals: Required submittals and approvals prior to receipt of bids. 1. For pre-bid prior approvals, submit the following substitution request in accordance with

Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures: a. The Architect has created a color scheme for this Project, which has been approved

by the Owner. b. Alternative products may be submitted for prior approval with the understanding that

the predetermined color scheme will not be compromised. c. Prior approval submissions must be accompanied by an actual sample of

representative size to determine if it is acceptable; full size samples are encouraged. d. Those products approved for bidding will be indicated in an Addendum.

B. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300:

1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description, installation instructions, and maintenance instructions.

2. Shop Drawings a. Show complete information for fabrication and installation of solid surface

fabrications.


06 61 16 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS Addendum No. 02

b. Include plans, elevations and details of all fabrications, materials, arrangement, profiles, thicknesses, finishes, edge profiles, all openings, construction fastenings, blocking clearances, assembly and erection details, built-in hardware and necessary connections to other work.

3. Samples: Submit 2 samples of each solid surface type, in color and pattern specified, a

minimum size of 6" x 6" square by thickness specified, with finish and edge condition specified.

4. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements specified, and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage solid surface materials.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 7710:

1. Fabricator/Installer: Provide commercial care and maintenance information specified in Article 3.07 - DEMONSTRATION.

2. Maintenance Data: Include in maintenance manuals product data for solid surface care products used or recommended by fabricator, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.

3. Warranty: Fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty and date of Substantial Completion.


A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years successful experience in fabrication of solid surface fabrications, similar to units required for this Project.

B. Erector's Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years successful experience in the fabrication of solid surface fabrications, similar to units required for this Project.


A. Deliver materials and products to the Project site in manufacturer's original containers, clearly marked with proper identification with manufacturer's and fabricator's names, product type, designated location.

B. Store units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, condensation, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, cracking, distortion, warping, staining, and other physical damage.

C. Handle materials at the Project site to prevent damage in accordance with manufacturer's requirements to prevent damage to the fabrications.

D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when determined and replace with new. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project and replace with new at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Warrant solid surface materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except extend the warranty by manufacturer's 10-year warranty against defects in materials. Provide warranty for material to repair or replace defective materials. 1. Provide warranty in writing and signed by solid surfacing manufacturer.

B. Contractor's Warranty: Warrant solid surface installations to be free of faults and defects in

accordance with the General Conditions, except extend the warranty by installer for 2 years warranty against defects in installation. 1. Provide warranty for labor to repair or replace defective installation on Installer's letterhead

and signed by Installer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design: For basis-of-design and reference purposes “LG Hi-Macs" (LG Hausys America, Inc.) products are specified and indicated in the Drawings; (SSM-___ ). 1. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products available from the following

manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work upon receipt of prior approval for their products by the Architect when a substitution request is submitted during the Bidding Phase in accordance with the Document 00 2100 - Instructions to Bidders and Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures: a. "Avonite" (Avonite, Inc.) b. "Corian" (DuPont Polymers) c. "Formica Solid Surfacing", (Formica Corporation) d. "Hanex Solid Surfaces", (Hanwha L&C Surfaces, Inc.) e. "LG Hi-Macs" (LG Hausys America, Inc.) f. "Staron" (Samsung) g. "Wilsonart Solid Surface" (Wilson Engineered Surfaces)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous, non-porous sheets of solid or laminated construction, of filled acrylic plastic resin, mineral fillers and pigments, without a precoated finish, complying with the materials and performance requirements of ISFA 2-01 (2013), including for "Standard Type", "Special Purpose Type", and "Veneer Type" and the following: 1. Surfaces shall be unaffected by Class I reagents and repairable after exposure to Class II

reagents. 2. Thickness for Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: 1/2" (12 mm), unless otherwise indicated

on Drawings or specified.

B. Manufacturers, Products, Styles, Patterns, and Colors 1. SSM-1: (Gray Black) 1. SSM-1: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

B. Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesives, comply with solid surfacing

manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication and finishing. C. Tapes

1. Conductive Tapes: Manufacturer's standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources.

2. Insulating Felt Tape: Manufacturer's standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface material from adjacent heat source.

D. Sealants: Use only sealants formulated for solid surface work and recommended by their

manufacturer for the intended application. Installed by this specification Section 06 61 16. 1. Single-component silicone, nonsag, mold and mildew resistant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement); one of the following: a. "786 Silicone Sealant/Mildew Resistant" (Dow Corning Corp.) b. "Sanitary SCS1700" (General Electric) c. "898" (Pecora Corp.) d. "Tremsil 200 (Tremco, Inc.)

E. Anchors and Attachments: Use only stainless steel attachment devices in direct contact with

fabrications from stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304. 1. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;

ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1



F. Setting Shims: Resilient plastic, or vulcanized neoprene with a 50 to 70 Shore A durometer hardness, nonstaining to solid surfaces.

G. Cleaner: Cleaner specifically formulated for surface types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

H. Steel Support Framing: Provide steel framing designed to properly support vanities and work

surfaces not supported by cabinetry, complying with performance requirements in Section a. 05 50 00.

I. Grommets and Wire Management

1. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a. Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. b. Outwater Plastics Ind. Inc. & Architectural Products c. Approved substitutions

2. Wire Grommets: Round plastic liner and cap, 2-7/8" diameter hole, 3" overall, "Series

XG", (Doug Mockett & Co., Inc.)

3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors 2.03 FABRICATION

A. General 1. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in

accordance with approved shop drawings and solid polymer manufacturer requirements. 2. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements before

final submittal of shop drawings and fabrication of solid surface fabrications. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the Construction Manager, to avoid delay of the work.

3. Fabricate solid surfacing countertops in one piece, in longest lengths as is practicable, with shop-applied integral bowls, back and sidesplashes, and edges, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 2" (50 mm) wide reinforcing strip of solid polymer material under each joint.

B. Cove Backsplashes and Sidesplashes: Fabricate 4" high x 1/2" thick, with radius cove at

intersection of counters and backsplashes and sidesplashes.

C. Joints: Fabricate countertops and vanities without joints in their length or width, insofar as practicable.

D. Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion and staining by isolating dissimilar metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces and joint materials.

E. Finishes: Provide surfaces with a uniform finish when tested in accordance with ASTM D5767. 1. Semigloss; gloss range of 20-50.






3.02 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by countertop and vanity installer for anchorage. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.

B. Clean dirty or stained solid surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean solid surfaces by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow solid surfaces to dry before installing.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16" in 48". B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8" in 96"; 1/4" maximum.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation details.

B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.

C. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Components shall be clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Protect surfaces from damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Repair or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction and invoice for the cost of repairs.

E. Fabricator/Installer is to provide a commercial care and maintenance video, review maintenance procedures and warranty details with the director of maintenance upon completion of project.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Remove broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged fabrications, and defective joints, that do not match approved samples. Damaged products may be repaired if Architect approves methods and results.

B. Replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. Replace damaged units with new units which match approved samples and mockups.

C. Correct defective joints and joinery. D. Protect surfaces from damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and touch up minor scratches and other finish imperfections. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage solid surface materials.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Review maintenance procedures and warranty details with the director of maintenance upon completion of project.

END OF SECTION





Construction Documents BP-3 06 61 19 - 1 Addendum No. 02 QUARTZ SURFACING FABRICATIONS

SECTION 06 61 19 QUARTZ SURFACING FABRICATIONS


A. Section Includes 1. Manufactured quartz countertops and work surfaces. 2. Setting and installation materials and accessories 3. Sealers 4. Steel support framing


A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: For metal brackets for countertop support B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: For required blocking in walls to support quartz

fabrications. C. Section 06 61 16 - Solid Surface Fabrications: For wall caps, sills and surfaces D. Section 12 32 16 – Manufactured Plastic-Laminate Clad Casework. E. Division 26 - Electrical: For coordination with electrical outlets and other fixtures.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A118.3-2005, Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable, Tile-Setting and - Grouting

Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive 2. ANSI A136.1-2008, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile

B. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM A666-10, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar

2. ASTM F593-02 (2008), Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

3. ASTM F594-09, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-Bid Prior Approval Substitution Request Submittals: Required submittals and approvals prior to receipt of bids. 1. For pre-bid prior approvals, submit the following substitution request in accordance with the






1. Product Data: Material's materials description for each type of product and process


NEW HOPE, MN

06 61 19 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 QUARTZ SURFACING FABRICATIONS Addendum No. 02

specified and incorporated into items of the fabrications, installation and maintenance instructions.

2. Shop Drawings a. Show complete information for fabrication and installation of quartz fabrications. b. Include plans, elevations and details of all quartz fabrications, materials,

arrangement, profiles, thicknesses, finishes, edge profiles, all openings, construction fastenings, blocking clearances, assembly and erection details, built-in hardware and necessary connections to other work.

3. Samples: Submit 2 samples of each color specified, a minimum size of 6" x 6" square by

thicknesses specified, and finish and edge condition specified. 4. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with

requirements specified, and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage quartz.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 7710 1. Maintenance Data

a. Provide a commercial care and maintenance video and literature at Substantial Completion.

b. Include in maintenance manuals product data for quartz care products used or recommended by fabricator, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years successful experience in fabrication of quartz fabrications similar to units required for this Project.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years successful experience in the fabrication of quartz fabrications similar to units required for this Project.


A. Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition. Store units in a waterproof area at Project site to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, condensation, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, cracking, distortion, warping, staining, and other physical damage. Lift and support units avoiding damage to quartz and its finish.

B. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when determined and replace with new. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project.


A. Basis-of-Design: For basis-of-design and reference purposes "LG Viatera Quartz", products are specified and indicated as STN-1 1. Product / Color: ‘Willow White’ 1. Product / Color: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

2. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products available from the following

manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work upon receipt of prior approval for their products by the Architect when a substitution request is submitted during the Bidding Phase in accordance with the Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders and Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures: a. "Cambria", (Cambria Corporation) b. "Caesarstone", (U.S. Quartz Products) c. "Corian Quartz", (formerly Zodiaq) (DuPont Polymers)



d. "HanStone Quartz", (Hanwha Surfaces) e. "Okite", (Seieffe Corporation) f. "Quartz Stone", (EuroStone) g. "Radianz", (Samsung) h. "Silestone Quartz" (Silestone by Consentino) i. "Vicostone", (Stylenquaza LLC. dba Vicostone USA)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Quartz Material: Natural quartz-based, non-porous, homogeneous mixture containing 93 percent pure quartz with additions of high performance polyester resin and pigments. 1. Thickness for Horizontal Surfaces: 3/4" and 1-1/8", unless otherwise indicated on Drawings

or specified. 2. Thickness for Vertical Overlay: 3/8", unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified.

B. Adhesives: Use only adhesives and sealants formulated for stone work and recommended by

their manufacturer for the intended application. 1. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3 2. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. 3. Seam Adhesive: 2-part, epoxy-resin stone adhesive with an initial set time of not more

than 2 hours at 70 degrees F, VOC compliant in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). a. Color: Match each stone color.

C. Sealants: Use only sealants formulated for quartz work and recommended by their

manufacturer for the intended application. 1. Single-component silicone, nonsag, mold and mildew resistant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement); one of the following: a. "OmniPlus" (BASF Building Systems) b. "786 Mildew Resistant" (Dow Corning Corp.) c. "Sanitary SCS1700" (General Electrical) d. "898" (Pecora Corp.) e. "Tremsil 200 (Tremco, Inc.)

2. Installed under this Section 06 61 19.

D. Anchors and Attachments: Use only stainless steel attachment devices in direct contact with

quartz, fabricated from stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304. 1. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;

ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1

E. Setting Shims: Resilient plastic, or vulcanized neoprene with a 50 to 70 Shore A durometer hardness, nonstaining to quartz.

F. Cleaner: Quartz cleaner specifically formulated for quartz fabrication types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by quartz surface manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

G. Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of quartz surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

H. Steel Support Framing: Provide steel framing designed to properly support vanities and work surfaces not supported by cabinetry, complying with performance requirements in Section

a. 05 50 00. I. Grommets

1. Color: Satin Nickel 2. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a. Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.


NEW HOPE, MN


b. Outwater Plastics Ind. Inc. & Architectural Products c. Approved substitutions

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General 1. Fabricate in conformance with recommendations of reference standard publication(s).

Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimensional Stone--Design Manual IV." 2. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements before

final submittal of shop drawings and fabrication of quartz quartz fabrications. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the Construction Manager, to avoid delay of the work.

3. Fabricate quartz units accurately to conform with shapes, dimensions and thicknesses indicated on the Drawings and detailed on the final shop drawings.

4. Exposed plane surfaces shall be true. Exposed arrises shall be sharp and true. 5. Provide minimum hair line joints, cut and gauged by fabricator. 6. Fill and seal quartz units.

B. Horizontal Surfaces

1. Thickness: 3/4" and 1-1/8" thicknesses, where indicated on the Drawings, laminated to 3/4" thick preservative treated plywood.

2. Edge Profile: Square edge, eased, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. a. Refer to Drawings for additional edged detailing.

C. Splashes: 3/4" thick, "Set-on" backsplash and end splash, 4 " high, unless otherwise detailed

on Drawings. 1. Top-Edges and Corner Edge Profiles: Square edge, eased, unless otherwise indicated on

the Drawings.

D. Aprons: 3/4" thick, vertical dimensions indicated on Drawings. 1. Edge Profile: Square edge, eased, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

E. Joints: Fabricate without joints in their length or width, insofar as practicable. F. Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion and staining by isolating dissimilar metals and

other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of quartz and joint materials.

G. Rout out underside of fabrications to fit around in place hardware that may interfere with installation of fabrications.

H. Finish: All manufactured quartz surfaces exposed to view shall have a polished finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by installer for anchorage. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.



B. Clean dirty or stained quartz surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean quartz by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow quartz to dry before installing.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16" in 48". B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8" in 96"; 1/4" maximum.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Execute work with skilled mechanics and employ skilled fitters at the site to do necessary

field cutting as fabrications are set. 2. Install in conformance with referenced standard publications, manufacturer's instructions

and final shop drawings. 3. Provide adhesives, anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments shown, or

necessary to secure in place. Shim and adjust as required for proper setting. 4. Unless otherwise shown, install fabrications by adhering to supports with water-cleanable

epoxy adhesive.

B. Do not cut stone in field, unless otherwise indicated. If fabrications require additional work not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment.

C. Set quartz fabrications to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and final shop drawings. Shim and adjust fabrications to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

D. Bond seams with seaming adhesive recommended by manufacturer and draw tight as countertops are set. Clamp units to temporary bracing to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and seams are maximum 1/32" width.

E. Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to countertops, vanities, and work surfaces with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops, vanities, work surfaces and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Leave 1/16" gap between splash and wall for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

F. Install sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for the applications specified. Apply sealant to gaps specified for filling with sealant. Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.


A. Remove broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, and defective joints, that do not match approved samples. Damaged stone may be repaired if Architect approves methods and results.

B. Replace damaged stone units with new units which match approved samples and mockups. C. Correct defective joints and joinery. D. Clean countertops, vanities, and work surfaces not less than 6 days after completion of

installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions.


NEW HOPE, MN


3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Review maintenance procedures and warranty details with the director of maintenance upon completion of project.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 06 83 16- 1 Addendum No. 02 FRP WALL PANELING

SECTION 06 83 16 FRP WALL PANELING


A. Section Includes 1. Sanitary paneling (FRP-___ ) 2. Accessories and adhesive


A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM D5319-97(2008)e1, Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester

Wall and Ceiling Panels 2. ASTM E84-12, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials

B. Food and Drug Administration (FDA): 1999 Food Code 6-101.11. C. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description and installation instructions. 2. Samples: 12" square piece of each type paneling and 12" length of each type molding

strip specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications 1. At least 5 years experience in installation of fiberglass reinforced plastic panels, with at

least 5 projects of similar size, type and complexity as this Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original cartons clearly identified, and store indoors protected from the weather and exposure to the sunlight.

B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground, and protected from weather, construction activities, and other causes of damage. Prior to installation, re-stack panels on solid flat surface to minimize package distortion.

C. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when determined and replace with new. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project and replace with new at no additional cost to the Owner.



06 83 16- 2 Construction Documents BP-3 FRP WALL PANELING Addendum No. 02

A. Ambient Conditions 1. Do not begin installation until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling

equipment is in operation, and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated.

2. During installation, and within 48 hours prior to installation, maintain ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of panel adhesive used and recommendation of panel adhesive manufacturer.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: For basis-of -design and reference purposes Crane Composites, Inc. products are specified. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products available from the following manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work upon prior approval of their products by the Architect. 1. Marlite.

2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Materials shall meet USDA and FDA minimum applicable requirements. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Determined by testing identical products according to ASTM

E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 (Class A) 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 3. Water Absorption; ASTM D570: Less than 0.75 percent. 4. Barcol Hardness/Scratch Resistance; ASTM D2583: Not less than 35. 5. Impact Strength: Showing no visible damage on finish side.

a. 7.2 ft. lbs. per in when tested in accordance with ASTM D256 b. 45 in-lbs when tested in accordance with ASTM D5420.

6. Abrasion Resistance, Taber Abrasion Test; CS-17 abrasive wheels with 1,000 gram

weight: Not more than 0.038 percent panel material weight loss after 25 cycles. 2.03 MATERIALS

A. Panels (FRP-___ ): Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D5319, with manufacturer's proprietary molecularly-bonded surface protection film providing impact, abrasion and scratch resistance. 1. Thickness: 0.09" thick, 2. Size: 4' x 8' long (minimum) or as otherwise required to allow no horizontal joints except at

floor (base), and ceiling unless otherwise detailed. 3. Surface Finish: Embossed Pebble Texture 4. Color: White 5. Colors and locations are specified in the INTERIOR FINISH and MATERIAL SCHEDULE

indicated on the Drawings.

B. Products 1. "Fire-X Glasbord (FX)" with "Surfaseal", (Crane Composites, Inc.) 2. "Standard FRP", Class A, (Marlite)

C. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard one-piece polypropylene or PVC edge and corner moldings

designed to cover panel edges. 1. Color: Match panel colors.

D. Adhesive: As recommended by the paneling manufacturer for the substrates indicated. E. Sealant: Sealant S1 as specified in Section 07 92 00.


Construction Documents BP-3 06 83 16- 3 Addendum No. 02 FRP WALL PANELING



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates to remove substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, dust or other contamination.

B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space no less than 24 hours before installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install sanitary wall paneling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.

B. Lay out paneling before beginning installation. Locate panel joints to provide equal panel widths at ends of walls 1. Panels at corners not less than 12" wide.

C. Molding: Install moldings wherever paneling meets paneling (corners), terminations at floor

(base) and ceilings, and where panels are used as wainscoting unless otherwise detailed. D. Sealant: Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside

corner trim in a bead of sealant. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesives and sealants from face of panels and moldings, and other finishes as the work progresses. Use soft cloths and detergents or solvents as recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


06 83 16- 4 Construction Documents BP-3 FRP WALL PANELING Addendum No. 02



Construction Documents BP-3 07 42 13.16 - 1 Addendum No. 02 ALUMINUM PLATE WALL PANELS

SECTION 07 42 13.16 ALUMINUM PLATE WALL PANELS


A. Section Includes 1. Preformed, prefinished, concealed fastener, aluminum plate wall panels, MP-2, MP-3. 2. Flashing, trim, fasteners and accessories for each different panel. 3. Installation of building air barrier specified elsewhere. 4. Installation of metal furring and cavity wall building insulation. 5. Related sealant work specified elsewhere but provided by this Section. 6. Engineering, manufacturing and installation of specified systems.


A. Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation: For semi-rigid insulation and batt insulation. B. Section 07 27 13 – Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier C. Section 07 42 13.23 - Aluminum Composite Wall Panels D. Section 07 43 43 – Phenolic Composite Wall Panels E. Section 07 51 13 - Built-Up Asphalt Roofing F. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim G. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: For sealant materials and installation requirements installed

under the Section 07 42 13. H. Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies: For gypsum sheathing wall panels.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. Aluminum Association Aluminum Standards and Data, 2003 edition.

B. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 2605-11, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

C. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM B209-10, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2. ASTM C920-11, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 3. ASTM C734-06, Standard Test Method for Low-Temperature Flexibility of Latex Sealants

After Artificial Weathering 4. ASTM C754-09, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products 5. ASTM D1187-97 (2002)e1, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as

Protective Coatings for Metal 6. ASTM E283-04, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

7. ASTM E331-00(2009), Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

8. ASTM E1592-05, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof


07 42 13.16 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 ALUMINUM PLATE WALL PANELS Addendum No. 02

and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

D. International Building Code (IBC), 2012 Edition E. Minnesota State Building Code, 2015 edition (MSBC), incorporating the IBC listed above.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Conference 1. Construction Manager

a. Arrange and conduct a preinstallation conference, held at the Project site prior to commencement of the work of this Section. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening preinstallation conference.

b. Record discussions of conference including decisions and agreements reached, and disagreements, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved, and set date for reconvening conference.

c. Coordinate preinstallation conference with installation of aluminum composite wall

panels specified in Section 07 42 13.23.

2. Required attendance unless otherwise indicated, includes Construction Manager, installer installing Contractor, manufacturers' representatives, Architect and Architect's consultant if desired, Owner's representative and Owner's insurance representative at Owner's discretion.

3. Perform a thorough review of details, materials and methods of installation, and warranties. 4. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work, and verify availability of

materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

6. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. 7. Examine the substrate, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other

trades. 8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with

unfavorable weather conditions, including temporary requirements. 9. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days. 10. Review observation, protection and repair procedures after installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings

a. Manufacturer prepared and engineered certified shop drawings, or Contractor prepared and manufacturer approved and engineered certified shop drawings.

b. Show comprehensive layout detailing proposed plan, elevation and section configurations for the metal panel work. Indicate panel thickness, length, and width. Show large scale details of edge connections, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trims, flashings, closures and specialty details, distinguishing between factory and field assembly work. Indicate sealant type and joint configurations. Indicate erection procedures and accessories required for a complete installation.

3. Samples

a. Verification Sample Panels: One each 12" square section of concealed fastener aluminum plate panel type and configuration specified, indicating panel construction, edge, joint, and seam details, attachments and accessories, in each of the approved colors, mounted on plywood backer and including support framing, underlayment,



and insulation with sealed joints.

4. Calculations: Prepared and certified by a structural engineer registered in the State of Minnesota, indicating composite wall panel system specified complies with the specified performance requirements for air infiltration, water infiltration, structural performance, and wind uplift, for the substrate to which panels are attached.

5. Test Reports: Independent laboratory test report indicating the following:

a. For each individual metal wall panel system complying with the specified performance requirements for air infiltration, water infiltration, structural performance, and wind uplift, for the substrate to which panels are attached.

6. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's intended warranties for each specified metal

panel for this Project, stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

B. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 7710: 1. Include fully executed warranties for this Project, stating obligations, remedies, limitations,

and exclusions of warranty. 2. Final Inspection Reports: Upon completion of installation of metal wall panel systems,

manufacturer's representative shall submit an inspection report indicating that systems are installed in accordance with published specifications, final shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Engineering, manufacturing and installation of specified system shall be provided by single manufacturer and wall panel systems installation contractor trained and authorized by the manufacturer for erecting specified products. 1. Provide accessories acceptable to the panel manufacturer. 2. Installation, including underlayment, fasteners, panels, flashings and sealants shall be

installed by a single installer for undivided responsibility.

B. Manufacturer: Have had a minimum of 10 years experience in the successful completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance requirements, with a minimum of 5 completed projects of similar size and scope using the specified or similar metal wall panel systems.

C. Installer/Erector: A manufacturer trained and authorized firm, with a minimum 5 years successful experience in installation of materials of similar size and scope of this Project, and have a minimum of 5 completed projects using the specified or similar metal wall panel systems.

D. Mockup: Before starting exterior metal wall panel work, construct a sample wall panel minimum 8 feet long and 8 feet high incorporating back-up construction (including but not limited to concrete block, steel studs as applicable, sheathing, air barrier, etc.), subgirt framing, anchors, flashing and drainage methods, a sealant joint (if any), using all aluminum plate panels specified, and representing the proposed color range (if any), texture, layout, joint treatment, and overall workmanship, for review and approval by the Architect and manufacturer's technical filed representative. 1. Erect sample panel facing Southwest or West in direct sunlight at a location determined by

the Construction Manager installing contractor and Architect. 2. Include air barrier wall flashing and starter strips with a 12" length of flashing and starter left

exposed to view. 3. Include framing and anchors specified, properly spaced, and wall insulation. 4. Include a sealant-filled joint (if any) at least 16" long in mockup. 5. Clean sample panel prior to review. 6. Mockup may be part of the overall work and remain in place if approved by the Architect

and manufacturer's technical field representative. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING



A. Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original crating or packing, properly labeled for

identification and erection purposes. B. Handle, store, stage, transfer, and lift panels and covers during installation in strict accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations and guidelines. C. Store materials as recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Store prefinished materials masked with factory applied protective film from the sun's ultraviolet rays until ready for installation.

D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged or otherwise unsuitable material when

determined and replace with new. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate construction to ensure that wall panel assemblies fit properly to supporting and adjoining construction and coordinate schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements can not be made without delaying

the work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of wall panel assemblies corresponding to the established dimensions.

1.09 WARRANTIES

A. Warrant the metal wall panel systems to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except extend the warranties as follows: 1. Installing Contractor's 2-year warranty covering water infiltration behind and underneath the

metal wall panel system and air/vapor/water barrier membrane. a. Provide warranty on Contractor's letterhead, signed by an officer of the company,

and notarized.

2. Panel System Manufacturer's 10-year, non-prorated written warranty against failure of the metal wall panel system, including the wall panels, attachments system, flashing, trim, tapes, sealants, related fasteners, and cavity wall insulation. a. Provide warranty on manufacturer's standard preprinted form, and signed by a

corporate officer of the manufacturer's company, having the authority to execute warranties.

3. Panel Finish Manufacturer's 20-year, non-prorated written warranty against failure and

deterioration of fluoropolymer finish against color fade, chalking and film integrity in excess of normal weathering. a. Provide warranty on manufacturer's standard preprinted form, and signed by a


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available fabricators offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. AlumaFab Metal Sales, LLC 2. Protean Construction Products, Inc. 3. Specialty Systems, Inc. 4. Dri-Design; Aluminum Wall Panel System



5. Approved substitutions. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Aluminum Plate Wall Panel System MP-2, MP-3: Single-skin, formed aluminum wall panels with concealed fastening and sealant filled joints, applied as exterior rainscreen cladding over steel wall framing, and gypsum sheathing, an applied air barrier providing air, moisture, and water vapor control, and insulation applied outboard of the sheathing for a complete weathertight wall system. Secondary metal subgirt framing for panel attachment specified is in this Section.

B. Basis of Design: For basis-of -design and reference purposes "Aluminum Plate AP-2000RS"

(rainscreen), by Protean Construction Products, Inc. system and components are specified. 1. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products available from the other

specified manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work. 2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, engineer, fabricate, and install metal wall panel assembly capable of meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with the specified standards: 1. Structural Load Requirements: Chapter 16 of the specified IBC:

a. Ultimate Design Wind Speed (Vult): 120 mph b. Nominal Design Wind Speed (Vasd): 93 mph c. Surface Roughness Category: C d. Exposure: C e. Occupancy Category III, Education; A structure for elementary, secondary, or day

care with an occupancy load greater than 250.

2. Deflections for Metal Wall Panel Systems a. Maximum Deflection: L/180 under loading. b. Wind Loading: Panel components tested in accordance with ASTM E1592 to

withstand a uniform pressure of at least 23 psf inward and 23 psf outward. c. Increase base design pressure additional 10 percent within 10 feet of all building

corners.

3. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E331, at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf, or 20 percent of the design wind pressure whichever is greater, at a minimum test pressure of 12 psf.

4. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. at a test of 1.57 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.

5. Thermal Movement: Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F., preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

2.04 ALUMINUM PLATE WALL PANELS

A. Aluminum Panel Material: Preformed, precut, prefinished, solid aluminum sheet alloy, complying with ASTM B209, and Aluminum Association specification 3003-H14/3105-H14 for painted finish. 1. Plate Thickness: 0.125".

B. Formed Aluminum Trim: Preformed from prefinished aluminum sheets, alloy and temper as

recommended by manufacturer for the type of use and finish specified, factory primed and finished, and protected with strippable plastic film. 1. Thickness: 0.050".



C. Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Weather Barrier: Refer to Section 07 25 00. B. Insulation: Refer to Section 07 21 00 for insulation outboard of sheathing and applied over air

barrier. C. Furring (Subgirts)

1. Z-Furring (Wall Girts): Minimum 0.033" thickness, or as recommended by the manufacturer if thicker, ASTM A653, G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel, 1-1/2" deep, 1-1/4" flange widths.

2. Hat-Shaped Channels: Minimum 0.033" thickness, or as recommended by the manufacturer if thicker, ASTM A645, G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel, 3/4" to 7/8" deep.

D. Foam Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1" thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre-molded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

E. Sealants 1. Hidden Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, isobutylene compound sealant tape with

release-paper backing, permanently elastic, non-sag, non-toxic, non-staining. a. 1/8" thick by 1" wide.

2. Hidden Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone

sealant. Type, grade, class, and use classifications recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacture.

3. Non-Skinning Butyl Sealant: ASTM C734, non-hardening, non-drying, non-oxidizing butyl rubber-based sealant.

4. Accessory Tape: Pressure-sensitive 1/8" (3mm) thick and 1" (25mm) wide VHB tape. 5. Refer to Section 07 92 00 for sealant materials and installation requirements for sealant

installed under this Section 07 42 13.

F. Accessories 1. Provide components required for a complete wall panel system. Match materials and

finishes of wall panels. 2. Color matched touch-up paint.

G. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt emulsion, ASTM D1187, Type I.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. General 1. Fabricate metal wall panels, flashing and trim, and assemble work to greatest lengths

possible. Comply with detail configurations indicated on the Drawings, approved shop drawings and other recognized industry practices.

2. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material.

3. Form panels to specific dimensions and profiles with tolerances to accommodate expansion and contraction and structural movement tolerances.

4. Build-in rain drainage features into panel profile. 5. Allow for fields adjustments where final dimensions cannot be established by field

measurement before fabrication. 6. Make expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage,

damage, or deterioration of the work. 7. Protect panel finish during forming with a continuous strippable plastic film.



8. Fabricate all metal wall panel components, including panels, flashing, and trim to have "grain" of metal finish to follow the along the length of the panel.

B. Aluminum Plate Wall Panels MP-2

1. No Joints or Seams: Form panels as one piece without joints for full length and width of panels.

2. Maximum Allowable Panel Fabrication Tolerances a. Panel Width or Length

1) Plus 0.064" from 48" to 144".

b. Panel Squareness: Plus 0.1875" difference between diagonal measurements. c. Panel Camber: Plus 0.032". d. Panel Bow: 0.2 percent of panel dimension, not to exceed 0.1875".

C. Fascia, Flashings, Copings, Counterflashings and Trim

1. Fabricate and assemble units in the shop. Limit fascia, flashings, and trim units to 24 feet in length. Where appearance is not a factor, work may be fabricated in 8 or 10 foot lengths.

2. Provide formed drip edges on all fascia, copings, ends of wall panel system to properly shed water from metal surfaces.

3. Fabricate joint cover plates 6" long minimum. Prefabricate corners, minimum 18" long in each direction.

4. Counterflashing shall be 2-piece type. Receiver shall be minimum 1-1/2" deep, have a hooked end, and a locking slot, factory formed and requiring no malleting and bending to hold cap member. Cap member shall be formed to snap into receiver and provide positive spring action against base flashing.

D. Perforated Soffit Panels MP-3

1. At locations indicated on the Drawings provide soffit panels with perforations for venting of soffits.

2. Perforations a. Number of Rows: Quantity to create perforated pattern 3" wide. b. Margin (distance from edges and ends of panels): 3". c. Hole Diameter: 1/8". d. Hole Spacing: 1/4" o.c., staggered.

3. Bug Screens: Adhere square mesh, woven aluminum wire insect screen on the top side

(concealed side) of the soffit panels.

E. Separations: Provide for separation of non-compatible metals or corrosive substrate by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Aluminum Plate Wall Panels, Exposed Flashing and Trim 1. Exposed Painted Surfaces: Primed and coated on top side with Fluoropolymer resin-

based (70 percent Kynar or Hylar 5000) coating/color system, thermocured, composed of inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer top coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight complying with AAMA 2605. a. 2-Coat Finish System: "Duranar Plus" (PPG); or approved substitution.

1) Primer and color top coat to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.6 mil.

b. Texture: Smooth finish. c. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of all colors, including

metallic colors. d. Concealed Surfaces: Primer wash coat of 0.25 mil to 0.35 mil dry film thickness.



e. Coordinate colors of aluminum plate wall panels with formed aluminum wall/roof coping specified in Section 07 62 00.

B. Mask prefinished materials with factory applied protective film to protect materials during

fabrication, from the sun's ultraviolet rays and during installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate work of this Section with other work for the correct sequencing of items which make up the entire wall membrane system of weatherproofing and waterproofing, and rain drainage. It is required that the wall panel, flashing and sheet metal work be permanently watertight, and not deteriorate in excess of manufacturer's published limitations.

B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation 1. Coordinate with other work for correct sequencing of items. 2. Coordinate installation of subgirts and metal flashings with air barrier installation and cavity

wall insulation. 3. Separations: Separate metal wall panel surfaces from non-compatible metals, woods or

corrosive substrate with coating of bituminous paint or other permanent separation recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.

B. Drip Edges, Flashing, and Trim: Build in as the work progresses. Install beneath applied air

barrier.

C. General 1. Install panels and associated work in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed

instructions and recommendations, and final approved shop Drawings. 2. Erect all members plumb, level, and in line securely anchored and properly related to other

parts of the Work. 3. Erection Tolerances: Shim and align aluminum plate panel units within specified

installation tolerances a. Level, Plumb, and Line Locations: 1/4" in 20 feet, nonaccumulative. b. Offset of Adjoining Faces: Within 1/8" c. Alignment of Matching Profiles: Within 1/8"

4. Install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed

faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform, neat seams.

5. Protect metal surfaces which are to be in contact with dissimilar metals, with wood or other absorptive material, with a coat of bituminous paint specified to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Do not extend coating onto exposed surfaces.

6. Anchor panels securely in place using concealed fasteners insofar as practicable. 7. Allow for necessary thermal and structural movement.



D. Wall Subgirts and Insulation

1. Subgirts: Install wall subgirts at spacings indicated on Drawings with manufacturer's recommended fasteners. Install insulation between subgirts.

2. Wall Insulation: Install semi-rigid wall insulation progressively as the wall is built. Press insulation firmly against substrate and between subgirts. Butt insulation tightly together and stagger all vertical joints.

E. Coordinate metal panel installation with the following work:

1. Air barrier specified in Section 07 27 13. 2. Insulation applied outboard of the sheathing specified in Section 07 21 00. 3. Roofing membrane specified in section 07 51 13. 4. Metal flashings and copings specified in Sections 07 62 00. Take precautions not to

damage the underlayment and roofing membrane when installing panel systems. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTIONS

A. Metal Wall Panel Manufacturer: Provide the following during installation of the wall panel systems: 1. Start of Installation: Upon commencement of installation of wall panel system conduct an

inspection to determine that wall panel system is being installed in accordance with published specifications, final shop drawings and manufacturer's instruction.

2. Inform Construction Manager of the progress, and quality of work as observed. 3. Prepare report, and submit copies to the installing Contractor, the Construction Manager

and the Architect. 4. Report to Construction Manager in writing, copied to Architect, failure or refusal of the wall

panel installer to correct unacceptable practices called to the installer's attention. 5. Final Inspection Report: After completion of the project, prepare final report, confirming,

based on manufacturer's observation and tests, that manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with specifications, manufacturer's requirements, and final shop drawings, other than those previously reported and corrected. Submit inspection report to Construction Manager for inclusion in contract closeout documents.


A. Remove protective plastic film immediately after installation of prefinished wall panels and miscellaneous fabrications.

B. Remove dirt and excess sealants from exposed surfaces. C. Field touch-up marred and abraded surfaces with paint provided.

1. Minor scratches, blemishes other minor repair procedures shall be corrected by means of finish touch-up, only if acceptable to the Architect.

D. Replace sections of wall panel and trim, which exhibit abrasions on the face of surfaces exposed

to view from finished grade, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, with new materials to match adjacent undamaged components.

END OF SECTION





Construction Documents BP-3 07 42 43 - 1 Addendum No. 02 PHENOLIC COMPOSITE WALL PANEL

SECTION 07 42 43 PHENOLIC COMPOSITE WALL PANEL


A. Section Includes 1. Solid phenolic composite panels for an interior wall panel system. 2. Subframing and fasteners 3. Accessories 4. Solid phenolic composite access panels


A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies B. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications – for perforated metal and hardware for phenolic

composite access panels.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM A653-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2. ASTM B117-11, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 3. ASTM D635-10, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of

Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position 4. ASTM D1929-12, Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics 5. ASTM D2244-11, Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color

Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates 6. ASTM D2247-11 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100?%

Relative Humidity 7. ASTM E84-11a, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials 8. ASTM E119-12a, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials 9. ASTM E330-02(2010), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

B. International Building Code (IBC), 2012 edition. C. Minnesota State Building Code, 2015 edition (MSBC), incorporating the IBC listed above. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 268 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitability of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

2. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evacuating of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description, installation instructions, storage and

handling instructions, maintenance and inspection recommendations.


07 42 43 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 PHENOLIC COMPOSITE WALL PANEL Addendum No. 02

2. Shop Drawings: Plans, sections, elevations and details necessary to describe and convey the layout, profiles and product components, including edge conditions, panel joints, fixture location, anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. a. Show panel thickness, other system dimensions, installation and erection details,

including connections, fasteners and welds. Show access panels, and coordination with perforated metal.

c. Provide scaled drawings as follows:

1) Plans and Elevations at 1/2" = 1' -0". 2) Sections at 3/4" or 1-1/2" = 1'-0". 3) Attachment details at full scale.

d. Erection procedures and accessories required for a complete installation.

2. Samples

a. Initial Selection Samples: Two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

b. Verification Samples 1) Two 4" x 4" or larger pieces of each style panel in finish, texture, pattern and

color selected or specified. Two edges shall represent panel edge finish. 2) One 12" length of each anchor and fastening system.

3. Reports and Certifications

a. Code Compliance Documents: Indicate product compliance with specified building code. These documents shall include, but not be limited to, appropriate Evaluation Reports and test reports supporting the use of the product.

b. Manufacturer's Certifications: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

c. Engineering Calculations: Indicate that installed panels and attachments system meets or exceeds specified Performance Requirements.

4. Warranties: Sample copy of panel manufacturer's intended warranties for this Project,

stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

B. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 7710: 1. Warranty: Manufacturer's fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and

endorsements indicating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty and date of Substantial Completion.

2. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning information for specified products.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Primary panel products supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years experience.

B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm trained, approved, and authorized by the manufacturer, experienced in installation of panel assemblies specified, or similar assemblies, with not less than 3 years of successful experience installing specified products.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type panel and trim, and related accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Mockup: Before starting panel work, construct a sample wall panel minimum 8 feet long and 8 feet high incorporating back-up construction using all panel types specified, and representing the proposed color range (if any), texture, layout, joint treatment, and overall workmanship, for review and approval by the Architect and manufacturer's technical filed representative. 1. Erect sample panel facing Southwest or West in direct sunlight at a location determined

by the Construction Manager installing contractor and Architect.



2. Construct mockup using back-up construction (steel or wood studs as applicable, sheathing, vapor/air membrane, etc.).

3. Include air/vapor barrier wall flashing and starter strips with a 12" length of flashing and starter left exposed to view.

4. Include sub-girt framing and anchors specified, properly spaced, and wall insulation. 5. Include a joint (if any) at least 16" long in mockup. 6. Clean sample panel prior to review. 7. Panel shall not be a part of the finished work, but shall remain at the Project site protected

during the work with weather-resistant membrane, and removed when directed, or upon completion of the work.


A. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's original cartons, clearly marked with proper identification with manufacturer's name, equipment type, model numbers.

B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground, and protected from weather, construction activities, and other causes of damage.

C. Handle materials at the Project site to prevent damage in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when so determined and replace with new. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project.


A. Field Measurements 1. Verify actual measurements and openings by field measurements prior to release for

fabrication. 2. Recorded measurements and indicate on shop drawings 3. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to

avoid construction delays. 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the metal wall panel systems to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except extend the warranties as follows: 1. Panel System Manufacturer's 10-year, non-prorated written warranty against failure of the

metal wall panel system, including the wall panels, attachments system, flashing, trim, tapes, sealants, related fasteners. a. Provide warranty on manufacturer's standard preprinted form, and signed by a



A. "Trespa Meteon", (Trespa North America, Ltd.) B. Approved substitutions

2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Decorative solid phenolic wall panels on aluminum framing with open joints between panels, creating drainable rain screen wall system.

2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA



A. Physical Properties 1. Modulus of Elasticity: 1,300,000 psi minimum, ISO 178. 2. Tensile Strength: 10,100 psi minimum, ISO 527-2. 3. Flexural Strength: 14,500psi minimum, ISO 178. 4. Structural Performance:

a. Panel Deflection: Not exceeding L/175, normal to the plane of the wall. b. Deflection of Aluminum Sub-Framing Members: Not exceeding L/175 or 3/4 inch,

whichever is less, normal to the plane of the wall between supports. 1) Permanent Deflection of Framing Members: Not exceeding L/100 of span

length at 1-1/2 times design pressure. Components shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion.

B. Fire Performance Criteria

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. a. Flame Spread Index: 0 b. Smoke Developed (Maximum): 450

2. Ignition Temperature: Greater than 650 degree F above ambient, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D1929. 3. Burning Classification: CC1 or CC2, when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Panels: Solid phenolic composite panel consisting of a blend of up to 70 percent wood-based fibers and thermosetting resins, surfaced with an integral Decorative High-Pressure Laminate (DHPL) surface on one side and a primer finish on the concealed side, formed, dried, and cured, manufactured under high pressures and temperatures, finished with transparent topcoat on exposed surfaces. 1. Standard Grade (EDS) 2. Panel: "Meteon", (Trespa) 3. Panel Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 4. Colors

a. Primary Face: "Wenge”, NW09/MT, Dark brown with grain

B. Mounting System 1. TS210 - Concealed fastening over fixed depth aluminum sub-framing.

C. Aluminum Substructure: Aluminum sub-structure designed to withstand specified structural

loading D. Extrusions: Corner closures, joint closures, and vent screens, formed members, sheet, and

plate shall conform with the recommendations of the manufacturer. E. Extruded Aluminum Trim: Color as specified in the finish schedule. F. Fasteners (Concealed/Exposed): Non-corrosive and as recommended by panel manufacturer.

1. Fasteners For Metal Framing: Corrosion-resistant, self-drilling, self-tapping, length required to penetrate through aluminum substructure, wall sheathing, blocking and into stud or other solid backing as required by manufacturer.

G. Touch-Up Kit: Provide manufacturer's recommended touch-up kit for treating field trimmed

panels which have been factory primed and sealed. 2.05 FABRICATION

A. Panels: Solid phenolic impregnated kraft paper wall panels with no voids, air spaces or foamed insulation in the core material.

B. Accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals



C. Appearance: Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from warp and buckle.

D. Panel Dimensions: Fabricate panels under controlled shop conditions when possible. Field fabrication allowed where necessary, but kept to an absolute minimum.

E. Fabrication Tolerances 1. Panel Weight

a. 8 mm = 2.4 psf

2. Panel Bow: 0.079" per 39.38" (2mm per meter)

F. Access Panels: 1. Provide phenolic access panel doors with cut-out for perforated metal panel specified in 05 50 00. 2. Provide trim, frame or other support and construction as required at door perimeter. 3. Access panel will include hinges and locks as specified in 05 50 00.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to performance of the Work and recommended corrections. Where the installation and its completion may be delayed due to existing conditions, follow notification immediately with a written report. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install solid phenolic wall panels and sub-frame system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install solid phenolic wall panels plumb and level and accurately spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals and drawings.

C. Anchor panels and sub-framing securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary movement and structural support.

D. Fasten solid phenolic wall panels with fasteners approved for use with supporting substrate. E. Do not install panels or component parts which are observed to be defective or damaged

including, but not limited to: warped, bowed, abraded, scratched, and broken members. F. Do not cut or trim component parts during installation in a manner that would damage the finish,

decrease the strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts with require alteration to the shop for re-fabrication or replacement.

G. Install corner profiles and trim with fasteners appropriate for use with adjoining construction as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Remove masking or panel protection as soon as possible after installation. Any masking intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation, shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor to remove.

B. Adjust final panel installation so that all joints are true and even throughout the installation. Panels out of plane shall be adjusted with the surrounding panels to minimize any imperfection.



C. Repair panels with minor damage. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

D. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 09 01 60.91 - 1 Addendum No. 02 WOOD FLOORING RESTORATION

SECTION 09 01 60.91 WOOD STRIP STAGE FLOORING RESTORATION

This specification Section is issued in its entirety as a new specification section to the Construction Documents BP-3 for this Project via Addendum No. 02. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Stripping and sanding of existing finish and installation of new stain and top coats on

existing hardwood strip stage flooring. 2. Removal of deteriorated strip stage flooring and installation of new wood strip flooring as

required. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (MFMA) B. National Wood Flooring Association (NWFA)

1. Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Prerestoration Conference 1. Contractor

a. Arrange and conduct a prerestoration conference, held at the Project site prior to commencement of the work of this Section. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening prerestoration conference.

b. Record discussions of conference including decisions and agreements reached, and disagreements, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference.

2. Required attendance unless otherwise indicated, includes Contractor, Contractor's

superintendent, floor restoration subcontractor, Architect, Owner's representative, and Owner's insurance representative at Owner's discretion.

3. Perform a thorough review of construction, condition, materials, details, and methods of installation of existing wood strip flooring system.

4. Perform a thorough review of the substrate, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

5. Review observation, protection, and repair procedures after installation. 6. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 7. Review and finalize construction schedule related to this work, and verify availability of

materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

8. Review required material usage accounting procedures (unit pricing), inspection, testing, and certifying procedures.

9. Review conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable construction conditions, including temporary requirements.

10. Review notification procedures for non-working days. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300:



NEW HOPE, MN

09 01 60.91 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3

WOOD FLOORING RESTORATION Addendum No. 02

1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description, installation and maintenance instructions.

2. Field Quality Control Submittal: Submit installer's recommended procedures for removal of deteriorated strip flooring pieces, installation of new wood strip flooring pieces , sanding and cleaning, staining and sealing of sanded flooring.

3. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's intended warranties for this Project, stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

B. Submit in accordance with Section 01 7710:

1. Warranty: Manufacturer's fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty and date of Substantial Completion.

2. Maintenance Data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications 1. A firm minimum of 5 years experience in stripping, sanding, repairing, and refinishing of

existing strip wood stage flooring systems on comparable projects 2. Submit a list of at least 6 projects of similar size and complexity with references that can

be contacted. 3. Comply with NWFA Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring.

B. Sample Area: Before starting and completing the entire work of this section, prepare a sample

area to establish the quality standards for restoring the existing wood stage floor and for review and approval by the Owner and Architect. 1. Prepare an 8 feet by 8 feet area in a location of the stage agreed to between the Owner,

Architect, and flooring subcontractor, unless an area is designated on the Drawings. 2. Incorporate all processes for stripping and refinishing the sample area as would be

employed to restore the entire floor. 3. Stain and seal a 4 foot by 8 foot area of the strip and sanded area representing the

proposed color, texture, joint treatment, and overall workmanship. 4. Provide adequate lighting for reviewing the sample area. 5. Clean sample panel prior to review. 6. Sample area may be part of the overall work and remain in place if approved by the

Owner and Architect. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver new materials and installed after all wet work is completed. Complete overhead mechanical and electrical work prior to refinishing of flooring. Deliver product to Project site in manufacturer's original containers, clearly marked with proper identification with manufacturer's name, equipment type, model numbers.

B. Store packaged materials in the area where the flooring is to be installed for a minimum 72 hours. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground, and protected from weather, construction activities, and other causes of damage.

C. Handle materials at the Project site to prevent damage in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when determined and replace with new. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project.




A. Maintain a minimum ambient temperature of not less than 65 degrees F., nor more than 80 degrees F., and 35 to 50 percent relative humidity within area of work for 72 hours before beginning work until final acceptance of building.

B. Provide ventilation. Use sparkproof fans if natural ventilation is inadequate. Prohibit smoking. 1.08 WARRANTY

A. Contractor: Warrant the work to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except extend the warranty for 2 years. Provide warranty in writing on installer's preprinted letterhead, and signed by the installer and the Contractor. 1. Warranty shall include stripping and sanding process, and finish system against

deterioration beyond normal use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. New Flooring: Match existing. B. Base: Retain the existing. C. Thresholds, Reducer Strips, and Saddles: Retain the existing. D. Wood Filler: Compatible with finish system components and recommended by filler and finish

manufacturers for use indicated. If required to match approved Samples, provide pigmented filler.

E. Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application indicated. VOC content of not more than 100 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring.".

2.02 FINISHING

A. Urethane Finish System: Complete solvent-based, oil-modified system of compatible components that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated. 1. VOC Content: When calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24),

as follows: a. Finish Coats and Floor Sealers: Not more than 350 g/L. b. Stains: Not more than 250 g/L.

2. Stain: Penetrating and nonfading type.

a. Color: Black or near-black range of colors submitted to Architect for review and approval prior to application.

3. Floor Sealer: Pliable, penetrating type. 4. Finish Coats: Formulated for multicoat application on wood flooring.





NEW HOPE, MN

09 01 60.91 - 4 Construction Documents BP-3

WOOD FLOORING RESTORATION Addendum No. 02

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Store materials in the installation area for a minimum of 72 hours prior to commencing work. B. Where flammable adhesives are used, provide safety sparkproof fans when natural ventilation is

inadequate. Prohibit smoking, lighting matches, metal heel caps, and other flame and spark producing devices.

C. Remove and sweep floor clean of foreign matters before sanding. 3.03 EXISTING FLOORING

A. Existing Flooring: Verify and match existing conditions to the extent possible. a. For bidding purposes, assume 2-1/4" wide x 7/8" thick, Hard Maple flooring, Second and

Better Grade, kiln dried, with tongue and grooved edges. B. Remove damaged flooring strips, sleepers, and other floor system materials.

1. Damaged flooring may include split and splintered boards; warped and cupped boards that cannot be sanded to acceptable finish levels; water stained boards that cannot be properly refinished; boards without adequate tongues and grooves for proper fastening, sleepers and blocking that cannot be properly fastened to substrate.

C. Shoe Base: Prior to sanding, remove base shoe, retain for reinstallation after completion of

floor refinishing. D. Anchors: Remove existing floor miscellaneous floor anchors for installation of new flooring.

3.04 SANDING, SEALING AND FINISHING OF EXISTING FLOOR

A. Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring. B. Sand wood floor surfaces to a true and smooth surface by sanding machine and by scraping.

Hand-sandpapering each portion that cannot be performed using larger floor sanding equipment. Floor must not show sand marks or grooves when finish is applied. 1. If floor is in fair and even condition:

a. First Sanding: Sand straight with grain using minimum 36 grit abrasive or more aggressive grit if necessary to remove imperfections and existing finish. Vacuum as grinding is performed, do not wait until grinding is complete before vacuuming. Vacuum floor free of grit before additional sanding.

b. Second Sanding: Sand straight with grain, using 60 grit abrasive. Vacuum as grinding is performed, do not wait until grinding is complete before vacuuming. Vacuum floor free of grit before additional sanding.

c. Third Sanding: Sand straight with grain, using 100 grit abrasive or a finer grit if necessary to match approved sample. Vacuum as grinding is performed, do not wait until grinding is complete before vacuuming. Vacuum floor free of grit before additional sanding or applying floor finish.

2. If floor is in rough and uneven condition:

a. First Sanding: Sand at 45 degree angle to grain using 36 grit abrasive or more aggressive grit if necessary to provide even surface, remove imperfections, and existing stain finish. Vacuum as grinding is performed, do not wait until grinding is complete before vacuuming. Vacuum floor free of grit before additional sanding.

b. Second Sanding: If further evening is required, make second sanding at 45 degree angle to grain in opposite direction (perpendicular) of first sanding using 36 grit abrasive to provide even surface, remove additional imperfections, and existing stain finish. Vacuum as grinding is performed, do not wait until grinding is complete before vacuuming. Vacuum floor free of grit before additional sanding.

c. Additional Sanding: Follow second and third sandings specified in subparagraphs 3.04.A.1.b and c. above.

3. Perimeter Edge and Stair Sanding



a. Sand perimeter edges of floor to match field sanding finish. Maintain expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring to match existing.

b. Sand stair treads and risers to match floor field sanding finish.

B. Screening 1. Follow sanding by hardplating with 100-grit abrasive paper. 2. Screen with Grade-80 screen backed by red pad. 3. Screen with Grade-100 screen backed by white pad. 4. Vacuum as screening is performed, do not wait until screening is complete before

vacuuming. Vacuum floor free of grit before additional screening or applying floor finish.

C. Staining and Sealing 1. After Sanding is Complete

a. Clean all surfaces of sanding dust in the existing auditorium, including but not limited to other floor surfaces, walls, theater equipment, ductwork, light fixtures, and exposed structure.

b. Wipe entire floor with tack rag of mineral spirits or other acceptable tackable and drying solutions prior to application of finish system.

2. Staining

a. Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples. b. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish

manufacturer to minimize grain raise

3. Sealing a. Apply 2 coats of specified sealer with manufacturer recommended applicator. b. Allow seal coats at least 24 hours to dry, unless otherwise required by

manufacturer. c. Sand between coats.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect the wood flooring from traffic so that it will be without indication of use and damage on the date of Substantial Completion. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over wood floor or floor-covered. Protect

flooring with panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 09 30 00 - 1 Addendum No. 02 TILING

SECTION 09 30 00 TILING


A. Section includes 1. Ceramic tile walls 2. Quarry tile floors and bases 3. Cementitious backer units 4. Gypsum Tile Backer Units 5. Setting and grouting materials 6. Installation accessories


A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile Material & Installation Standards (ANSI), Release Date December 2017. 1. Installation Methods

a. ANSI A108.01, General Requirements: Subsurfaces and Preparations by Other Trades - 2013 [Revised]

b. ANSI A108.02, General Requirements: Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship - 2013 [Revised]

c. ASNI A108.1A, Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar - 2014

d. ASNI A108.1B, Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010]

e. ASNI A108.1C, Contractor's Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010]

f. ANSI A108.4, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive - 2009 [Revised]

g. ANSI A108.5, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010]

h. ANSI A108.6, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010]

i. ANSI A108.8, Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grouting - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010]

j. ANSI A108.9 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010]

k. ANSI A108.10, Installation of Grout in Tilework - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010] l. ANSI A108.11, Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units - 2010 [Revised] m. ANSI A108.12, Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Grade Plywood)

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010] n. ANSI A108.13, Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for

Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone - 2005 [Reaffirmed 2010]


09 30 00 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 TILING Addendum No. 02

o. ANSI A108.14, Installation of Paper-Faced Glass Mosaic Tile - 2010 [Revised] p. ANSI A108.15, Alternate Method: Installation of Paper-Faced Glass Mosaic Tile -

2005 [Revised 2010] q. ANSI A108.16, Installation of Paper-Faced, Back-Mounted, Edge Mounted, or Clear

Film Face-Mounted Glass Mosaic Tile - 2005 [Revised 2010] r. ANSI A108.17, Installation of Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile

and Dimension Stone - 2005 [Reaffirmed 2010]

2. Materials Specifications a. ANSI A118.1, Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar - 2012 [Revised] b. ANSI A118.3, Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable, Tile-Setting

and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive - 2013 [Revised]

c. ANSI A118.4, Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar - 2012 [Revised] d. ANSI A118.5, Specification for Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile

Installation - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010] e. ANSI A118.6, Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation - 2010

[Revised] f. ANSI A118.7, Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile

Installation - 2010 [Revised] g. ANSI A118.8, Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout - 1999

[Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010] h. ANSI A118.9, Specifications for Test Method and Specifications for Cementitious

Backer Units - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010] i. ANSI A118.10, Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for

Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation - 2014 j. ANSI A118.11, Specifications for EGP (Exterior Grade Plywood) Latex-Portland

Cement Mortar - 1999 [Reaffirmed 2005 and 2010] k. ANSI A118.12, Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic

Tile and Dimension Stone Installation - 2014 l. ANSI A118.13, Specifications for Bonded Sound Reduction Membranes for Thin-Set

Ceramic Tile Installation - 2014 m. ANSI A118.15, Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar - 2012

[New] n. ANSI A136.1, Specifications for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile -

2008 [Reaffirmed 2013] o. ANSI A137.1, Standards Specifications for Ceramic Tile - 2012 p. ANSI A137.2, Specifications for Glass Tile - 2013


1. ASTM C144-11, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 2. ASTM C150-15, Standard Specification for Portland Cement 3. ASTM C241-15, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot

Traffic 4. ASTM C615-11 Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone 5. ASTM C1178-13, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing

Panel 6. ASTM C1325-14 Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced

Cementitious Backer Units 7. ASTM C1396-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 8. ASTM D226-09, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing

and Waterproofing 9. ASTM D4397-10, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,

Industrial, and Agricultural Applications

C. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA) 1. TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation, 2017



1.04 SUBMITTALS







1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description and recommended installation instructions for adhesives, manufactured mortar, grout and latex additive.

2. Samples a. One sample each type tile 6" square and smaller in colors selected, mounted on

12" x 12" backing, with grouted joints. One sample of each trim shape. b. One sample of each type tile larger than 6" square in colors selected with grout key.

One sample of each trim shape. c. One 6" length or longer, of each style of metal edge strip in the finish specified. d. One 6" long (minimum) piece of threshold material, or one full length piece, in each

color and pattern specified.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Tile manufacturer's maintenance guidelines for Owner's use in maintaining tile work specified.


A. Material and installation shall comply with the provisions of the codes, specifications and standards referenced, except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

B. Single Source Materials: Provide setting, grouting, waterproofing, crack isolation underlayment materials from a single manufacturer unless otherwise approved and acceptable to the manufacturer to ensure total tile setting system responsibility.


A. Deliver materials and products to the Project site in manufacturer's original containers, clearly marked with proper identification with manufacturer's name, equipment type, model numbers.

B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground, and protected from weather, construction activities, and other causes of damage.

C. Handle materials at the Project site in accordance with manufacturer's requirements to prevent damage.

D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when determined and replace with new at no additional cost to the Owner. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project.


A. Maintain temperature within spaces scheduled to receive tile at 50 degrees F. (minimum) during installation and for 7 days following completion.

B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.



1.08 EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS

A. Furnish Owner at least 2 percent additional tile of each type and color used on this Project over and above the quantity installed, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Furnish Owner 100 sq. ft. of Guest Room tile of each type and color used on this Project over and above the quantity installed.

C. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store where directed in the building.


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. For Glazed Wall Tile and Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile

a. American Olean Tile Co., Sub. Daltile International b. Daltile c. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. d. Huntington/Pacific Ceramics, Inc. e. Kate-Lo, Inc. f. Lone Star Ceramics Co. (*for floor tile only) g. Mid-State Tile Co. h. United States Ceramic Tile Co. (*for wall tile only) i. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Co.

2. For Unglazed Quarry Tile

a. Kate-Lo, Inc. b. American Olean Tile Co., Sub Daltile International c. Daltile d. Huntington/Pacific Ceramics, Inc. e. Mid-State Tile Co. f. Quarry Tile Co. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

3. For Setting and Grouting Materials

a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. Mapei Corp. e. TEC, Inc., an HB Fuller Co.

4. Other Materials: As specified in Article 2.02.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Ceramic Tile Walls: Standard Grade, glazed ceramic tile, matte finish, cushion edged. Furnish required trim shapes; angles, corners, caps, and similar trim. 1. CTW -1 (Basis of Design)

a. Manufacturer / Product: Kate Lo Tile & Stone, Color and Dimension Subway tile

a. Manufacturer / Product:See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

b. QT.CD.ARW.0306.MT c. Size: 3" x 6" face size. d. Color: Arctic White



e. Finish: Matte

f. Grout: GR-2

2. CTW -2 (Basis of Design) a. Manufacturer / Product:See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color

selections b. Grout: GR-3

B. Quarry Tile Floors: Unglazed natural clay quarry tile, square edged with standard finish and non-slip finish where scheduled. 1. QT-1 (Basis of Design)

a. Manufacturer / Product: Kate Lo Tile & Stone, Metropolitan Quarry

a. Manufacturer / Product:See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

b. Size: 6" x 6" c. Color: 507 Puritan Gray

d. Grout: GR-1

B. Quarry Tile Base: Coved, round top.

1. QT-B1 (Basis of Design) a. Manufacturer / Product: Kate Lo Tile & Stone, Metropolitan Quarry

a. Manufacturer / Product:See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color

selections

b. Size: 6" x 6" c. Color: 507 Puritan Gray

d. Grout: GR-1

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. C. Sand: ASTM C144. D. Water: Clean, free from deleterious substances. E. Reinforcing: 2" x 2" x 16/16" gage welded wire fabric. F. Cleavage Membrane: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15) asphalt-saturated, nonperforated felt, or

ASTM C171, 4-mil polyethylene film, at contractor's option. G. Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane System: Thin, self-bonding, load-bearing, self-

curing fabric-reinforced, fluid-applied latex or rubber polymer that produces a flexible, seamless, antimicrobial protection to inhibit the growth of mold and mildew, waterproofing membrane complying with ANSI A118.10, and crack bridging and crack isolation membrane complying with ANSI A118.12 for high performance. 1. Provide manufacturer's recommended reinforcing mesh. 2. Thickness: Recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 40 mil (minimum) DFT. 3. Provide manufacturer's primer applied to gypsum underlayment, if required. 4. One of the following:

a. "Hydroment Ultra-Set Advanced", (Bostik) b. "Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane", (Custom) c. "Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane", (Laticrete) d. "PRP M19", (Mapei) e. Triple Flex Waterproofing (TEC)



H. Anti-Fracture Membrane: Self-bonding elastomeric sheet membrane, 40 mils thick for use over floors subject to deflection which exceeds (<L/360), "ECB Membrane" (National Applied Construction Products, Inc.); or approved substitution.

I. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar for Porcelain Ceramic Floor and Wall Tiles, and Glass Mosaic Wall Tiles, complying with ANSI A118.4. Thin-set mortar for tiles smaller than 15" on all sides. For large format tile refer to LHT mortar specified below. 1. "Tile Mate - Premium" (Bostik) 2. "VersaBond Fortified Thin-Set Mortar" (Custom) 3. "254 Platinum " (Laticrete) 4. "Kerabond" (Mapei) 5. "Full Flex - Latex Modified Thin Set Mortar" (TEC) (no admixture is necessary)

J. Organic Adhesives: Acrylic-based, multi-purpose ceramic and marble tile adhesive complying

with ANSI A136.1, Type II specification. One of the following: 1. "Hydroment 3500" (Bostik) 2. "Acryl-3000" (Custom) 3. "Laticrete 15 Multi-Mastic" (Laticrete) 4. "Ultra/Mastic 2" (Mapei) 5. "Double Duty Classic" No. TA-122 (TEC)

K. Floor and Wall Grout

1. Epoxy Grout: Water-cleanable, stain-resistant, chemical-resistant, tile-setting and grouting epoxy, meeting requirements of ANSI A118.3. a. "TruColor Pre-Mixed Grout" (Bostik) b. "CEG-2000 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout" (Custom) c. "LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO" (Laticrete) d. "Opticolor" (Mapei) e. "AccuColor EFX® Epoxy Special Effects Grout", (TEC)

2. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Colors: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

L. Latex Liquid Additives

1. Type 1 (For Mortar) a. "Hydroment 425 Multi-Purpose Acrylic Latex Admixture" (Bostik) b. "CustomFlex Ultra-Strength Thin-Set Additive" (Custom) c. "Laticrete" No. 4237 (Laticrete) d. "Keralastic" (Mapei) e. None required (TEC)

M. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C1325 and ANSI A118.9, Portland cement surfaced, fiber

glass mesh reinforced panel, 1/2" thick. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. "The Original Wonder-Board" (Custom Building Products) b. "PermaBase Cement Board", (National Gypsum Co.) c. "Durock Cement Board Next Gen" (United States Gypsum Co.) d. Approved substitution.

2. Provide 2" wide coated fiber glass tape as recommended by the panel manufacturer for

covering joints in panels.

N. Gypsum Tile Backer Units: ASTM C1396 paper-faced product, or ASTM C1396 and a. ASTM C1658 glass-mat faced product, each meeting Performance Level 10

according to b. ASTM D3273; one of the following:

2. Paper-Faced Gypsum Board



a. "Gold Bond Brand XP Wallboard" (National Gypsum Co.) b. Approved substitution

3. Glass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board

a. "DensGuard Tile Backer" (Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC) b. "Gold Bond Brand eXP Wallboard" (National Gypsum Co.) c. "Fiberock Brand Aqua-Tough" (United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp.)

4. Installation Accessories

a. Provide tile backer board manufacturer‘s recommended 2" wide 10 x 10 coated fiber glass tape for covering joints in panels.

b. Provide noncorrosive and nonoxidizing fasteners.

O. Moisture-Vapor Barrier 1. Polyethylene Sheet: 4-mil polyethylene sheet membrane, complying with ASTM D4397,

fungi resistant polyethylene sheet. 2. Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive Tapes: Double-stick pressure-sensitive tape, and single-

sided adhesive-backed tape compatible with the water resistant barrier sheet for adhering barrier to studs.

P. Metal Edge Transitions, Finishing, Protection, and Control Joint Strips: Aluminum profiles with

integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated, (Schlüter Systems LP). 1. Metal Profiles: Refer to Drawings for sizes and locations. 2. Finishes: Satin anodized. 3. Wall Base Tile Transitions

a. SCHIENE: L-shaped profile with 1/8" thick top section and depth of horizontal ledge equal to depth of tile and setting mortar, and vertical wall section with integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. 1) Install at top edge of tile base is exposed, and not included with wall tiles.

a. See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Work shall not commence until grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, etc., have been installed, and until adjoining work is satisfactorily protected.

B. Installation of Backer Board 1. Maximum Allowable Variation of Backer Board Surfaces

a. For Tiles with All Edges Less Than 15": 1/4" in 10 feet from required plane, and not more than 1/16" in 12" when measured from high points.

2. Joints

a. Horizontal Joints 1/8" Wide and Greater: Fill joint solid with latex-portland cement mortar and tape with 2" alkali-resistant glass fiber mess tape.



b. Vertical Joints: Fill all joints solid with latex-portland cement mortar and tape with 2" alkali-resistant glass fiber mess tape.

3. Corners: Do not fill corner joints. Tape with skim coat of with latex-portland cement

mortar. 4. Center end and edges of backer boards on framing. Stagger joints between boards in

adjacent rows so 4 corners of adjacent boards do not come together.

C. Install polyethylene membrane over steel framing with double faced adhesive applied to each stud face. Follow membrane installation with cementitious backer units installation. Apply membrane horizontally to face of studs shown to receive cementitious backer units. Lap not less than 2 studs and seal with tape.

D. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound

according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

E. Crack Isolation/Anti-Fracture Membrane System: Install where specified below, over substrates scheduled to receive floor tile, except substrates required to receive Waterproof Membrane System. 1. Install crack isolation membrane complying with ANSI A108.17 and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Install at the following locations: a. Over entire area to receive floor tile.

F. Layout tile in each area in such a manner as to minimize the cutting of tile.

1. Locate cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous. 2. Align all wall joints to give straight uniform grout lines, plumb and level. 3. Align all floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines, parallel with walls.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF TILE

A. General 1. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications

for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

2. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

3. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

4. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

5. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. a. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints

within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

6. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated, unless otherwise shown.



7. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. a. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

8. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS

A. Joints 1. Construct expansion or control joints in accordance with TCNA Method EJ171 by installing

wood strips extending through setting bed. After tile has set for 3 days, remove the wood strips, clean and repair the joints.

2. Joint Width: Match grouted joints but not less than 1/8" for ceramic tile and 1/4" for porcelain paver tile.

3. Location a. If locations of such joints are not shown provide joints at restraining surfaces, such

as walls, curbs, columns, pipes, etc., over expansion joints in backing and at changes in backing material. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

b. In large interior tiled areas, expansion joints shall occur not more than 36 ft. o.c. each way.

c. As best as possible locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Setting Base: Install base directly to substrate with the same mortar used for floors. Apply mortar with the flat side of trowel and comb with the serrated or notched side of trowel. Press the base firmly into place and tap lightly to ensure maximum bond. Joints of the base shall be of the same width and align with the joints of the floor tile insofar as practicable.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other

flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 3.06 GROUTING

A. After tile is firmly set, fill joints with specified grout materials. 1. Floors: Spread slurry of grout over the floor surfaces until joints are filled. 2. Walls: After tile has set, remove string or rope spacers, if any, and force a maximum of

grout into joints by trowel, squeegee, brush, or finger application. 3. Fill all grout joints flush with surface of tile. Before grout sets, fill all skips and gaps. Tool

joints to cushion edge of tile. Strike flush joints in quarry tile. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of tile work in each area, including work specified under other Sections, clean all tile surfaces with warm water and a high quality washing compound.

B. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. 1. Do NOT use acid or acid cleaners.

C. Sponge and wash tile thoroughly, working diagonally across joints; polish with dry cloths. D. Removing Surface Grout: Leave face of all tile clean and free from grout or other stains.

1. Remove surface latence and excess grout with dry polishing cloths, or in accordance with tile and grout manufacturers' instructions.

2. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.



3. Damp mop grouted floors twice daily for not less than 7 days following installation. 4. Clean grouted walls and ceilings twice daily for not less than 7 days following installation.

E. Immediately prior to occupancy by the Owner, wash tile surfaces again, and perform additional

grouting that may be necessary. 3.08 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 3 days following completion.

B. Cover tile floors with nonstaining building paper or polyethylene sheeting until just prior to occupancy by the Owner.

C. During construction, tiled areas used as walkways, in addition to other covering protect floors with boards or plywood.

3.09 SCHEDULE OF SETTING BED AND GROUT SYSTEMS

A. Floor Setting Beds 1. Over Slab-On-Grade

a. Thin-Bed or Large and Heavy Tile (LHT) Mortar: , Dry-Set Mortar: Latex-modified factory premix, with water added in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

b. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (By Volume): One part portland cement, one part fine dry sand and latex liquid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix.

c. Epoxy Mortar: Factory proportioned components mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Wall Setting Beds

1. Over Gypsum Wallboard a. Dry Areas and for Intermittent Water Resistance: Organic adhesive Type II

prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Over Cementitious Backer Units/Tile Backer Board a. Dry-Set Mortar: Latex-modified factory premix, with water added in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions.

3. Over Masonry a. Dry Areas b. Dry-Set Mortar: Latex-modified factory premix, with water added in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions.

c. Dry or Wet Areas 1) Portland cement paste on a portland cement mortar bed that is still workable,

or; 2) Dry-set or latex-portland cement mortar specified herein, over a portland

cement mortar bed cured for a minimum of 20 hours at 70 degrees F. or above. a) Dry-Set Mortar: Latex-modified factory premix, with water added in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

b) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (By Volume): One part portland cement, one part fine dry sand and latex liquid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix.

C. Grout

1. Epoxy Grout: Factory proportioned components mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



3.10 SCHEDULE OF TILE SETTING METHODS

A. Floors 1. TCNA Method F115: On-Ground Concrete; for Ceramic Tile; Epoxy Grout; with Optional

Crack Isolation Membrane a. Thin-Bed Dry-Set Mortar for tile units smaller than 15" dimension on all sides. b. Large and Heavy Tile (LHT) Mortar for tile units 15" and larger dimension on any

side. c. Epoxy grout.

B. Walls

1. TCNA Method W202I, Masonry or Concrete; Ceramic Tile 2. Dry Areas Only: TCNA Method W243: Wood or Metal Studs; Gypsum Board;

Cementitious Bond Coat; for Ceramic Tile a. Dry areas ONLY, not subject to moisture.

3. Wet Areas: TCNA Method W244C: Metal Studs; Cementitious Backer Unit; Ceramic Tile

a. Plumbing Walls

4. Dry or Wet Areas: TCNA Method W245: Metal Studs; Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backer Board; for Ceramic Tile a. Plumbing Walls, but NOT Showers

C. Expansion Joints

1. TCNA Method EJ171, Joints

END OF SECTION





Construction Documents BP-3 09 51 13 - 1 Addendum No. 02 SUSPENDED LAY-IN PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 51 13 SUSPENDED LAY-IN PANEL CEILINGS


A. Section Includes 1. Acoustical panels (ACP-___ ) for lay-in suspended ceiling installation 2. Non-acoustical panels (NACP-___ ) for lay-in suspended ceiling installation 3. Decorative metal panels (ACP-___ ) for lay-in suspended ceiling installation 4. Suspended ceiling grid systems. 5. Attachment and installation accessories. 6. Coordination with demolition subcontractor and other subcontractors for removal of existing

acoustical ceiling panels and suspension grid for installation of new work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Installers of the following systems shall coordinate their work with the suspended wood strip ceilings installer to minimize interference with ceilings: 1. Division 21 - Fire Suppression 2. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 3. Division 26 - Electrical 4. Division 27 - Communications 5. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI) 1. ASCE/SEI 7-10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures


1. ASTM A641-09a, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire 2. ASTM A653-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Alloy-Iron-Coated (Galvanealled) by the Hot-Dip Process 3. ASTM B164-03(2008), Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire 4. ASTM B221-08, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 5. ASTM B633-07, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and

Steel 6. ASTM C635-07, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 7. ASTM C636-08, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels 8. ASTM C367-09, Standard Test Methods for Strength Properties of Prefabricated

Architectural Acoustical Tile or Lay-In Ceiling Panels 9. ASTM C834-10, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants 10. ASTM D3273-00(2005), Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the

Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 11. ASTM D3274-09e1, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement

of Paint Films by Fungal or Algal Growth, or Soil and Dirt Accumulation


09 51 13 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 SUSPENDED LAY-IN PANEL CEILINGS Addendum No. 02

12. ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

13. ASTM E488-96(2003), Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements

14. ASTM E1190-95(2007), Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural members

15. ASTM E1264-08e1, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products 16. ASTM E1512-01(2007), Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of Bonded

Anchors

C. Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA) 1. CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook, latest edition. 2. CISCA Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings,

Seismic Zones 0-2, latest edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures: a. An interior finish scheme has been determined for this Project, and has been

approved by the Owner. b. Alternative products may be submitted for prior approval with the understanding that

the predetermined interior finish scheme will not be compromised. c. Include product data and actual sample(s) of representative size for review, to

determine acceptance; full size samples are encouraged. d. Products approved for bidding will be indicated in an Addendum. e. Products incorporated in the Work without prior written approval will be rejected.


1. Product Data: Materials description and recommended installation instructions for systems used.

2. Samples: Two 12" square units of each type of panel specified 3. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: a. Suspended ceiling components b. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached c. Size and location of initial access modules for ceiling panels d. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1) Lighting fixtures 2) Air outlets and inlets 3) Speakers 4) Sprinklers 5) Access panels

e. Perimeter moldings

4. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

C. Submit in accordance with Section 01 7710:

1. Warranty a. Manufacturer's fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and




1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Ceiling panels Full-size units equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2

percent of quantity installed.

B. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of Work under this Section, and store where directed in the building.


A. Compliance 1. Comply with the provisions of the Building Code, these specifications, and standards

referenced in Article 1.03 REFERENCES, except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

2. Suspended ceiling products and their installation shall comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of governing authorities having jurisdiction over this portion of the Work.

B. To the greatest extent possible, obtain materials from one manufacturer to promote single source

responsibility. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation

of ceiling systems similar to requirements for this Project. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver ceiling panels suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand, type, style, size, color, texture and other identifying information.

B. Store in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where materials will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

C. Before installing ceiling panels permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

D. Handle ceiling panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. E. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable material into the Project.


A. Do not install ceiling systems until space is enclosed and weatherproofed, until wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, until work above ceilings is completed, and until ambient condition of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Place panels in the intended location for a minimum of 72 hours. Remove plastic wrap and allow panels to acclimate to intended conditions.

C. Provide environmental conditions where the temperature is between 50 degrees F. and 86 degrees F., and relative humidity levels maintained between 25 and 55 percent. Maintain these conditions during the installation period and throughout the lifetime of the warranty.

D. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning ceiling installation.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Acoustical Ceilings: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ceiling components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



1. Failures do not include ceiling components which are exposed to abnormal conditions, including chemical fumes, corrosive agents such as chlorine, moisture from conditions such as building leaks or condensation, excessive humidity, or excessive dirt or dust buildup.

2. In addition to the abnormal conditions specified above, this warranty does not cover damage from vibrations, fire, water, freezing temperatures, accident or any form of abuse.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion for ceiling panels ONLY 4. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion when ceiling panels

manufacturer's grid system is utilized together as one system in the installation. 5. Provide warranty signed by an officer of the manufacturer authorized to execute warranties.


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Lay-In Panels

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. USG Interiors, Inc.; a Subsidiary of USG Corporation d. Moz Designs; mozdesigns.com

2. Suspension Systems

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Chicago Metallic Corp. d. USG Interiors, Inc.; a Subsidiary of USG Corporation

3. Approved substitutions 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Acoustical Panels (ACP-___ ) 1. ACP-1: ASTM E1264, Type IV; Form 1 and 2, pattern E, G

a. Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4". b. Edge Treatment: Shadowline tapered c. Color: White. d. LR: Not less than 0.90. e. NRC: Not less than 0.90. f. CAC: Not less than 30. g. High Temperature and Humidity Resistant: Resistant to temperatures up to 104

degrees F (32 to 40 degrees C.) and relative humidity 100 percent RH when tested and measured in accordance with laboratory test ASTM C367.

h. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21.

i. Grid Color: White

1. ACP-1: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Product selection

2. ACP-2: Decorative Metal Panel to fit standard ceiling grid a. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Moz Designs b. Size: 24" x 24" nominal c. Color / Material: Light Pewter- Waterfall Polygloss Panel d. Pattern: ¼” and 3/8” random perforations



e. Grid Color: Silver



B. Nonacoustical Panels (NACP-___ ) 2. NACP-1: Vinyl faced gypsum board lay-in panels, "Sheetrock Brand Lay-in Ceiling Panel

ClimaPlus" (USG Interiors, Inc.). a. Size: 24" x 24" x 1/2". b. Pattern: No. 3260

C. Exposed Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of

types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C635. 2. Type 1: Direct-hung, nonfire-rated double web steel suspension system, electrolytically

zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653, not less than G30 coating designation, and complete with main tees, cross tees, splices, wall moldings and accessories.

a. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system. b. Face Design: Flat, flush. c. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. d. Sizes

1) ACP-1: 15/16"

e. Finish: Factory applied enamel (satin). 1) Color: White - at ACP-1 2) Color: Silver - at ACP-2

3. Edge Moldings and Trim

a. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 1) Special Trim

a) Prefabricated bullnose outside corners for bullnose concrete block applications.

b) Prefabricated square outside corners for square applications.

b. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

c. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

d. Exposed Steel Perimeter Edge Fascia, Edge Moldings and Trim: Roll-formed, steel

of type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1) Basis of Design – USG Compasso, 4” high, white. 2) Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5

mils . Comply with ASTM C635 and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

D. Attachment Devices



2. General: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

3. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.

4. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant (Pecora Corporation) 5. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant (USG Corporation)



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of ceiling units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid the use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever specifically shown on the Drawings.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and CISCA Ceiling

Systems Handbook. 2. Comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements where indicated,

and industry standards applicable to the work; and meet the requirements specified herein. 3. The finished system shall be true and level, and panels shall be installed so as to form

straight true lines and cross lines. Adjacent panels shall match in appearance and shall be from one "factory run".

4. Arrange ceiling units and orient directionally-patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.

5. Frame access panels and other openings on 4 sides with 1-1/2" runner channel; each frame to be supported by a hanger at each end.

B. Install suspension systems to comply with CISCA 0-2 CISCA 3-4 and ASTM C636, and ASTM

E580 with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced 4' -0" along each carrying channel and direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' -0". 1. Install corrosive resistant wires in high humidity areas, including vestibules, toilet rooms,

kitchens, loading dock/receiving areas, etc. 2. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye-screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age and elevated temperatures. a. Space hangers not more than 6" from ends, not more than 4'-0" o.c. between ends of

main runners, and as required to support other work resting in and on ceiling. Where spans exceed the recommended or specified spans, furnish larger main runners or additional reinforcing.

b. Do NOT attach hangers to metal decking under any circumstances.



3. Coordinate spacing of hangers, carrying channels, runners, and moldings with the location

of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in and on ceilings. 4. Do not support system from electrical conduit, mechanical ducts, pipes, and equipment. 5. Do not bear main runners on walls and partitions. 6. Miter grid corners. Provide finish channels at exposed edges. Center runners to align with

architectural elements light fixtures, and similar visual components. Obtain Architect's approval of layout before beginning construction if layout is not specifically shown on the Drawings.

7. Edge Moldings and Trim: Install type indicated at perimeter of ceiling area at walls, soffits, other vertical planes, and edges of panels. a. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than

3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

b. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

8. Exposed Perimeter Edge Fascia: Install vertical perimeter edge fascia type indicated at

perimeter of ceiling area to conceal edges of ceiling panel and suspension grid where ceiling is NOT in contact with vertical plane. a. Attach perimeter fascia to suspension grid with manufacturer's recommended clips

and angles. Mechanically attach clips or angles to suspension grid with manufacturer's recommended fasteners.

b. Splice sections of perimeter edge fascia together with splice plates provided by manufacturer.

c. Leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". d. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and fascia.

C. Lay-In Panels

1. Install lay-in panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.

2. Where tegular edges have been field cut, paint cut edges of panels remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

3. Hold-Down Clips a. Standard Hold-Down Clips: Space clips 24" o.c. on all cross tees, unless otherwise

required by panel manufacturer, or required by code. Provide hold-down clips at the following locations: 1) For lay-in ceiling units weighing less than one lb. per sq. ft. 2) For units within a 20 foot radius of doors to the exterior of the building without

vestibules. 3) For units in the Vestibules, all Toilet Rooms, 4) Provide hold-down clips for single panels where lights, speakers, cameras,

enunciations, strobes and electrical items are located at ACP-____.




A. Adjust hanger lengths if necessary to correct deflections caused by installation of panels light fixtures, and other equipment in plenum following original leveling of grid system.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings, including panels trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.

C. Remove panels and grid which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, and replace with new units to match adjacent undamaged components.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 09 65 13 - 1 Addendum No. 02 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES


A. Section Includes 1. Resilient base (RB) 2. Resilient flooring transition accessories (RTS) 3. Leveling/patching compound and adhesives


A. Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring B. Section 09 68 00 - Carpeting

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM F710-11, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient

Flooring 2. ASTM F1861-08 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 3. ASTM F1869-11, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of

Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 4. ASTM F2170-11, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete

Slabs Using in-situ Probes 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, and the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders: 1. Prebid Submittals

a. The Architect has created a color scheme for this Project, which has been approved by the Owner.

b. Alternative products may be submitted for prior approval with the understanding that the predetermined color scheme will not be compromised.

c. Prior approval submissions must be accompanied by an actual sample of representative size to determine if it is acceptable; full size samples are encouraged.

d. Those products approved for bidding will be indicated in an Addendum.

B. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description, installation and maintenance

instructions. 2. Samples, in colors and textures specified:

a. One full size base 2" wide, in each color and style specified. b. One 3" length of each style transition and reducer strip in colors selected. c. One 12" length of each style stair tread and riser in colors selected. d. One 8" x 8" piece of stair landing materials in each pattern and color specified.

3. Test Reports: Results of field moisture, calcium chloride or alkalinity tests.



09 65 13 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Addendum No. 02

A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient base and accessories, produced by a single

manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants and leveling compounds unless otherwise specified.

B. Installer: Authorized or otherwise approved by the manufacturer to install specified materials. Provide a list of projects of similar magnitude and complexity, completed within the last 5 years, if requested by the Architect.

C. Mock-ups 1. Rubber Base Corners

a. Prior to installing vinyl base, if site-formed corners are specified or allowed, demonstrate method of forming inside and outside corners, and installer’s ability to form corners without discoloration.

b. Do not proceed with installation until corner construction has been reviewed and approved by the Architect.

1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's undamaged condition packages with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.

B. Store materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before installing materials.

C. Immediately removed from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined.


A. Environmental Conditions 1. Install resilient base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed. 2. In spaces to receive resilient base and accessory materials maintain a minimum

temperature of 70 degrees F., nor more than 90 degrees F. Maintain temperature during entire installation of resilient materials, and for not less than 48 hours after installation.

3. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. in areas where work is completed.

4. When solvent-based adhesives are used, the space shall be ventilated. Use spark-proof fans if natural ventilation is inadequate. Prohibit smoking.


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Div. of Burke Industries, Inc. 2. Flexco Corp. 3. Johnsonite, Inc. 4. Roppe, Inc. 5. Vinyl Plastics, Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic) Group II (layered). 1. Style: Straight and coved set-on base. 2. Size: 1/8" gage 3. Coil stock only is allowed, NO 4 ft. cut lengths. 4. Corner Construction: Site formed



5. Finish: Matte. 6. Colors: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s Standard range. 7. RB-1: Height = 4” 8. RB-2: Height = 6”

B. Transition and Reducer Strips (RTS-__ ): Solid rubber type for rubber flooring, vinyl type for vinyl

flooring, complying with ASTM E648 Class 1 Flammability requirements. As a basis-of-design Johnsonite products and item numbers are specified. 1. Provide RTS-___ profiles as indicated on Drawings or specified, or if not indicated,

selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of available shapes for the various flooring conditions, but not less than the following: a. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) Transitions

1) RTS-3: VCT to Concrete: a) SSR-29-B

2) RTS-2: VCT to CPT a) CTA-29-A

b. Carpet (CPT) Transitions

1) RTS-1: CPT to Concrete a) CTA-29-J

2) RTS-4: CPT to CPT

a) CTA-29-M

2. Unless otherwise shown, all floor coverings shall terminate or join adjacent floor coverings or terminate with these products.

3. Colors: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Colors: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

C. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. D. Adhesive: Water and alkali resistant, complying with recommendations of the resilient materials

manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


3.02 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Do NOT commence resilient floor and accessory installation work until: 1. Surfaces to receive resilient materials have been determined to meet the minimum

requirements of the manufacturer of the products; 2. All items that go through the flooring have been installed, and; 3. Installer has determined that chemical treatments used for curing concrete or for stripping

existing adhesives will not interfere with the successful application of the flooring materials.

B. Verify that finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 for slabs receiving resilient flooring.



C. Before installing resilient flooring, test concrete floors for excessive moisture, calcium chloride or alkalinity in accordance with one of the following methods: 1. Do NOT perform tests until working environment within the room or space is approximately

the same as the flooring will encounter when the room or space is enclosed and the air is conditioned.

2. Excessive Moisture Content: Test concrete floors for excessive moisture in accordance with ASTM F1869 - Calcium Chloride. Test concrete floors with flooring manufacturer's calcium chloride testing kit, follow instructions included in kit. a. Do not install flooring if maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate exceeds 5.0 lbs of

water per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours, unless otherwise recommended by the floor covering manufacturer.

b. Perform at least one test for each concrete pour made, which is to receive floor covering, but not less than one test for every 500 sq. ff. of flooring to be covered.

3. Excessive Moisture Content: Test concrete floors for excessive moisture in accordance

with ASTM F2170. a. Do not install flooring if maximum relative humidity exceeds 80 percent, unless

otherwise acceptable to the flooring manufacturer.

4. Alkalinity: Test floors for alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710. A pH range of 7 to 9 is satisfactory. Perform corrective procedures in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer‘s recommendations for test results which show a pH level above 8.

5. On installations where 2 or all 3 tests are conducted, results for 2 or all 3 tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation 1. If moisture vapor and calcium chloride/alkalinity rates are higher than allowed by flooring

manufacture, apply the moisture vapor and calcium chloride/alkalinity control system in accordance with the control system manufacturer. a. Contractor's Option: Install moisture vapor and calcium chloride/alkalinity control

system without performing concrete subfloor testing.

B. Install resilient base and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise specified.

C. Mix and apply adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Cover surface evenly. Maximum working area shall not be exceeded. Install base within time limits recommended. If adhesive films over, or dries, remove the adhesive and recoat the area.

D. Base Installation 1. Firmly adhere resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent

bases as scheduled. Use longest lengths practical. Scribe bases accurately to abutting surfaces.

2. Site-Formed Corners: Mock-up required for Architect approval.

a. Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

3. Factory Preformed Corners (Optional): Install preformed corners before installing straight

pieces.

4. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

5. Remove excessive adhesive in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions.

E. Transition Accessories Installations



1. Install resilient flooring accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise specified.

2. Coordinate installation of transition strips with the installer of other finished flooring products.

3. Install reducer strips at terminations of finish flooring where substrate is exposed and extends beyond.

4. Remove excessive adhesive in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean base, and transition accessories not less than 4 days after being installed. Wash thoroughly, with a cleaner recommended by the base manufacturer and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION





Construction Documents BP-3 09 65 19 - 1 Addendum No. 02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING


A. Section Includes 1. Vinyl tile. 2. Leveling/patching compound, adhesives, and wax.


A. Section 01 22 00 - Unit Prices B. Section 09 05 61.13 - Moisture Vapor Emission Control C. Section 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories D. Section 09 68 00 - Carpeting

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM F710-11, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient

Flooring 2. ASTM F1066-04(2010)e1, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile 3. ASTM F1869-11, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of


Slabs Using in-situ Probes 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-Bid Prior Approval Substitution Request Submittals: Submit for prior approvals in accordance with the Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures and the following: 1. The Architect has created a color scheme for this Project, which has been approved by the

Owner. 2. Alternative products may be submitted for prior approval with the understanding that the

predetermined color scheme will not be compromised. 3. Prior approval submissions must be accompanied by an actual sample of representative

size to determine if it is acceptable; full size samples are encouraged. 4. Those products approved for bidding will be indicated in an Addendum.


1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description, installation and maintenance instructions.

2. Samples: Not less than 4 full size tiles in colors selected or specified. 3. Test Reports: Results of field moisture, calcium chloride or alkalinity tests. 4. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's intended warranties for this Project, stating

obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

C. Submit in accordance with Section 01 7710: 1. Warranty: Manufacturer's fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and



09 65 19 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Addendum No. 02


A. Furnish Owner with the following minimum quantities of flooring and accessories: 1. Vinyl Tile Flooring: One full unopened box of additional vinyl tile type used on the Project

over and above the amount installed. 2. Wax: One full unopened container of static dissipative tile wax used on the Project over

and above the amount installed.

B. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store where directed in the building.


A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants and leveling compounds unless otherwise specified.

B. Installer: Authorized or otherwise approved by the manufacturer to install specified materials. Provide a list of projects of similar magnitude and complexity, completed within the last 5 years, if requested by the Architect.

1.07 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's undamaged condition packages with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.

B. Store materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before installing materials.

C. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined.


A. Environmental Conditions 1. Install resilient flooring materials after other finishing operations, including painting, have

been completed. 2. In spaces to receive resilient materials maintain a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F.,

nor more than 90 degrees F. Maintain temperature during entire installation of resilient materials, and for not less than 48 hours after installation.

3. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. in areas where work is completed.

4. When solvent-based adhesives are used, the space shall be ventilated. Use spark-proof fans if natural ventilation is inadequate. Prohibit smoking.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Contractor: Warrant Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) flooring to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except extend warranty by manufacturer's 10-year written warranty against defects in materials and "wear through". 1. Provide warranty on manufacturer's preprinted letterhead and signed by an officer of the

manufacturer authorized to sign warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design: For basis-of-design and reference purposes Excelon Vinyl Composition Tile by Armstrong are specified.



1. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products available from the following manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work upon receipt of prior approval for their products by the Architect when a substitution request is submitted during the Bidding Phase in accordance with Document 00 2100 - Instructions to Bidders and Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures including manufacturer's product literature, installation requirements, and a product sample. a. "Excelon Tile Series, Imperial Texture", (Armstrong World Industries, Inc.) b. "Expressions", (Tarkett, Inc.). c. "Premium Resilient Tile", (VPI Corporation)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Vinyl Composition Tile Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Type: Vinyl Composition 1, Class 2, Duravinyl complying with ASTM F1066. 2. Surface Texture: Type A, smooth surface 3. Size: 12" x 12" x 1/8" 4. Products: Excellon VCT 5. Colors: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. 5. Colors: See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Adhesive: VOC-compliant, water and alkali resistant, complying with recommendations of resilient flooring manufacturer.

D. Wax: Vinyl flooring manufacturer's recommended Commercial Grade acrylic polish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


3.02 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Do NOT commence resilient floor installation work until: 1. Surfaces to receive resilient materials have been determined to meet the minimum

requirements of the manufacturer of the products; 2. All items that go through the flooring have been installed, and; 3. Installer has determined that chemical treatments used for curing concrete or for stripping

existing adhesives will not interfere with the successful application of the flooring materials.

B. Verify that finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 for slabs receiving resilient flooring.

C. Before installing resilient flooring, test concrete floors for excessive moisture, calcium chloride or alkalinity in accordance with one of the following methods: 1. Do NOT perform tests until working environment within the room or space is approximately

the same as the flooring will encounter when the room or space is enclosed and the air is conditioned.

2. Excessive Moisture Content: Test concrete floors for excessive moisture in accordance with ASTM F1869 - Calcium Chloride. Test concrete floors with flooring manufacturer's calcium chloride testing kit, follow instructions included in kit.



a. Do not install flooring if maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate exceeds 5.0 lbs of water per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours, unless otherwise recommended by the floor covering manufacturer.

b. Perform at least one test for each concrete pour made, which is to receive floor covering, but not less than one test for every 500 sq. ff. of flooring to be covered.

3. Excessive Moisture Content: Test concrete floors for excessive moisture in accordance

with ASTM F2170. a. Do not install flooring if maximum relative humidity exceeds 80 percent, unless

otherwise acceptable to the flooring manufacturer.

4. Alkalinity: Test floors for alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710. A pH range of 7 to 9 is satisfactory. Perform corrective procedures in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer‘s recommendations for test results which show a pH level above 8.

5. On installations where 2 or all 3 tests are conducted, results for 2 or all 3 tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above.

3.04 PREPARATION

A. Provide surfaces to receive resilient flooring meeting the minimum requirements of the manufacturer of the flooring.

B. Do not begin resilient flooring work until all items that go through the flooring have been installed. C. Do not begin resilient flooring installation until installer has determined that the chemical

treatment on substrates will not interfere with the successful application of the flooring materials. D. Spaces in which resilient flooring is being installed shall be closed to traffic and other work. E. Before installing resilient flooring, fill cracks and holes, and level depressions with underlayment

compound. 1. Surfaces Deviation: Not more than 3/16" in 10 feet in any dimension.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation 1. If moisture vapor and calcium chloride/alkalinity rates are higher than allowed by flooring

manufacture, apply the moisture vapor and calcium chloride/alkalinity control system in accordance with the control system manufacturer. a. Contractor's Option: Install moisture vapor and calcium chloride/alkalinity control

system without performing concrete subfloor testing.

B. Install resilient flooring in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise specified.

C. Mix and apply adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Cover surface evenly. Maximum working area shall not be exceeded. Install flooring within time limits recommended. If adhesive films over, or dries, remove the adhesive and recoat the area.

D. Lay flooring so that fields or patterns center on areas. Adjust pattern so that edge pieces are not less than one half tile (vinyl composition tile). Lay flooring true to line, level, and with tight joints. Cut flooring to and around all permanent cabinets and bases. Roll flooring to assure intimate contact and proper adhesion to substrate. 1. Layout (Pattern): Checkerboard, unless otherwise shown.

E. Coordinate installation of base, transition strips, and other accessories with Section 09 65 13,

and other finished flooring products. F. Remove excessive adhesive in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions.




A. Not less than 4 days after flooring installation, clean the resilient flooring. Wash thoroughly, with a cleaner recommended by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply 3 coats of specified wax. Factory finish wax application shall constitute first coat if tile is so provided. Machine buff each coat.

END OF SECTION





Construction Documents BP-3 09 68 00 - 1 Addendum No. 02 CARPETING

SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING


A. Section Includes 1. Carpet (CPT-___ ) 2. Installation accessories


A. Section 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories: For transition and reducer strips. B. Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Tile Flooring: For transition and reducer strips.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM E648-09a, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2. ASTM E662-09, Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by

Solid Materials 3. ASTM F710-11, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient

Flooring 4. ASTM F1869-11, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of


Slabs Using in-situ Probes

B. The Carpet & Rug Institute (CRI) 1. CRI 104-02, Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet


A. Preinstallation Conference 1. Construction Manager



2. Required attendance unless otherwise indicated, includes Construction Manager, installer, manufacturers' representatives, and other entities concerned with carpeting performance, Architect, Owner's representative and Owner's insurance representative at Owner's discretion.

3. Perform thorough review of methods and procedures related to carpet installation specified herein, and warranties.

4. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed.


NEW HOPE, MN

09 68 00 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 CARPETING Addendum No. 02

5. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work, and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.


trades. 8. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. 9. Review notification procedures for non-working days. 10. Review observation, protection and repair procedures after installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: For each carpet specified; show the following:

a. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet.

b. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. c. Locations where dye lot changes occur. d. Seam locations, types, and methods. e. Type of subfloor. f. Type of installation. g. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. h. Pile direction. i. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. j. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. k. Transition details to other flooring materials. l. Type of carpet cushion.

3. Samples

a. Carpet: 12" square or larger piece of each carpet specified. b. Carpet Seam: 6" sample.

4. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that carpet materials furnished

comply with specified requirements.

B. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 7710: 1. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

a. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

b. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion.

2. Warranties

a. Manufacturer's fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty and date of Substantial Completion.

1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTAL

A. Furnish Owner at least 1 percent of additional carpet of each type and color used on the Project over and above the quantity installed.

B. Package carpet with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. C. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store where directed in

the building.



1. Carpet Tile: Provide one full unopened carton and all partially opened cartons. Collect and organize all opened cartons and carpet tiles into as few cartons as possible. Provide only full-size tiles in the opened cartons.

2. Broadloom: Provide one additional length of broadloom carpet equal to the cut width of the broadloom installed by 12 feet long. Allow sufficient width for cutting and seaming equal to the width installed for future installation.


A. Installer: Engage a carpet installation firm, which has at least 5 years successful experience in carpet installations similar in size and type to the carpeting requirements of this Project, and authorized or otherwise approved by the carpet manufacturer to install specified materials, using carpet manufacturer‘s recommended adhesives and seam sealer.


A. Deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags attached. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling.

B. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when determined.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity, and with Section 7.12, Ventilation. 1. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet and carpet cushion until wet work in

spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

2. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

1.10 WARRANTIES

A. Contractor: Warrant carpeting and cushion to be free of faults and defects in accordance with General Conditions, except extend warranty by carpet and cushion manufacturer's standard warranties defined in Article 2. Provide warranty in writing and signed by the carpet and cushion manufacturers.


A. Carpet (CPT-1) 1. Manufacturer: J & J 2. Product: Carpet Tile 3. Design: Zenith 7716 Modular 4. Color: 2566 POWER (Royal Blue main color, Black & Gray) 5. Install: Ashlar 6. Location: Auditorium aisles, half length of aisles – closest to stage

B. Carpet (CPT-2)

1. Manufacturer: J & J 2. Product: Carpet Tile 3. Design: Zenith 7716 Modular


NEW HOPE, MN


4. Color: 2564 AMP (Black & Gray, Steel Blue accent) 5. Install: Ashlar 6. Location: Auditorium aisles, half length of aisles – closest to entry doors

C. Carpet (CPT-3)

1. Manufacturer: Boyou 2. Product: Broadloom 3. Style: Rush Hour 4. Color: RHR06, Merging Traffic (Gray / Blue)

D. Carpet (CPT-M-1) 1. Manufacturer: Milliken 2. Product: Carpet Tile - Walk Off 50cm x 50cm 3. Design: Quadrus Phase PHA5-27-173 Boundary 4. Color: (Gray / Black) 5. Install: Monolithic 6. Location: Vestibule

6. See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Product selections

D. Carpet (CPT-M-2)

1. See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Product selections

E. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant, nonstaining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet.

F. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. This is a requirement not an option unless it adversely affects the warranty.

G. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by carpet manufacturer for applications indicated.

H. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, and other carpeting products; and selected by installer to meet project circumstance and requirements.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Surfaces to receive carpet shall meet the minimum requirements of the manufacturer of the carpet.

C. Testing Concrete Floors for Moisture and Alkalinity 1. No floor coverings shall be installed until it has been determined that the chemical

treatment on substrates will not interfere with the successful application of the flooring materials.

2. Before installing floor coverings, test concrete floors for excessive moisture in accordance with ASTM F1869. Do not perform tests until working environment within the room or space is approximately the same as the flooring will encounter when the room or space is enclosed and the air is conditioned.

3. Test floors with flooring manufacturer's calcium chloride testing kit. Follow instructions included in kit.



a. Do not proceed with the installation, if maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate exceeds 3.0 lbs of water/1000 sf/24 hours, unless otherwise recommended by the floor covering manufacturer.

b. Perform at least one test for each concrete pour made, which is to receive floor covering, but not less than one test for every 500 sf of flooring to be covered.

4. Test floors for alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710. A pH range of 6 to 8 is

satisfactory. Perform corrective procedures in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer‘s recommendations for test results which show a pH level above 8.

D. Verify that finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpeting. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Subfloors shall be level and free of irregularities. Irregularities in the subfloor height shall be gradually raised with troweled underlayment.

B. Where carpet meets other applied floor finishes and joiner or transition strips are not shown, gradually raise floor heights with troweled underlayment to produce level transition.

C. Just prior to installation of carpeting, subfloors shall be dry, free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits or concrete treatment that may interfere with adhesion of carpeting.

D. Just prior to installation of carpeting, subfloors shall be dry, and free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. F. Measure each space to receive carpeting, as a basis of supplying, cutting and seaming the

carpet. Do not scale the Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions shown. G. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations for installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install carpeting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, Direct Glue-Down

Installation. 2. Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, Double Glue-Down

Installation. 3. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11,

Attached-Cushion Installations. 4. Preapplied Adhesive Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11.4, Pre-Applied

Adhesive Systems (Peel and Stick). 5. Carpet Tiles: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, Carpet Modules.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam

locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. 1. Install carpet wall to wall, using continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible to

minimize the placement of seams in traffic lanes. Hold cross seams to an absolute minimum. Make all seams so the pile of the adjoining pieces have the same directional run to be practically invisible.

2. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, Patterned Carpet Installations, and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Run under open bottom items such as heating convectors, and install tightly against walls, and bases so that all portions of the floor are covered in each room.

E. Install around all floor outlets or similar obstructions. Extend carpeting into alcoves and recesses adjoining areas to be carpeted.


NEW HOPE, MN


F. On completion the carpet shall be free of wrinkles and buckles; seams and cross-joints shall be straight, close and well made.

G. Coordinate installation of transition and reducer strips with the installers of adjacent finish flooring materials.


A. Rubbish, wrapping paper, and salvages shall be removed from the Project site. Excess pieces of usable carpet shall be left with the Owner for future repairs.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner

recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

C. At the completion of the Work when directed by the Owner, the protective covering specified in

Article 3.05 shall be removed, the carpeting vacuum cleaned and soiling removed to the satisfaction of the Owner.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Carpeting shall be adequately covered and protected against damage of any kind during the remainder of the construction period, and until acceptance by Owner.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, Protection of Indoor Installations. C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and

fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer

D. Damaged carpeting will be rejected and shall be replaced with new carpet at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 09 84 14 - 1 Addendum No. 02 ACOUSTIC STRETCH FABRIC SYSTEMS

SECTION 09 84 14 ACOUSTIC STRETCH FABRIC SYSTEMS


A. Section Includes 1. Stretched fabric acoustic wall panel and ceiling panel systems (AWP-___ ) 2. Fabric facings (FAB -___ ) 3. Framework mounting extrusions 4. Core materials


A. Section 09 01 20.91 – Plaster Repair B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C423-09a, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption

Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method 2. ASTM E84-13a, Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 3. ASTM E2573-12, Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Site-Fabricated Stretch Systems

to Assess Surface Building Characteristics 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Conference 1. Contractor



2. Required attendance unless otherwise indicated, includes Contractor, installer,

manufacturers' representatives, and other entities concerned with stretch fabric system performance, Architect, Owner's representative, and Owner's insurance representative at Owner's discretion.

3. Perform thorough review of methods and procedures related to installation specified herein, and warranties.

4. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work, and verify availability of

materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.


trades.


09 84 14 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 ACOUSTIC STRETCH FABRIC SYSTEMS Addendum No. 02

8. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. 9. Review notification procedures for non-working days. 10. Review observation, protection and repair procedures after installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, and the Document 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures: 1. Prebid Submittals

a. The Architect has created a color scheme for this Project, which has been approved by the Owner.

b. Alternative products may be submitted for prior approval with the understanding that the predetermined color scheme will not be compromised.

c. Prior approval submissions must be accompanied by an actual sample of representative size to determine if it is acceptable; full size samples are encouraged.

d. Those products approved for bidding will be indicated in an Addendum.

B. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's materials description, installation, and maintenance

instructions. 2. Shop Drawings

a. Submit showing general layout, jointing, anchoring sizes and types, shapes, thickness, and other similar detailed information necessary to fully describe installation.

b. Indicate locations of seams, methods of joining seams, direction of fabric, and notations as to where dye lot changes occur, if any.

c. Make shop drawing of sufficient detail and scale to determine compliance with design intent. Scales shall generally be as follows: 1) Key Plans: 1/8" = 1'-0" 2) Elevations: 1/2" = 1'-0" 3) Plan Sections: 3" = 1'-0" 4) Details: Full size or 3" = 1'-0"

3. Samples: Submit 4 samples each of the following:

a. 4" long mounting extrusions b. 4" x 4" fabric facings c. 4" x 4" core materials

4. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that materials furnished comply

with specified requirements. 1.05 EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS

A. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver to Project site not less than 10 percent of each type, color, and pattern of fabrics installed, clearly marked and wrapped for protection. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed.


A. Installer: A firm specializing in stretch fabric systems, trained, qualified, and authorized by manufacturer, and with not less than 3 years of successful experiences in installing specified systems and employing mechanics with a minimum of 2 years documented experience.

B. Single Source Responsibility 1. To greatest extent possible, materials shall be products of a single manufacturer or items

standard with manufacturer of stretched fabric panel system. 2. Provide secondary materials which are produced, or are specifically recommended by

stretched fabric panel system manufacturer to ensure compatibility.



C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide stretch fabric wall and ceiling assemblies that

meets mandatory mounting requirements of ASTM E2573, and with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products installed to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Field Sample Panels: Install 2 sample panels of full usable width, including 1 (one) corner, in

areas designated by Architect. Replace panels which are not acceptable to Architect until satisfactory installation is achieved.


A. Store fabric in undamaged condition as packaged by the manufacturer, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Do not store fabric in an upright position on it ends or under other materials.

B. Provide storage area clean, dry, and maintained at a temperature above 40 degrees F. with normal humidity. Protect fabrics from soil, humidity, and wet areas. Cover fabrics with protections that allow air circulation.

C. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stretch fabric systems until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Maintain temperature of 70 degrees F. in area to receive wall covering measured at base elevation, and maintain temperature for 72 hours before, during and 48 hours after the application.

C. Provide illumination levels of not less than 80 foot-candles measured at mid-height of substrate surface. Project lighting.

D. Field Measurements 1. Verify field dimensions prior to fabrication and indicate these dimensions on shop

drawings. Contractor and installer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions.

2. Measure each wall area and establish layout of panels to balance at opposite edges of each wall.

3. Locate electrical receptacles, switch-boxes, and other similar devices which will be exposed in finished work.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Contractor: Warrant stretch fabric system installations to be free of faults and defects in accordance with General Conditions, except extend warranty by manufacturer's limited life type warranty if system is installed by manufacturer's Authorized Distributor or Certified Installer as follows: 1. Manufacturer will provide replacement extrusions that are deemed defective at no charge

to the Authorized Distributor or Certified Installer during the "useable life" of an installation. Manufacturer does not warranty against damage by others, normal wear and tear, the project installation, fabric or core materials which may have certain other manufacturer warranties.

2. Provide warranty in writing and signed by the manufacturers' office authorized to sign warranties.




A. Basis of Design: 1. Manufacturer: Novawall. 2. Acoustic Panel System (AWP-___ ) 3. Fabrics (Upholstery) (FAB-___ ) 4. Square and hardened edges with 1” brushed stainless steel J-trim on all exposed edges.

B. Acoustical Core Material: Semi-rigid fiberglass board, 6 pcf density.

1. Thickness: 1" nominal except where noted 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.80 minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM C423

Type A Mounting.

C. Panels: 1. AWP-1: 1” thick acoustic panel, hardened square edges, with brushed stainless steel

‘J’ trim on all exposed edges. Acoustical Fabric FAB-1. 2. AWP-2: 1” thick acoustic panel, hardened square edges, with brushed stainless steel

‘J’ trim on all exposed edges. Acoustical Fabric FAB-2. 3. AWP-3: Thickness of acoustical panel to match adjacent existing Face Brick,

hardened square edges, with full depth brushed stainless steel ‘J’ trim on all exposed edges. Acoustical Fabric FAB-1.

D. Fabric: 1. FAB-1:

a. Manufacturer / Product: Carnegie, Xorel Meteor 6427 b. Width: 52” c. Weight: 16 oz. d. Flame Spread: Class A e. Backing: X-Protect Wall f. Warranty: 10 years g. Color: To be determined

a. See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Product selection

2. FAB-2.

a. Manufacturer / Product: Carnegie, Xorel Meteor 6427 b. Width: 52” c. Weight: 16 oz. d. Flame Spread: Class A e. Backing: X-Protect Wall f. Warranty: 10 years g. Color: To be determined

a. See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Product selection






B. Other work that penetrates the substrate shall be completed before beginning wall covering installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove fabrics from its packaging and allow to acclimate to the area of installation 24 hours before application.

B. Coordinate installation with other hardware, electrical switches and outlets, and surface-mounted fixtures in areas where wall covering is to be applied.

C. Gypsum Wall Board 1. Repair gypsum wallboard substrate by depressing exposed nails and screws, fill cracks

and holes with joint compound, or spackle. 2. Moisture content of less than 5 percent, verified by moisture meter.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Butt panel edges with adjacent finishes or surfaces or to conform to adjacent joint

conditions without reveals or gaps unless required by design. 2. Fully cover visible surfaces and make free from wrinkles, sags, blisters, and foreign matter. 3. Install fabric with panel joints tight, straight, true, plumb, and in proper relation to building

lines without ripples, waviness, and "hourglass" effects. 4. Do not seam fabric by sewing.

B. Framework

1. Install framework in strict compliance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install framework around perimeter of each panel area. To greatest extent possible,

install members in continuous lengths. 3. Install framework shimmed, plumbed, and scribed to align with adjacent surfaces. Attach

in a manner to prevent sagging or moving out of position after fabric has been stretched tightly. Do not install framework members so that fabric will telescope through.

4. Secure framework to wall surface using manufacturer's recommended fasteners and at spacing recommended.

5. Install framework flush with face of panel around outlet boxes, duplex receptacles, thermostats, etc., which may occur within fabric panel area.

C. Core Material

1. Install materials in a continuous manner, flush, level and tight with framework. 2. Install materials using a suitable method of mechanical fastening. 3. Do not use adhesives when installing core materials to substrate.

D. Fabric Facing Materials

1. Cut fabric from each roll maintaining sequence of drops and matching direction of weave for sequential and uniform installation.

2. Install fabric with warp and weft threads plumb, level, and true. Patterns, textures, and grain of fabric shall be aligned and matched at seams. Throughout entire seam, join wall panels without distortion to geometry of fabric or pattern.

3. Stretch, re-stretch, and tension fabric over framework and left to atmospherically cure for a minimum of 24 hours between stretchings until sufficiently taught to avoid sagging under varying year-round temperature and humidity conditions.

4. Install fabric stretched taut so as not to puddle or dent when touched or leaned upon. Fabric shall be self-healing when pushed, punched, or hit, and shall revert back to original finished condition.



5. Apply fabric securely to grounds using a hand tool appropriate for joint condition and nature of fabric. Do not nail,, tack, staple, or glue fabrics. Ensure that fabric surface is free of wrinkles and that weave is plumb and straight and properly aligned horizontally and vertically.

6. Fabric shall be installed as butt joined panels on walls as indicated on Drawings, with reveals.

E. Maximum Allowable Installation Tolerances

1. Maximum variation of panels from true location shall be +/- 1/8". 2. Maximum variation of surfaces intended to be flush shall be +/- 1/16". 3. Maximum variation of reveal width shall be +/- 1/16".


A. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from wall covering installation and leave areas of work in a neat, clean condition.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of wall fabric. Trim and remove loose threads. 3.05 PROTECTION

A. Cover fabric installation with new, clean vinyl sheeting until Substantial Completion and acceptable to Owner.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 09 91 00 - 1 Addendum No. 02 PAINTING

SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING

This specification Section is issued in its entirety as a revised specification section to the Construction Documents BP-3 for this Project via Addendum No. 02. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Painting interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces shown and otherwise scheduled

to be painted. 2. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified in addition to shop-priming and

surface treatments specified under other Sections of the Work. 3. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of

hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanical and electrical work in paint finished spaces.

4. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field-applied finish work: a. Shop priming specified in other Sections. b. Mechanical and electrical work except exposed in painted spaces. c. Prefinished items d. Finished metal surfaces e. Operating parts and labels f. Copper, brass, bronze, aluminum, stainless steel and other nonferrous metals. g. Face brick, ceramic tile, structural glazed units, stones, marble and other similar

items. h. Work identified in Article 1.02 below.

5. Touch-up and restoration of damaged and defaced painted surfaces.


A. Division 21 - Fire Suppression B. Division 22 - Plumbing C. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) D. Division 25 - Integrated Automation E. Division 26 - Electrical F. Division 27 - Communications G. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security H. Section 32 17 00 - Pavement Markings: Bituminous striping

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 1. EPA 40 CFR Part 59, National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings

B. Factory Mutual Global (FMG) C. Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): PDCA Industry Standards 2013. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1.04 DEFINITIONS


NEW HOPE, MN

09 91 00 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 PAINTING Addendum No. 02

A. "Paint" as used herein means coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and product data including the following:

a. Product characteristics b. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations c. Primer requirements and finish specification d. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations e. Application methods f. Cleanup Information g. VOC content

2. Schedule: Clearly indicate surfaces to be painted, paint manufacturer and names of

products to be used. Submit in the same format and order specified in Article 3.07 PAINT SCHEDULES. Schedules not submitted in this format will be returned, "REJECTED".

3. Certifications a. Furnish a letter from the paint manufacturer or their factory representative certifying

that the paint systems proposed for this Project are equal to or better than the specified systems in appearance and performance levels. Submittals not accompanied by this certification will be returned, "REJECTED".

b. Furnish a letter from the paint manufacturer or their factory representative certifying that the paint systems proposed for this Project meet the current requirements of EPA 40 CFR Part 59, National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. Submittals not accompanied by this certification will be returned, "REJECTED".

4. Samples

a. 8-1/2" x 11" "draw-downs" for surfaces to be painted, clearly labeled identifying color and sheen.

b. 1" x 3" x 6" long or larger wood samples for stained and natural finishes, applied to wood of the species specified.


A. Extra stock is not required for this Project, however all partially used containers of paint as well as unopened containers of paint, shall be presented to the Owner at the completion of the Project and stored in the building at the Owner's direction unless otherwise requested by the Owner.


A. Conform to the recommendations of the PDCA Industry Standards 2013 for the work, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. 1. Each product container shall bear manufacturer's legible label indicating manufacturer's

name, type of material, product number, batch number, color, and instructions for reducing where applicable.

2. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will NOT be acceptable.

C. Applied paints and coatings shall meet the current requirements of EPA 40 CFR Part 59, National

Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings.



D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

E. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Architect, in writing, of anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

F. Proprietary names used to designate colors of materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent or better products of other manufacturers.

G. No claims as to the suitability of materials specified, or the applicator's inability to produce first class finishes with these materials will be considered unless such claims are made in writing prior to the start of the painting work.


A. Deliver painting materials and products to the Project site in manufacturer's original containers, with product labels intact, clearly marked with proper identification with manufacturer's name, equipment type, model numbers. 1. Product Labels: Each product container shall bear manufacturer's legible label indicating

manufacturer's name, type of material, product number, batch number, color, and instructions for reducing where applicable.

B. Store painting materials and products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above

ground, and protected from weather, construction activities, and other causes of damage. C. Handle painting materials and products at the Project site in accordance with manufacturer's

requirements to prevent damage. D. Immediately remove from the Project site damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials and

products when determined and replace with new at no additional cost to the Owner. Do not incorporate damaged or otherwise unsuitable materials and products into the Project.


A. Do not apply finishes in rain, snow, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. B. Apply finishes, other than water-thinned coatings, only to surfaces that are completely free of

surface moisture as determined by sight or touch, or as otherwise required by coating manufacturer.

C. Do not apply finishes when the temperature of the surfaces to be painted and of the surrounding atmosphere is below 50 degrees F. for other coatings, or when the temperature is expected to drop to 32 degrees F.

D. Do not continue painting during inclement weather, unless areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable brands of best quality grade paints, stains, varnishes, sealers and coatings equal or better than those scheduled herein are acceptable as follows: 1. General Coatings

a. Benjamin Moore and Co. b. Devoe & Raynolds Co.


NEW HOPE, MN


c. Diamond Vogel d. Glidden Professional e. Hirshfield's, Inc. f. ICI Paint Stores g. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints h. Pratt & Lambert (P & L) i. The Sherwin-Williams Co.

2. Stains and Sealers

a. Coating manufacturers listed in Subparagraph 2.01.A.1 (wood stain). b. Samuel Cabot Inc. (wood stain) c. Olympic Stain, A Product of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (wood stain)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide materials, brushes, tools, ladders, scaffolds, and other equipment kind necessary for the proper execution of each type of work.

B. Materials used on this part of the Work shall be as specified in Article 3.07 PAINT SCHEDULES. C. Materials such as linseed oil, turpentine, and mineral spirits, shall be pure and of highest quality.

2.03 COLORS

A. Prior to beginning work, obtain approval of colors for surfaces to be painted. Each coat of paint shall be slightly lighter or darker than the preceding coat. Colors may not necessarily be the manufacturer's standard colors.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. General 1. Remove and protect hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items, before painting. Protect

finished surfaces in areas where paint is being applied, with clean drop cloths and suitable masking.

2. Clean surfaces to be finished as required to remove oil grease, dust and dirt, or other substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Sand or mechanically prep where necessary to properly prepare surfaces to receive finish.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified herein. 1. For Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete and concrete

block by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing

appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.



2. For Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized, and not

shopcoated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

3. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent.

4. For Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. a. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to

job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including interior millwork and trim.

b. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming. c. Seal factory cut-outs of wood veneered and plastic laminate faced wood doors, with

a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer (pigmented to be easily identifiable) immediately upon delivery to job.

5. For Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: Fill scratches, nicks and uneven areas with joint

compound or spackle, and sand flush with the surface. 6. For Existing Surfaces: Clean thoroughly to remove loose, scaley, and other defective film.

Fill holes and cracks. Remove gloss from painted surfaces by washing and sanding, and touch up bare spots with appropriate primer.

C. Materials

1. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in

storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

3. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the Paint Schedule, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items and surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials and areas. If color and finish is not designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified.

B. Apply paint evenly and smoothly without runs, sags, brush marks, laps, streaks, unfinished patches and other blemishes. The hiding shall be complete, and each coat shall be so applied to produce film of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to ensure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces.

C. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

D. Brush out flow on each coat as required by the characteristics of the materials or recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Priming coat shall be of suitable type for each surface and compatible in each case with the finish paint.

F. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying next coat.


NEW HOPE, MN


G. The priming coat on concrete block shall be tinted to the approximate shade of the final coat. Suction spots or "hot-spots" in concrete, evident after the application of the first coating shall be touched-up before applying the second coat, to produce an even result in the finish coat.

H. Properly prepare and touch-up scratches, abrasions and other disfigurements and remove foreign matter before proceeding with the following coat. Spot-priming or spot-coating shall be featheredged into adjacent coatings to produce a smooth and level surface.

I. Final coats shall not be applied before other trades whose operations would be detrimental to finish painting have finished with their work in the areas to be painted.

J. Fill nail holes with suitable filler. K. Finish recesses the same as adjoining rooms. Finish other surfaces the same as nearest or

adjoining surfaces unless otherwise shown. L. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only, before final installation of equipment.

M. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors. Temporarily remove door silencers from frames prior to painting. Replace door silencers after finish coats are dried.

N. If metal has been shop primed omit first coat, except for touch-up. Primer for touch-up shall be the same composition as shop primer.

O. Mechanical and Electrical Work 1. Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in occupied

spaces. 2. Paint exposed items, identical with room color, ceiling color or adjacent surfaces unless

specifically noted otherwise. 3. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports b. Heat exchangers c. Tanks d. Ductwork, insulation e. Motor, mechanical equipment and supports f. Accessory items

4. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Conduit and fittings b. Switchgear

5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers and grilles, with a flat,

non-specular black paint.

P. Do not paint over code-required labels, such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual Global (FMG), and over equipment identification, performance rating, name, and nomenclature plates.


A. Painted interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent in the completed work: 1. Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by

inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials ain paint coatings;

2. evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners and entrant angles;

3. damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause; 4. damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the

weather, and; 5. damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.).



B. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces. 1. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from

a distance of not less than 39"; 2. visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles

from a distance of not less than 39"; 3. visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit, and other overhead surfaces when viewed at

normal viewing angles, and; 4. when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture, and

hiding across full surface area.

C. Repairs 1. Touch-up painting is acceptable for small affected areas. 2. Repaint entire surface of large affected areas and areas without sufficient dry film thickness

(DFT). 3. Remove evidence of runs, sags, and other irregular paint film by scraper or sanding prior to

painting. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements, until such requirements are met.

B. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged and defaced painted surfaces. 1. Costs for this touch-up painting shall be charged to the trade responsible for such damage,

and at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Notify the Contractor immediately upon such discovery.

C. During the progress of the work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from

the Project site at the end of each work day. D. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces.

Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch and otherwise damage finished surfaces.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect work finished under this Section and the work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted surfaces. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

3.07 PAINT SCHEDULES

A. Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. B. Provide the following EXTERIOR paint systems and finishes for the various substrates indicated:

1. Bituminous/Concrete Paving and Curbs a. Refer to Section 32 17 00.

2. Concrete: 2 coats P & L Accolade Exterior Acrylic Latex, Eggshell 3. Concrete (Poured-in-Place Concrete, Precast Concrete, Tilt-Up Concrete, Cementitious

Siding, and Stucco) a. Latex

1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300 (8.0 mils wet, 3.2 dry)


NEW HOPE, MN


2) 2nd and 3rd Coats

a) Gloss Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat)

b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss, A76 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

d) Low Sheen Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen, A12 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

e) Flat Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry per coat)

4. Concrete Masonry (CMU - Smooth, Split Face, Scored, High / Low Density, Fluted)

a. Latex 1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 (75-125 sq. ft. per

gal.)

2) 2nd and 3rd Coats a) Gloss Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4.0 mils

wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss, A76 Series (4.0

mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4.0 mils

wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) d) Low Sheen Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen, A12 Series

(4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) e) Flat Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.2

mils dry per coat)

5. Ferrous Metal a. 1 coat P & L Steeltech Universal Alkyd HP Primer b. 2 coats P & L RedSeal Interior/Exterior Oil, Gloss

6. Ferrous Metals (Structural Steel, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications EXCEPT as otherwise

specified.) a. Latex or Acrylic Systems

1) Primer/Base/1st: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry)

2) 2nd and 3rd Coats a) Gloss Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4.0 mils

wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss, A76 Series (4.0

mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4.0 mils

wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) d) Low Sheen Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen, A12 Series

(4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) e) Flat Finish: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.2

mils dry per coat)

7. Galvanized Metal a. 1 coat P & L Steeltech Acrylic Prime or Finish b. 2 coats P & L RedSeal Interior/Exterior Oil, Gloss

8. Galvanized Ferrous Metals (Steel Elements, Metal Fabrications, Doors and Frames, etc.)



a. Latex or Acrylic Systems 1) Primer/Base/1st and 2nd Coats






9. Wood (Stained)

a. Semi-Transparent Finish 1) 1st and 2nd Coats: S-W WoodScapes Semi-Transparent Stain, A15T5

(100-350 sq. ft. per gal.)

b. Opaque (Solid) Finish 1) 1st and 2nd Coats: S-W WoodScapes Solid Color Stain, A15 Series

(200-400 sq. ft. per gal.); or 2) S-W ProMar Solid Color Stain, A16 Series (200-400 sq ft/gal)

10. Wood

a. 1 coat P & L Suprime Exterior Latex Wood Primer b. 2 coats P & L Accolade Exterior Acrylic Latex, Eggshell

11. Wood (Opaque)

a. Acrylic Latex Systems 1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041 (4.0

mils wet, 1.4 mils dry) 2) 2nd and 3rd Coats






C. Provide the following INTERIOR paint systems and finishes for the various substrates indicated.

Refer to ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE and / or INTERIOR ELEVATIONS for location of various systems and sheens specified.

1. Concrete (Cast-In-Place, Precast Concrete, and Plaster; Walls, Ceilings, Beams, Columns,

Planks, Tees, etc. EXCEPT Floors) a. Latex

1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300 (8.0 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry)


a) Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Gloss B21-2200 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)


NEW HOPE, MN


b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

d) Low Sheen Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Low Sheen Enamel, B24-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

e) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.8 mils dry per coat)

b. Epoxy (Water Base)

1) 1st and 2nd Coats a) Gloss Finish: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy Gloss, B70W211/

B60V15 (6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat) b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy Semi-Gloss,

B70W211/ B60V25 (6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat) c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy

Eg-Shel, B73-360 (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry per coat)

c. Dryfall (Water Based) 1) 1st and 2nd Coats

a) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall Semi-Gloss, B42W83 (5.8 mils wet, 2.3 mils dry per coat)

b) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall Eg-Shel, B42W82 (6.0 mils wet, 1.9 mils dry per coat)

c) Flat Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall Flat, B42 Series (6.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

2. Concrete Masonry (CMU - Smooth, Split Face, Scored, High / Low Density, Fluted)

a. Latex 1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 (75-125 sq. ft. per

gal.)

2) 2nd and 3rd Coats a) Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Gloss B21-2200 Series (4.0 mils

wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat); or b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss,

B31-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)


e) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)


1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W46 (50-88 sq. ft. per gal.)

2) 2nd and 3rd Coats a) Gloss Finish: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy Gloss, B70W211/

B60V15 (6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat)



b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy Semi-Gloss, B70W211/ B60V25 (6.5 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat)

c) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry per coat)

3. Concrete Floors

a. Latex 1) Semi-Gloss Finish

a) 1st and 2nd Coats: S-W Tread-Plex Acrylic Floor Coating, B90 Series (3.5 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

b) 3rd Coats (optional): S-W Tread-Plex Acrylic Floor Coating, B90 Series (3.5 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

2) Satin Finish

a) 1st and 2nd Coats: S-W Porch & Floor Enamel, A32-200 Series (a) (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

4. Ferrous Metals (Structural Steel, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications EXCEPT as otherwise

specified.) a. Latex or Acrylic Systems

1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry)

2) 2nd and 3rd Coats a) Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Gloss Enamel, B21-2200 Series

(4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat); or S-W Pro Industrial Gloss Acrylic, B66-600 Series (6.0 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat)

b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat); or S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B31 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat)

c) Eg-Shel or Satin Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat); or S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Satin, B20 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat)


e) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat); or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)







c. Dryfall Waterbased Topcoats (Structural Steel, Factory Primed Steel Deck, other overhead non-galvanized metals). Omit Primer Coat for previously primed metals, except for field touch up. 1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer,

B66-310 Series (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry)


NEW HOPE, MN


2) 2nd Coat, (3rd coat if necessary to provide complete coverage. a) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall,

Semi-Gloss, B42W83 (5.8 mils wet, 2.3 mils dry per coat) b) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall

Eg-Shel, B42W82 (6.0 mils wet, 1.9 mils dry per coat) c) Flat Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall Flat, B42

Series (6.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

5. Galvanized Ferrous Metals (Steel Elements, Decks, Metal Fabrications, Ductwork, Doors and Frames, etc.) a. Latex or Acrylic Systems



a) Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Gloss Enamel, B21-2200 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat); or S-W Pro Industrial Gloss Acrylic, B66-600 Series (6.0 mils wet, 2.5 mils dry per coat)

b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat); or S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B31 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat)

c) Eg-Shel or Satin Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat); or S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Satin, B20 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat)


e) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat); or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)







c. Dryfall Waterbased Topcoats (Steel Deck, Steel Ceilings, Ducts, other overhead galvanized metals) 1) 1st and 2nd Coat

a) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall, Semi-Gloss, B42W83 (5.8 mils wet, 2.3 mils dry per coat)

b) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall Eg-Shel, B42W82 (6.0 mils wet, 1.9 mils dry per coat)

c) Flat Finish: S-W Pro Industrial Waterbased Acrylic Dryfall Flat, B42 Series (6.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

d. Urethane System (Water Base)

1) 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry)



2) 2nd and 3rd Coats: S-W Waterbased Acrolon, Gloss, 100, B65-720 Series (4.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry per coat)

6. Metal Stair and Ladder Treads

a. 1 coat P & L Steeltech Universal Alkyd HP Primer b. 2 coats P & L WithSTAND Oil Floor Enamel, Gloss

7. Metal Railings

a. 1 coat P & L Steeltech Universal Alkyd HP Primer b. 2 coats P & L Pro-Hide Gold Interior Alkyd Enamel, Semi-Gloss

8. Wood (Transparent) For Natural Clear Finishes

a. For all open grain wood species: Ash, Butternut, Chestnut, Mahogany, Oak, Pecan, Rosewood, Teak, or Walnut; use the first system below 1) 1st Coat: Oil based sanding sealer (omit on closed-grain wood species) 2) 2nd and 3rd Coats

a) Gloss Finish: S-W WoodClassics Waterbased Polyurethane Varnish Gloss, A68 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.0 mil dry per coat)

b) Satin Finish: S-W WoodClassics Waterbased Polyurethane Varnish Satin, A68 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.0 mil dry per coat)

b. For all closed grain wood species: Basswood, Beech, Birch, Cedar, Cherry, Cypress,

Fir, Maple, Pine, Poplar, Redwood, Spruce, or Zebrawood 1) 1st and 2nd Coats



9. Wood (Transparent) For Stained Finishes

a. For all open grain wood species: Ash, Butternut, Chestnut, Mahogany, Oak, Pecan, Rosewood, Teak, or Walnut; use the first system below applied over stain specified 1) 1st Coat: S-W WoodClassics 250 Stains 2) 2nd Coat: Oil based sanding sealer (omit on closed-grain wood species) 3) 3rd and 4th Coats



b. For all open grain wood species: Basswood, Beech, Birch, Cedar, Cherry, Cypress,

Fir, Maple, Pine, Poplar, Redwood, Spruce, or Zebrawood, applied over stain specified 1) 1st Coat: S-W WoodClassics 250 Stains 2) 2nd and 3rd Coats



10. Wood (Opaque)

a. Acrylic Systems 1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111 (4.0

mils wet, 1.8 mils dry) 2) 2nd and 3rd Coats


NEW HOPE, MN


a) Gloss Finish: S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Gloss, B21-51 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)

b) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B31 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat)

c) Satin Finish: S-W ProClassic Waterbased Acrylic Satin, B20 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry per coat)

d) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

11. Gypsum Board, Paper-Faced

a. Latex 1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Harmony Interior Latex Primer, B11 (4.0 mils

wet, 1.3 mils dry) 2) 2nd and 3rd Coats

a) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

b) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat); or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

c) Low Sheen Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Low Sheen Enamel, B24-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

d) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat), or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.8 mils dry per coat)

b. Epoxy

1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W Harmony Interior Latex Primer, B11 (4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry)





12. Gypsum Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant a. Latex

1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W HIGH BUILD Interior Latex Primer, B28W08601 (4.0 mils wet, 0.8 mils dry)

2) 2nd and 3rd Coats a) Semi-Gloss Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss,

B31-2600 Series; or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

b) Eg-Shel Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat); or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

c) Low Sheen Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Low Sheen Enamel, B24-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

d) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat), or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.8 mils dry per coat)

b. Epoxy



1) Primer/Base/1st Coat: S-W HIGH BUILD Interior Latex Primer, B28W08601 (4.0 mils wet, 0.8 mils dry)





13. Interior Surfaces of Ducts (Visible from Room) a. Latex


2) 2nd Coat: 1 coat manufacturer's nonspecular flat black a) Flat Finish: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series

(4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat); or S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

14. Existing Surfaces

a. Verify existing finishes before applying systems specified above. b. Alternative primers and finish coats may be necessary to provide compatibility with

existing finishes.

D. If substrate is not among those specified above, notify Architect for direction. 3.08 COLOR SCHEDULES

A. PT-1 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. Gyp. Bd. Ceiling, UNO B. PT-2 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. Typical Wall paint C. PT-3 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. HM Door Frames D. PT-4 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. Accent paint in Admin. area E. PT-5 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. Color surround and Columns F. PT-6 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. Black at Stage G. PT-7 Sherwin Williams color SW xxxx, ‘ _________’. Existing and New Pipe Rails

A. See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

END OF SECTION


NEW HOPE, MN



Auerbach Pollock Friedlander ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLSAPF Project No.: 250919.00 COOPER HIGH SCHOOL

AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATIONNEW HOPE, MN

Construction Documents BP-3 11 61 33 - 1Addendum No. 2 THEATRICAL RIGGING SYSTEMS

SECTION 11 61 33THEATRICAL RIGGING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work in this section includes Theatrical Rigging (TR-series drawings) systems, drapery andequipment1. Installation of stage drapery supplied under 11 61 432. Traveler tracks with all necessary parts3. New elements for reuse of existing electrics batten hoists

a. Batten pipes with connector strip support bracketsb. Replace Multicable if older than two yearsc. Ethernet cabled. Cable strain relief at ceilinge. Confirm limits on electrics are set appropriately

4. Maintenance of existing rigging equipment as indicated on drawings.a. Request copy of 2018 Rigging Inspection Report from Owner.

5. Salvage, reuse, adjustment, and demo of existing rigging equipment as shown on relateddrawings.

6. Provide all material, components, accessories and services required to provide the work asspecified herein, elsewhere in the Contract Documents and/or as shown on relatedDrawings.

7. Consult and coordinate with other affected work and contractors throughout the course ofthe work contained herein.

8. Special consideration should be given to the examination of existing conditions related tothe rigging system herein.

9. Rigging system signage10. Initial owner training and a second follow-up on-site training session within the first year.

B. Products Supplied but Not Installed Under This Section:1. Miscellaneous rigging equipment as listed herein.2. Miscellaneous loose hardware components as listed herein.3. Equipment to be terminated under Division 26:

a. Non-connectorized motors, starters and motor control panels.4. Termination of control system conductors shall be made by Division 26 under the direct

onsite supervision of the Installer for work of this Section.

C. Delegated Design1. Provide design for the means of fastening, suspension and support of the work of this

section. Provide drawings and calculations meeting the review requirements of theauthorities having jurisdiction, stamped and wet signed by a Professional Engineerlicensed in the project jurisdiction for work of the specific type performed.

2. Engineered drawings shall be provided to the Consultant for review of coordination andcompliance to this section.

3. Engineered drawings shall be provided to the structural engineer of record for this facility.The engineer of record will review the loads imposed on the structure by this equipmentand compare those loads to allowable structural loading.

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS Auerbach Pollock FriedlanderCOOPER HIGH SCHOOL APF Project No.: 250919.00AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATIONNEW HOPE, MN

11 61 33 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3THEATRICAL RIGGING SYSTEMS Addendum No. 2

4. Engineered drawings shall be provided to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for this facility.The Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ) will review the drawings for compliance with localcodes. In all cases code compliance is the responsibility of the contractor providing thework of this section.

5. Provide all material, components, accessories and services required to provide the work asspecified herein, elsewhere in the Contract Documents and/or as shown on relatedDrawings.

6. Refer to the ‘TR’ series drawings.7. Refer to the ‘TX’ series drawings.

D. Related Sections1. All drawings including General Construction, Structural, Theatrical, Mechanical, and

Electrical, and General Conditions of the contract, including Supplemental Provisions andDivision 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section.

2. Coordinate with all related sections of the specifications including, but not limited to:a. Equipment attachment backing, reinforcement and support.b. Concrete

1) Fastener requirements.c. Masonry

1) Fastener requirements.d. Metals

1) Structural steel supporting the work of this section.e. Fire Protection

1) Coordination with sprinkler work.f. Finishes

1) Walls and floors.g. Section 116143 - Theatrical Drapery Systemsh. Section 11 61 63 – Theatrical Lighting Controli. Division 26 – Electrical

1) Required conduit, wiring, back boxes, and termination as required for acomplete electrical installation shall be under Division 26 - Electrical work withthe direct onsite supervision of the Installer for work of this Section. Division26 - Electrical to provide miscellaneous hardware as required for properinstallation of each component.

2) Section 26 05 83 – TSE Systems Electrical Installation

E. Alternates1. Not used

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS1. All requests for variations from the specified materials and products will be reviewed by the

Architect and Theatre consultant according to the procedures outlined in Division 1.2. All requests for substitutions must be submitted in a timely manner, so as not to adversely

impact the project schedule.3. Substitutions will only be accepted if, in the opinion of the Architect and Theatre

Consultant, the product is an equal to the specified product. No substitutions may be madewithout written acceptance from the Architect and Theatre Consultant. All substitutionsmade prior to this acceptance are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

4. A substitution must be a product of equal design, construction and performance. TheContractor must submit all pertinent information required to substantiate that the product isequal. The Contractor must submit all additional information, including test data, which maybe requested by the Architect and Theatre Consultant to fully evaluate the substitution. Theburden of proof is solely on the Contractor.

5. All additional expenses of any kind with respect to substitution(s) shall be borne by theContractor. This shall include, but not be limited to, all fees and expenses incurred by the




Architect and other related Consultants for evaluation of the substitution and subsequentintegration into the project should the substitution be taken and/or additional costs of othercontractors related to the substitution(s).

1.04 REFERENCES

A. References to code, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies,trade organizations and governmental agencies will refer to the latest edition of suchpublications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. All such codes and standardswill be considered a part of this specification as if they were fully included herein.

B. If an applicable code or standard permits work of lesser quality or extent than this specification,then this specification and the related Drawings will govern.

C. Comply with prevailing local codes, standards, and applicable Underwriters Laboratorystandards.

D. Comply with national, state and local labor regulations and requirements.E. All internal wiring of electrical devices shall be factory completed, clearly marked and comply

with UL508 design parameters.F. Comply with ANSI E1.6-1 - 2012, Entertainment Technology – Powered Hoist Systems

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. In all cases where a device or a part of equipment is referred to in a singular manner within thecontract documents, it is intended that such a reference shall include all devices required tocomplete the installation in accordance with the project documents.

B. “Architect”: All references to the “Architect” will refer to the process by which the indicatedaction or decision regarding the work in this section will be administered. All such actions shallbe initiated with or by the Project Architect, who will disseminate all pertinent information anddocuments to, as well as coordinate all efforts and site visits with, the Theatre Consultant and allother project consultants who may have design responsibility relating to the work in this section.

C. “Theatre Consultant”: Auerbach Pollock Friedlander, the Theatre Consultant will be party to allactions and decisions regarding the work in this section.

D. “Other Project Consultants”: Acoustical Consultant, Electrical Engineer, Structural Engineer, orMechanical Engineer as is applicable to a particular issue.

E. “Contractor”: Specialty contractor/manufacturer for the work contained in this section only.Contractors involved with other portions of the work shall be indicated with a specific tradepreceding the word “Contractor” (i.e. General, Electrical, etc.).

F. "Owner": Authorized personnel representing Cooper High School.G. “Furnish”: Purchase and/or fabricate and deliver to project site.H. “Install”: Physically install the items in their proper location(s) on the project site.I. “Provide”: Furnish and install complete, functioning and complete with all necessary accessories

(CWANA).


A. The rigging systems shall include provisions for hanging of theatrical lighting fixtures, sceneryand drapery on a system of fixed and moving battens:1. After approval, remove existing equipment that precludes proper installation of this system.

See Demolition below.2. The rigging system shall incorporate the reuse of existing fixed speed electric motor hoists

dedicated to the stage “electrics” battens. Refer to drawings for layout.a. Refer to lineset schedule notes for regarding new, demo and reuse of specific

elements.3. Traveler tracks shall be furnished for bi-parting curtains as indicated in the TR and TD

drawings4. New carriers for side tab drapery tracks



5. The rigging system shall include dead hung battens for drapery.a. Adjust mounting heights were indicated to accommodate new drapery

6. Provide signage with loading limits and warnings posted in the area where the equipmentwill be operated. Signage shall be in conformance with ANSI E1.6-1 - 2012, EntertainmentTechnology – Powered Hoist Systems

7. The contractor must leave the site and equipment in safe condition.

1.07 DEMOLITION

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwiseindicated to remain property of Owner, demolished materials shall become the Contractor'sproperty and shall be removed, recycled, or disposed from project site in an appropriate andlegal manner.1. Arrange a meeting no less than ten (10) days prior to demolition with the Owner and other

designated representatives to review any salvageable items to determine if Owner wants toretain ownership, and discuss Contractor’s waste management and recycling plan.

B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to facilities.C. Locate demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive

loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.D. Transport demolished materials off the Owner’s property and legally recycle, or dispose of

materials.E. Demolition work of this section shall include:

1. Demolition work as required to complete installation work of this section.2. Demolition and removal of the existing general purpose motorized hoists.

a. Refer to lineset schedule notes for demo and reuse of specific elementsb. Existing control to be demolished under division 26.

3. Partial demolition and removal of the existing “electrics” motorized hoistsa. Refer to lineset schedule notes for demo and reuse of specific elements

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Structural performance for this system must be fully documented under the direct supervision ofa Structural Licensed Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Minnesota. The contractorsengineer shall design and/or select all elements and their connections to meet or exceed theCode in force at the time of the installation.1. Documentation must include certified calculations by a structural professional engineer

licensed in the State of Minnesota2. Calculations must be provided for all bolted or welded connections, within system

components as well as between system components and building structure3. Where standard components are used manufactures engineering data shall be provided to

supplement engineered calculations.4. The Contractor shall provide certified calculations of all system design loads and structural

accommodations not indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall supply to theArchitect all system engineering documents and information within 60 days of contractaward.

B. Provide full insurance against loss or damage during shipment. Furnish certifications of suchcoverage to the Architect within 30 calendar days of contract award.

C. All submittals shall leave a 3” by 3” space available for review stamps and comments.D. All cast iron elements taking load shall be fabricated in accordance with Section 11 6133 2.02

G.E. Submittals must contain verified field dimensions and must be submitted for review and

acceptance prior to proceeding with the fabrication of the work in this section. The Architect




shall only mark one set of reproducibles per submittal with comments. Any additional sets ofdrawings or product data shall be returned unmarked.

F. Review all pertinent project Electrical and Theatrical series drawings. Following this review,provide to the Consultant and Contractor any additional information required to make a fullyfunctioning system. In addition, the Contractor shall confirm that all systems components arecompatible with conduit sizes and wire gauge sizes/types as shown in the drawings and that theinterconnectivity of components is as required to make a fully functioning system. Thisconfirmation shall be in writing within 30 calendar days of contract award. All costs associatedwith additions to the scope of the electrical work because of insufficient wire count and/or sizesafter this confirmation shall be borne by the Manufacturer/Contractor herein.

G. Project Manager: Provide the name and position of the Contractor’s Project Manager. ThisProject Manager shall be the key contact person between the Consultant, Architect and theContractor during the entire course of the project.

H. Product Data: Submit catalog or standard data sheets for component parts as part of the shopdrawing submittal. The data shall include all information, which indicates compliance with thespecifications herein. Clearly indicate the manufacturer of each component and part.1. If any work is required to be specially tested or approved, whether by the Owner’s

instructions or by any laws, ordinance or any public authority, the Installing Contractor shallgive the General Contractor and architect timely notice of its readiness for inspections, andof dates of inspections to be made by appropriate authorities.

I. Shop Drawings1. All shop drawings to be prepared under the supervision of a Structural Professional

Engineer licensed in the State of Minnesota. The drawings must include the engineer’sstamp, which is recognized in the city and state in which the project is taking place.

2. The Contractor shall provide certified calculations of all system design loads and structuralaccommodations not indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall supply to theArchitect all system engineering documents and information within 60 days of contractaward.

3. All Shop Drawings shall be Sheet Size B or larger, but in no case shall sheet size vary oncechosen.

4. Provide ¼” = 1’- 0” plans of all locations which contain equipment in this contract basedupon AutoCAD 2010. Show all equipment properly located, dimensioned, and labeled.Note all work by others in the vicinity, which may affect work in this contract.

5. Include a cover sheet with a drawing index including the sheet number and title for eachsheet in the set.

6. Provide an inventory of all equipment to be supplied, including quantities, manufacturer’spart number, reference to applicable drawings, etc.a. Provide a separate equipment inventory list of all miscellaneous rigging equipment

which is supplied but not installed. This inventory shall be used as a checklist forfinal acceptance of this equipment.

7. Provide complete, fully dimensioned, large-scale detailed fabrication drawings of all majorcomponents.

8. Provide requisite schematics, plans and sections indicating assembly and installation ofcomponents.

9. Provide indications by arrow and boxed caption of all variations from contract drawings andspecifications, except where variation is indicated as acceptable.

10. For any electrical devices provided under this section, provide detailed riser diagrams andinstallation circuit diagrams indicating all control requirements and point to pointconnections. Show all required high and low voltage wire sizes and wire counts betweenall components. Show line voltage power input required by systems components whichshall be provided under Division 26.

J. Samples: Submit samples for approval within 14 days of written request. These items mayinclude, but are not limited to:



1. Provide wire rope termination complete with compression sleeve, thimble, and heat shrinktubing.

2. Samples of basic rigging components, and hardware if requested by the Architect.

K. Installation Instructions:1. Supply installation instructions for all items furnished in this section, as reviewed and

approved with shop drawings, to General Contractor. Such instructions shall be fullycoordinated with trades doing adjoining work and with site conditions. Instructions shallinclude inter-equipment connection diagrams with terminal designations.

2. Provide information to the General Contractor which details any temporary loads imposedon the building; these include scaffolding loads, machinery loads, rigging loads, etc.

L. Installation Inspection Reports:1. Supply reports confirming that all elements of installation by Division 26 conform to

requirements of the Theatrical Rigging System as engineered, and specified herein.Submit these reports to the Architect at times required by the Schedule of Submittals.

2. If conditions exist that are contrary to proper installation of the Theatrical Rigging System,directly inform Contractor, Architect, and Theatre Consultant of discrepancies. Failure toinform the Contractor shall constitute acceptance of installation and place responsibility forany revisions or additions necessary to properly install work of this section, with theContractor of this section.

M. Project Schedule1. The Contractor shall submit a project schedule (critical path) at the time of contract

negotiation, which shall indicate coordinated functions with other trades and projectrequirements.

N. Project Record Documents:1. Submit documents in accordance with Division 1.2. At the time of compliance testing, submit three bound copies of parts lists and

operations/maintenance instruction sheets.3. Within 60 days of the compliance testing, submit one set of reproducible “as built and

approved” drawings showing all equipment as installed. These drawings shall include alladjustments made during the checkout process.

4. Submit operation and maintenance manuals with the “as built and approved” drawings. Themanual shall include:a. Complete parts list for all equipment and telephone numbers for the authorized parts

and service distributors.b. Instructions as to the safe operation for all equipment.c. Recommended maintenance schedule for component parts that may need periodic

replacement.d. Recommendations for cleaning, maintaining and touch-up of all finished surfaces.

5. Warranties as required herein.6. Where specific elements do not require manuals, instruction sheets as to care and handling

shall be provided.7. The record documents shall be reviewed by the Architect and Theatre Consultant, all

modifications to the documents stemming from this review shall be made as required.8. Above submissions are required as a condition for final approval of the work.

O. Closeout Submittals1. Written verification that all punch list items have been rectified will be required for project

closeout and initiation of the warranty period.2. See Division 1 for additional requirements.





A. Qualifications1. The Contractor must have been engaged in the fabrication and installation of equipment of

the type indicated herein for no less than 5 full years.2. All equipment and installation of the work in this section shall be the responsibility of the

single Contractor, who shall own and operate their own shop for the installation of theatricalrigging equipment, and be regularly engaged in the installation of such equipment.Installation of such equipment shall comprise no less than 90% of the Contractor’sbusiness in the theatrical rigging division.

3. The Contractor shall have, at time of bid, a current Contractors License. This license shallbe maintained throughout the course of work of this Contract.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for proper installation, operation and safety of allcomponents equipment. Motors, control elements and other component equipment must beprocured as specified. Non-specified items may be procured from any nationallyrecognized manufacturer.

5. Metalworking may be done by others. Responsibility in all respects shall be that of theContractor.

6. The Contractor shall verify all system design loads.

B. Pre-installation Meetings1. Reference Division 1– General Requirements for mandatory pre-bid meeting requirements.

C. State of the Art Development1. The successful Contractor shall furnish only the latest developed appropriate product. In

cases where product development from a specified manufacturer surpasses the criteria ofthis specification, the Contractor shall inform the Architect and make the newer productavailable to the project. In no case shall discontinued or obsolete equipment beacceptable. Should a newer product be suggested as a substitution for a discontinuedproduct, or for a product that is in process of being phased out of production, that newerproduct shall be offered to the Owner at no additional cost.

2. Should product recall by the Manufacturer require temporary or permanent replacement ofa product specified under this section, the Contractor shall notify the Owner at the earliestreasonable time and shall arrange to replace the product in question at the earliest possibletime.

3. Equipment found defective or subject to recall prior to scheduled installation shall not bedelivered to the jobsite.

4. Equipment defect or intended recall shall not relieve the Contractor from his contractualobligation with regard to delivery schedule of product. In this circumstance, notificationshall be made to the Consultant by telegram or express carrier. Arrangement for alternateproduct shall be made at this time.

5. Under no circumstances shall arrangement for alternate product necessarily require theOwner to accept superseded equipment except on a temporary basis.


A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be coordinated with the Construction Manager and shallmeet all requirements described in Division 1.

B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading1. All equipment shall be appropriately and substantially packed for shipment.2. All equipment containers shall clearly indicate the equipment contained, “front”, “top”,

“fragile”, the project name, and theatre site allocation. Include packing and shipping lists foreach container.



3. All shipping costs to the job site are the responsibility of the Contractor. The shippingmethod/company is at the total discretion of the Contractor in order to meet the publishedproject schedules.

C. Acceptance at Site1. Coordinate responsibility for acceptance of material and equipment at job site with the

Contractor.2. The Theatrical Rigging Contractor shall be responsible for acceptance of the Rigging

System components at the jobsite, confirming that all quantities and counts are correct andfor keeping accurate logs and records of such information.

D. Storage and Protections1. Upon delivery, the materials shall be stored under cover in a dry and clean location, off the

ground. Delivered materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installationshall be removed from the job site and replaced with acceptable materials.

2. Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all equipment and materials which aredamaged during storage or handling.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions1. Verify all conditions at job site. Promptly report variations and obstructions to the Architect.

All additions and or corrections are to be requested prior to fabrications.2. Prior to start of equipment fabrication, the Contractor shall visit the site and notify the

Owner, in writing, of any conditions that are inconsistent with the contract documents orrequire modification to the system or any components thereof as designed anddocumented due to existing or new site conditions. The Owner may consider that thecontractor considers the documents and conditions acceptable by the Contractor in theabsence of written notice.

3. Prior to start of installation, the Contractor shall visit the site and notify the Owner, inwriting, of any conditions that are inappropriate or unsafe for an efficient installation. TheOwner may consider conditions acceptable by the Contractor in the absence of writtennotice.

B. Field Measurements1. Field measurements shall be taken prior to preparation of shop drawings to ensure proper

fitting of work. Allow for adjustments during installation whenever taking fieldmeasurements.

2. Should field measurement of site conditions alter the design or installation of systemelements from the approved shop drawings, revised shop drawings shall be reissued forreview.

1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. The installation of the equipment in this section shall begin following the completion of workwhich may be in conflict with the installation including:1. Demolition of existing electrical infrastructure.2. Removal and salvage of all existing rigging elements.

B. Structural, electrical, mechanical and fire protection work in related work areas.




1.13 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant materials and workmanship of systems and equipment installed aspart of this project as free of defects. The Contractor shall guarantee in writing the repair orreplacement within 14 days of any item found defective during a period of 2-year following dateof final acceptance. Ordinary wear and defects due to improper usage are not covered by thiswarranty.

B. During the warranty period, all emergency conditions where systems failures may be hazardousor may cause severe hardship or cancellation of performances shall be responded to within 24hours. Immediate action shall be undertaken to ensure the safety of the audience and theperformers.

C. Refer to Division 1 – General Requirements.

1.14 SYSTEM START UP, OWNER’S INSTRUCTION, AND COMMISSIONING

A. Operation Instruction:1. Following the equipment demonstration, inspection and final adjustments, the Owner’s

designated staff or representatives shall be instructed in the use, care and maintenance ofall items.

2. Deliver all copies of approved Operations Manual to Owner prior to first instruction session,and review it as part of that session.

3. Provide in-depth training of the user’s staff in the operation and maintenance of all systemsincluded herein.a. An Online training course shall be available after the initial training. The owner shall

be given clear information on how to take the complete on line training course.4. All training shall be by technical staff of Theatrical Rigging System Contractor.5. Provide an on-site second follow-up training session within the first year. Session shall be

scheduled at the request of the owner.

1.15 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials1. Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish the following to match those

installed and taken from the same production run, packaged with protective covering forstorage and identified with appropriate labels.

B. Maintenance Services1. One year following date of final acceptance, a factory engineer shall be provided to

examine, adjust and repair the equipment included in this sections as required. Thisservice shall not cover adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence,misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons other than the Contractor. All labor andmaterials which are required to perform this service shall meet or exceed thesespecifications and shall not compromise the performance of the equipment in any way.

2. Following this inspection and maintenance service, the Manufacturer shall provide theOwner and Theatre Consultant with a written report itemizing the results of the inspectionsand the warranty work, which was conducted. The Manufacturer shall also include in thiswritten report recommendations for any corrective actions which the Manufacturer feelsshould be taken, with respect to the equipment included in this section, but are outside thescope of the warranty agreement.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTRACTORS

A. The systems described herein shall be provided by a Theatrical Rigging Contractor who will beresponsible for furnishing all services described herein including but not limited to coordinationand supervision of the engineering, shop drawings, fabrication and provision for all systemsspecified herein and shown in the drawings.

B. Acceptable Contractors: To establish comparative standards of quality the provision of theequipment and services of this section shall be by one of the following contractors or approvedequal prior to bid:

Gopher Stage Lighting4141 Cedar Ave SouthMinneapolis, MN 55407Phone: 612.871.0138

JR Clancy7041 Interstate Island RoadSyracuse, NY 13209 USAPhone: 315-451-3440

Norcostco825 Rhode Island Ave. SouthMinneapolis, MN 55426Phone: 763-544-0601

C. Any other contractor who wishes to bid must submit qualification information to the Architect andTheatre Consultant. Proposal shall include all of the information listed below.1. Submit the following additional information with proposal:

a. Statements of financial responsibility for past five fiscal years showing assets andliabilities.

b. List of principal officers and design and service engineers in an organizationalstructure flow chart.

c. List of not less than 5 projects of similar size and scope completed within the fiveyears on which contractor has provided full services: product engineering, shopdrawings, manufacture, installation and commissioning. In each instance, indicatespecifics of scope of fabrication and installation. Include a contact list: name,address and phone numbers of person(s) directly responsible for operation andmaintenance of equipment in each facility.

d. List of current projects and approximate contract value and completion dates.Include list of names, phone numbers and addresses of owner, owner'srepresentatives and Architect.

e. For each above described project, list of names of persons who supervisedpreparation of shop drawings, manufacture of components, and installation ofequipment.

f. List of names of persons who would do project management, product engineering,supervision of shop drawing, supervision of installation should this contract beawarded.

g. Contract Bond Company information indicating that Contractor has bonding capacityfor full duration of project. Include list of other bonded projects coinciding with thisproject.

h. Evidence of ability to undertake custom product engineering to meet specificrequirements of project specifications. Provide sample project engineering drawings




for custom products and contact information for facility operators where thoseproducts have been installed.

2. Standards of acceptance:a. Contractor must have been engaged in the manufacture and installation of theatrical

rigging systems for a minimum of five years and maintain its own facility and staff forthis purpose.

b. Contractor must have a minimum of five projects of similar size and scope within thepast five years.

c. Ability to undertake the work within the time available, judged against other currentlycontracted work.

d. Ability to meet specifications and project requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. In all cases where a device or a part of equipment is referred to in a singular manner within theContract Documents, it is intended that such a reference shall include all devices required tocomplete the installation in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. All equipment and components shall be new and complete. No used or reconditioned equipmentshall be acceptable unless otherwise noted.

C. All control surfaces/controls must be in a lockable cabinet or have the means to be physicallyinaccessible with lock and key.

D. All mounting hardware to be included.E. All equipment and components shall be factory tested prior to shipping.F. All bolts and fasteners must be Grade 5 or better.

1. All bolted attachments to have nylon-insert locknuts, lock washers, or other self-lockingfasteners.

G. All cast iron elements taking load (e.g. sheaves, rope locks, tension blocks, etc.) shall beminimally of #30 grey iron and shall be certified to have been cast according to ASTMstandards. Cast elements are to be foundry tested for cracks and casting flaws or providefoundry certification of casting process. Testing certificates are to be made available onrequest.

H. All internal wiring shall be factory completed and clearly marked. All field connections shall beby compression connector, terminal strip or other device specified herein. Any terminal stripconnections shall be clearly labeled as to terminal designation. Wire nut splices not permitted.

I. All wire sizes and insulation to comply with Underwriters Laboratory and all applicablestandards, local codes and standards.

J. All wiring to be harnessed and bound. No loose or randomly routed wires shall be permitted.K. Overhead rigging elements to be designed with a mechanical safety factor of their minimum

breaking strength.1. Wire rope: 8:12. Terminating hardware: 5:13. Batten clamps: 5:1

L. All drive components shall be designed with a safety factor 3X.M. Bearings shall be designed with a 2X rating, full speed / 2000 hours.

2.03 PRE AND POST WORK

A. The contractor of this section is responsible for removal of all identified existing riggingequipment. Existing equipment must be first offered to the owner, any equipment not taken bythe owner must be disposed of in a legal manner.1. All equipment within the rigging area that precluded proper installation of the rigging

system must be identified and that information must be given to the architect. After



approval the equipment must be removed, offered to the owner and, if not taken by theowner, disposed of.

B. The contractor of this section shall remove and store all of the existing drapery in a clean, drystorage facility before construction begins. All existing track and accessories to be salvaged.Contractor to provide routine inspection and maintenance, noting any deficiencies that mayrequire repair or replacement.

2.04 DEAD-HUNG BATTENS

A. Pipe Battens:1. Existing pipe battens to be re-hung at new elevations per drawings.2. Battens to be cleaned and inspected for straightness and damage. Replace bent and

damaged pipes.3. Refer to Drawings for suspension details.

B. Provide:1. Screw Pin Shackles2. Pipe clamps3. Turnbuckles4. Wire rope at side tabs

2.05 TRAVELER TRACK

A. Rehang tracks as indicated on the drawings.B. Provide new tracks for the traveler curtains, as indicated on drawings and schedules. Complete

with all necessary accessories (CWANA).1. Traveler Track:

a. Track:1) Track to be heavy-duty channel type, approximately 3" x 3", 14 gauge steel or

extruded aluminum formed to provide parallel double tracks for carrier wheelsand totally enclosed except for bottom carrier slot.

2) Traveler tracks to be in 2 sections, with 2'- 0" combined center overlap, fittedfor manual line operation.

3) Each half of double-section traveler track assemblies to be single piece, freeof burrs, dents or irregularities. Halves clamped together by at least 3 lapclamps.

4) Hanger fittings and clamps for attachment spaced at 4'-0" on centermaximum.

b. Carriers:1) Two master carriers for each double-section traveler track. Each with 4 paired

neoprene wheels with ball bearings.2) Master carriers to have 2 clamps for attachment of operating line and 2 plated

swivels with 6" of usable trim chains for curtain attachment.3) Single carriers to have 2 neoprene wheels with ball bearing with "hollow

center" design to bypass the operating line.4) Each single carrier to have single plated swivels with 6" of usable trim chain.5) One single carrier for each 1'-0" of track length.6) Provide end stacking (rear fold, back pack) devices to stack drapery only at

offstage track ends. Provide rubber washers to packing tabs.c. Traveler Track Pulley Blocks:

1) End pulley blocks heavy-duty type with 8" sheaves turned and grooved for1/2" operating line. Dead end pulley shall be 8” diameter. Double verticalsheaves on the live end of the tracks; a single horizontal sheave on the deadend. Housings firmly bolted to the track.




2) Floor pulley blocks to have 8" sheaves with sealed ball bearings. Sheavesmounted to slide vertically and clamp in a steel frame with full side plates ofsufficient height to permit 9" tension and adjustment of operating line. Basedrilled for 2 improved stage screws for floor mounting. Supply 2 improvedstage screws and plugs.

3) All blocks to provide for positive retention of operating cords in grooves ofsheaves.

d. Traveler Operating Hand Lines:1) Each hand line to be a single length, first quality, 1/2" diameter, fiberglass

center, braided cotton cord.2) Rig for curtain operation from the live end of the track.3) Length of hand line to be adjusted for tension with traveler curtains mounted

and trimmed.e. Manufacturers:

1) ADC #283-R2) H&H #4003) Or equal

2.06 WALK-ALONG STRAIGHT TRACK ASSEMBLIES – SIDE TABS

A. Carriers:1. Provide one (1) master carrier with "tow line" for active end of each drape. Tow line of 3/8"

black braided cotton cord with 3" diameter metal ring at end. Tow line to extend fromcarrier to +4’-0” above finished floor.

2. Each Master carrier to have four (4) paired neoprene wheels with ball bearings.3. Master carriers to have two (2) clamps for attachment of operating line and two (2) plated

swivels with 6” of usable trim chains for curtain attachment.4. Single Carries Quantities5. Provide one (1) single carrier for each 1’-0” of track length.6. Single carriers to have two (2) neoprene wheels with ball bearing with “hollow center”

design to bypass the operating line.7. Each single carrier to have single plated swivels with 6” of usable trim chain.8. Provide end stacking (rear fold, back pack) devices to stack drapery only at track ends.

Provide rubber washers to packing tabs.9. Provide end stops for tracks as required.

2.07 ELECTRICS MULTI-CABLE AND CABLE MANAGEMENT

A. Re-use existing cable cradle managementB. Re-use existing multi-cable. Replace if cable is older than two years. Provide flexible multi-

conductor cable as indicated on the drawings.1. Electrical terminations to ceiling terminal box and batten connector strips under Division 26

Electrical work.2. Provide flexible multi-conductor cables of minimum 12 awg SO neoprene covered cable in

accordance with prevailing electrical codes. Provide two (2) conductors for each circuit,plus grounds, rated for 20A, 125V.

3. Provide "Hubbell Kellems Deluxe" cord type grips correctly sized to restrain multicable atterminal box at each end of cable. Provide "Hubbell Kellems Heavy Duty, Single Eye,Closed Mesh Strain Relief" as indicated in drawings. Provide one (1) rated shackle foreach eye.

4. Quantities:a. Provide quantity and length as required for circuit count, rigging and travel of

electrics batten with cable cradles as indicated on the drawings.



C. Provide heavy duty flexible Ethernet lighting control cable on cable cradles as indicated on thedrawings. Provide cable with connector at ceiling, coordinate connector type with lightingcontractor. Termination at batten connector strips under Division 26 Electrical work.1. Quantities:

a. Provide quantity and length as required for rigging and travel of electrics battens withcable cradles as indicated on the drawings. Refer to TR and TL drawings.

D. Provide mounting hardware at ceiling for securing multicable strain relief as indicated on theDrawings.

2.08 ELECTRICS PIPE BATTENS:

A. Provide single pipe battens as indicated on the Drawings. Pipes to be of 1½" nominal Schedule40 black iron pipe as per standard industry practice.

B. Joints: 24” close fitted internal sleeves secured by 2 bolts perpendicular to floor on each side ofjoint. ¼” x 20 cap screws through-bolted with nylock nuts. Holes 6” on center, 3” from ends.

C. Battens to be painted with flat black enamel.D. Refer to Drawings for pick-up details.E. Lengths to match existing and quantities of pipe battens as indicated on the Drawings and

schedules.F. Pipe batten connection by:

1. ETC Type 21 connector strip hanger.a. Confirm connector strip size with 11 61 63 prior to final purchase

2. Rated hot dip galvanized jaw/jaw (cotter pine type) turnbuckle with 6” of take-up, lock nuts,lock washers, and safety wire mouse (after adjustment)

3. Re-use existing wire-rope lift line. Provide the following additional hardware as required toconform to modern industry standards.a. Wire rope thimbleb. Copper compression sleeves installed as per manufacturer’s recommendation.c. Dress cable ends using black heat shrink tubing.

2.09 FINISHES

A. Shop Finishing1. Machine-finish all operating parts to standard trade tolerance, fits and finishes.2. The color of all non-moving parts shall be the same as the surrounding ceiling color.

Moving parts: festoon and pipe shall be black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. The work on this section shall be installed by an experienced installer in the employ of theContractor for the equipment in this section.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions1. The Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which the equipment is to be

installed and shall notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental toproper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactoryconditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.




3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION

A. Install all work in this section in accordance with the Consultant’s direction, specifications,approved shop drawings, pertinent Contract Drawings, established trade practices andapplicable code requirements.

B. Install all work securely, complete with all bolts, nuts, washers, clips, fittings, supports, and otheritems required for proper installation and operation.

C. Position all items accurately as indicated on Drawings and true to plumb, line and level.Maintain maximum headroom and clearances at all points.

D. Coordinate work with all other trades to avoid causing delays in construction schedule.E. Obtain requisite approvals for field welding.

1. Carry out approved field welding in full accordance with the appropriate sections of“Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings” of theAmerican Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

F. Do all cutting, drilling, tapping and approved welding required to properly install work. Obtainrequisite prior approval for cutting and drilling of existing structural work.

G. Clean structural steel and fabricated steelwork of rust, scale and foreign matter by grinding;prime with 1 coat of chromated primer; finish with 1 coat of first quality machinery enamel free ofskips, runs and saps. Touch up all field connections, welds and abraded places with primer andenamel.

H. Install new, clean and un-deformed steel cables of diameters and construction specified. Usefittings and clips conforming to cable manufacturer’s recommendations as to size, number andmethod of installation. Form eyes over properly sized thimbles at all requisite connection points.

I. Align winches, pulleys and sheaves for fleet angles not greater than 1½ degrees for smooth and2 degrees for grooved drums and sheaves.


A. Site Tests, Inspection1. The installation of the equipment indicated in this section shall be supervised by qualified

personnel who are regularly employed by the Contractor for supervision of equipmentinstallation similar to that indicated herein.

2. Arrange for all tests and inspections required by the General Conditions.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust all equipment and components for operation in accordance with the specifications,approved shop drawings and pertinent Contract Drawings prior to the demonstration indicatedherein.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Touch up minor abrasions and imperfections as required.B. All unnecessary equipment and materials shall be removed from the area(s) of this work upon

completion, removed from the jobsite and disposed of legally at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Installed equipment to be operated for approval, and inspected for quality by the Architect andthe Owner.

B. Adjustments or modifications shall be made as directed by the Architect and the TheatreConsultant.



C. Following the equipment demonstration, inspection and final adjustments, the Owner'sdesignated staff or representatives shall be instructed in the use, care and maintenance of allitems.

D. Tests and instruction to be scheduled in conformance with project construction schedules andthe availability of the Architect and the Owner.

E. Cost of re-inspection and additional testing by the Architect or Theatre Consultant, if required,due to lack of completion and/or errors and omissions shall be paid by the Contractor or theGeneral Contractor respective to the area of work concerned. This work will be conducted on atime and materials basis, including standard hourly rates, and shall be scheduled and approvedin writing prior to the re-inspection/testing session between the Architect, Theatre Consultant,the Owner, and the contractor(s). All travel expenses, if required, shall be provided.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Suitable precautions shall be taken to protect the equipment in this section from damage afterinstallation and prior to acceptance by the Owner.

B. Remove all equipment protection and clean all components thoroughly prior to thedemonstration session.

END OF SECTION 11 61 33

Auerbach Pollock Friedlander ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS APF Project No.: 250919.00 COOPER HIGH SCHOOL AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION NEW HOPE, MN

Construction Documents BP-3 11 61 43 - 1 Addendum No. 2 THEATRICAL DRAPERY SYSTEMS

SECTION 11 61 43 THEATRICAL DRAPERIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Theater stage draperies

a. Main House Curtain b. Stage Masking Borders, Tabs, and Traveler draperies c. Cyclorama d. Drapery Protective Wrap e. Provide all material, components, accessories and services required to provide the

work as specified herein, elsewhere in the Contract Documents and/or as shown on related Drawings.

2. Consult and coordinate with other affected work and contractors throughout the course of the work contained herein.

3. Training

B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Furnish fabric remnants from the manufacture of the theatrical draperies. Ship to the jobsite

and turn over to the Owner for use in repairs and maintenance.

C. Related Sections 1. Coordinate with all related sections of the specifications including, but not limited to:

a. Section 11 61 33 – Theatrical Rigging Systems b. Metals

1) Structural steel supporting the work of this section.

D. Substitutions 1. All requests for variations from the specified materials and products will be reviewed by the

Architect and Theatre consultant according to the procedures outlined in Division 1. 2. All requests for substitutions must be submitted in a timely manner, so as not to adversely

impact the project schedule. 3. Substitutions will only be accepted if, in the opinion of the Architect and Theatre

Consultant, the product is an equal to the specified product. No substitutions may be made without written acceptance from the Architect and Theatre Consultant. All substitutions made prior to this acceptance are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

4. A substitution must be a product of equal design, construction and performance. The Contractor must submit all pertinent information required to substantiate that the product is equal. The Contractor must submit all additional information, including test data, which may be requested order for the Architect and Theatre Consultant to fully evaluate the substitution. The burden of proof is solely on the Contractor.

5. All additional expenses of any kind with respect to substitution(s) shall be borne by the Contractor. This shall include, but not be limited to, all fees and expenses incurred by the Architect and other related Consultants for evaluation of the substitution and subsequent integration into the project should the substitution be taken and/or additional costs of other contractors related to the substitution(s).

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Reference Division 1 for general project references and standards.

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS Auerbach Pollock Friedlander COOPER HIGH SCHOOL APF Project No.: 250919.00


NEW HOPE, MN

11 61 43 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 THEATRICAL DRAPERY SYSTEMS Addendum No. 2

B. References to code, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies will refer to the latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. All such codes and standards will be considered a part of this specification as if they were fully included herein.

C. If an applicable code or standard permits work of lesser quality or extent than this specification, then this specification and the related Drawings will govern.

D. Comply with prevailing local codes, standards, and applicable Underwriters Laboratory standards.

E. Comply with national, state and local labor regulations and requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. In all cases where a device or a part of equipment is referred to in a singular manner within the contract documents, it is intended that such a reference shall include all devices required to complete the installation in accordance with the project documents.

B. “Architect”: All references to the “Architect” will refer to the process by which the indicated action or decision regarding the work in this section will be administered. All such actions shall be initiated with or by the Project Architect, who will disseminate all pertinent information and documents to, as well as coordinate all efforts and site visits with, the Theatre Consultant and all other project consultants who may have design responsibility relating to the work in this section.

C. “Theatre Consultant”: Auerbach Pollock Friedlander, the Theatre Consultant will be party to all actions and decisions regarding the work in this section.

D. “Other Project Consultants”: Acoustical Consultant, Electrical Engineer, Structural Engineer, or Mechanical Engineer as is applicable to a particular issue.

E. “Contractor”: Specialty contractor/manufacturer for the work contained in this section only. Contractors involved with other portions of the work shall be indicated with a specific trade preceding the word “Contractor” (i.e. General, Electrical, etc.).

F. "Owner": Authorized personnel representing Cooper High School

G. “Furnish”: Purchase and/or fabricate and deliver to project site.

H. “Install”: Physically install the items in their proper location(s) on the project site.

I. “Provide”: Furnish and install complete, functioning and complete with all necessary accessories (CWANA).


A. Draperies 1. A basic complement of theatrical draperies will include a decorative main curtain for both

vertical and bi-part manual operation, black masking curtains, and a full width cyclorama. Configurations will be variable, at the discretion of the Owner, but a basic hang is shown on the Drawings. The main curtain will be lined to provide durability and maximum opacity, and will have fullness sewn in. Masking draperies will be oversized in width and sewn flat for tie-in fullness capability. Two unpainted muslin drops will be provided.



2. All curtain fabrics will be certified inherently fire retardant, and comply with pertinent national and local building and fire codes.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 – Submittals.

B. All submittals shall be submitted in a timely manner, allowing sufficient time for adequate review and possible resubmittals without jeopardizing the project schedule.

C. Submittals will be reviewed and accepted, containing verified field dimensions, prior to proceeding with the fabrication of the work in this section. The Architect shall only mark one set of reproducibles per submittal with comments. Any additional sets of drawings or product data shall be returned unmarked.

D. All submittals shall leave space available for review stamps and comments.

E. Provide full insurance against loss or damage during shipment. Furnish certifications of such coverage to the Architect within 30 calendar days of contract award.

F. Shop Drawings 1. Include a cover sheet with a drawing index including the sheet number and title for each

sheet in the set. 2. Provide a 4” X 4” area near the title block for review stamps and comments. This area

should be in relatively the same location on each sheet. 3. A complete list of all draperies, indicating fabric type, Fabricator, fullness, color and sizes. 4. Requisite schematics, plans and sections indicating assembly and installation of

components. 5. Indications by arrow and boxed caption of all variations from Contract Drawings and

specifications, except where variation is indicated as acceptable.

G. Product Data: 1. Where standard manufactured parts are used, submit current product literature describing

component, manufacturer’s recommended applications, load ratings, safety factors and dimensions.

2. Clearly indicate specific component and applicable options.

H. Samples: Submit samples for approval within 14 days of written request. These items may include, but are not limited to: 1. Standard color line swatches for all fabrics to be selected by the Architect. 2. Six yards by full bolt width exact color samples of all fabrics specified as to type and dye

color. 3. Sample of fabrication details, showing:

a. Main curtain top, offstage side, bottom and lining and paging handle. 4. Samples of standard hooks, swivels, ties and hardware.

I. Provide shop mock-up of main drape including raise/lower operation a. Mock-up shall be a minimum of 24” wide and 8’ tall. b. Provide pictures and high definition video of motion for review by Architect and

Consultant. c. Ship the mock-up sample to Consultant, then provide continued shipping to Architect

J. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit documents in accordance with Division 1 – Project Record Documents.



NEW HOPE, MN


2. At the time of acceptance testing, submit 6 bound copies of parts lists and operations/maintenance instruction sheets.

3. Within 60 days of the acceptance testing, submit 1 set of reproducible “as built and approved” drawings showing all equipment as installed. These Drawings shall include all adjustments made during the checkout process.

4. Submit operation and maintenance manuals with the “as built and approved” drawings. Each manual shall be bound in an individual binder with the project name on the front cover and system identification on the spine. The manuals shall include: a. Complete parts list for all equipment and telephone numbers for the authorized parts

and service distributors. b. Instructions as to the safe operation for all equipment. c. Recommended maintenance schedule for component parts which may need

periodic replacement. d. Recommendations for cleaning, maintaining and touch-up of all finished surfaces. e. Warranties as required in Division 1 – Guarantees, Warranties, Bonds, Service &

Maintenance Contracts. f. Flame retardence certificates.

5. Where specific elements do not require manuals, instruction sheets as to care and handling shall be provided.

6. The record documents shall be reviewed by the theatre consultant and all modifications to the documents stemming from this review shall be made as required.

7. Above submissions are required as a condition for final approval of the work.


A. Qualifications 1. The Contractor must have been engaged in the fabrication and installation of equipment of

the type indicated herein for no less than 5 full years. 2. All equipment and installation of the work in this section shall be the responsibility of the

single Contractor, who shall own and operate their own shop for the fabrication of theatrical draperies, and be regularly engaged in the fabrication of such equipment. Fabrication of such equipment shall comprise no less than 90% of the Contractor’s business.

3. The Contractor shall have, at time of bid, a current Contractors License. This license shall be maintained throughout the course of work of this Contract.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for proper installation, operation and safety of all components.

5. All curtains and draperies to be the responsibility of a single theatrical drapery sub-contractor that shall own and operate their own scenic studio for the fabrication of stage curtains and draperies.

B. Pre-installation Meetings 1. Reference Division 1– General Requirements for pre-installation meeting requirements.


A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be coordinated with the Construction Manager and shall meet all requirements described in Division 1.

B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading 1. All equipment shall be appropriately and substantially packed for shipment. 2. All equipment containers shall clearly indicate the equipment contained, “front”, “top”,

“fragile”, the project name, and theatre site allocation. Include packing and shipping lists for each container.



3. All shipping costs to the job site are the responsibility of the Contractor. The shipping method/company is at the total discretion of the Contractor in order to meet the published project schedules.

C. All drapery shall be boxed in solid plywood crates and shipped on pallets. In no case shall the drapery itself contact any slatted surfaces during shipping.

D. All required weights and pipe battens to be shipped separately from draperies and installed at the job site.

E. Main curtain to be shipped with 2" diameter cardboard tubes inserted into each fold to guard against fabric crushing.

F. Acceptance at Site 1. Coordinate responsibility for acceptance of material and equipment at job site with the

Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for acceptance of the draperies at the jobsite,

confirming that all quantities and counts are correct and for keeping accurate logs and records of such information.

G. Storage and Protections 1. Upon delivery, the materials shall be stored under cover in a dry and clean location, off the

ground. Delivered materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation shall be removed from the job site and replaced with acceptable materials.

2. Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all equipment and materials which are damaged during storage or handling.

1.08 HANG-OUT AND STRAIGHTENING

A. All draperies shall be prehung for stretch and final length and trim prior to delivery. This shall be done at the scenic studio or at the job-site given clean conditions.

B. Upon installation and in accordance with the Project and the Contractor’s schedule, all draperies shall be given 2 weeks “hang-out” period on site prior to final acceptance. Steam-out of wrinkles and creases will only be permitted with prior approval.


A. Existing Conditions 1. Verify all conditions at job site. Promptly report variations and obstructions to the Architect.

All additions and or corrections are to be requested prior to fabrications.

B. Field Measurements 1. Field measurements shall be taken prior to preparation of shop drawings to ensure proper

fitting of work. Allow for adjustments during installation whenever taking field measurements.

2. Should field measurement of site conditions alter the design or installation of system elements from the approved shop drawings, revised shop drawings shall be reissued for review.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. The installation of the equipment in this section shall not begin until the completion of work which may be in conflict with the installation including:



NEW HOPE, MN


1. Theatrical rigging linesets 2. Drapery tracks 3. Painting of fly tower 4. Finishing of stage floor 5. Finish, electrical, mechanical and fire protection work in related work areas.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant materials and workmanship of systems and equipment installed as free of defects. The Contractor shall guarantee in writing the repair or replacement within 30 days of any item found defective during a period of 1-year following date of final acceptance. Ordinary wear and defects due to improper usage are excepted.

B. During the warranty period, all emergency conditions where systems failures may be hazardous or may cause severe hardship or cancellation of performances shall be responded to within 24 hours. Immediate action shall be undertaken to ensure the safety of the audience and the performers.


1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials 1. Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish the following to match those

installed and taken from the same production run, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. a. All fabric remnants from the manufacture of the theatrical draperies are to be packed

and shipped to the Owner as part of the theatrical drapery package.

1.13 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION

A. Curtains and masking to be operated for approval. Curtains shall be inspected for construction, hang and proper masking by the Architect and Theater Consultant.

B. Necessary adjustments or modifications shall be made as required.

C. Owner’s designated staff or representatives shall be instructed in the safe operation, servicing, care and maintenance of all items.

D. Test and instruction to be scheduled in conformance with project construction schedules and the availability of Architect, Theater Consultant and Owner.

E. Cost of re-inspection and additional testing by the Architect and/or Theater Consultant, if required, due to lack of completion and/or errors and omissions shall be paid by the drapery contractor or the general contractor respective to the area of work concerned. This work will be conducted on a time and material basis, including the Architect’s and Theater Consultant’s standard hourly rates and shall be scheduled and approved in writing prior to the re-inspection/testing session between 1) The Architect, Theater Consultant and the Owner, and 2) the Owner and the contractor(s).

1.14 STANDARD OF QUALITY

A. The contractor is obligated to inspect all fabric purchased for drapery construction prior to layout, cutting and sewing. Commencement of work using yard goods shall imply the



assumption of all responsibility for the fitness and merchantability of these yard goods and their use for stage draperies. Should the following standards of quality not be met, in the judgment of the Architect and Theatre Consultant upon inspection of the finished draperies, all costs for replacement of draperies deemed non-compliant with the specifications shall be at the Contractor’s cost, including all component materials, labor for construction of replacement draperies, shipping, re-hanging and re-inspection by the Architect and Theatre Consultant.

B. In all cases, fabrics are to be “first quality”. In no case shall “seconds” or re-dyed fabric be acceptable.

C. All velour fabric to be free of crush marks, nap irregularities, and any other abnormal markings.

D. All fabrics to be vat-dyed with no variation of color or pigment impregnation. There shall be no evidence of streaking or color variation. Verification of fabric quality is the responsibility of the fabricator prior to approval.

E. There shall be no chemical leach-out or crystallization from the flameproofing process allowed. All flameproofing must be done at the mill. No flameproofing will be acceptable after drapery fabrication without prior approval.

F. Materials to be through-flameproofed to conform to local, state and national codes. Affidavits from fabric manufacturer, jobber or other agent required to test flameproofing of the fabrics and methods used must accompany drapery upon delivery. Duplicate copies to be sewn to the upper edge in the offstage corner of each piece of drapery goods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. To establish comparative standards of quality, the draperies and installation indicated herein shall be by one of the following manufacturers or approved equal prior to bid:

J.R.Clancy 7041 Interstate Island Road Syracuse, NY 13209-9713 800-836-1885

Norcostco 825 Rhode Island Ave. South Minneapolis, MN 55426 (763)506-8800

Rose Brand 517 West 35th St. New York, NY 10001 (800) 223-1624

Stage Decoration and Supply 3519 Associate Drive Greensboro, NC 27405 (800) 547-8243



NEW HOPE, MN


2.02 MAIN DRAPERY

A. The face material of the drapery shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. 100% polyester Inherently Flame Retardant (IFR) velour. 2. Acceptable products:

a. Rosebrand 25oz. ‘Prestige’ b. JB Martin 25oz. ‘Dante’ c. Fred Krieger 25oz. ‘Epic’ d. Or approved equal

3. The color shall be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standard color choices.

B. Entire drapery shall be continuous, finished with 100% fullness box pleated and sewn down.

C. Box pleats at top shall be 1'-0” O.C. reinforced with heavy weight 3½” jute or 3” heavy weight black polypropylene webbing.

D. Vertical seams to be located so as to be hidden behind pleats

E. Sew with nylon thread. Color to match face material. Thread shall have no apparent sheen with relationship to the velour.

F. Line with black IFR lining fabric. Tack lining to face material by sewing cording between each face material seam and the lining material at 4'-0" on center vertically. Tack lining to face material hems every 4'-0" on center horizontally in a similar fashion. 1. Acceptable Products

a. “Avora Lining” by Rosebrand b. “Poly Chintz” by Rosebrand c. or equal IFR lining fabric

G. Main Drapery Construction: 1. Two panels for bi-part action, with continuous border as indicated on drawings. 2. Sew with nylon thread. Color to match face material. Thread shall have no apparent

sheen with relationship to the velour. 3. The center edges of each panel faced back with a full width of fabric plus 1'-0” (minimum)

and hand-tacked entire height with continuous catch stitching spaced 4” apart, seizing lining and facing material.

4. Offstage edges faced back 6”. 5. Provide a paging handle for the upstage curtain panel of each bi-parting curtain set. The

paging handle shall be located on the back face of the onstage side of the panel with the point of attachment located 48” above the bottom of the curtain.

6. Each handle to be fabricated of a 12” loop of velour face material which is sewn around a core of heavy-duty 2” cotton webbing.

7. Each handle to be stitched to the back of the center edge of the panel and seized in the stitching where the face material is turned back. Sewing for the attachment of the handle shall not be visible on the face of the curtain panel

8. Box pleats at top of panels 1'-0” O.C. reinforced with heavy weight 3½” jute or 3” heavy weight black polypropylene webbing. Vertical seams to be located so as to be hidden behind pleats.

9. At center of each pleat on main drape, provide 1” cadmium plated rigid eye snap hook attached by nylon webbing strap sewn through curtain and webbing. This assembly shall be centered on the webbing. Provide double layer of webbing (3” square) at snap hook locations.



10. 6” double-turned bottom hems with 0.75 lb per foot weighted tape in a separate pocket inside hem. Continuous chain of equal weight, sewn in, acceptable. Weight pocket to be 1” short of finished hem for house curtain. Ends of weight pockets to be secured with 1½” wide black hook-and-loop fastener for the full height of the pocket opening.

11. Weights shall be shipped separately from draperies and installed in weight pockets in the field.

12. A pull-line or tape shall be placed within each weight pocket prior to shipping. The pull line shall be provided to facilitate installation of weights in the field.

13. Sizes and quantities as indicated on drawings

2.03 STAGE MASKING BORDERS, SIDE TABS AND TRAVELERS

A. The face material of the stage masking curtains shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Provide 100% polyester Inherently Flame Retardant (IFR) velour 2. Acceptable products:

a. Rosebrand 22oz. ‘Encore’ b. JB Martin 22oz. ‘Dante’ c. Fred Krieger 22oz. ‘Prism’ d. Or approved equal

3. The color of all stage masking draperies shall be black.

B. Entire drapery shall be continuous, finished with 50% fullness box pleated and sewn down.

C. Box pleats at top shall be 1'-0” O.C. reinforced with heavy weight 3½” jute or 3” heavy weight black polypropylene webbing.

D. Vertical seams to be located so as to be hidden behind pleats

E. Sew with nylon thread or cotton thread. Color to match face material. Thread shall have no apparent sheen with relationship to the fabric.

F. Edges of side masking and the off stage edge of traveler panels are to be faced back with 6” of fabric. Edges of borders and tabs with 2” hems. Hand-tack entire height with continuous catch stitching spaced 4” apart.

G. The on stage edge of travelers are to be faced back 6” minimum.

H. Tops reinforced with 3½” jute or 3” heavy weight black polypropylene webbing with #2 black oxide finish brass grommets, 6” O.C.; double grommets at both ends. Center grommets on webbing. Provide double layer of webbing (3½” square) at each grommet at travelers (not required for borders). Masking borders and tabs to be marked with centerline designation on heavy-duty muslin with permanent markings, sewn securely to webbing. 2” high letters minimum. Provide one 2'-0” black #4 cotton braided tie line at each grommet. Center tie line to be white on masking borders and tabs. Finish ends of tie lines to prevent unraveling.

I. Bottoms of all masking to have 6” double-turned hems with 0.75 lb. per foot weighted tape or continuous chain in separate pocket inside hem. Weight pocket to be 1” short of finished hem for full height masking and equal to finished hem for borders. Ends of weight pockets to be secured with 1½” wide black hook-and-loop fastener for the full height of the pocket opening.

J. Weights shall be shipped separately from draperies and installed in weight pockets in the field.

K. A pull-line or tape shall be placed within each weight pocket prior to shipping. The pull line shall be provided to facilitate installation of weights in the field.



NEW HOPE, MN


L. Sizes and quantities as indicated on drawings.

2.04 CYCLORAMA

A. Material: White leno cyclorama cloth, fabricated without seams.

B. Where the specified height of the cyclorama precludes the use of a single piece of leno, one horizontal seam near the top of the cyclorama will be acceptable.

C. Edges to have 3” double-stitched seams.

D. Top reinforced with 3½” jute webbing. #2 brass grommets and white braided cotton tie lines 1'-0” O.C., double grommets at ends. Mark center of drape on webbing.

E. Bottom to have 4” triple hem. White ribbon ties at 1'-0” O.C. for 1” nominal pipe batten triple stitched to top of hem. 1'-0” jute webbing sewn into ends of hems with two grommets 4” apart at corners. Provide slots in the back of the hem for installing pipe weight.

F. Provide grommets at sides, 1'-0” O.C.

G. Sizes and quantities as indicated on drawings.

H. Provide 1” nominal diameter painted pipe for bottom of cyclorama.

I. Provide 2” flat strap sling with oval link and snap hook every 2’-0” of cyclorama length to allow the cyclorama to be gathered and stored on the batten.

2.05 DRAPERY “PROTECTIVE” WRAPS

A. Provide one protective wrap for each drape that touches the ground

B. The 5’-0” tall protective wrap shall wrap completely around the drapery section and fasten anywhere in its length using a series of continuous 1 ½” Velcro strips. The wrap shall have no bottom.

C. See drawing for construction

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Construction to conform to the best trade practices and to the requirements outlined herein.

B. Each drapery to have identification tag sewn to the jute webbing at the upper edge of the goods, offstage corner. Identification tag should contain the following information: 1. Fabricator's Name 2. Fabricator's Date 3. Finished size of goods 4. Recommended cleaning instructions

C. Fabric runs to be full height without joints or intermediate seams.

D. In no case shall a seam between fabric runs fall directly at the finished end of a piece of goods. Provide 1'-0" minimum from end of goods to a seam, either on the front or back face.



E. Nap of velour sewn up on main curtain and border and down on all black masking borders, travelers and tabs unless otherwise specified.

F. Ends of chain and pipe pockets to be closed with 1½" wide hook and loop fasteners minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. The work on this section shall be installed by an experienced installer in the employ of the successful manufacturer of the Part 2 equipment.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: The Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which the equipment is to be installed and shall notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. The Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which the Variable Acoustic draperies are to be installed and shall notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.03 ERECTION / INSTALLATION

A. Materials to be through-flameproofed to conform to local codes.

B. Install all work in this section in accordance with the Architect's direction, specifications, approved shop drawings, pertinent project drawings, established trade practices and applicable code requirements.

C. Install all work securely, complete with all bolts, nuts, washers, clips, fittings, supports, and other items required for proper installation and operation.

D. Position all items accurately as indicated on drawings and true to plumb, line and level. Maintain maximum headroom and clearances at all points.


A. The installation of the equipment indicated in this section shall be supervised by qualified personnel who are regularly employed by the Contractor for supervision of equipment installation similar to that indicated herein.

B. Arrange for all tests and inspections required by the General Conditions.


A. Upon installation and in accordance with the Owner's and the rigging contractor's schedule, all draperies shall be given an adequate “hang-out” period prior to final acceptance. Steam-out of wrinkles and creases will only be permitted with prior approval.



NEW HOPE, MN


B. All unnecessary equipment and materials shall be removed from the area(s) of this work upon completion, removed from the jobsite and disposed of legally at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Installed equipment to be operated for approval, and inspected for quality by the Architect and the Owner.

B. Adjustments or modifications shall be made as directed by the Architect and the Theatre Consultant.

C. Following the equipment demonstration, inspection and final adjustments, the Owner's designated staff or representatives shall be instructed in the use, care and maintenance of all items.

D. Tests and instruction to be scheduled in conformance with project construction schedules and the availability of the Architect and the Owner.

E. Cost of re-inspection and additional testing by the Architect or Theatre Consultant, if required, due to lack of completion and/or errors and omissions shall be paid by the Contractor or the General Contractor respective to the area of work concerned. This work will be conducted on a time and materials basis, including standard hourly rates, and shall be scheduled and approved in writing prior to the re-inspection/testing session between the Architect, Theatre Consultant, the Owner, and the contractor(s). All travel expenses, if required, shall be provided.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Suitable precautions shall be taken to protect the equipment in this section from damage after installation and prior to acceptance by the Owner.

B. Remove all equipment protection and clean all components thoroughly prior to the demonstration session.

END OF SECTION 11 61 43



Construction Documents BP-3 11 61 63 - 1Addendum No. 2 THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS

SECTION 11 61 63THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work in this section includes but is not limited to the furnishing and commissioning of thetheatrical and architectural lighting control systems consisting of the following major elementsand associated accessories:1. Theatrical dimmer racks and modules2. Theatrical equipment racks3. Architectural house lighting system components4. Theatrical Lighting Control Consoles and receptacles.5. Ethernet data network system components6. Control System Wiring Devices.7. Theatrical Lighting Wiring Devices.8. Emergency Lighting Transfer Equipment9. Accessories.10.All materials, components and services required to provide the work as specified herein,

elsewhere in the project documents and as shown on related drawings.11.The work in the section includes consulting and coordinating with other effected work and

contractors throughout the course of the work contained herein.

B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section1. The following equipment shall be supplied under this section and installed under Division 26:

a. Theatrical Equipment Racks.b. Architectural/Houselight Control Stations.c. Control System Wiring Devices.d. Control System Network Devices, as follows:

1) Nodes.2) Power supplies.

e. Theatrical Lighting Wiring Devices2. Portable Control Devices or Control Device Enclosures, as follows:

a. Control System Processor/Computer.b. Control Console(s) and Monitors.c. Portable cables

3. Termination of control system conductors shall be made Electrical Contractor under thedirect onsite supervision of the Contractor for this section of work.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Coordinate with all related sections of the specifications including, but not limited to:1. Section 11 61 33 – Theatrical Rigging Systems2. Section 11 61 43 – Theatrical Draperies3. Section 11 61 73 – Theatrical Lighting Fixtures4. Section 11 61 83 – Theatrical Audio Video Systems5. Division 22 – Plumbing6. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning7. Division 26 – Electrical8. Section 26 05 83 – TSE Systems Electrical Requirements


11 61 63 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS Addendum No. 2

1.03 ALTERNATES

A. Provide bid-alternate pricing for MA dot2 XL-F console rather than ETC Ion XE 20 console asdescribed herein.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms1. The following abbreviations and acronyms are relevant to this Section and are in addition to

those defined in Division 01.a. CCT – Contract Compliance Testingb. AISC: American Institute of Steel Constructionc. ANSI – American National Standards Institute.d. ATP – Acceptance Testing Procedures.e. AWG – American Wire Gauge.f. DMX or DMX 512: ANSI E1.11 - 2008, USITT DMX512-Ag. IEEE – Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers.h. ETL – Equipment Testing Laboratories.i. NFPA: National Fire Protection Associationj. NEC: National Electric Codek. IEEE: Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineersl. FAT – Factory Acceptance Test.m. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Associationn. TIA/EIA: Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Associationo. TSE – Theatre and Stage Equipment.p. UL – Underwriters Laboratories.q. USITT – United States Institute for Theatre Technology.

B. Definitions1. In all cases where a device or a part of equipment is referred to in a singular manner within

the contract documents, it is intended that such a reference shall include all devicesrequired to complete the installation in accordance with the project documents.

2. “Architect”: All references to the “Architect” will refer to the process by which the indicatedaction or decision regarding the work in this section will be administered. All such actionsshall be initiated with or by the Project Architect, who will disseminate all pertinentinformation and documents to, as well as coordinate all efforts and site visits with, theTheater Consultant and all other project consultants who may have design responsibilityrelating to the work in this section.

3. “Theater Consultant”: Auerbach Pollock Friedlander. The Theater Consultant will be party toall actions and decisions regarding the work in this section.

4. “Other Project Consultants”: Electrical Engineer, Structural Engineer as is applicable to aparticular issue.

5. “Contractor”: Specialty contractor/manufacturer for the work contained in this section only.Contractors involved with other portions of the work shall be indicated with a specific tradepreceding the word “Contractor” (i.e. General, Electrical.).

6. "Owner": Authorized personnel representing Cooper High School.7. “Furnish”: Purchase and/or fabricate and deliver to project site.8. “Install”: Physically install the items in their proper location(s) on the project site.9. “Provide”: Furnish and install complete, functioning and “complete with all necessary

accessories” (CWANA)

C. Reference Standards1. References to code, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies,

trade organizations and governmental agencies will refer to the latest edition of such




publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. Such codes and standardswill be considered a part of this specification as if they were fully included herein.

2. If a code or standard permits work of lesser quality or extent than this specification, thisspecification and the related drawings will govern.

3. Comply with prevailing local codes and Underwriters Laboratory standards.4. Comply with national, regional and local labor regulations and requirements.5. Contractor shall know, understand and comply with Regulatory Requirements in New Hope,

MN that govern the installation, engineering and testing of equipment in this Section.6. Equipment to be installed or permanently connected must be UL listed and labeled, or

certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as ETL.7. The following standards apply to the work of this section. It remains the contractor’s

responsibility to confirm and comply with all industry standards that are applicable to thework of this of this section.

8. Underwriters Laboratoriesa. UL 1008

9. Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineersa. IEEE 802.3afb. IEEE 802.3atc. IEEE 802.3z

10.Illuminating Engineering Society of North America11.American National Standards Institute

a. ANSI E1.11 - 2008, USITT DMX512-Ab. ANSI E1.17-2010, Architecture for Control Networksc. ANSI E1.20, Remote Device Management Over DMX512 Networks

12.Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Associationa. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A

1) Category 5E Standard13.ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B

a. Category 6 Standard14.American Institute of Steel Construction

a. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings15.National Electrical Manufacturers Association


A. Coordination1. Review project Electrical and Theatrical series drawings. Verify that systems components

provided by the work of this Section are compatible with the conduit sizes and wire gaugesizes as shown on the drawings and that the interconnectivity of components is as requiredto provide a fully functioning system in conformance with the requirements of this Section. If additional information or correction of the documents is required in order to provide afully functioning system, within 30 calendar days of award of contract, submit a Request forInformation (RFI) in accordance with the Project Procedures. If no RFI is submitted within30 calendar days of award of contract it will be construed as acceptance of the ContractDocuments and costs associated with additions to the scope of the electrical work becauseof insufficient wire count and/or sizes shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting1. Refer to Division 01 - General Requirements for information regarding pre-installation

meeting with the Construction Manager.2. There shall be one meeting, in a location to be determined. This meeting shall take place

within two weeks of award of contract. The Contractor and the Contractor’s ProjectManager are required to be present.



3. Additional meetings shall be required should the project equipment delivery and testingmilestone not be met. The cost of attendance at additional meetings shall be at theexpense of the Contractor.

C. Sequencing and Scheduling1. The installation of theatrical lighting system wiring devices shall not occur until painting in the

area is complete.2. The installation of computer grade network components, dimmer rack processors and

modules, and any other equipment sensitive to construction debris and dust shall not beinstalled until debris and dust has been removed. Typical finished “office” cleanliness shallbe required, and must be continuously maintained in rooms in which computer gradeequipment is to be installed.

3. The installation of computer grade network components, dimmer rack processors andmodules, and any other valuable equipment shall not be installed until equipment roomsare continuously secure.

4. The unpacking and installation of theatrical lighting consoles and peripheral devices shall notoccur until the control room is continuously secure, dust and debris free and climatecontrolled.

5. Equipment provided under this Section shall be maintained in a dust free state, by protectivewrapping between the time of completion of installation and the beginning ofcommissioning and from the end of commissioning and Contract Compliance Testing untilturn-over to the Owner.

1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

B. Product Data1. Where standard manufactured parts are used, submit current product literature describing

component, manufacturer’s recommended applications, load ratings, safety factors, anddimensions.

2. Clearly indicate specific component and applicable options.

C. Shop Drawings1. Prepare shop drawings based on accurate field measurements.

a. Should field measurements necessitate significant modifications to the contractdocuments notify the Architect prior to beginning shop drawings.

2. Include a cover sheet with a drawing index including the sheet number and title for eachsheet in the set.

3. Show equipment properly located, dimensioned and labeled. Note work of other Sections inthe vicinity, which may affect work in this Section.

4. Provide an inventory of equipment to be supplied, including quantities, manufacturer’s partnumber, and reference to applicable drawings.

5. Provide complete, fully dimensioned, large scale detailed fabrication drawings of majorcomponents.

6. Provide requisite schematics, plans, and sections indicating assembly and installation ofcomponents.

7. Provide indications by arrow and boxed caption of variations from contract drawings andspecifications, except where variation is indicated as acceptable.

8. Provide power requirements, one-line riser diagrams, and installation circuit diagrams forelectrical equipment. Show required wire sizes and counts between components.

9. Shop drawings for power-related equipment shall state that the scope of Division 26Electrical has been reviewed for coordination of wire types to be provided and that the




equipment shown has been engineered to accommodate serviceable and workman-liketerminations which are code compliant. Coordination shall include, but not be limited to:a. Conduit knockouts.b. Dimmer rack feeder sizes.c. Dimmer rack load wire lugs.d. Dimmer rack bussing.e. Architectural and Work lighting control groups, circuiting, dimmer numbers and

addressing.f. Wiring device terminal strips.g. Equipment mounting conditions.

D. Samples1. Furnish samples of device finishes that are to be located in front of house, public areas.2. Furnish a Sample of system components for which a substitution is requested.

E. Qualification Statements1. Contractor:

a. As part of the bid package submit the following information:1) Provide the name and position of the Contractor’s Project Manager for the

work of this Section. This Project Manager shall be the key contact person forwork of this Section during the entire course of the project.

b. For Contractor NOT listed under Part 2 of this Section submit the following informationin accordance with Project Procedures.1) Statements of financial responsibility for past five fiscal years showing assets

and liabilities.2) List of principal officers and design and service engineers in an organizational

structure flow chart.3) List of not less than five projects of similar size and scope completed within

the five years on which the manufacturer has provided full services: productengineering, shop drawings, manufacture, installation, and commissioning. Ineach instance indicate specifics of scope of fabrication and installation.Include a contact list: name, address, and phone numbers of person(s)directly responsible for operation and maintenance of equipment in eachfacility.

4) List of current projects and approximate contract value and completion dates.Include list of names, phone numbers, and addresses of owner, owner’srepresentatives, and architect.a) For each above described project, list of names of persons who

supervised preparation of shop drawings, fabrication of components,and installation of equipment.

5) List of names of persons who would do project management, productengineering, supervision of shop drawings, and supervision of installationshould this contract be awarded.

6) Contract Bond Company information indicating that the Contactor has bondingcapacity for full duration of the project. Include list of other bonded projectscoinciding with this project.

7) Evidence of ability to undertake custom product engineering to meet specificrequirements of project specifications. Provide sample project engineeringdrawings for custom products and contact information for facility operatorswhere those products have been installed.



1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Installation Instructions:1. Supply specific, detailed installation instructions to the Div. 26 Contractor as required for

proper installation of Lighting Control System equipment, coordinated with actual siteconditions.

B. Installation Inspection Reports:1. Supply reports confirming that elements of installation by Division 26 conform to

requirements of the Theatrical Lighting Control System as engineered, and specifiedherein. Submit these reports to the Architect 15 days prior to CCT.

1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data1. Submit documents in the format specified in Section01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance

Data.2. In addition to the content required by Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data,

included the following information:a. Complete parts list for all equipment and a list of telephone numbers for the authorized

parts and service distributors.b. Recommended maintenance schedule for component parts that may need periodic

replacement or maintenance.c. Recommendations for cleaning, maintaining and touch-up of all finished surfaces.d. Warranties as described herein and elsewhere in Section 01 78 23 – Warranties.e. A master sheet of all pass codes, passwords and access codes used in the system.

3. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to CCT. The copy will bereturned after CCT, with the Owner’s Representative’s comments. Revise content ofdocuments as required prior to final submittal.

B. Warranty Documentation1. Provide documentation of warranties associated with the work of this Section in accordance

with Section 01 78 23– Warranties.

C. Record Documentation1. Submit As-Built Drawings in accordance with Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.2. Provide complete systems commissioning documentation as described herein.3. Testing reports:

a. Three (3) weeks prior to scheduled Contract Compliance Testing Procedures (CCTP)events, provide a schedule of completed tests as described herein, including, but notlimited to, the following:1) Provide Dimmer System voltage drop test report including a schedule of

dimmed and non-dimmed circuits and their adjusted output voltage at thereceptacle.

2) Provide Ethernet (UTP) System test report including cable lengths (max. 275feet).

3) Provide Ethernet (Fibers) test report.


A. Qualifications1. Contractor

a. Refer to Part 2 of this Section.





A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements1. Provide products appropriately and substantially packed for shipment.

a. Equipment containers shall clearly indicate the equipment contained, "front", "top","fragile", and the project name.

b. Include packing and shipping lists for each container.2. Shipping costs to the job site are the responsibility of the Contractor. The shipping

method/company is at the total discretion of the Contractor in order to meet the publishedproject schedules.

3. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements related to the packaging and delivery ofproducts to site.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements1. Upon delivery, store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground.2. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements related to the storage and handling of

products.3. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that equipment delivered to site is stored and

protected appropriately.

C. Packing Waste Management1. Refer to Division 01 for requirements related to packaging waste management.

1.11 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient Conditions1. Verify conditions at job site match those indicated in the contract documents, and promptly

report variations and obstructions to the Architect. Request additions and/or correctionsprior to approval of shop drawings.

B. Existing Conditions1. Verify all conditions at jobsite. Promptly report variations and obstructions to the Architect

and General Contractor. All additions and or corrections are to be requested prior tofabrications.

2. Prior to start of installation, the Contractor shall visit the site and notify the Architect in writingof any conditions that are inappropriate or unsafe for an efficient installation. The Architectmay consider conditions acceptable by the Contractor in the absence of written notice.

C. Environmental Requirements1. Equipment is classified according to its susceptibility to construction conditions that may

affect its operation. Classes shall be defined by the following paragraphs:a. Class 1:

1) Cable and distribution apparatus, structural elements, electrical back boxes,face plates, terminal boxes, and empty equipment rack frames may be storedin weather protected spaces under "normal" construction site conditionsprovided that no electronic components are contained within devices. Storageboxes shall be sturdy and well-sealed, and equipment shall be protected withimperforate inner plastic sheeting.

2) Contractor may install this class of equipment in weather-protected spacesunder "normal" construction site conditions provided that equipment isprotected from dust and moisture by sturdy imperforate plastic sheeting andcompletely covered with corrugated cardboard held securely in place by duct



tape. Cardboard covers shall not be removed until area is broom cleaned.Under no circumstances shall equipment remain uncovered overnight duringinstallation or while work which causes high dust or moisture levels in area ofplacement is taking place.

b. Class 2:1) Control panels, spare parts, test and other equipment (except as listed under

Class 3), not subject to damage by concrete dust or dirt shall be stored andprotected per Class 1 devices.

2) Contractor shall not install equipment in this class until area of installation isbroom cleaned, "blown" clean with pressurized air, mopped, air conditionedand secure. Contractor may install control panels with electronic componentsunder Class 1 conditions, but electronic components must be removed andnot installed until area of installation meets Class 2 conditions.

c. Class 3:1) Control and panels consoles, filled equipment racks and other electronic

equipment shall not be shipped to site until the rack and control rooms arefinished, air conditioned, dust free, broom and mop cleaned, secure, and in allrespects complete and ready for occupation. This class of equipment shall notbe unpacked until the system is complete in all other respects. Under nocircumstances may any equipment in this class be removed from the rack andcontrol rooms into or through spaces which are not cleaned, air conditioned,and complete.

D. Field measurements1. Reference Division 1 specifications for all tolerance requirements.2. Field measurements shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure proper fitting of work and

prior to preparations of shop drawings. Allow for adjustments during installation whenevertaking field measurements.

3. Should field measurement of site conditions alter the design or installation of systemelements from the approved submittal drawings, revised submittal drawings shall be issuedfor review.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant materials and workmanship of systems and equipment installed asfree of defects. The Contractor shall guarantee in writing the repair or replacement within 14days of any item found defective during a period of 1-year following date of final acceptance.Ordinary wear and defects due to improper usage are excepted.

B. Correct or replace, at no cost to the Owner, any system or part of system found not meeting orexceeding specifications at time of Completion Checkout, or any time during warranty period.

C. During the warranty period, all emergency conditions where systems failures may be hazardousor may cause severe hardship or cancellation of performances shall be responded to within 24hours. Immediate action shall be undertaken to ensure the safety of the audience and theperformers.

D. During the warranty period, all non-emergency conditions that do not affect the performance ordress rehearsal schedule shall be responded to within 7 calendar days.

E. Refer to Division 1 – Guarantees, Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts.F. Correction Period:

1. One year following the date of final acceptance, a factory trained and certified field servicetechnician in the employ of the Contractor will examine, adjust, and repair the equipmentincluded in this Section as required. This service will not cover adjustments, repairs, orreplacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse, or accidents caused by personsother than the Contractor. Labor and materials required to perform this service will meet orexceed these specifications and will not compromise the performance of the equipment.




2. Following this inspection and maintenance service, provide the Architect with a written reportitemizing the results of the inspections and the warranty work conducted. Include in thewritten report recommendations for any corrective actions that the Contractor feels shouldbe taken with respect to the equipment included in this Section, but are outside the scopeof the warranty agreement.

1.13 SOFTWARE UPDATES

A. Provide, at no cost to the Owner, any software updates of the operating programs of anyspecified control consoles through end of the warranty period.

B. Provide, at no cost to the Owner, for the life of the console, any software updates of theoperating programs of any specified control consoles issued to correct "bugs" identified in theconsole operations.

C. The Owner shall be allowed a 60-day trial of each new software package with option to rejectthe new operating program for any reason.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The system shall be comprised of professional quality components. Manufacturers shall be aslisted per item.

B. Primary dimming control shall be by a single manufacturer. Contact information formanufacturers of key system elements is provided below for convenience of the Contractor onlyand should not be considered definitive of all specified manufacturers.1. The complete and functional Lighting System shall be provided by:

Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.3031 Pleasant View RoadMiddleton, WI 53562(800) 688-4116

C. Manufacturers of secondary control equipment including architectural control interfaces,Ethernet distribution equipment, DMX 512 distribution equipment, and control and power cableshall be as specified herein.

2.02 CONTRACTORS

A. Furnish services described herein including but not limited to coordination and supervision ofthe engineering, submittal drawings, fabrication, installation and provision for systems specifiedshown in the drawings.

B. Design and fabricate custom equipment required under work of this Section.C. Acceptable Contractors: To establish comparative standards of quality the provision of the

equipment and services of this section shall be one of the following:

Gopher Stage Lighting4141 Cedar Avenue SouthMinneapolis, Minnesota, 55407(612) 871-0138

Norcostco - MN



825 Rhode Island Avenue SouthMinneapolis, Minnesota, 55426-1611(763) 544-0601

Barbizon Lighting Company2525 N. Elston Avenue, D220,Chicago, Illinois 60647 (773) 276-8500

D. Substitution Limitations1. Other Contractors:

a. Submit substitution request in accordance with Section 01 25 00 – Substitutions andProduct Options and Part 1 of this Section.

E. Qualifications1. The Contractor shall have been in the theatrical lighting distribution and installation business

continuously for a minimum of ten (10) years and shall have provided complete engineeringand installation services on a minimum of five (5) jobs of similar size and scope in the pastfive (5) years.

2. The Contractor shall maintain a full-time factory trained and certified field engineering staffavailable in the New Hope, MN area of at least two people who are available on anemergency basis and are trained in electronic lighting control systems and Ethernetsystems services.

3. Contractor must have a minimum of five (5) projects with a contract value of minimum$150,000

4. Contractor must have the ability to undertake the work within the time available, judgedagainst other currently contracted work.

5. Contractor must have the ability to meet specifications and project requirements.

F. State of the art development1. Furnish only the latest developed appropriate product. In cases where product development

surpasses the criteria of this specification, inform the Architect and make the newer productavailable to the project at no additional cost. This same requirement applies to controlconsole programs developed/updated during the warranty period. In no case shalldiscontinued or obsolete equipment be acceptable.a. Should a newer product be suggested as a substitution for a discontinued product, or

for a product that is in process of being phased out of production, that newer productwill be offered at no additional cost.

b. Submit as a substitution request in accordance with 01 25 00 – Substitutions andProduct Options.

c. Products and software listed on their manufacturer’s End of Life, End of Support, orReplacement lists shall not be acceptable. It is the contractor’s responsibility toensure that such products are not furnished.

2. Should product recall by the Manufacturer require temporary or permanent replacement of aproduct specified under this Section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and arrange toreplace the product in question at the earliest possible time.a. Do NOT deliver to the sit equipment found to be defective or subject to recall prior to the

scheduled installation.b. Equipment defect or intended recall shall not relieve the Contractor from the contractual

obligation with regard to delivery schedule of product. In this circumstance,immediate notification shall be made to the Architect. Make arrangements foralternate product at this time.




c. Under no circumstances shall arrangement for alternate product necessarily require theOwner to accept superseded equipment except on a temporary basis.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Equipment and components shall be new and complete. No used or reconditioned equipmentshall be acceptable.

B. Mounting hardware to be included.C. Equipment and components shall be factory tested prior to shipping.D. Bolts and fasteners must be Grade 5 or better.

1. Bolted attachments to have lock washers or other equal self-locking hardware.

E. Internal wiring shall be factory completed and clearly marked. Field connections shall be byconnector, terminal strip or other device specified herein, wirenuts will not be acceptable. Anyterminal strip connections shall be clearly labeled as to terminal designation.

F. Wire sizes and insulation to comply with Underwriters Laboratory standards and local codes.G. Wiring to be harnessed and bound. No loose or randomly routed wires shall be permitted.H. Control wire counts shall include 10% spares (minimum of one).I. Microprocessor controls shall utilize a non-volatile memory. Systems configuration, operating

parameters, preset, etc. shall be protected against system power failure for a minimum of 48hours.

J. No Manufacturer’s logo shall appear on control station faceplates or any other device located inpublic areas.

K. Any supplementary or auxiliary equipment necessary for the operation of the system shall besupplied with overload and short-circuit protection.

2.04 THEATRICAL DIMMING

A. Dimmer racks and dimmer modules1. Provide Theatrical Lighting Dimmer Racks as indicated on the drawings, drawing schedules

and specified herein.a. The entire dimmer rack assembly shall be Underwriters Laboratory listed.b. Provide current limiting fuses as required on all bussed racks.c. Dimmer racks shall be one of the following with all currently advertised or published

features:1) ETC Sensor3 48-Module rack with Advanced Features.2) ETC Sensor3 12-Module rack with Advanced Features

a) Provide with mounting pedestal.2. Provide Dimmer Modules as indicated on the drawings, drawing schedules and specified

herein.a. Selectable output mode modules shall be designed for a choice for dimmed, non-dim, or

hot power on each branch circuit. A single module shall provide:1) Two dimmed outputs with 500 MS rise times, controlled by DMX, or2) Two air gap relay switched outputs controlled by DMX, or3) Two manual bypass constant power circuits controlled manually4) The module may be configured to operate as two dimmers, two relays, or any

combination of relay and dimmer from the CEM3 Power Control Module orfrom an ETC control console connected to a CEM3 system. Any single circuitmay be set to bypass the dimmer using a switch on the front of the module.

b. Modules shall be the following with all currently advertised or published features asindicated in the drawings:1) ETC Sensor3 Thru-Power w/ 500 MS rise time



2) ETC Sensor3 Standard Dimmer Module w/ 500 MS rise time3) Provide ETC Air Flow Modules for any empty slots

3. Provide Dimmer Rack control electronics modules as required.a. The dimmer control electronics shall be capable of being addressed by the IEEE 802.3

Ethernet protocol.1) The dimmer control electronics shall be capable of being addressed by the

USITT DMX 512/1990 protocol when any lighting control console utilizing thesame protocol is plugged into the network. It shall be possible to address anycombination of any dimmers without any reconfiguration of the dimmers in therack or any other type of “change over” between the “house system” and the“visiting system”.

b. Electronics modules shall regulate output voltage of dimmers to remain constant outputRMS voltage as long as input remains over 120V per phase.1) Field adjustment of dimming curve shall not be required.

c. Modules shall be one of the following with all currently advertised or published features:1) ETC CEM3

2.05 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL SYSTEM

A. House Lighting Control System1. House lighting control system shall be a microprocessor-based control system that works in

conjunction with the theatrical lighting control console to set and control house lightinglevels. The system shall also control the remote switching of work lighting circuitsthroughout the auditorium and backstage spaces by interfacing with the DMX controlledwork light relay system. The system shall be controlled remotely with a portable masterstation (Portable House Light Control Console specified herein) with plug-in locationsthroughout the auditorium and backstage spaces.

B. The house lighting control system shall have the following characteristics and functions:1. When in use, the theatrical console shall override preset levels on a highest takes

precedence basis and shall directly control only those dimmed architectural circuits withinthe Auditorium.

2. The circuits in the Auditorium shall operate independently of the dimmed circuits in theLobby.

3. Switching between panels shall not cause flicker or change in lighting levels when setting onpanels or Portable Control console are identical.

4. The system shall be a microprocessor based lighting control system. System operatingprogram shall be stored in electrically erasable programmable read only memory(EEPROM).

5. Data storage facilities shall retain memory for an indefinite period of time. In case of powerfailure, the control module shall retain preset memory for minimum of 72 hours.

6. The House lighting control system allows programming and selection for playback aminimum of 99 different preset lighting states and control of the fade time between presets.

7. The system shall be configured to allow multiple active presets to control work lights, concertlights, and theatrical lights simultaneously through the use of multiple room assignments.

8. Provide control system configuration software operating on a PC platform to allowconfiguration and preset level setting.

9. Provide the quantity of system processors to have the ability to “snapshot” DMX levels fromTheatrical lighting console and record into architectural preset for all DMX assigned valuesincluding dimmed circuits, relay circuits, moving lights and scrollers in the system.

10.Provide:a. ETC Unison Paradigm Architectural System and Software.

C. Architectural Control Panels1. General:




a. Control electronics shall use digital electronic circuitry, be microprocessor based anddesigned specifically for the control. The location, overall dimensions, and quantitiesof control devices as shown on the Drawings.

b. Controls shall be low voltage type and use N.E.C. Class II, low voltage wiring.c. Control cables shall be by:

1) Belden2) Or Equal

d. No manufacture’s logo or other marking shall appear on faceplates unless otherwisenoted.

e. Control devices shall be labeled with appropriate zone and /or scene descriptions.These descriptions shall be furnished to the Manufacturer prior to fabrication. Labelsshall be reverse screened polycarbonate adhesive labels.

2. House Lighting Entry Panel “EP”a. Furnish single pushbutton entry panels in locations as shown on drawings.

1) Station shall recall a designated preset and may be disabled by the mainsystem.

2) Pushbuttons shall be self-illuminated and lit only when “on”.b. The last executed action will take precedence should level information be entered from

more than one source.c. The panel shall function regardless of whether or not the main console is turned on.d. Station shall recall a designated preset and may be disabled by the main system.e. Entry Panels shall be flush or surface mounted panels as indicated on the drawings.

1) Flush mounted panels shall be supplied with a matching backbox.2) Faceplate color as noted in the drawings

f. Button labels/engraving to be coordinated/verified with the owner’s representative andTheatre Consultant prior to fabrication

3. House Lighting Preset Panel “PP”a. Five (5) rear illuminated, momentary contact pushbuttons. The pushbuttons shall enact

recall presets stored in memory in the architectural lighting control processor.b. All stations assigned to control a room shall mimic the command actions from the other

stations in that room.c. Entry Panels shall be flush or surface mounted panels as indicated on the drawings.

1) Flush mounted panels shall be supplied with a matching backbox.2) Faceplate color as noted in the drawings

d. Button labels/engraving to be coordinated/verified with the owner’s representative andTheatre Consultant prior to fabrication

4. House Lighting Panel (HL)a. The panel shall have a backlit user customizable liquid crystal display with user

interface touch screen face-plate.b. The panel shall have multiple pages as follows to allow control of:

1) Master levels of each recorded preset.2) Individual dimmed channel.3) Preset, level and fade time recording.4) Preset selection and playback.5) Recording of theatrical lighting console output into architectural system

presets.c. House Lighting control panels shall be surface mounted as indicated in the drawings.

1) A lockable cover will be provided as indicated in the drawings.5. Portable House Light (HL) Control Console

a. Provide one (1) Wireless Handheld Houselight Control Console with backlit usercustomizable liquid crystal display with user interface touch screen faceplate in arugged portable enclosure.

b. Provide one (1) Docking Station



2.06 ETHERNET SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Provide a fully operational and properly functioning Ethernet based network distribution system.The intent of these specifications and accompanying drawings is to establish functional andoperational criteria; to establish standards of quality of materials, components andworkmanship; and to establish specific procedures and obligations with respect to thefabrication and installation of the network equipment and components.1. Provide department concentrator hubs, 100BASE-T hubs, bridges or routers and 19" wide

wall mounting cabinets for components as required for a fully operational Ethernet protocolbased data distribution system as shown on Drawings and as described herein.

2. Provide DMX nodes as shown on drawings and as required for a fully functioning datadistribution system as described herein.

3. Components and manufactured devices shall be selected with preference given to thoseproducts having the greatest published MTBF (mean time before failure) ratings. A veryhigh priority of importance shall be given to the long-term reliability of network components.

B. Network Components1. Provide 100BASE-T hubs for operation of the network system.

a. All terminations of cable shall be under the responsibility of this Section.b. Hubs shall be rack-mounted in the Auxiliary Control Rack (AUX) as described herein.c. All switches shall be PoE.d. Installations in noise sensitive areas (i.e. control booths and stage) shall be fanless.e. Hubs shall utilize “ST” type 100BASE-FL compatible connectors.f. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Cisco Systems2) 3Com3) Dell4) Pathway Connectivity

2. Provide recommended 100BASE-T Category 5e twisted pair type designation andrecommended conduit size and bend radius to accommodate such cable runs that areoptimum for the system as described.a. 100BASE-T Category 5e twisted pair cable, cable pull, and conduit shall be by Division

26.3. If required, provide 100BASE-T Concentrator Hubs for operation of the network system.

a. Hubs shall support IEEE 802.3i Type 100BASE-T standard.b. Concentrator hubs shall be equipped with fiber optic transceiver modules for connection

to Fiber Optic Hubs, if separate fiber optic hubs are required.c. Connection to the network patch bay shall be made with patch cables supplied with RJ-

45 connectors on each end.d. Hubs shall have front panel LED's that shall report hub traffic, collisions, management

control and expansion status. Per port LED's shall indicate link and partition statusfor individual connections.

e. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) Cisco systems2) 3Com3) Dell

4. Provide a Category 5e twisted pair Patch Bay(s) for termination of Category 5e twisted pairwire leads.a. Terminations of Category 5e twisted pair cable shall be under the responsibility of this

Section.b. Patch cords as required for connection between the patch bay (or bays) and hubs,

terminated with RJ-45 connectors on either end, shall be provided under theresponsibility of this Section.1) Patch cords shall be provided in the shortest length possible for the rack

configuration to minimize the need for cable management.




2) A patch cord shall be provided for every port in the patch bay.c. Any unused spaces in the patch bay shall be filled with a bank cap. In no instance will

open spaces be acceptable.d. Port ID panels shall be powder coated aluminum with rolled edges. Labels shall be self-

adhesive, reverse screened polycarbonate with 1/8” high text.

2.07 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS

A. Provide wireless access point switches (WAP) to provide continuous and consistent access tothe available network using wireless remote lighting control units and laptop computers.1. Provide additional dedicated Ethernet Tap(s) as described herein for connection of WAP to

the Lighting control Network.2. System Ethernet Taps (TC-XX) shall not be utilized for connection of WAP.

B. Wireless switches shall comply with the latest IEEE 802.3 b/g standards.C. Coordinate the Ethernet protocols (and frequencies) with other areas of work (AV, Automation,

Administration, etc) to ensure that the theatrical lighting system has its own dedicated securedchannels and does not broadcast SSID information that would allow the system to becompromised. Set up MAC address filtering if nearby networks require it.

D. Provide a wireless network map showing WAP locations, discreet address, and coordinationwith other wireless networks.

E. Provide each WAP with appropriate mounting hardware and safety tie-offs (as appropriate) perlocation.

F. Provide external antenna connectors for auxiliary antennasG. Provide software to allow management and configuration of WAPs.H. Wireless access point shall be provided with pipe mounting or other appropriate mounting

hardware, power supply and 25’ Ethernet cable.I. Manufacturers

1. Cisco Systems2. 3-Com3. Or Equal

2.08 NETWORK CONTROL RACKS

A. Provide standard, fully enclosed, 19" Sectional Wall Mounted Cabinets or Freestanding FloorMounted Cabinets as required for all network equipment including, but not limited to, Fiber PortHubs, Concentrator Hubs, Patch Bays, and miscellaneous system components. Installation ofequipment rack shall be under Division 26 - Electrical. Install all network components asrequired within equipment racks.

B. Structural features shall include construction of #14 or #16 gauge US Grade steel, one-piecefront and rear sections strengthened with corner angle braces, ventilated reinforced centersection and electric welded seams and miters. Rear section hinges shall have removable pinsto allow independent installation of rear section.

C. In no case shall loose equipment be permanently mounted outside of a protective equipmentrack or cabinet. Equipment racks shall be provided with knockouts as required on top, bottomand sides to allow conduit connection as required.

D. Internal Rack Power1. All equipment in rack shall be protected from power surges via a switched and grounded AC

surge protector. Provide surge protection on the input side of AC receptacle strips.2. Coordinate outlets required by other subcontractors having equipment in the rack.3. Provide minimum of (2) spare AC outlets per rack.4. Quantity: as needed per rack.



5. Uninterrupted power supply (UPS Unit) rated to power all equipment contained in the rack for20 minutes.

E. Rack Lighting1. Provide 1U rack lighting panel with (2) 12” min goosenecks with LED lighting.2. Lighting Panel shall have an on/off switch.3. Goosenecks shall be recessed to allow rack door to close.4. Provide Littlelite RakLite RL-10-D-LED or equal.

F. Cable Management1. Provide brush panels for cable entry/exit and cable management between the network hubs

and the patch panels.2. Provide horizontal lacing bars as required to keep cables neat, to allow for rack door closure

and prevent bending of cables at the connectors.

G. Blank Panels1. It shall be the responsibility of the Theatrical Equipment Contractor(s) to punch, label, mount,

and wire their own control equipment.2. It shall be the responsibility of the Lighting Manufacturer to provide finished, blank panels,

complete with rack-mounting holes and hardware to the other Theatrical EquipmentContractors for their equipment as indicated.

3. Coordinate with other systems and trades including, but not limited to, mechanized riggingsystems, Sound Video and Communications systems and work light button stations.

4. Confirm space requirements with other systems and trades in writing prior to fabrication.

H. Labeling1. Label all controls that are contained within this contract as indicated herein, on related

drawings, or as appropriate. All labels to be engraved and white filled lamicoid tags,adhered to surfaces with dry adhesive.

2. Provide seismic restraint of control racks as required.

2.09 CONTROL RACK (CR)

A. Provide a fully enclosed, self-standing Auxiliary Rack located as indicated in the Drawings.B. Other configurations of auxiliary racks or devices shall be acceptable, space permitting.

Coordinate installation requirements with Division 26 - Electrical.C. Auxiliary Equipment rack (CR) shall contain at minimum:

1. Rack Identification panel with rack name and location.2. Credit panel.3. Task Light Panel as described above.4. Architectural Lighting Control Processor as described herein5. System computer as described herein.6. Vent Panel7. Wireless Access Point8. 3RU Locking Drawer9. 4 port rack mounted Ethernet Node(s)10.KVM Pull-out keyboard and monitor11.DMX/Ethernet Network Components:

a. Recessed Network Switch with PoE.b. Recessed Port ID panelsc. Recessed Network Patch Panel

12.Uninterrupted power supply rated to power all equipment contained in this rack for 30minutes.

13.Blank and vent panels as required.




14.Cable management panels and lacing bars as required.15.Other control system components as required per manufacturer.

2.10 DMX NODES

A. DMX nodes will be located as noted on drawings. Nodes shall be connected via the Ethernetdata network on Category 6 wire.

B. XLR connectors at each node shall be able to be configured to output or allow input for any oneframe of DMX 512 with normal assignment being sequential. All nodes indicated in the systemshall be able to operate simultaneously without data collision or corruption while maintainingrecommended minimum and maximum DMX-512/RS485 frame length, packet size and refreshrates.

C. DMX distribution over the data network shall be independent of all devices on the system.Regardless of dedicated production lighting devices that may be connected to the variousnodes, the DMX distribution system shall be configurable from a PC or other independentcontrol device. The PC or other independent control device shall be provided under this section.Saving and loading of the system configuration to disk shall be supported.

D. 1 Port Ethernet Node(s) and DMX output panels (DMX)1. Provide DMX out Nodes as shown on drawings and as required for operation of the system

as described herein.2. DMX out nodes shall be capable of translating Ethernet based protocol into usable signal for

output to plug in peripheral devices employing USITT standard DMX-512/1990 and shallhave (1) female five pin XLR connectors within one node box. These nodes shall complywith IEEE 802.3 standards.a. Label each receptacle with appropriate designations. Labels to be reverse screened

polycarbonate labels. Labels shall be applied to the device with an adhesive suita-ble for adherence to a textured, baked enamel finish under high heat conditions.

3. Each node shall be powered via its Ethernet connection using Power Over Ethernet (IEEE802.3af).

4. DMX out nodes shall be rack mounted in Network racks and wired as indicated on thedrawings.a. Connection of Category 6 at nodes shall be via a RJ-45 connector or what is accepted

as industry standard at the time of the installation.b. Internal components shall be modular in nature and easily replaced as a unit in case of

failure.5. Provide quantities as indicated in drawings

a. ETC Net3 One Port DMX Output Gateway

E. 4 port rack mounted Ethernet Node(s)1. Provide DMX out Nodes as shown on drawings and as required for operation of the system

as described herein.2. DMX out nodes shall be capable of translating Ethernet based protocol into usable signal for

output to plug in peripheral devices employing USITT standard DMX-512/1990 and shallhave (4) female five pin XLR connectors within one node box. These nodes shall complywith all IEEE 802.3 standards.

3. Label each receptacle with appropriate designations. All labels to be engraved with whitecore fill. Provide white acrylic write on surface as shown.

4. Power supply for each node shall be located in the network rack.5. Provide recommended wire type for node power distribution.6. DMX out nodes shall be rack mounted at in Network racks and wired as indicated on the

drawings.7. Connection of Category 6 at nodes shall be via a RJ-45 connector or what is accepted as

industry standard at the time of the installation.



8. Internal components shall be modular in nature and easily replaced as a unit in case offailure.

9. Acceptable Productsa. ETC Net3 4 Port Gateway

2.11 LIGHTING SYSTEMS COMPUTER

A. General:1. Provide a rack mounted computer for diagnostics and monitoring data available through the

lighting control system network and the facility IT network for Internet access.2. Label computers with device name, device number and IP address

a. Adhesive labels shall be legibly laser printed and be defacement and exposureresistant.

b. Labels shall be polyolefin or polyester, white, with adhesive backing. Labels shall be noless than 10mm in height.

3. Computers shall meet or exceed the following criteria4. Intel Duel Core Xeon, 3GHz 4MB cache

a. Latest compatible and supported version of Windows Operating Systemb. 4GB SDRAMc. 160 GB hard drived. 48x CD read/writee. 16x CD/DVD-ROM read/write DVDf. 17” minimum, black, flat panel display monitorg. Monitor dust coverh. 128 MB ATI Radeon video cardi. Serial ports and network interface fully compatible with systemj. (4) USB ports, minimumk. All appropriate software for all uses as outlined herein for all hardware provided,l. Dell or approved substitute

5. Softwarea. Provide one set of the operating system compatible with the proprietary application

software and system configuration.b. System monitoring computers shall be pre-loaded, configured, and tested with at

minimum the following software:1) Wireless Access Point configuration and management software2) Console emulation software.3) Internet Explorer4) Adobe Acrobat reader5) Network Configuration Editing Software6) Architectural Lighting Control System Software7) Theatrical Lighting Network configuration software.8) All user guides and manuals for equipment in Theatrical Lighting Control

System.c. Provide networking software complete with manuals, technical support resources and

CDROM as required allowing on line and off line owner configuration and operationof system parameters and relay panel configuration setting.

2.12 THEATRICAL LIGHTING WIRING DEVICES

A. General1. Coordinate with Division 26 – Electrical.2. Provide all theatrical wiring devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein, for

installation by the Electrical Contractor.3. All wire terminations shall be by the Electrical Contractor.




4. Each receptacle within a wiring device must have a home run to the DMX relay panel andpanel board of its hot and neutral. Circuits with more than one (1) receptacle must beparalleled at the DMX relay panel and panel board. The method of termination must notvoid Underwriters Laboratory listing. Circuits with more than one (1) receptacle within asingle wiring device may be paralleled within the device and require only one (1) home runof the hot and neutral to the DMX relay panel and panel board.

5. Minimize feeder inductance by twisting the hot and neutral conductors in long connectorstrips. Neutral conductor must be at least the same size or greater than the hot conductor.

6. Coordinate size of device, orientation of circuits and mounting detail to suit site condition.7. Devices constructed of sheet metal, finished flat black. Provide requisite mounting holes,

conduit knockouts, etc.8. All 20 amp receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer.9. All 20 amp parallel blade, U-ground receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer.10.Flush mounted female receptacles shall have a screw driven locking spring to ensure firm fit

on face panel.11.Parallel blade, U-ground receptacles shall have the following characteristics:

a. Wires shall be terminated with pressure terminals using wire shoes and Phillips-headset screws.

b. Strain relief appropriate to wire assembly.c. Connector shall be entirely user-serviceable without use of specialized crimp tools.d. Acceptable manufactures:

1) Leviton2) Approved equal.

12.Provide all requisite mounting hardware for installation of theatrical lighting wiring devices.Coordinate all device mounting requirements with Electrical work.

13.Provide all wiring devices with internal terminal strips or exterior terminal boxes forinterconnection to the theatrical lighting system. All wiring devices may be internally wiredat the factory prior to shipping.

14.Size all terminals as required based on wire sizes indicated on the electrical documents.Terminal strips shall be grounded to the device enclosure.

15.Back box to be clearly labeled with circuit number.a. Provide terminal boxes factory assembled with numbered terminal blocks for field

connection by Electrical Contractor, as indicated in the drawings and schedules. Allterminal boxes regardless of quantity of circuits shall be the same size. Provide sixspare terminals in each terminal box in addition to the spare circuits indicated in theschedules. Provide four (4) ground lugs per box. Size all lugs and terminal box asrequired based on wire sizes indicated on the Electrical Documents.

B. Labeling1. Label each receptacle with appropriate circuit designation as indicated on distribution

schedule and drawings. All labels to be reverse screened polycarbonate labels. Labelsshall be applied to the device with an adhesive suitable for adherence to a textured, bakedenamel finish under high heat conditions.

2. Label pigtails with two (2), opposing, cloth 1 1/4" high white numerals, vertically orientedunder heavy duty clear shrink wrap, 6" above connector. Sole 6 and 9 numerals shall beunderlined for orientation. Labels to be applied securely.

C. Mounting1. Devices shall be surface or flush mounted at locations and mounting heights as called out on

drawings.2. All holes in mounting bracket to have 1” minimum slotted hole to enable adjustment for field

conditions. Provide lock washers on bolts.



3. The Contractor is responsible for providing all wiring devices to meet all requirements asstated by the National Electrical Code and local code in reference to separation, isolation,and clearances for all different voltages specified, as well as terminal sizes for all thedifferent cable sizes, cable entry sizes and exit routes and standoff.

D. Plugging Box with Receptacles (PBR)1. Provide plug boxes with flush mounted, 20A grounded female parallel blade, U-ground

connectors. See Drawings for locations of devices, device details, and mounting details.2. Back boxes and face plates of sheet metal, finished per drawings. Provide requisite

mounting holes, conduit knock-outs, etc.3. Wiring devices to be factory wired with numbered terminal blocks for final connection under

Division 26.4. Label each circuit on box with appropriate circuit designation indicated on the Drawings.

E. Plugging Strips with Pigtails (PSP):1. Furnish connector strips of standard construction. These shall have pigtail mounted, 20A,

parallel blade, U-ground connectors. See Drawings for locations of devices and requireddevice and mounting types.

2. Pigtails to be 12/3 (for 20A circuits) S or SO neoprene covered cable, with connector. Eachpigtail to have a metal Hubbell strain relief.

3. Lengths and circuit allocation of connector strips as indicated on the Drawings.

F. Plugging Strips with Receptacles (PSR):1. Provide connector strips with flush mounted 20A parallel blade, U-ground female

receptacles. See Drawings for locations of devices, device details, and mounting details.a. Devices constructed of sheet metal, finished flat black. Provide requisite mounting

holes, conduit knock-outs, etc.b. Label each circuit on box with appropriate circuit designation indicated on the Drawings.c. Provide brackets and hardware for mounting boxes as indicated.d. Connector strip to be factory wired with numbered terminal blocks for final connection

by Division 26. See Drawings for conduit feed/terminal block locations.e. Lengths and circuit allocation of connector strips as indicated on the Drawings.f. Duplex female receptacles to be labeled with appropriate circuit designation indicated

on distribution schedule and drawings. Labels to be reverse screened polycarbonatelabels. Labels shall be applied to the device with an adhesive suitable for adherenceto a textured, baked enamel finish under high heat conditions.

2. Provide with a Net3 One Port Gateway as described herein and as shown on the drawings.

G. Terminal Box (TB)1. Furnish terminal boxes as indicated in the Drawings and schedules.2. In addition to the circuits indicated in the Drawings, each terminal box to have six (6) spare

terminals.3. Each box to be furnished with four (4) ground lugs.

a. Size lugs as required based on wire size indicated on the electrical Drawings and Divi-sion 26 shop drawings

4. Reinforce base of terminal boxes to take load from multicable.

2.13 THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL CONSOLE

A. Provide Control console as indicated herein. Control Console shall have the following minimumcapabilities:1. 12,288 DMX outputs (12 DMX universes)2. 16000 Channels3. 999 Submasters




4. USB ports for flash drives, pointing devices and keyboards5. 2 video outputs6. The Control Console shall be the following with all currently advertised or published features:

a. ETC Ion Xe 20

B. Accessories1. Keyboards:

a. Provide one QWERTY keyboard.b. Provide one under-table keyboard tray system.

2. Connecting cables:a. Provide one 15’-0” 120V power connection cable for each console.b. Provide one set of 15’-0” Category 5e patch cables for each console

3. Protective cover:a. Provide one protective cover for each console.

4. Gooseneck lamps:a. Provide one LED “Little Lite” gooseneck lamps per console lamp receptacle.

5. Data storagea. Furnish one 500GB external hard drive with USB cable and connector for backup and

storage of show files.6. Uninterruptable power supply

a. Provide a tabletop uninterrupted power supply as needed to protect console andnetwork operations for at least 20 minutes in the event of power failure.

7. LCD video monitorsa. Video monitors shall be located adjacent to ancillary devices and shall be mounted on

table stands as a single unit 24” x 24” with adjustable height frame.b. Main Console monitors shall be high resolution, black, 17” color flat-screen LCD VGA

monitors capable of displaying console video display information. Remote monitorsshall have front mounted controls for contrast, brightness, vertical hold, andhorizontal hold.

c. Provide: (1) monitor for each console video output.1) Furnish (1) 15' power extension cable for each monitor.2) Furnish (1) protective cover for each monitor.3) Provide security devices to lock monitors to countertop

8. Provide lockable flight case with lift-off lid, appropriately sized to accommodate console.a. Flight case to be anchored to countertop at in-house mix position.b. Finish to be coordinated with Architect.

2.14 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate all work in this section in accordance with the Architect’s direction, specifications,approved shop drawings, pertinent project drawings, established trade practices and applicablecode requirements.

B. Carry out shop welding in full accordance with the appropriate sections of “Specifications for theDesign, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings” of the American Institute of SteelConstruction (AISC).

C. Fabrication, assembly and wiring shall be neat and workmanlike throughout.D. Control desks, racks and cabinets shall be welded assemblies of sheet steel or aluminum or of

bar, angles, channels and tees or aluminum extrusions forming rigid enclosures to supportinternal components.

E. All face panels shall be fully supported on all edges, either internally or by rolling interior edgesof panels.

F. Operating elements shall be mechanically safe and electrically “dead”.



G. Operating instructions shall be similarly engraved and appropriately located on designatedequipment.

H. All panel engraving shall be in Helvetica Regular, height as indicated herein or shown onDrawings. In no case shall the engraving be less than 3/16” high without Architect’s approval.

I. All internal wiring shall be factory completed and clearly marked.J. Field connections shall be made by connector devices and cables as specified in preceding

sections.K. Dimmer modules, dimmer controllers and other plug-in components may have spade lug and/or

receptacle devices for connection.L. Control relays wherever possible shall be the glass or polycarbonate enclosed plug-in type.

Relays shall be acoustically damped.M. Uniform components shall be used throughout the system. All dimmer, fader and preset

controllers shall be physically similar; they may vary in voltage according to the TheatricalLighting Manufacturer circuit requirements.

N. All wire sizes and insulation to comply with UL standards and local codes and meet or exceedelectronics industry standards.

O. All wiring to be harnessed and bound. No loose or randomly routed wires permitted.P. All printed circuit cards to be suitably racked with numbered and indexed guides. Legends to be

provided on panel door.Q. Key all components in this section with locks or key-switches alike.R. Each receptacle within a wiring device must have a home run to the dimmer racks of its hot and

neutral. Circuits with more than one receptacle must be paralleled at the dimmer rack. Themethod of termination must not void UL listing. Circuits with more than one receptacle within asingle wiring device may be paralleled within the device and require only one home run of thehot and neutral to the dimmer racks.

S. Minimize feeder inductance by twisting the hot and neutral conductors in long connector strips.Neutral conductor must be at least the same size or greater than the hot conductor.

T. All wiring to be harnessed and bound. No loose or randomly routed wires permitted.

2.15 KEYS

A. All components that may be switched or locked shall be keyed alike.B. Provide two (2) keys for each separately keyed device in the system. Devices include:

1. Consoles2. Network Control racks3. Relay Panels4. Console flight case

2.16 FINISHES

A. Shop Priming and Finishing1. All steel parts and panels shall be cleaned and primed with rust inhibiting primer.2. Control element working face panels shall be heavy aluminum. Legends and control device

designations shall be engraved in panels, or in permanently attached plates, and locatedfor ready identification.

2.17 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspection1. Notify the Architect at least three (3) weeks prior to date when equipment shall be complete

and ready for testing. If deemed necessary by the Theatre Consultant or Architect,assemble, in the factory, any and all system assemblies and subassemblies for testing inpresence of the Theatre Consultant or Architect. Make equipment available to the Architect




and Theatre Consultant, in the Contractor’s factory, for a period of at least two (2) weeksfor testing prior to shipment.

2. During the test provide test equipment for all testing required and any other testing requestedby the Theatre Consultant or Architect.a. Test Equipment shall consist of any item that is proprietary to the testing of

manufacturer’s equipment. Meters and oscilloscope need not be supplied.3. The Theatrical Lighting Control Console and Network system shall be assembled in the

factory and tested for control console update time, video refresh rate, remote video picturequality, and any other function requested by the Theatre Consultant or Architect.

4. The Architect, based on input from the Theatre Consultant, shall be the sole judge of extentof testing necessary and sole judge of acceptability of any system tested.

B. Verification of Performance1. Provide Architect with all test results for verification of system performance.2. For equipment that requires in-house testing, do not ship any piece of equipment without

either written verification of factory testing or written waiver of factory testing from Architectfor that particular piece of equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Under work of this Section provide site supervision during the installation of electrical workassociated with the work of this Section.

B. Project Manager:1. The project Manager shall be a full time employee of the Contractor.2. Provide the name and contact details for the Contractor’s appointed Project Manager at

contract award. This information shall be submitted to the Architect, Consultant andOwner. The Project Manager shall be the key contact person for all future communicationfor the lifetime of the contract.

3. The Contractor’s Project Manager shall be qualified and have experience in projects ofsimilar size and scope.

4. The Project Manager shall have binding authority to represent and act for the Contractor.The Project Manager shall be the primary conduit for all information between theContractor and the General Contractor. All information given to the Project Manager shallbe considered as given to the Contractor.

5. Starting from the award of contract, until system turn-over, the Contractor’s Project Managershall be available for a minimum of one (1) monthly meeting with the Architect and GeneralContractor. In addition, the Project Manager shall be available for conference calls on aperiodic basis.a. The project manager in coordination with the General Contractor and Electrical

Contractor shall establish a milestone schedule for the delivery and installation ofkey components of the system.

b. The project manager shall arrange to be on site for the delivery of the key componentsof the system and to coordinate the installation of these items.

c. The Project Manager shall provide meeting notes, minutes, or field reports from allmeetings, site visits, and conference calls to the General Contractor.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions



1. Refer to Administrative Requirements under Part 1 of this Section for a description of workthat must be complete prior to the work of this Section being installed.

2. Field verify all dimensions prior to fabrication.3. The Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which the equipment is to be

installed and shall notify the Architect and General Contractor in writing of conditionsdetrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

4. Contractor shall not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected inan acceptable manner.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Removal1. Prior to removal, thoroughly inspect existing dimmer racks.

a. Should it become apparent that any components of the existing dimmer racks requirereplacement, notify the Architect immediately. Replacement of components found tobe damaged prior to removal IS NOT part of this contract.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions, contract documents,approved shop drawings, established trade practices and applicable codes.

B. Install work securely, complete with bolts, nuts, washers, clips, fittings, supports, and otheritems required for proper installation and operation.

C. Obtain requisite approvals for field welding1. Carry out approved field welding in accordance with the appropriate section of the

“Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings” of the American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC) and AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Guide.

D. Interface with Other Work1. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other sections in adjacent areas to ensure that

panels, distribution boxes, or other devices do NOT require relocation or change ofmounting details indicated in approved shop drawings. Immediately notify the Architect ofany such changes that are found to be required.

2. Obtain requisite approvals for cutting or drilling existing structural work.

E. Systems Integration1. Coordinate the lighting system provided under work of this Section with building wide

emergency power and fire alarm systems.

F. Tolerances1. Position components as indicated on the Drawings. Install components true, plumb, and

level.

3.05 REINSTALLATION

A. Prior to reinstallation, existing dimmer racks shall be thoroughly cleaned including but not limitedto exterior and interior surfaces, air filters, dimmer modules and fans.

3.06 SITE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Site Tests, Inspection1. Arrange for tests and inspections required by the General Conditions.




3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean structural steel and fabricated steelwork of rust, scale and foreign matter by grinding;Prime with one (1) coat of first quality primer. Finish with one (1) coat of first quality machineryenamel free of skips, runs and saps. Touch up field connections, welds and abraded placeswith primer and enamel.

B. Touch-up minor abrasions and imperfections as required.C. Remove unnecessary equipment and materials from the jobsite and properly dispose of waste

upon completion of the work of this Section.

3.08 SYSTEM START UP, AND COMMISSIONING

A. House Lighting Preset Programming1. Coordinate with the Architect to determine the desired house lighting presets including the

layout and functionality of touchscreen pages as described herein, button station presetsand keyswitch operations.a. Sample touchscreen pages shall be submitted to the Architect for review four weeks

prior to final system checkouts.b. Preliminary programming of house light control stations shall be completed prior to final

system checkout.2. At the CCT the house lighting presets including the layout and functionality of touchscreen

pages will be reviewed by the Architect and changes may be required at that time. Beprepared to make any changes, additions, or reprogramming that may be necessary at thetime of the CCT.

B. Commissioning.1. Schedule the CCT in conformance with project construction schedule and the availability of

the Owner Representative.2. Provide the Architect with a draft copy of the System Commissioning Document(s) at least

four (4) weeks prior to the beginning of the final system demonstration for review andapproval. The documents shall include, but not be limited to:a. Cover Sheetb. Table of Contentsc. Comprehensive outline checklist summarizing system commissioning tests and

proceduresd. Operations/maintenance instruction sheets.e. Final Bill of Materials/Parts Listf. Loose equipment inventory and spare parts checklist

3. Prior to the start of the CCT, complete manufacturer’s system commissioning.4. After delivering the above reference documentation, the Contractor will notify the Architect

that the work is complete and ready for final review.5. Unless otherwise approved in writing, the following conditions shall be considered minimal

criteria to begin the final system demonstration:a. Provide written confirmation that the systems and equipment have been installed,

tested, programmed and calibrated as per the specifications, contract documents,and manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Manufacturer’s system commissioning documentation has been provided to theArchitect.

c. Systems have been burned in for 72 hours and/or have operated in normal operationduty cycles.

d. Provide a schedule of dimmer rack input voltagese. Test the output voltages and polarity at each circuit under a 750w load.



1) Circuits which deviate from the mode by more than +/- 3 volts shall beadjusted to match the mode (the voltage which occurs most frequently) at thedimmer rack control module.

2) Provide a schedule of all dimmed and non-dimmed circuits and their originaland adjusted output voltage.

f. Provide a schedule of all network wiring testing, including the Pass/Fail status, the runlengths, and the remaining allowable portable cable length.

g. Loose equipment provided under this section shall be on site, configured, installed andavailable for testing.

6. Contractor shall supply all equipment required for the commissioning process includingaccess equipment (personnel lifts, ladders test and appropriate protective equipment), testinstruments and communications equipment.

7. Contractor shall provide staff to assist in the commissioning process including the ProjectMananger and at least one factory trained and certified field service technician.

8. Contractor to provide test equipment and instrumentation required to conduct the final CCTand evaluate electrical performance of the theatrical lighting system inclduding, but notlimited to:a. Cable assemblies (multi-conductor breakouts, two-fers, etc…)b. Network/DMX Testerc. True RMS Volt-Meter/Multi-tester

9. Contract Compliance Testing (CCT) shall include, but not be limited to:a. Visual inspection and operation of components of the system and accessories.b. Functional testing of systems components.c. Testing a sampling of Dimmed/Switched receptacle circuits:

1) Polarity2) Circuit identification3) Assignment to designated device

d. Testing a sampling of control receptacles for data integrity1) DMX2) Ethernet

e. Testing a sampling of theatrical control devices for function1) DMX Nodes2) Remotes3) Consoles4) Architectural Panels

f. Certify with use of industry accepted diagnostic tools that Ethernet network meetscategory 5e criteria.

g. Demonstrate portable controls at each location.h. Demonstrate main and peripheral lighting control consoles and accessories perform

standard functions.i. Demonstrate successful input and output of lighting control data as specified at each

possible location.j. Functional testing of diagnostic and status reporting software.k. Demonstrate power outage and rack over-temperature conditions.

3.09 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstration1. The Architect will conduct the CCT of the system and issue an Executive Report including a

list of deficiencies requiring modification or adjustment.

B. Completion of adjustments or modifications indicated in the CCT Executive Summary is arequirement for Final Acceptance.




C. Following the equipment demonstration, inspection and final adjustments, the Owner’sdesignated staff or representatives shall be instructed in the use, care and maintenance of allitems as described below.

D. Test and instruction to be scheduled in conformance with project construction schedules and theavailability of the Architect and Owner.

E. Cost of reinspection and additional testing by the Architect, due to lack of completion and/orerrors and omissions shall be paid by the Contractor or the General Contractor respective to thearea of work concerned. This work will be conducted on a time and materials basis, includingthe Architect's and Theatre Consultants standard hourly rates, travel expenses includingbusiness class airfare for point to point travel over 6 hours, lodging and expenses related to thereinspection and shall be scheduled and approved in writing prior to the reinspection/testingsession between 1) the Architect and the Owner, and 2) the Owner and the contractor(s).

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect the equipment in this Section from damage after installation and prior to acceptance bythe Owner.

B. Remove equipment protection and clean all components thoroughly prior to the CCT andtraining.

3.11 TRAINING

A. Following the CCT and final adjustments, provide training to the Owner’s staff on the safeoperation and maintenance of the system.1. Provide instruction to Owner’s staff on operation and care of system for not less than eight

hours total in two, four hour sessions.2. Instruction shall include, but not be limited to; network operations and maintenance, dimmer

rack operations and maintenance and operation of system control panels, proper generalmaintenance of the system, replacement procedures for user replaceable parts andoperating procedure to obtain maximum usage of system.

3. Instruction must be by qualified expert operators who have actual experience with systems inperformance conditions.

4. The first session shall occur within a week of completing the CCT assuming the work isfound to be substantially complete and in compliance with contract documents. Otherwise,delay instruction until work is complete and in compliance.

5. The second session shall occur at a time arranged by the Owner no sooner than 1 day andno later than 1 month after first session.

B. Console operator instruction:1. Provide instruction to the Owner’s staff on the detailed operation of Console. This training

shall take place in two separate sessions. Each session shall be no less than four hoursand shall take place on site. Instruction shall include, but not be limited to, console operatorinstruction as described below, proper general maintenance of the system, replacementprocedures for user replaceable parts and operating procedure to obtain maximum usageof system.

2. Deliver all copies of approved Operations Manual to Owner prior to first instruction session,and review it as part of that session.

3. The first session shall occur directly after finish of Completion Checkout. If Owner orArchitect judge that any work inspected fails to conform to the specification, or is notsubstantially complete at time of Completion Checkout, postpone instruction session untilOwner and Architect judge the entire Lighting System to conform with specification.



4. The second session shall occur at a time arranged by the Owner no sooner than 1 day andno later than 1 month after first session.

C. Schedule the training in conformance with the project construction schedule and the availabilityof the Owner’s staff. Commissioning

3.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials1. Deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish the following to match those

installed and taken from the same production run, packaged with protective covering forstorage and identified with appropriate labels.

2. Provide:a. Four spare 2.4kW dimmer modules.b. One spare CEM modulec. Four spare relays of each size in the system.d. Four circuit breakers of each size in the system.

3. Provide a package of spare parts for user serviceable portions of the dimmer and controlsystems and distribution apparatus.a. Provide 10% of total quantity of each type of small component or part in system as

spare parts (minimum of one).b. Label spare parts with manufacturer’s part number, designation and description, and

location(s) where used.c. Provide durable, clearly labeled, storage containers for spare parts, including special

static free containers for electronically sensitive parts.d. Quantity – Package shall include, but not be limited to:

1) One spare of each of the following:a) Pushbuttons (lamps, and caps of each color) and keyswitches.b) Knobs, handles, nuts, bolts, screws, fuses, fuse holders, indicator lights

and SSR assemblies.c) Caps, screws, crimp connectors and crimping tool, stage pin plugs,

multipin connector spare parts, nuts and washers.2) Six pilot lights, two LED array of each type in the system.3) Spare dust covers for network taps.

3.13 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to drawings for device and dimming schedules related to the work in this section.

3.14 ATTACHEMENTS

A. Refer to following Appendix pages for quantities and accessories.

End of Section 11 61 63




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


Construction Documents BP-3 12 32 16 - 1 Addendum No. 02 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK

SECTION 12 32 16 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK


A. Section Includes 1. Manufactured plastic laminate faced casework including hardware and accessories. 2. Plastic Laminate countertops for cabinets provided in this Section. 3. Plastic Laminate countertops supported by metal brackets provided in another Section.


A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications – for support of countertops not supported by casework. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry – for blocking

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A208.1-1999, Particleboard 2. ANSI A208.2-1999, Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF)

B. American National Standard Institute/Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (ANSI/HPVA)

1. ANSI/HPVA HP-1-2004, American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood

C. American National Standard Institute/National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

(ANSI/NEMA) 1. ANSI/NEMA LD 3-2005, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates

D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)

1. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) 1st Edition (2009): Sections specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300: 1. Manufacturers Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for stock

hardware and accessory items. 2. Shop Drawings

a. Casework: Elevations and locations of each assembly. Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, surfacing materials, drawers, doors and door swings, sections of typical and special cases. Indicate core materials, edge treatments and construction.

b. Countertops and Work Surfaces: Plans and locations of each work surface. Indicate dimensions. Indicate locations and sizes of openings including those for sinks. Indicate provisions for securing work surfaces to cases, and for securing window sills.

c. Show plans, elevations and details of all custom wood millwork, indicating materials, species of wood, applied finishes, matching of panels, arrangement, profiles, thicknesses, construction fastenings blocking clearances, assembly and erection details, built-in hardware and necessary connections to other work.


NEW HOPE, MN

12 32 16 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK Addendum No. 02

3. Samples a. Swatches of plastic laminate and 3" lengths of PVC edging in thicknesses and colors

selected. b. One sample of each exposed door and drawer hardware item in finishes specified.

4. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's intended warranties for this Project, stating

obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

B. Submit in accordance with Section 01 7710: 1. Warranty: Manufacturer's fully executed warranty forms with authorized signatures and


2. Maintenance Literature: Include manufacturer's maintenance literature in the closeout documents.


A. Manufactured Casework: Comply with applicable requirements of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) 1st Edition (2009), established by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 5 years experience in the fabrication of casework for projects similar to the size and type specified for this Project.

C. Installer's Qualifications 1. A firm with at least 5 years of successful experience installing casework similar to that

required for this Project. 2. Installation performed by manufacturer's trained and authorized personnel, under the

supervision of the manufacturer's representative. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle work to prevent damage, staining and disfigurement. Do not store and install casework in building until concrete, masonry, plaster and other wet work has cured. Storage areas shall be enclosed, dry, and ventilated. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site.


A. Install casework only after ceilings, overhead ductwork, lighting, fire sprinkler system, and wall and floor finishes are completed.

B. Maintain building temperatures between 65 and 80 degrees with ambient relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during and after installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Contractor: Warrant casework to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except extend warranty by manufacturer's 5-year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Casework manufactured by TMI Systems Design Corporation is specified.



1. Custom casework and products manufactured by LSI Corporation of America, Grey Wolf, Inc., and Stevens Industries, Inc., may be acceptable subject to approval by Architect of minor deviations from these Specifications.

2. Submit a COMPLETE list of deviations from these specifications, not less than 10 days prior to bidding, for review by the Architect. Approval or rejection will be identified by Addendum.

3. Other manufacturers not specified above, seeking approval of their products shall also submit this list.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Softwood Plywood: 3/4" water resistant A-C interior fir plywood with exterior glue. B. Particle Board Core Materials: Minimum 47 lbs. density high performance particle board of

balanced 3-ply construction with moisture content not to exceed 8 percent. Meet requirements for type and classification conforming to ANSI A208.1-1999, Grade M-3.

C. Hardboard: Tempered hardboard, smooth both sides, minimum 1/4" thick. Meet requirements of Commercial Standard CS-251 and FS LLL-B-00810.

D. Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA Publication No. LD-3-1995 unless otherwise specified herein. 1. Grades

a. GP-28 (0.028" nominal): For exposed vertical cabinet surfaces and shelving. b. GP-42 (0.042" nominal): For postformed countertops. c. GP-50 (0.050" nominal): For other countertops. d. CL-20: For balancing sheet.

1) Color: Manufacturer's standard.

e. Thermosetting polyester resin (62 percent) impregnated laminate, not less than 0.009" thick. For semi-exposed cabinet interiors behind doors and drawers and underside of wall cabinets. 1) Color: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Colors:

a. PL-1 To be selected by Architect from Manufacturers full range. a. PL-1 See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections

1) Location: Vertical Casework

b. PL-2 To be selected by Architect from Manufacturers full range. b. PL-2 See Interior Finish and Materials Schedule for Color selections 1) Location: Dry Countertops

E. Casework Edging: Polyvinyl Chloride: (PVC) solid, high impact, color thru, acid resistant, applied with hot melt adhesive, trimmed, length-radius, buffed, and corner-radius, thickness specified, trimmed face, back and corners1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

a. (Doellken Woodtape, a Surteco Company) b. (Outwater Plastics Ind. Inc. & Architectural Products) c. Approved substitutions.

1. Width: Face width to fit thickness of door, drawer or shelves, and face width of cabinet

body edges, door/drawer front spacer rails, and cabinet dividers. a. Round Faced: 3 mm thick b. Flat Faced: 0.020" thick

2. Cabinet Body: 0.51mm thick.


NEW HOPE, MN


3. Cabinet Doors and Drawers: 3mm thick. 4. Door and Drawer Front Spacer Rails, and Cabinet Dividers: 0.51mm thick. 5. Shelves

a. Lead Edge: 3mm thick b. Concealed Edges: 0.51mm thick.

6. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of available colors.

F. Edging 1. Countertops

a. Typical Casework: High pressure plastic laminate, self edge unless otherwise shown; color and grade to match horizontal surface.

2. Cabinet Body Edges

a. Typical Casework: 0.51mm thick, solid, high impact, color thru, acid resistant PVC, applied with hot melt adhesive, trimmed face, back and corners. 1) Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

3. Cabinet Doors and Drawers

a. Typical Casework: 3mm thick, solid, high impact, color thru, acid resistant PVC, applied with hot melt adhesive, trimmed, length-radiused, buffed, and corner-radiused. 1) Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's 10 (or more) standard

colors.

4. Door/drawer Front Spacer Rails, and Cabinet Dividers a. Typical Casework: 0.51mm thick, solid, high impact, color thru, acid resistant PVC,

applied with hot melt adhesive, trimmed face, back and corners. 1) Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

5. Shelves

a. Lead Edge: 3mm thick, solid, high impact, color thru, acid resistant PVC, applied with hot melt adhesive, trimmed, length-radiused, buffed, and corner-radiused. 1) Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's 10 (or more) standard

colors.

b. Concealed Edges: 0.51mm PVC.

G. Hardware 1. Hinges

a. Heavy duty, 5-knuckle 2-3/4" institutional type hinge. Mill ground, hospital tip, tight pin feature with edges eased. Hinge shall be full wrap around type of tempered steel 0.095" thick. Each hinge to have minimum 9 screws, No. 7 x 5/8" FHMS to assure positive door attachment.

b. One pair per door to 48" height. One and one-half pair over 48" in height. Hinge shall accommodate 13/16" thick laminated door, and allow 270 degree swing.

c. Finishes 1) Typical Casework: 626 dull chrome.

2. Pulls: ‘C’ Pull – all metal.

a. Color: Stainless Steel.

3. Drawer Slides a. Standard Drawers: LSI Lab Series Slide, LH 375, epoxy powder coated to match

drawer body color, self-closing, with positive in-stop, out-stop and out-keeper to



maintain drawer in 80 percent open position. Captive nylon rollers, front and rear. Provide adjuster cam to regulate body side sway.

b. Dynamic Load Rating: 100 lbs. (minimum). c. Static Load Rating: 150 lbs. (minimum).

4. Catches: LH-340ADA, magnetic catch for base and wall cabinets. Provide 2 catches at

each tall cabinet door. Catches shall provide opening resistance in accordance with ADA requirements.

5. Adjustable Shelf Supports: LH-354 twin-pin design with anti tip-up shelf restraints and slot for mechanical attachment of shelf to support, to prevent accidental shelf slide-off. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush, without shelf system permanent projection. a. Load Rating: 300 lbs. (minimum) each support without failure.

6. Locks: 7-pin tumbler lock, No. 5L7RD2 for drawers, and No 5L7RD3 or 5L7RD4 (as

applicable) for doors, with strike plate (Best Lock Corp.). a. Finish: 626 dull chrome. b. Provide locks for each cabinet with hinged doors, and with drawers, where shown

on the Drawings. c. Keying

1) Locks shall be keyed alike within each room, differently among rooms. 2) Locks shall be rekeyable. 3) Operation shall be noncaptive; key may be removed in locked or unlocked

position. 4) Provide 3 keys for each room.

7. Grommets: Round plastic grommets sized for 3" hole, Series XG (Doug Mockett & Co.,

Inc./(800)523-1269). a. Cord Slot Size: 7/8". b. Color: "Putty".

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Casework Construction 1. In addition to the fabrication requirements specified herein, make required modifications

from standard materials and assembly shown on the Drawings. 2. Core Materials: High performance particle board. 3. Cabinet Sub-base: Separate and continuous (no cabinet body sides-to-floor), waterproof

plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder-type construction, of front, back and intermediates, to form a secure and level platform to which cabinets attach.

4. Cabinet Top and Bottom - Wall and Base a. Base cabinet bottoms shall be polyester laminated core interior side, 3/4" thick with

backer sheet on concealed side. b. Solid sub-top shall be 3/4" polyester laminated core, for nonsink base and tall

cabinets. c. Wall cabinet bottoms and tops shall be 3/4" thick. d. Exterior exposed wall cabinet bottoms shall be polyester laminate both sides.

Assembly devices shall be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets.

5. Cabinet Ends a. White polyester laminated core interior side, 3/4" thick with phenolic neutral color

back sheet on concealed side. Holes drilled for adjustable shelves 1-1/4" on center.

b. Exposed exterior cabinet ends shall be laminated with plastic laminate. c. Exposed edges shall be 1mm PVC.


NEW HOPE, MN


6. Cabinet Backs a. Standard cabinet back shall be 1/2" thick core, prefinished for use on cabinets with

and without doors. Backs shall be fully bound (dadoed) into sides, top, and bottom, recessed 7/8" from cabinet rear. Rear unexposed side of back shall be toe-nailed to cabinet body.

b. Exposed exterior backs shall be 1/2" core faced with high pressure plastic laminate.

c. Provide removable backs at all base cabinets which contain mechanical, plumbing or electrical services, elsewhere as shown.

7. Exposed Inner Cabinet Surfaces (THOSE WITHOUT DOORS)

a. High pressure plastic laminate, NO EXCEPTIONS.

8. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves (Within Casework) a. Typical Shelves: Polyester laminated core 2 sides.

1) Thicknesses a) Typical Casework: Standard shelving to 36" wide, 3/4" b) Typical Casework: Shelving 36" wide and over, 1" c) Shelving in open cabinets regardless of size, 1".

2) Each shelf 36" and wider shall be reinforced with a 20 gage steel hat

channel or equivalent reinforcement for full width of shelf to reduce sagging when loaded. Secure to shelf at midpoint of shelf depth. a) Finish: Factory applied paint finish to match shelf color.

9. Doors and Drawer Fronts

a. Plastic laminate doors (hinged and sliding) and drawer fronts shall be 13/16" thick. Core material shall be 3/4" thick, bonded on exterior with high pressure laminate and with balancing sheet on interior face. 1) Typical Casework: Drawer fronts and hinged doors shall overlay the

cabinet body. Maintain a maximum 1/8" reveal between pairs of doors, between door and drawer front, and between multiple drawer fronts within the cabinet.

10. Drawers

a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer body component sub-front. b. Bottom, sides, back and sub-front of drawers shall be 1/2" thick core . c. Drawer sides shall be doweled and glued to receive front and back, machine

squared and held under pressure. Drawer bottom shall be fully bound (dadoed) into front, sides, and back. Routing in drawer body for bottom shall receive continuous glue.

d. Exposed top edge shall be 1mm PVC. e. Reinforce drawer bottoms with intermediate spreaders, 1/2" x 4" located

front-to-back. Provide one spreader at 24", 2 spreaders at 36", 4 spreaders at 48".

11. Vertical and Horizontal Dividers: One of the following as indicated by cabinet number: a. Tempered hardboard 1/4" thick, smooth both faces, secured in cabinet with molded

plastic clips. b. White polyester laminated core 3/4" thick, secured in cabinet with molded plastic

clips or dowels. Front edge shall be 3mm PVC. c. Cabinets shall have clear span interiors, unless otherwise shown.

12. Door/Drawer Spreaders: Provide minimum 3/4" x 6" x full width polyester finished

cabinet body spreaders immediately behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal joints to maintain exact body dimensions, and close off reveal.



B. Countertops: High pressure laminate bonded to core 1" thick. Underside shall be properly balanced with heavy gage backing sheet. Edges shall be high pressure plastic laminate to match horizontal surface color. Furnish countertops in design shown on Drawings. Provide continuous tops for counter type cabinets fixed in a line. Provide postformed countertop at cabinets with sinks.

C. Workmanship 1. Cases shall be square, plumb and true. 2. Laminate plastic laminate surface/backer to core under controlled conditions, by

approved and regulated laminating methods to assure a premium lamination. Natural-setting adhesives that cure through chemical reaction are required. Methods requiring heat are not allowed; "contact" methods of laminating are not allowed.

3. Cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored for premium quality grade joinery construction utilizing automatic machinery to ensure consistent sizing of modular components.

4. End panels shall be doweled to receive bottom and top. 5. Back panel shall be fully bound into and recessed 7/8" from the back of cabinet sides, top,

and bottom to ensure rigidity and a fully closed cabinet. Cabinet back shall be mechanically fastened from rear of body for tight interior fit, and sealed with full perimeter high-strength hot-melt adhesive.

6. Drawer bottoms shall be fully bound and glued into and recessed 1/2" up from the bottom of sides, back, and subfront. Sides of drawer shall be fully doweled to receive drawer back and subfront.

7. 3/4" thick hang rails shall be mechanically fastened to end panels of all wall, base and tall cabinets for extra rigidity and to facilitate installation. a. Provide 2 hang rails at base and wall cabinets, and 3 at tall cabinets.

8. Provide removable back panels and closure panels for plumbing access at all sink

cabinets, and where shown on Drawings. 9. Surfaces of open cabinets (those without doors) shall have no exposed fastener heads or

plastic trim caps.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other sections, necessary to obtain proper installation of items.

B. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication. C. Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to

installing. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Erect casework straight, level and plumb and securely anchor in place. Scribe and closely

fit to adjacent work. Cut and fit work around pipes, ducts, and similar penetrations.


NEW HOPE, MN

12 32 16 - 8 Construction Documents BP-3 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK

2. Install items complete and adjust moving parts to operate smoothly. 3. Install acrylic sealant where casework and countertops abut adjacent construction.

B. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Attach items to floors and walls and anchor by concealed bolts or wood screws into inserts

on floors and to grounds on walls. Provide grounds as necessary. Trim and finish cabinets with scribe members for a neat and finished installation.

2. Installed cabinets shall have no more than 1/8" in 8 feet, sag, bow, or other variations from a straight line.

C. Plastic Laminate Countertops

1. Anchor tops securely to base units or to metal brackets – as applies. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16" o.c. 3. Provide cutouts for grommets, if any. 4. Smooth cut edges of cutouts and all other cuts, and coat with waterproof coating or

adhesive. 5. Scribe tops to walls. Calk space between backsplash and wall with specified sealant. 6. Installed tops shall have no more than 1/8" in 8 feet, sag, bow, or other variations from a

straight line. 3.03 CLEANING

A. Leave surfaces clean and free from defects at time of final acceptance. B. Remove cartons, debris, sawdust, and scraps, and leave spaces clean and casework ready for

Owner's use.

END OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 12 61 00 - 1 Addendum No. 2 Provided for Reference Only FIXED THEATRE SEATING

SECTION 126100 FIXED THEATRE SEATING

SECTION PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY

FIXED THEATRE SEATING PROVIDED BY OWNER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work in this section includes but is not limited to furnishing and installing the following major elements and associated accessories:

New, fixed floor mounted auditorium seating. 1. All material, components and services required to provide the work as specified herein,

elsewhere in the Contract Documents and/or as shown on related drawings 2. Consult and coordinate with other affected work and contractors throughout the course of

the work contained herein. 3. Preparation and submission of complete shop drawings and samples for review by the

Architect prior to fabrication. 4. Preparation and submission of sample chairs as indicated herein for review by the Architect

prior to fabrication. a. Related work:

1) Division 9 floor finishes. 2) Division 26 electrical work for aisle lighting.

B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Aisle Lights: Aisle lights (including 24” flexible conduit extension) and aisle light

transformers are to be furnished under work of this section for installation under work of Division 26. a. All required conduit, wiring, back boxes, termination as required for a complete

electrical installation shall be under Division 26 - Electrical work with the direct onsite supervision of the Contractor for this section of work. Division 26 -Electrical to provide miscellaneous hardware as required for proper installation of each component, including.


A. Chair Layout: Design and install seating to conform with specified requirements in a manner that produces seating layout with standards spaced laterally in each row so that end standards are in alignment from first to last row, regardless of whether aisles converge or are of constant width, and so that sightlines are optimized.

B. Auditorium Seating: Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the installation of the seating as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. The upholstered seating shall have self-rising seat mechanisms, wood finish panels at back and seat, arm rests, and accessories, including end panels, aisle lights, and seat numbers.

C. Chairs shall be equipped with seats which shall be self-rising to a uniform full vertical safety position with manual override to the maximum clearance position. Overall front to back dimension of an unoccupied chair shall not exceed 21".

D. Seat widths shall typically run between 20” and 23” (center of armrest to center of armrest) as indicated in the drawings. Narrow seats should only be used where additional width is required to bring row to proper width.



NEW HOPE, MN

12 61 00 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 FIXED THEATRE SEATING Provided for Reference Only Addendum No. 2

E. The auditorium seating shall be fabricated in contoured form using molded foam cushions for maximum comfort. All materials shall be carefully selected to be free of defects, objectionable projections, or irregularities. Smoothly round corners, edges, and exposed fasteners, to present least possible snagging and pinching hazards.

F. Layout Requirements: 1. Seating layout shall conform to critical aisle dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.

These dimensions are based on project code requirements. 2. Actual makeup of rows and requisite seat widths shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor and shall be based on the Contractor's own field measurements. a. If the Contractor's measurements indicate greater width in the rows of the fixed

seating area than that which has been shown in the drawings, the Contractor shall pro-rate the additional width in the distribution of wider chairs than indicated in the drawings.

b. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor provide more chairs per row than have been indicated in the drawings, as the chairs per row indicated in the drawings are critical to the determination of allowed occupants per row, critical aisle and exit widths and the overall determination of requisite chair envelope.

3. Chairs must stagger from row to row on the centerline of the theatre to maximize vertical sightlines. End of rows should align as indicated on the Drawings.

4. In rows which contain varying width chairs, the following criteria should be followed: a. A narrower seat is to be mounted adjacent to an aisle. b. A wider seat is to be mounted adjacent to side-walls or railing. c. Remaining varying width seats shall be distributed throughout the row so that the

narrower seats are not mounted adjacent to one another.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. References to code, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies will refer to the latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. All such codes and standards will be considered a part of this specification as if they were fully included herein.

B. If an applicable code or standard permits work of lesser quality or extent than this specification, then this specification and the related Drawings will govern.

C. Comply with prevailing local codes, standards, and applicable Underwriters Laboratory standards.

D. Comply with national, state and local labor regulations and requirements. E. Equipment to have pertinent labels F. Materials to have pertinent flame proofing certificates and labels

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. In all cases where a device or a part of equipment is referred to in a singular manner within the contract documents, it is intended that such a reference shall include all devices required to complete the installation in accordance with the project documents

B. “Architect”: All references to the “Architect” will refer to the process by which the indicated action or decision regarding the work in this section will be administered. All such actions shall be initiated with or by the Project Architect, who will disseminate all pertinent information and documents to, as well as coordinate all efforts and site visits with, the Architect’s sub-consultants who may have design responsibility relating to the work in this section.

C. “Theatre Consultant”: Auerbach Pollock Friedlander shall act as an adviser to the Architect and shall be party to all decisions and actions regarding this Section, regardless of who requested that action.

D. “Other Project Consultants”: Acoustical Consultant, Electrical Engineer, Structural Engineer, or Mechanical Engineer as is applicable to a particular issue.



E. “Contractor”: Specialty contractor/manufacturer for the work contained in this section only. Contractors involved with other portions of the work shall be indicated with a specific trade preceding the word “Contractor” (i.e. General, Electrical, etc.).

F. "Owner": Authorized personnel representing Cooper High School G. “Furnish”: Purchase and/or fabricate and deliver to project site. H. “Install”: Physically install the items in their proper location(s) on the project site. I. “Provide”: Furnish and install unless otherwise indicated.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All requests for variations from the specified materials and products will be reviewed by the Architect and Theatre Consultant in keeping with the requirements of the General Conditions.

B. All requests for substitutions must be submitted in a timely manner, so as not to adversely impact the project schedule.

C. Substitutions will only be accepted if, in the opinion of the Architect and the Theatre Consultant, the product is an equal to the specified product. No substitutions may be made without written acceptance from the Architect. All substitutions made prior to this acceptance are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

D. A substitution must be a product of equal design, construction and performance. The Contractor must submit all pertinent information required to substantiate that the products equal. The contractor must submit all additional information, including test data, which may be requested in order for the Architect to fully evaluate the substitution. The burden of proof is solely on the Contractor.

E. All additional expenses of any kind with respect to substitution(s) shall be borne by the Contractor. This shall include, but not be limited to, all fees and expenses incurred by the Architect and other related sub-consultants for evaluation of the substitution and subsequent integration into the project should the substitution be taken and/or additional costs of other contractors related to the substitution(s)

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Include a cover sheet with a drawing index including the sheet number and title for each

sheet in the set. 2. All Shop Drawings shall be Sheet Size B or larger, but in no case shall sheet size vary once

chosen. 3. Provide a 4”x4” area near the title block for review stamps and comments. This area

should be in relatively the same location on each sheet. 4. Provide ¼” = 1’-0” plans showing a complete layout indicating seating placement, aisle

widths, chair size arrangement, seat numbering, and aisle light locations. Provide seating schedules as required. Clearly note the width of each individual seat in rows with varying width seats. These plans shall clearly indicate actual field measurements.

5. Provide an inventory of all equipment to be supplied, including quantities, manufacturer’s part number, reference to applicable drawings, etc.

6. Provide complete, fully dimensioned, large-scale detailed fabrication drawings of all major components.

7. Provide requisite schematics, plans, and sections indicating assembly and installation of components.

8. Provide indications by arrow and boxed caption of all variation from contract drawings and specifications, except where variation is indicated as acceptable.

B. Product Data



NEW HOPE, MN


1. Submit catalog or standard data sheets for component parts as part of the shop drawing submittal. The data shall include all information, which indicates compliance with the specifications herein. Clearly indicate the manufacturer of each component and part. a. If any work is required to be specially tested or approved, whether by the Architect’s

instructions or by any laws, ordinance or any public authority, the Installing Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness for inspections, and of dates of inspections to be made by appropriate authorities.

C. Samples: Submit samples for approval within 14 days of written request. These items may include, but are not limited to: 1. 30-inch square "quality" sample of seating fabric for approval by the Architect. 2. Manufacturer's color charts or actual samples of electrostatically applied powder coat

finishes to be used on exposed parts. 3. Manufacturer’s color charts or actual samples of finishes to be used on seats and backs. 4. Wood materials with finish samples for color selection. 5. Aisle light mounted and wired under armrest. Armrest to be affixed to aisle end standard. 6. Row-Letter and Chair Number Plates: Full-size units with letters and numbers marked. 7. Provide samples of any system component for which a substitution is requested.

D. Informational Submittals 1. Provide full insurance against loss or damage during shipment. Furnish certifications of

such coverage to the Consultant within 30 calendar days of contract award. 2. Project Manager:

a. Provide the name and position of the Contractor’s Project Manager. This Project Manager shall be the key contact person between the Consultant, Owner, and the General Contractor during the entire course of the project.

3. Installation Instructions: a. Supply installation instructions for all items furnished in this section, as reviewed and

approved with shop drawings, to Electrical Contractor and General Contractor. Such instructions shall be fully coordinated with trades doing adjoining work and with site conditions. Instructions shall include inter-equipment connection diagrams with terminal designations.

4. Installation Inspection Reports: a. Supply reports confirming that all elements of the installation by Division 26 conform

to the requirements of the seating as engineered, and specified herein. Submit these reports to the Architect at times required the Schedule of Submittals.

b. If conditions exist, that are contrary to the proper installation of the seating system, the General Contractor shall inform the Architect and Owner of discrepancies. Failure of the General Contractor to inform the Architect and Owner of discrepancies constitutes an acceptance of the conditions and places responsibility for any revisions or additions necessary for proper installation of work of the section solely with the General Contractor.

5. Project Schedule a. The Contractor shall submit a project schedule (critical path) at the time of contract

negotiation, which shall indicate coordinated functions with other trades and project requirements.

E. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit documents in accordance with Division 1. 2. At the time of compliance testing, submit six bound copies of parts lists and

operations/maintenance instruction sheets. 3. Within 60 days of the compliance testing, submit one set of reproducible “as built and

approved” drawings showing all equipment as installed. These drawings shall include all adjustments made during the checkout process.



4. Submit operation and maintenance manuals with the “as built and approved” drawings. Each manual shall be bound in an individual binder with the project name on the front cover and system identification on the spine. The manuals shall include: a. Complete parts list for all equipment and telephone numbers for the authorized parts

and service distributors. b. Instructions as to the safe operation for all equipment. c. Recommended maintenance schedule for component parts that may need periodic

replacement. d. Recommendations for cleaning, maintaining, and touch-up of all finished surfaces. e. Certificates stating that materials provided for the fixed theatre seating meet fire

performance requirements. 5. Warranties as required herein. 6. Where specific elements do not require manuals, instruction sheets as to care and handling

shall be provided. 7. The record documents shall be reviewed by the Architect and Theatre Consultant. All

modifications to the documents stemming from this review shall be made as required. 8. Above submissions are required as a condition for final approval of the work.

F. Closeout Submittals 1. Written verification that all punch list items have been rectified will be required for project

closeout and initiation of the warranty period. 2. See Division 1 for additional requirements.


A. Coordination of work: 1. Coordinate seat support requirements with installation of floor slab. 2. Coordinate installation of electrical wiring with seating layout to ensure floor junction boxes

for aisle lights are located inboard of aisle light standards and result in minimal exposure of electrical conduit.

B. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: 1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 2. ASTM A 36 - Carbon Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A 591 - Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. 4. ASTM D 635 - Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting

Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 5. ASTM D 3453 - Flexible Cellular Materials, Urethane for Furniture and Automotive

Cushioning, Bedding, and Similar Applications. 6. ASTM D 3597 - Performance Specification for Woven Upholstery Fabrics - Plain, Tufted or

Flocked. 7. ASTM D 3770 - Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - High Resilience Polyurethane

Foam (HR) and Combustion Modified High Resilience (CMHR) Polyurethane Foam. 8. ASTM F 851 - Self-Rising Seat Mechanisms. 9. ASTM E 84 – Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 10. Federal Test Standard 191 11. ICC A117.1-2003 Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities

C. Qualifications: 1. Installer

a. The Installer will have at time of bid, a current Contractor’s License required by the State of Minnesota specific to the class of work to be performed. This license will be maintained throughout the course of the work under this Contract.



NEW HOPE, MN


D. Mock-Ups 1. At time of bid, provide a mock-up of a single chair, fitted with one fixed end panel with

operable aisle light and one ADA transfer end panel. Chair shall have sample seat and row number plates installed.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for delivery of mock-up to site selected by Architect. 3. The mock-up may not be used as part of the installed Work. The mock-up will be retained

by the Owner as replacement for future maintenance.


A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be coordinated with the General Contractor and shall meet all requirements described in Division 1.

B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading 1. All equipment shall be appropriately and substantially packed for shipment. 2. All equipment containers shall clearly indicate the equipment contained, “front”, “top”,

“fragile”, the project name, and theater site allocation. Include packing and shipping lists for each container.

3. All shipping costs to the job site are the responsibility of the Contractor. The shipping method/company is at the total discretion of the Contractor in order to meet the published project schedules.

C. Acceptance at Site 1. Coordinate responsibility for acceptance of material and equipment at job site with the

General Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for acceptance of the equipment and components at

the jobsite, confirming that all quantities and counts are correct and for keeping accurate logs and records of such information.

D. Storage and Protections 1. Upon delivery, the materials shall be stored under cover in a dry and clean location, off the

ground. Delivered materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation shall be removed from the job site and replaced with acceptable materials.

2. Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all equipment and materials which are damaged during storage or handling.


A. Environmental Requirements 1. Coordinate all environmental requirements for all materials provided and installed under

this contract.

B. Existing Conditions 1. Verify all conditions at job site. Promptly report variations and obstructions to the General

Contractor, the Architect, and Owner. All additions and or corrections are to be requested prior to fabrications.

C. Field Measurements 1. Field measurements shall be taken prior to preparation of shop drawings to ensure proper

fitting of work. Allow for adjustments during installation whenever taking field measurements.



1.10 WARRANTY

A. The Warranty period shall not start until all punchlist items have been rectified and the chairs have been accepted by the Owner.

B. Warrant products against failures and manufacturing defects for five years and guarantee in writing the repair or replacement within 14 days of any item found defective during the selected period by the Owner. Ordinary wear and tear due to usage are excepted. This warranty does not apply to fabrics or products not installed by the manufacturers authorized technicians.


1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver ‘attic stock’ of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish the following to match those installed and taken from the same production run, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Furnish fabric for replacement of seat and back upholstery equal to 2% of each type of

chair provided. 2. Furnish complete aisle lights assemblies in a quantity equal to 10% of the chairs installed

with aisle lights. 3. Furnish mounting hardware for all mounting conditions equal to 2% of chairs installed. 4. Furnish blank row letter and seat number plates in a quantity equal to 2% of the chairs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. To establish comparative standards of quality, the equipment and installation indicated herein shall be by one of the following manufacturers:

Irwin Seating Company 3251 Fruit Ridge NW Grand Rapids, MI 49544 (616) 574-7400

B. Basis of Design is the following: 1. Irwin Citation Marquee

a. End Standard: 1) To Be Selected by Architect No. 10 Enclosed end with veneer insert

stained classic walnut b. End wood Injection molded arm rest finish:

1) To Be Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard c. End Panel Laminate:

1) To Be Selected by Architect d. Interior plastic arm rest, standards, exterior back, and exterior seat pan finish:

1) To be Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard e. Fabric:

1) Seat Back a) To Be Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard line Absecon

Sherpa Shire 2) Seat

a) To Be Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard line Absecon Sherpa Shire



NEW HOPE, MN


2. Comparable products by one of the manufacturers listed above shall also be acceptable.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install seating components (other than aisle light transformers, receptacles, and terminations) complete with all necessary accessories and as described herein.

B. All variations from the specified materials and product must be approved by the Architect. C. Fire Performance Characteristics:

1. Flammability performance: Upholstery components and the assembly thereof shall be in conformance with flammability standards as set forth in California Technical Bulletin #117.

2. Padding: Provide new (prime manufacture) polyurethane foam with an average burn length not exceeding 8" and average flame time after removal of flame source not exceeding 15 seconds, with drippings from test specimen not continuing to flame for more than 5 seconds after falling, when tested vertically in compliance with Federal Test Method Standard 191, Method 5903.2.

3. Fabric to comply with 16 CFR Part 1610 Class I.

D. Certificates: Certificates shall be provided by manufacturer attesting that the materials provided for theatre seating meet the above fire performance requirements.

E. Hardware and fasteners shall be provided in imperial measurement. Metric hardware shall not be provided.

F. Gray Iron Castings: American Society of Testing Materials A48, Class 25. G. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: American Society of Testing Materials A36. H. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: American Society of Testing Materials A591, commercial

and drawing quality; Class C, galvanized-bonderized; 20 gauge minimum unless otherwise indicated.

I. Expansion Bolts: FS FF-B-588; Type, Class, and Style as recommended by the chair manufacturer.

J. Concealed Plywood: PS 1/ANSI A199. K. Finish for all exposed metal parts shall be selected from the manufacturer's standard color line

and shall match. 1. Color to be black

L. Exposed Wood (including plywood): Manufacturer's standard hardwood, free of visible defects. Species shall be as specified. Seal with clear lacquer finish. 1. Color shall match Architect shall select from manufacturer’s standard

M. Finish for seat back, seat bottom, end panel and armrest shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard color lines and shall match. 1. Color shall be Architect shall select from manufacturer’s standard

N. Seat and inner back upholstery fabric shall be: 1. Flame Retardant: Meets Class "A" flamespread rating in accordance with American Society

of Testing Materials-E84, NFPA #255, UBC #42-1, and Underwriters Laboratory #723. 2. Light Fast: Exceeds 48 hour NAFM requirement. Test method A.A.T.C.C.-16A. 3. The fabric shall be strengthened with an acrylic or similar backing.

O. Cushions: 1. Seat and back cushions made of open cell polyurethane foam.

P. Fasteners: 1. All fasteners shall be concealed. No exposed fasteners permitted.



2.03 UPHOLSTERED SEATS

A. Auditorium chairs shall have steel structural polypropylene seat pans with upholstered molded foam cushions. 1. Padding shall consist of contour cut high resilience 2.0 pcf density polyurethane foam with

an ILD of 44. The foam shall pass Cal TB 117 requirements for fire resistance. It shall be non-hardening and non-oxidizing. It shall resist acids, alkalis, oils, greases, soaps, abrasions, moisture, mildew and tearing. The pad shall be approximately 3" thick at the front and 1 1/2" thick at the rear with a thickness of 2" over the center portion.

2. The upholstery cover shall be of a panel side construction without welts and shall be fastened to the frame without the use of nails, tacks, or screws, thereby providing for ease of reupholstering. The fabric shall pass Cal TB 117 requirements for fire resistance.

3. Seat foundation shall be not less than 20 gauge steel Seat foundation shall be engineered glass-filled, injection molded polypropylene, strengthened by deep internal ribs and gussets. Metal inserts are provided for attachment of the seat arms. The seat shall enclose the entire seat raising mechanism and counter weight. The seat foundation shall be reinforced by an 11 gauge formed steel seat arm which accepts the seat hinge through an additional 11 gauge welded reinforcing bracket. It shall be possible to remove the upholstery from the seat without removing the complete seat from the chair. Seat can be provided with number plates centered on the front beveled edge of the seat bottom. Area provided for number plates shall be recessed to prevent wear and abrasion of the plate and eliminate snagging hazards. Attaching of number plates shall be by two tamper-resistant mechanical fasteners.

B. Equip chairs with automatic noiseless uplift devices, so that unoccupied seats shall rise to uniform fold storage position. Gravity-based uplift devices are acceptable. 1. Provide for seat rotation on bushings which do not require lubrication, and have a positive

internal return stop of rubber or neoprene.

C. The underside of the seat pans shall not be upholstered nor shall they be covered with fabric of any kind.

2.04 UPHOLSTERED BACKS

A. Back shall consist of an upholstered steel front panel of a softened rectangular rounded top shape and an exposed matching shaped molded plastic rear panel. Back wings, attaching chair back to chair standard, will be concealed between the inner and outer panels. Backs are sized in 1” increments to fit chair widths from 20” through 23” center-to-center dimensions. 1. The inner panel shall consist of 18 gauge minimum compound curved sheet steel panel. 2. Padding shall consist of 2” thick Polyurethane foam, adhered to the plywood and covered

with selected upholstering material. 3. The exposed rear panel shall be of molded plastic, covering the rear, top and sides of the

back and formed on the same radius and shape as the front panel. The rear panel shall be 5 1/4” longer than the front panel with the additional length at the bottom of the back to protect the rear of the seat from the feet of the occupant behind.

4. Attach the rear panel to the inner panel with three concealed steel clips which mate to routs in the inner panel. Final connection of the outer and inner panel is by a screw on each outboard side of the inner surface of the rear panel.

2.05 CHAIR MOUNTING STANDARDS

A. Aisle and intermediate standards shall be fabricated from cast iron or cast aluminum.



NEW HOPE, MN


1. Cast Standards: Fabricate chair standards of 1-piece cast aluminum or iron, with integral mounting provisions and anchoring points for seat pivots, backs, and arm rests.

B. Fabricate seating units for attachment to flat and/or sloped floors of heights indicated, using standards which have been manufactured to allow maximum cleaning space below point of attachment while maintaining seat height at proper elevation from floor.

C. Provide bolt caps or countersunk or otherwise concealed fasteners at each floor mounted standard foot which cover mounting stud and nut. Color to match selected metal finish for aisle standard.

D. Aisle standards shall be floor mounted or riser mounted as indicated on the Drawings, per manufactures specifications. All mounting assemblies shall be approved by the Architect and Theatre Consultant prior to installation.

2.06 AISLE TRANSFER SEAT PANEL

A. Provide open end standard with flip-up armrest at aisle transfer seat locations as required by ADA. 1. Under arm, recessed aisle light must function in flip-up armrest.

B. The aisle transfer seat end panels shall be designated with code complying graphics. All graphic elements shall be set flush in chair surfaces and shall be permanently affixed to the chair with dry adhesive.

2.07 REMOVABLE SEATING

A. Not Used

2.08 ARMRESTS

A. Provide arm rest at each aisle and between chairs, designed for concealed mounting to standards.

B. Aisle end armrests shall be of solid wood or veneer over composite wood construction with exposed edges well rounded.

C. Attachment shall be with 2 keyhole slots plus 1 security screw, or countersunk fasteners on underside.

D. Middle armrests shall be high density blow molded polyethylene. E. Provide integral aisle light at row ends as specified below.

2.09 AISLE LIGHTS

A. Each end panel shall be provided with a low voltage egress path lighting meeting local life safety code requirements of a minimum 0.2 footcandles across the entire path of egress.

B. Provide UL approved aisle lighting fixtures for installation in armrests, for the locations indicated on the Drawings.

C. Aisle lights shall be: 1. Aisle Lights shall be LED Strip Fantasma Seat Light – FSL-WW-9-NOJB as manufactured

by Tivoli (714-957-6101). 2. Or approved LED source equal.

D. Furnish low voltage transformers sized for project for installation under Division 26. Transformers shall be provided in quantities as shown on electrical drawings or as required for maximum proper lighting performance. Transformers shall be housed in a steel safety enclosure complete with primary and secondary fuses, terminal blocks and safety disconnect. Coordinate transformer characteristics with power feed provided under work of Division 26.



1. Aisle lighting and all associated power and transformers shall be inaudible under all operating conditions.

2. Furnish all necessary hardware for vibration isolation mounting. Mounting shall prevent vibration from being transmitted into the concrete slab.

E. The aisle light shall be pre-wired with No. 14 AWG wire with THHN type insulation, extending 24 inches beyond the chair mounting foot. Provide black, 3/8-inch flexible steel “seal-tight” conduit and fittings pre-attached to standard.

F. Aisle lights at removable seating locations to be prewired with NEMA ML1-P plugs. 1. Furnish recessed, covered NEMA ML1-C connector for installation in the floor under work

of Division 26.

2.10 NUMBER AND LETTER PLATES

A. Provide brushed aluminum finished plates engraved and black filled for seat location identification system corresponding to approved shop drawings.

B. Black fill shall be deep in color and consistent. Characters shall be centered on the plate. C. Round aisle letter plates to be 2" diameter and mounted flush into aisle panels with dry

adhesive. 1. No escutcheon pins or mechanical fasteners permitted. 2. Mount at a consistent height which is below the aisle light, where occurs.

D. Seat number plates to be 3/8" x 1 5/8" and recess mounted in recesses located at the center of the front edge of the seat pan with dry adhesive. 1. No escutcheon pins or mechanical fasteners permitted.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: 1. Fabricate all work in this section in accordance with the Architect’s direction, the contract

drawings, specifications, approved shop drawings, established trade practices, and applicable code requirements.

2. Shop assembly shall not commence until written approval of all mock-ups has been received from the Architect.

3. Carry out shop welding in full accordance with the appropriate sections of “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings” of the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

B. Shop/Factory Finishing: 1. All factory finishes shall comply with manufacturers' recommendations. Color selection

shall be as indicated in the seating color scheme schedule at the end of this section.

C. Tolerances: 1. Machine finish all operating parts to standard trade tolerances, fits and finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Contractor must examine areas and conditions under which auditorium seating is to be installed, including condition of substrate to which seating standards are to be attached, and must notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and



NEW HOPE, MN


timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Contractor.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare all surfaces as to manufacturers recommendations. Surface preparation shall

comply with all industry standards regarding surface materials.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with best standard industry practice for secure and proper installation. Install chairs in locations indicated on approved shop drawings, with required clearances, elevations, and sightlines.

B. Install standards in locations necessitated by seating layout with each standard attached to the substrate by no less than 2 anchoring devices of recommended size.

C. Install chairs by mounting components to standards or brackets mounted on standards using industry approved hardware and fasteners.


A. The installation of the equipment indicated in this section shall be supervised by qualified personnel who are regularly employed by the Contractor for supervision of equipment installation similar to that indicated herein.

B. Arrange for all tests and inspections through the General Contractor as required by the General Conditions.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust seat uplift mechanisms as required to assure that seats in each row are aligned when in upright position.

B. Replace any upholstery that has been damaged during installation. C. Remove all debris caused by this work from the premises.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Touch-up minor abrasions and imperfections in painted finishes with coating to match factory-applied finish.

B. Remove all debris caused by this work from the premises.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Installed seating to be operated for approval, and inspected for quality by the Architect and Theatre Consultant.

B. Necessary adjustments or modifications shall be made as required. C. Owner's designated staff or representatives shall be instructed in the care and maintenance of

all items, on site. Allow an hour for such instruction to be scheduled at the Owner’s convenience.

D. Tests and instruction to be scheduled in conformance with project construction schedules and the availability of Owner and Architect.

E. Cost of re-inspection and additional testing by the Architect and Theatre Consultant, if required, due to lack of completion and/or errors and omissions shall be paid by the Contractor respective to the area of work concerned. This work will be conducted on a time and materials basis,



including the Architect's and Theatre Consultant’s standard hourly rates, and shall be scheduled and approved in writing prior to the re-inspection/testing session with the owner.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Suitable precautions shall be taken to protect the equipment in this section from damage after installation and prior to acceptance by the Owner.

B. Remove all equipment protection and clean all components thoroughly prior to the demonstration session.

END OF SECTION 126100

LSE Architects, Inc. / Peterson AV Consulting, Inc. ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS LSE Project No.: 17.1044.03 COOPER HIGH SCHOOL AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION NEW HOPE, MN

Construction Documents BP-3 27 41 01 - 1 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 27 41SECTION 27 41SECTION 27 41SECTION 27 4101010101 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMSAUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMSAUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMSAUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS GENERAL CONDITIONSGENERAL CONDITIONSGENERAL CONDITIONSGENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 PART 1 PART 1 PART 1 ---- GENERALGENERALGENERALGENERAL

1.11.11.11.1 SUMMARYSUMMARYSUMMARYSUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. General Conditions

2. Bidder Requirements

3. Scope of Work

4. Related Work

5. References

6. Quality Assurance

7. Submittals

8. Warranty and Maintenance

9. Installation Standards

1.21.21.21.2 GENERAL CONDITIONSGENERAL CONDITIONSGENERAL CONDITIONSGENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Reference to Division 1 General Conditions

1. The Division 1 section of this specifications shall establish the General Conditions for the project unless this Section contains statements, which are more definitive or more restrictive than those contained in the General Conditions section. This Specification shall not be interpreted as waiving or overruling any requirements expressed in the General Conditions.

B. On-Site Storage

1. The Contractor shall be responsible coordinate and maintain a storage space.

2. If this storage space is required to be on-site it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the size and spatial requirements with the Owner.

C. Protection from Damage

1. The Contractor shall provide all protection necessary to safeguard their work from damage by their operations and the operations of others.

D. Owners Representative

1. The Contractor shall coordinate demolition, storage and reinstallation of existing AV equipment with the Owners Technical Director

a. Tom Becklund

1) [email protected]

2) 952-393-9886

1.31.31.31.3 RELATED SECTIONSRELATED SECTIONSRELATED SECTIONSRELATED SECTIONS

07 84 00 Firestopping 26 00 00 Electrical 27 41 13 Grounding Bonding and RF suppression 27 41 14 Hangers and Support Hardware 27 41 34 Identification

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS LSE Architects, Inc. / Peterson AV Consulting, Inc. COOPER HIGH SCHOOL AUDITORIUM AND ENTRY RENOVATION LSE Project No.: 17.1044.03

27 41 01 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS GENERAL CONDITIONS

27 41 21 Technical Panels 27 41 22 Power Distribution 27 41 23 Wire and Cable 27 41 31 Auditorium Audio Visual Systems 27 41 76 Training 27 41 89 Commissioning

1.41.41.41.4 BIDDER REQUIREMENTSBIDDER REQUIREMENTSBIDDER REQUIREMENTSBIDDER REQUIREMENTS

A. AV Contractor

1. Work specified herein shall be the responsibility of a single Audio Visual Systems Contractor.

2. The Contractor shall maintain, a fully staffed office including a service center capable of providing maintenance and service to the Project within seventy-two (72) hours after being called.

3. All installing personnel shall be licensed as required by local and/or state jurisdictions.

4. Pre-Approval

a. AV Contractors shall be pre-approved to submit a bid on this project and shall be identified in the list below or by addendum

1) Approved AV Contractors

a) Audio Logic Systems, Eden Prairie, MN 952-400-2222

b) Electronic Design Company, Mpls, MN 612-355-2300

c) Parsons, Minneapolis, MN 763-571-8000

d) Video Services Inc. Mankato MN 507-625-1650

e) Audio Video Electronics, Maple Grove, MN 763-561-0433

f) Diversified, St Paul, MN 952-486-6551 ADDM ADDM ADDM ADDM 2222

Pre-Approval Submission

5. AV Contractors (not listed above) interested in bidding on this project may request Pre-Approval, if approved, the contractor must be identified in a project addendum.

6. The following items shall be included with the pre-approval submission

B. AV Contractor

1. Work specified shall be the responsibility of a single Audio Visual Systems Contractor.

2. The Contractor shall maintain, a fully staffed office including a service center capable of providing maintenance and service to the Project within seventy-two (72) hours after being notified.

3. All on site personnel shall be licensed as required by local and/or state jurisdictions.

C. Pre-Approval Submission

1. AV Contractors interested in bidding on this project may request Pre-Approval, if approved, the contractor must be identified in a project addendum. A Pre-Approval document is available from the AV Consultant.

2. The following items shall be included with the pre-approval submission



a. Work Experience

1) Document a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the fabrication, assembly, and installation of AV systems of similar complexity.

2) The documentation shall include the names, locations, and points of contact for at least five (5) installations of the type and complexity specified herein.

b. Staff

1) Provide organization information indicating staff that will be directly involved with the project. The information to include:

a) Staff Name

b) Position

c) Contact information (Phone, email)

d) The information to include (at a minimum) the following:

(1) Company / Branch (Owner / Manager)

(2) Project Manager

(3) Project Engineer (if different that PM)

(4) Project Technicians / Installers

1.51.51.51.5 SCOPE OF WORKSCOPE OF WORKSCOPE OF WORKSCOPE OF WORK

A. General:

1. Provide audio visual systems design, engineering, and installation within all phases and spaces of the Project. Systems are to include all devices, equipment, installation, programming and commissioning in accordance with requirements of the contract documents and drawings.

2. Provide all work as detailed in the Contract Documents as a turnkey installation including all material, labor, engineering, warranties, taxes, freight, and permits. Only items and requirements specifically stated to be provided by others shall not be a requirement for this Section of the Work.

B. Owner Furnished Equipment

1. The Owner reserves the right to furnish any materials necessary for the Project.

2. For items of equipment which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Work, the Work shall include:

a. Coordination of delivery

b. Unloading from delivery trucks

c. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the project

d. Notify the Owner of any damage to the item(s)

e. Mounting in place and connection(s) as specified

1.61.61.61.6 DESIGN INTENTDESIGN INTENTDESIGN INTENTDESIGN INTENT

A. The project documentation is, in general, diagrammatic and/or developed to communicate design intent.

B. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings are complementary. Where



there are conflicts within the documents, the overall design intent shall govern.

1.71.71.71.7 RELATED WORKRELATED WORKRELATED WORKRELATED WORK

A. AV Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor on raceway/junction box locations for audio visual equipment and routing of audio, video, control, and power cables/raceway from equipment, terminal and pull boxes to system equipment racks.

B. Equipment and materials provided and installed by others, unless otherwise shown in this Section or the Drawings, shall include but are not limited to:

1. Fire Alarm interconnection

2. Telecommunications items

C. Coordinated Work

1. Coordinate with related trades to schedule the Work and ensure a complete installation in accordance with the schedule outlined by the Owner.

2. Coordinate all IP device requirements with the Data vendor, Owner, and Contractor.

3. Coordinate all network connectivity requirements with the low voltage cabling contractor and Owner.

1.81.81.81.8 REFERENCESREFERENCESREFERENCESREFERENCES

A. Installation Standards

1. The Audio Visual Systems shall be installed in accordance with the latest applicable revisions pertaining to all applicable national, state, and local codes and standards including, but not limited to the following:

a. National Electrical Code (NEC), current state recognized edition.

b. Uniform Building Code (UBC), current state recognized edition.

c. Local Governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction

1.91.91.91.9 QUALITY ASSURANCEQUALITY ASSURANCEQUALITY ASSURANCEQUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Standards

1. All equipment and materials for contained herein shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.

2. New equipment and materials shall:

a. Be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) listed and approved where specifically called for; or where normally subject to such U.L. labeling and/or listing services.

b. Be without blemish or defect.

c. It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified, and the terms “other approved” or “approved equal” are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the specified item. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance as delineated in schedules and in the specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

1.101.101.101.10 SUBMITTALSSUBMITTALSSUBMITTALSSUBMITTALS

A. Sequence

1. Shop Drawings - Upon award of Contract, submittals shall be prepared and submitted for review by the Owner, Architect and AV Consultant prior to



commencement of any work.

2. Record Documents - Upon completion of systems and Contractor System Check Out, Record Documents to be prepared and submitted for review prior to system final acceptance.

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals– Shall be produced for review prior to Owner Training.

4. Furnish submittals in accordance with general requirements specified in Division 1, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

B. Configuration

1. Submittals shall be configured as follows:

a. Two PDF files shall be provided for each of the systems (i.e. Auditorium, Gymnasium, etc.)

1) The PDF file shall be of generic type and to be compatible with many types of PDF Editors

2) Provide Bookmarks in the PDF file to facilitate easy navigation of the PDF file.

a. The PDF Files shall be named as follows

1) Example:

a) 2016-12-04 274131 AUDITORIUM AV SYSTEMS

b) 2016-12-04 274131 AUDITORIUM AV DATA SHEETS

2) YYYY/MM/DD SECTION SYSETM NAME

3) YYYY/MM/DD (example: 2016-12-04)

4) Section (example 274131)

5) System Name (Auditorium AV

b. Each submittal shall be organized as follows

1) System submittal

a) COVER SHEET

b) PLANS

c) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

d) DETAILS

2) Data Sheet Submittal

a) COVERSHEET

b) METERIALS LIST

c) DATA SHEETS

B. Cover Sheets

1. Cover Sheet shall include:

a. Information required in Division 1 – SUBMITTAL PROCEEDURES

b. Project name and address

c. Submittal name and number

1) Revision numbers shall be used in case of resubmittals



d. Contractor Name and contact information

1) Projection Manager – Phone Number

2) Project

C. System Submittals

1. System submittals shall include:

a. Floor Plans:

1) Indicate location of AV items with labels

2) Proposed routing of cabling

b. Schematic Diagrams:

1) Based on the contractors drawing standards

2) Identify equipment and components

3) Connectivity type and any special wiring conditions

4) Wire Labels

5) Power supply locations and connectivity

c. Details

1) Rigging

2) Rack Elevations

3) Plate and rack panel details

4) Special conditions

D. Data Sheet Submittal

1. Data sheet submittal shall include:

a. Materials List for the system shall be sorted in alphabetical order (by manufacturer) and shall include:

1) Equipment ID

2) Manufacturer

3) Description

4) Model No.

5) Quantity

6) Notes for any special accessories/options to be included

2. Manufacturer technical data information shall be submitted. Advertising, or sales sheets shall be rejected. If proper data sheets are not available from the manufacturer, the contractor shall generate the data sheet.

a. Information to be included

1) Connectivity

2) Physical dimensions

3) Mounting details

4) Technical specifications

3. Mark each product data sheet to show applicable choices and options (sheets containing more than one device or component model number shall be clearly



marked to delineate items included in the Work)

4. Remove any non-related pages

5. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for all fire stopping materials proposed for use on the project.

E. Record Documentation

1. The Record documents shall be a copy of the original submittal items with updates (clearly identified) for changes that have occurred during the construction process.

2. Provide cable test results as described in the Section 274176

3. Provide all systems programming files and passwords on CD-ROM

F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. A PDF file shall be provided for each of the systems (i.e. Auditorium, Gymnasium, etc.)

a. The PDF file shall be of generic type and to be compatible with many types of PDF Editors

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be formatted as follows:

a. A copy of the Record Document Materials List (used as an index)

b. A PDF file of each Factory Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1) Each to include

a) Operating instructions for each component

b) Maintenance instructions for each component

c. Provide Bookmarks in the PDF file to facilitate easy navigation of the PDF file.

1.21.21.21.2 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCEWARRANTY AND MAINTENANCEWARRANTY AND MAINTENANCEWARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

A. AV Contractor shall provide a one (1) year warranty for the Work. The warranty shall cover all Work, Systems, and subsystems against defects in materials and workmanship.

B. The warranty shall be valid for a period of one (1) year following the date of System acceptance by the Owner. System acceptance shall commence when all parts, components, sub-Systems, and Systems have been tested, shown to be working in accordance with the Specification, and approved by the Owner

C. In cases where the manufacturer’s warranty period is greater than twelve months, the contractor to honor that warranty for the full extent of the manufacturer’s warranty period. This shall not include any labor costs incurred by the contractor removing and re-installing the defective items.

D. In cases where the manufacturer’s warranty period is less than 12 months, the contractor is liable for defects in the item up to-but not exceeding-the first twelve-month period on any contractor provided items.

E. All manufacturers’ equipment warranties shall be activated in the Owner’s name and shall commence on the date of system acceptance.

1.3 WARRANTY SERVICEWARRANTY SERVICEWARRANTY SERVICEWARRANTY SERVICE

A. If defects in the materials and/or workmanship are identified during the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide all labor and materials as may be required for prompt correction of the defect.



B. Provide written notice to the Owner documenting any Work performed during the warranty period, including any preventative maintenance Work performed.

C. Provide loaner equipment that is fully compatible with the Audio Visual Systems for any equipment not field repairable.

D. Loaner equipment for components that must be shipped to/from the manufacturer or distributor shall be on site and operational within 48 hours of the component failure. Furnish lists of equipment that will require shipment from the manufacturer or distributor and lead times associated with that equipment.

PART 2 PART 2 PART 2 PART 2 ---- PRODUCTS PRODUCTS PRODUCTS PRODUCTS

PART 3 PART 3 PART 3 PART 3 ---- EXECUTION EXECUTION EXECUTION EXECUTION

3.13.13.13.1 COORDINATIONCOORDINATIONCOORDINATIONCOORDINATION

A. Power Distribution

1. Coordinate power distribution requirements with the Electrical Contractor.

B. LAN Distribution

1. Coordinate Local Area Network cabling and IP requirements with the project Data Cabling Contractor.

3.23.23.23.2 EXAMINATIONEXAMINATIONEXAMINATIONEXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the work and the conditions under which the Work would be performed. Contractor shall remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

END OF SECTIONEND OF SECTIONEND OF SECTIONEND OF SECTION


Construction Documents BP-3 27 41 31 - 1

AUDITORIUM AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 27 41 31SECTION 27 41 31SECTION 27 41 31SECTION 27 41 31 AUDITORIUMAUDITORIUMAUDITORIUMAUDITORIUM AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMAUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMAUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMAUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMSSSS

PART 1 PART 1 PART 1 PART 1 ---- GENERALGENERALGENERALGENERAL

1.11.11.11.1 SUMMARYSUMMARYSUMMARYSUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Related Sections

a. System Descriptions

b. General Requirements

c. Audio Equipment

d. Video Equipment

e. Infrastructure Equipment

f. Coordination

g. Installation

1.21.21.21.2 RELATED RELATED RELATED RELATED SECTIONSSECTIONSSECTIONSSECTIONS

A. Sections

1. 274101 – General Conditions – Audio Visual Systems

1.31.31.31.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Auditorium Audio Visual Systems

1. The systems shall support the following uses

a. Band, choral and ensemble performances

b. Theatrical performances

c. Presentations

B. Generally, the system shall feature the following physical items

1. Main loudspeakers

2. Audio mixing station

3. Stage connectivity

4. House ceiling connectivity for recording microphone

5. Powered monitor/EFX loudspeakers

6. Main equipment rack

7. Stage Managers equipment rack

8. Mix position desk and equipment rack

9. Electronics

10. Loose equipment

C. Control System Description


27 41 31 - 2 Construction Documents BP-3


1. The control system shall be programmed as follows:

a. Display Buttons

1) On

2) Off

b. Buttons

1) Screen Up

2) Screen Dn

3) Video Mute

4) Blank

PART 2 PART 2 PART 2 PART 2 ---- PRODUCTSPRODUCTSPRODUCTSPRODUCTS

2.12.12.12.1 GENERAL GENERAL GENERAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTSREQUIREMENTSREQUIREMENTSREQUIREMENTS

A. Audio Visual Equipment

1. This specification and plan set provide a diagrammatic concept of the system. Provide miscellaneous items as required to achieve an operating system, this to include but not be limited to:

a. Mounting equipment

1) Provide mounting kits for equipment as required to achieve the mounting configuration noted or detailed on plan

b. Adapters

1) Provide adapter cables/connectors to achieve signal chain as shown on plan.

c. Power Supplies

1) Provide manufacturers approved power supplies and cords for all equipment.

2) Where power supply size and capacity is variable, confirm calculations with the manufacturer and provide appropriate size product with 20% capacity for future growth.

2.22.22.22.2 AUDIO EQUIPMENTAUDIO EQUIPMENTAUDIO EQUIPMENTAUDIO EQUIPMENT

A. Existing Wireless Microphone Systems – General Use

1. Designation: WMWMWMWM1111

2. Product: Existing Shure Model No. QLXD

3. Adjustments

a. Provide a site survey to determine available frequencies and coordination with other wireless equipment in the facility.

b. Adjust Frequency of each unit as needed.

B. Existing Antenna Distribution Amplifier

1. Designation: ADA1ADA1ADA1ADA1

2. Product: Shure Model No. UA844SWB




C. Transformer

1. Designation: TF1TF1TF1TF1

2. Product: Radio Design Labs TX-70A

3. Features

a. 70v input to Line output

D. Stage Box Snake Cable

1. Designation: SB1SB1SB1SB1

2. Product:

a. Whrilwind Model No. MS-8-4-XLR-50

1) 8 sends x 4 returns

2) Length – 50’-0”

3) Quantity of 2

b. Whrilwind Model No. MS-8-4-XLR-75

1) 8 sends x 4 returns

2) Length – 75’-0”

3) Quantity of 2

3. Features

a. Fantail to Stage Box Configuration

b. XLR Connectivity

c. 24 AWG x 7x32 conductors

d. Pig Bag for storage of Fanout

4. Equal Manufacturers

a. By substitution. Refer to General Conditions

E. Snake Cables

1. Designation: SNK1SNK1SNK1SNK1 SNK2 SNK3SNK2 SNK3SNK2 SNK3SNK2 SNK3

2. Product: Whrilwind Model No. Custom Build

3. Features

a. Based on Medusa Standard Series

b. Fantail to Fantail Configuration

c. Connectivity as shown on plan

d. 36” fanout each end

e. Engraved Connectors

f. Color Coded (8 Pair) Configuration

g. 24 AWG x 7x32 conductors

F. Existing Audio Rack




1. Designation: AR1AR1AR1AR1

2. Product: Allen and Heath Model No. AR2412

3. Features:

a. 24 inputs x 12 outputs

b. Dsnake signal transport

c. Rack mounted

G. Audio Rack

1. Designation: ARARARAR2222

2. Product: Allen and Heath Model No. AB168

3. Features:

a. 16 inputs x 8 outputs

b. Dsnake signal transport

4. Accessories

a. Rack mounted

H. Existing Mixer

1. Designation: MX1MX1MX1MX1

2. Product: Allen and Heather Model No. GLD 80

I. Existing Media Player

1. Designation: MPMPMPMP1111

2. Product: Tascam Model No. CD200iL

J. Audio Processor

1. Designation: DSPDSPDSPDSP1111

2. Product: Symetrix Model No. Prism 12x12

3. Features:

a. Open architecture, custom programming

b. 12 input x 12 output

c. Control input/outputs including RS232

d. Embedded 1000 Ethernet Switch

e. Dante capable



K. Amplifier Type 1

1. Designation: AMPAMPAMPAMP4444

2. Product: Ashly Audio Model No. NX4002

3. Features




a. 2 Channel x 400w at 8 ohms



L. Amplifier Type 2

1. Designation: AMP2AMP2AMP2AMP2

2. Product: Ashly Audio Model No. NX1.52

3. Features

a. 2 Channel x 3000w at 8 ohms (Bridge Mode)



M. Amplifier Type 3



3. Features

a. 4 Channel x 400w at 8 ohms



N. Amplifier Type 4



3. Features

a. 2 Channel x 150w at 70V



O. Loudspeaker Type 1

1. Designation: LSLSLSLS1111

2. Product: Fulcrum Acoustics CCX1295

3. Features:

a. Single Amp Channel Full Range

b. 90x45 coverage pattern

c. Sub-cardioid 12” Woofer with 3” compression driver

d. Operating Range: 71 Hz to 19kHz

e. Sensitivity:104 dB @2.83V

f. Finish: Black

4. Rigging




a. Refer to section 274114 for rigging hardware information

b. Provide factory Yoke Bracket YK1811



P. Loudspeaker Type 2


2. Product: Fulcrum Acoustics Model No. CX896

3. Features:

a. Single Amp Channel Full Range


c. 15” Woofer with 4” compression driver


e. Sensitivity:104 dB @2.83V

f. Finish: Black

4. Rigging


b. Provide factory yoke bracket YK1408



Q. Loudspeaker Type 3


2. Product: Innovox Audio Model No. HLA Stage-Lip

3. Features:

a. Single channel amplifier – Full Range


c. 3.5” Woofer with 6” Ribben driver


e. Sensitivity: 90dB @2.83V

f. Finish: Black



R. Wall Speaker

1. Designation: LS4LS4LS4LS4

2. Product: JBL Model No. Control 25AV

3. Features




a. Frequency Range: 75Hz to 20 KHz

b. Sensitivity: 89 dB

c. 70V Multi Top Transformer

d. Provide yoke mount

e. Finish: Black

S. Subwoofer

1. Designation: SW1SW1SW1SW1

2. Product: Fulcrum Acoustics CS118

3. Features:

a. Cardioid Sub Bass

b. 18” Woofer

c. Operating Range: 29 Hz to 137 Hz

d. Sensitivity:103 dB @2.00V

e. Finish: Black

4. Rigging




T. Hearing Assistance

1. Designation: HA1HA1HA1HA1

2. Product:

a. Package LS-43

b. Transmitter – LT-800-216 (qty – 1)

c. Receivers with neck loop/lanyard and Ear Speaker – LR-4200-216 (qty – 40)

d. 12 Unit Charging Case – LA380 (qty – 2)

e. Antenna Kit – LA-122 (qty – 1)

3. Accessories:

a. Batteries – Provide (4) spare batteries

b. Signage kit


a. Williams Sound

b. By substitution. Refer to General Conditions

2.3 VIDEO PRESENATION EQUIPMENT

A. Existing DVD Ray Player




1. Designation: DVDDVDDVDDVD1111

2. Product: Deawoo

B. Switcher Type 1


2. Product: Extron Model No. DTP T USW 333

3. Features:

a. Inputs

1) 1-VGA with stereo audio

2) 2-HDMI

b. HDCP Compliant

c. Auto Signal Switching

d. Front Panel Controls

e. Integrated 3 port network switch

f. Integrated DTP transmitter

g. Rack mount

C. Existing Switcher Type 2


2. Product: Extron Model No. IN1608

D. Existing HDMI Over UTP Receiver

1. Designation: RX1RX1RX1RX1

2. Product: Extron Model No. DTP HDMI 4K 330 Rx

E. Existing Video Projector

1. Designation: VP1VP1VP1VP1

2. Product: Verify

2.42.42.42.4 DATA DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENTDATA DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENTDATA DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENTDATA DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

A. Patch Panels

1. Designation: PPPPPPPP

2. Product: Hubbell Model No. HP6A48US

3. Features

a. Category 6A Shielded

b. 48 Port

4. Accessories

a. Provide labeling of each port

B. Connectivity

1. All data connectivity and cabling to be rated CAT6 shielded




2.52.52.52.5 CONTROL EQUIPMENTCONTROL EQUIPMENTCONTROL EQUIPMENTCONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Control Panel

1. Designation: CCCCP1P1P1P1

2. Product: Extron Model No. MLC Plus 50

3. Features

a. 6 button panel

b. 1 – Bidirectional RS232

c. 2 – relays

d. 1 – IR port

4. Finish – black

5. Accessories

a. Surface Mount Box – Extron Model No. SMB112

1) Confirm back box compatibility

2.62.62.62.6 PRODUCTION INTERCOMPRODUCTION INTERCOMPRODUCTION INTERCOMPRODUCTION INTERCOM

A. Power Supply

1. Designation: PPPPS1S1S1S1

2. Product: ClearCom Model No. PS-702

3. Features

a. Party Line Power Supply

b. Two Channel

c. Announce Output

2.72.72.72.7 LOOSE EQUIPMENTLOOSE EQUIPMENTLOOSE EQUIPMENTLOOSE EQUIPMENT

A. Definition

1. Loose Equipment are items furnished as part of this Section for use with the AV system.

B. Equipment Schedule

1. Refer to plan for Loose Equipment Schedule

C. Delivery and Record Keeping

1. The AV contractor to generate a Bill of Materials

2. The Owner to take possession of the Materials

3. As confirmation of Owners possession. A copy of the materials list to be signed (by the Owner Representative) and submitted to the AV Consultant as part of the record document submission.

2.82.82.82.8 INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENTINFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENTINFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENTINFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT

A. Wall Plates and Rack Panels

1. Refer to Section 27 41 21 Technical Panels




B. Power Distribution

1. Refer to Section 27 41 22 Power Distribution

C. Wire and Cable

1. Refer to Section 27 41 23 Wire and Cable

D. Lectern

1. Designation: LECLECLECLEC 1111

2. Product: Audio Video Furniture Model No. LEX-PB

3. Features

a. MDF construction

b. 2” casters

c. Cable pass through

d. Finish: Standard finish to be selected by Architect

4. Accessories

a. Light – AVF Model No. LIGHT 18

b. Gooseneck microphone – AVF Model No. MIC18



E. Floor Standing Equipment Rack

1. Designation: ER 1ER 1ER 1ER 1

2. Product: Middle Atlantic Model No. WRK-44SA-32

3. Features:

a. Welded Construction

b. Front and rear solid door with keyed lock

4. Accessories

a. Rear rack rail

b. Solid Front Door

c. Solid Top

d. Caster Base

e. Ground Lug

f. (2) Sets front door and center section keys

g. Lacing bars

h. Provide blank covers for all open unused rack spaces

i. Ventilation

1) Determine ventilation requirements to maintain proper operating temperatures.

2) Provide vent blockers, Fans, thermostats to facilitate




proper air movement.


a. Middle Atlantic

b. Atlas

c. Chief

F. Existing Wall Rack

1. Designation: ER ER ER ER 2222

2. Product: Verify

a. Provide blank covers for all open unused rack spaces

b. Provide Locking Front Door

c. 2 Sets keys

G. Existing Audio Tech Rack

1. Designation: ERERERER 3333

2. Product: Verify

H. Rolltop Desktop

1. Designation: None

2. Product: HAS Model No. DTSTD-II

3. Features

a. 45.5” w x 24” d x 12.75” h

b. Finish: Ebony

4. Accessories

a. Stainless steel tambour option ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2

b. Institutional lock option ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2

1) Cores for the locks shall be coordinated with the Owners Locksets

c. Provide a Quantity of (2) Two ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2

I. Flight Case ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2

1. Designation: None

2. Product: Avolites Model No. Pearl Tiger

3. Features:

a. Coordinate with Lighting Console

b. Attached to Control Platform Countertop

c. Provide a quantity of (1) One

J. Work tables ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2ADDM 2

1. Designation: WT 1WT 1WT 1WT 1




2. Product: Balt Model No. 89961

3. Features

a. 30” x 60” training table with casters

b. Black frame with mahogany laminate top

K. Tool Cabinet

1. Designation: NONE

2. Product: Masterforce Model No. ME4111RC1GMM

3. Features:

a. 41” 11 Drawer Mobile Tool Cabinet

b. 5” Heavy Duty Casters

c. Full extension drawers rated 100 lbs

d. Lockable

e. Finish – Gun Metal

4. Provide Qty 1

a. For use at stage for storage of cords, short stands and adaptors

PART 3 PART 3 PART 3 PART 3 ---- EXECUTIONEXECUTIONEXECUTIONEXECUTION

3.13.13.13.1 INSTALLATIONINSTALLATIONINSTALLATIONINSTALLATION

A. Refer to section 27 41 01 General Conditions

END SECTIONEND SECTIONEND SECTIONEND SECTION

A104

STORAGE

108B

VEST.

A108C

VEST.

HR A107

CONCESSIONS

A106

TICKET

A108E

BOOTH

CONTROL

3

2

1.0

4

A105

STORAGE

A102

LOBBY

A101

VESTIBULE

A132

MECH.

A133

ADMIN.

A108

AUDITORIUM

A113

STAGE

A103

STORAGE

101A

101B

101C

101D

101H

101G

101F

101E

132

107A

108A108B

106A

105

108C108D

104

106B107B

133A

20

2021

21

22

20

2021

21

22

20

20

20

20

21

20

21

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

2021

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

20

1920

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2019

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

2021

2021

2021

2120

2121

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

2020

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

2020

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2222

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

19

1920

2019

2020

1920

2020

19

2121

2221

2221

2221

2221

2121

2121

2221

2221

2221

2121

2121

2221

2221

2221

2122

2221

2222

2221

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

2021

2120

2121

2021

2120

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

19

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

19

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

20

2020

2020

2120

2120

2120

2120

2021

2021

2120

2121

2021

2120

2121

2121

2121

2121

2122

2122

21

2121

2121

2121

2121

2122

2122

21

2020

2120

2120

2120

2120

2120

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2020

2020

1920

2020

2020

2019

1920

2020

2020

1920

2020

2020

2019

1920

2020

1920

2020

1920

2020

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

133C

133B

133D133E

133F

KBL A002

SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND CODE RECORD

SCALE: N.T.S.

LIFE SAFETY PLAN01A001

AB

ACT

AFF

ALT

AP

AV

B M

BD

BIT

BLK

BM

BR

CAB

CHBD

CEM

CFM

CI

CJCL

CMU

COLCONC BLKCONSTCORR

CPT

CT

DEMO

DIA

DNDR

DWG

Anchor Bolt

Acoustical Ceiling Tile

Above Finished Floor

Alternate

Access Panel/Acoustical Panel

Audio Visual

Bench Mark

Board

Bituminous

Block

Beam

Brick

Cabinet

Chalk Board

Cement

Cubic Foot Per Minute

Cast Iron

Control JointCenter Line

Concrete Masonry Unit

ColumnConcrete BlockConstructionCorridor

Carpet

Ceramic Tile

Demolition

Diameter

DownDoor

Drawing

ACP

ADJ

AGG

ALUM/ALANOD

APPROX

BATT

BFE

BLDG

BLKG

BOTT

BRGBUR

CB

CBD

CFG

CG

CIP

CLGCLO

COCONCCONFCONT

CP

CSWK

CUH

DEPT

DF

DIMDKG

DSDWLS

Acoustical Ceiling Panel

Adjustable

Aggregate

AluminumAnodized Finish

Approximate

Batt Insulation

Bottom Footing Elevation

Building

Blocking

Bottom

BearingBuilt-Up Roof

Catch Basin

Cementious Board

Clear Float Glass

Corner Guard

Cast In Place

CeilingCloset

CleanoutConcreteConferenceContinuous

Cement Plaster

Casework

Cabinet Unit Heater

Department

Drinking Fountain

DimensionDecking

DownspoutDowels

A

B

C

D

EEA

EHD

ELEC

EQ

EWC

EXPEXT

FBR

FDN

FFE

FIN

FLR

FRM

FRPFRMG

FTG

GB/GYP BD

GENGL

GLU-LAM

HC

HM

HR

HGT

HYD

ID

IGTINT

IRGB

JAN

JST

KOExisting MaterialEach

Electric Hand Dryer

Electric

Equal

Electric Water Cooler

ExposedExterior

Face Brick

Foundation

Finished Floor Elevation

Finish

Floor

Frame

Fiberglass Reinforced PanelingFraming

Footing

Gypsum Board

GeneralGlass or Glazing

Glue Laminated

Handicapped

Hollow Metal

Hour/Handrail

Height

Hydrant

Inside Diameter

Insulated Glass TemperedInterior

Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

Janitor

Joist

Knock Out

EFISEDC

EJ

ELEVENT

EQUIPEW

EXIST / EX

FD

FEFEC

FG

FIXT

FR

FT

FURR

GALV

GCGBLK

GL BLK

HDWHDWD

HORZ

HVAC

IG

INSULINV

JBE

JT

Exterior Finished Insulation SystemElastometric Deck Coating

Expansion Joint

Elevation or ElevatorEntrance

EquipmentEach Way

Existing

Floor Drain

Fire ExtinguisherFire Extinguisher Cabinet

Fire Glass

Fixture

Fire Rated

Foot or Feet

Furring

Galvanized

General ContractorGlazed Block

Glass Block

HardwareHardwood

Horizontal

Heating or Venting or A/C

Insulated Glass

InsulationInvert

Joist Bearing Elevation

JointE

G

F

FF Factory Finish

Feminine Napkin DispenserFNDISPFeminine Napkin Disposal

Fire Blanket/Cabinet

FND

FBC

I

J

K

H

LAB

LAV

LLH

LVT

MACH

MAS

MAX

MCCMECH

MET

MFRMIN

MR

N NICNOM

OA

OD

OHDR

OPP

PLAM / PL

PERF

PL

PLBG

PNLPPT

PROP

PTD

QT

R

RBRDREC

REQD

RM

RT

Laboratory

Lavatory

Long Leg Horizontal

Luxury Vinyl Tile

Machine

Masonry

Maximum

Multi-Color CoatingMechanical

Metal

ManufacturerMinimum or Minutes

Mirror

NorthNot In ContractNominal

Overall

Outside Diameter

Overhead Door

Opposite

Plastic Laminate

Perforated

Plate

Plumbing

Panel or PanelingPorcelain Paver Tile

Property

Paper Towel Dispenser

Quarry Tile

Riser/Radius

Resilient BaseRoof DrainRecessed

Required

Room

Rubber Tile or Tread

LAM

LF

LLV

MAF

MAT

MBD

MEMB

MEZZ

MISCMO

MULL

NO NTS

OC

OFF

OPG

P/CPC-TERR

PF

PLAS

PLYWD

PROJ

PT

PTDR

RAD

REFREINF

REV

RO

RUBRWL

Laminated

Lineal Foot

Long Leg Vertical

Modular Athletic Flooring

Material

Marker Board

Membrane

Mezzanine

MiscellaneousMasonry Opening

Mullion

NumberNot To Scale

On Center

Office

Opening

Precast ConcretePre-cast Terrazzo

Prefinished

Plaster

Plywood

Projection

Paint

Radiation

RefrigeratorReinforced or Reinforcing

Reverse

Rough Opening

RubberRain Water Leader

P

L

M

N

O

Q

R

Paper Towel Dispenser/Receptor

SCHED

SDSECT

SLNT

SPEC

SQFT

SST

STD

STOR

SW

TB

TEL

TFE

TOSTOW

TV

UH

UNO

VB

VDBD

VEST

VWC

WCWD

WGWGT

Schedule

Soap DispenserSection

Sealant

Specification

Square Foot/Feet

Stainless Steel

Standard

Storage

Switch

Towel Bar

Telephone

Top of Footing Elevation

Top of SteelTop of Wall

Television

Unit Heater

Unless Noted Otherwise

Vinyl Base

Visual Display Board

Vestibule

Vinyl Wall Covering

Water ClosetWood

Wire GlassWeight

SC

SGFTSIM

SLR

SQ

SRF

ST

STL

SUSP

SYM

T & G

TEMPTER

TFGTOM

TPHTYP

VCT

VERT

VPVP-SFVRB

WDPNLWF

WHWPWRGBWWF

Sealed Concrete

Structural Glazed Facing TileSimilar

Sealer

Square

Seamless Resilient Floor Section

Stain

Steel

Suspended

Symmetry/Symmetrical

Tongue and Groove

TemporaryTerrazzo

Tempered Float GlassTop of Masonry

Toilet Paper HolderTypical

Vinyl Composition Tile

Vertical

Veneer Plaster-Smooth FinishVeneer Plaster-Sand Float FinishVented Rubber Base

Wood PanelWash Fountain

Water HeaterWaterproofing / Wall PanelWater Resistant Gypsum BoardWelded Wire Fabric

S

V

T

TBD Tackboard

U

Unit Ventilator

Unfinished

UV

UNFIN

W

VISUAL DISPLAYBOARD TYPE

EQUIPMENT NOTE

ROOM NAME/NUMBER

LOUVER

GRID NUMBER/LINE

MATCHLINE

ELEVATION REFERENCE

NORTH ARROW

KEY NOTE

WALL TYPE

WINDOW

TV

FINISHED FLOORELEVATION

SECTIONREFERENCE

BREAK LINE

DETAIL NO.

VERTICAL BLINDS

PROJECTION SCREEN

DEMOLITION NOTE DOOR

SHEET NO.

SIGN TYPE

BRICK

PLYWOOD

TERRAZZO

FINISHED WOOD

RIGID INSULATION

BATT INSULATION

BLOWN/POUREDINSULATION

CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO

GYP. BD.

E.I.F.S.

METAL

ACOUSTICAL TILE/PANEL

EXPANSIONMATERIAL

EARTH

GRANULAR FILL

CONCRETE

CONCRETE BLOCK

STONE , MARBLE,GRANITE

STRUCTURAL GLAZEDFACING TILE

2 6 DIMENSIONED LUMBER/BLOCKING

EXISTINGCONSTRUCTION TOREMAIN

REMOVE EXISTINGCONSTRUCTION

LIGHTWEIGHTCONCRETE BLOCK

ABBREVIATIONS

DRAWING SYMBOLS MATERIAL SYMBOLS

1

00

A100ROOM

A100

L100

W-2

A 12 36

32"

3

P

B

2

1A500

F.F.E.100'-0"

A1

RF-3 FINISH TAG

TACC-3 TOILET ACCESSORY

STAIR Rubber Stair Treads

RP Resilient / Acrylic Panel

RF Resilient Flooring

QTB Quarry Tile Base

LWCB Lightweight Concrete Block

LFC Liquid Floor Coating

MP Metal Panel

EP Epoxy Paint

CTF Ceramic Tile FloorCTW Ceramic Tile Wall

DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL

LIFE SAFETY PLAN SYMBOL KEY

DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL

FE

DF

A

PDA

AED

0

01A300

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:

I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report wasprepared by me or under my direct supervision, and that I am aduly Licensed Architect under the laws of the State ofMinnesota.

Consultants- Logo- Name- Address- Phone

PROJECT

- Name- Address- Location

www.lse-architects.com

100 Portland Ave South, Suite 100Minneapolis, MN 55401

612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax

LSE ARCHITECTS, INC.

ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number

Revision Description

Copyright © by LSE Architects, Inc.

4/5/20

19 10

:39:16

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010

COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATION

ROBBINSDALE AREA SCHOOLS

4148 Winnetka Ave N,New Hope, MN 55427

A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

-- 2/25/2019 BID PACKAGE No. 2


4/4/2019 BP-3 ADDENDUM No. 201

01

PDA

PDA

PDA

PDA

PDA

PDA

PDA

DF

DF

PDA

PDAPDA

01

01

01

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A3'

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

XX

AutoCAD SHX Text

XXX

AutoCAD SHX Text

XXX

AutoCAD SHX Text

NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS

AutoCAD SHX Text

NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS EXITING FLOOR LEVEL OR BUILDING

AutoCAD SHX Text

INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGN

AutoCAD SHX Text

REQ'D WIDTH PER OCCUPANTS SERVED

AutoCAD SHX Text

ACTUAL WIDTH PROVIDED

AutoCAD SHX Text

REQ'D WIDTH PER OCCUPANTS SERVED

AutoCAD SHX Text

ACTUAL WIDTH PROVIDED

AutoCAD SHX Text

FIRE EXTINGUISHER (MAX TRAVEL 75'-0")

AutoCAD SHX Text

DRINKING FOUNTAIN

AutoCAD SHX Text

OCCUPANCY GROUP OF SPACE OR ROOM

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

POWER DOOR ACTUATOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

2 HOUR RATED CEILING ASSEMBLY

AutoCAD SHX Text

AUTOMATIC EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAPLE AREA - DO NOT USE

AutoCAD SHX Text

1 HOUR RATED ROOF ASSEMBLY

AutoCAD SHX Text

2 HOUR RATED FIRE BARRIER WITH 90 MINUTE RATED OPENINGS

AutoCAD SHX Text

2 HOUR RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXISTING NON-COMPLIANT ON HOUR RATED CORRIDOR. 20 MINUTE DOORS; 45 MINUTE GLAZING.

1/8"= 1'-0"

MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - AREA A101A100

A104STORAGE

108BVEST.

A108CVEST.

HR A107

CONCESSIONS

A106TICKET

A108EBOOTH

CONTROL

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

3

2

1.0

4

A105STORAGE

A102LOBBY

A101VESTIBULE

A132MECH.

A133ADMIN.

A108AUDITORIUM

A113STAGE

A103STORAGE

101A

101B

101C

101D

101H

101G

101F

101E

132

107A

108A108B

106A

105

108C108D

104

106B107B

133A

20

2021

21

22

20

2021

21

22

20

20

20

20

21

20

21

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

2021

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

20

1920

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2019

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

2021

2021

2021

2120

2121

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

2020

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

2020

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2222

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2222

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

19

1920

2019

2020

1920

2020

19

2121

2221

2221

2221

2221

2121

2121

2221

2221

2221

2121

2121

2221

2221

2221

2122

2221

2222

2221

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

2021

2120

2121

2021

2120

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

19

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

19

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

20

2020

2020

2120

2120

2120

2120

2021

2021

2120

2121

2021

2120

2121

2121

2121

2121

2122

2122

21

2121

2121

2121

2121

2122

2122

21

2020

2120

2120

2120

2120

2120

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2020

2020

1920

2020

2020

2019

1920

2020

2020

1920

2020

2020

2019

1920

2020

1920

2020

1920

2020

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

133C

133B

133D133E

133F

01A400

FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES

1. THESE GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND SHALL GOVERN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE BYGENERAL NOTES OR KEYNOTES ON SPECIFIC DRAWINGS.

2. NOTIFY ARCHITECT PROMPTLY IF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE CURRENT APPLICABLE CODESAND REGULATIONS.

3. NOTIFY ARCHITECT PROMPTLY IF ANY EXISTING CONDITIONS CONFLICT WITH THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.

4. COORDINATE ALL PROJECT SCHEDULING WITH OWNER OR AS SPECIFIED AND/OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.

5. PROVIDE A SAFE MEANS OF EGRESS THROUGH AND/OR AROUND THE BUILDING AND SITE PER APPLICABLE CODES AT ALLTIMES DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PROCESS. MINIMIZE DISRUPTION TO ADJACENT AREAS/FLOORS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE.

6. MINIMIZE NOISE TO A LEVEL ACCEPTABLE TO THE OWNER. SCHEDULE TASKS CREATING EXCESSIVE NOISE OR NEARSENSITIVE AREAS WITH THE OWNER.

7. PROVIDE DUST CONTROL BETWEEN CONSTRUCTION AREAS AND OCCUPIED AREAS AT ALL TIMES.

8. ALL SHUTDOWNS OF MECHANICAL, SPRINKLER, FIRE ALARM AND/OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITHOWNER AND LOCAL FIRE AUTHORITIES

9. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, DIMENSIONS OF INTERIOR DEMISING WALLS AND PARTITIONS ARE TO FINISHED FACE OF GYPBOARD

10. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS ARE TYPE "A3" - REFER TO SHEET A002 FOR PARTITION TYPES.

11. INSTALL NON-COMBUSTIBLE BLOCKING OR PLYWOOD IN WALLS WHERE FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES OR CABINETS ARE TO BEMOUNTED.

FLOOR PLAN KEYNOTE LEGEND

PATCH CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB AND SUBSOILS AS REQ'D TO ACCOMMODATE WORK AT AREA OFREMOVALS - REFER TO STRUCT.

INFILL CONC. FLOORING AT LOCATIONS OF REMOVED SEATING ANCHORS - REFER TO DETAILS ANDDEMOLITION DRAWINGS.

NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT 8" CMU WALL AT CONTROL BOOTH LOCATION.

NEW CONCRETE ACCESS RAMP - REFER TO DETAILS

NEW COLUMN WRAP - REFER TO DETAILS

NEW THEATRICAL SEATING - REFER TO THEATRICAL DOCUMENTS

NEW AISLE CARPETING - REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

PATCH / REPAIR / REFINISH EXISTING WOOD FLOORING - REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

NEW STAGE APRON - REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

REINSTALL SALVAGED WOOD STAIR ASSEMBLY. STRIP, SAND AND RE-STAIN TO MATCH ADJACENT STAGEAPRON P-LAM FINISH.

1

2

3

4

5

LEGEND

EXIST. WALL TO REMAIN

EXIST. WALL TO BE REMOVED

NEW WALL

EXIST. DOOR AND FRAMETO BE REMOVED

6

7

9

10

8

1

10

10

9

9

9

88

7

7

62

62

62

5 55

5

5 5 5 5

3

4

02A400

03A400

15'-4" 15'-4"15'-4"

42'-0"

3'-6"

15'-4

"15

'-4"

15'-4"

04 A40005 A400

06 A400

6'-6"21'-4"

2'-4"

15'-4

"3'-

8"

3A500

4A500

1A500

2A500

5A500

7A500

6A500

9A500

1

1

1

03A300

02A300

15'-4"

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 10

:49:26

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

KBL A100

MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN- AREA A1




01

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text


1/8"= 1'-0"

MAIN LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA A101A200

A104STORAGE

108BVEST.

A108CVEST.

A107CONCESSIONS

A106TICKET

A108EBOOTH

CONTROL

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

3

2

1.0

4

A105STORAGE

A102LOBBY

A101VESTIBULE

A132MECH.

A133ADMIN.

A108AUDITORIUM

A113STAGE

A103STORAGE

13'-4"

3'-3"

16'-9"

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN GENERAL NOTES

1. CEILING PLANS SHOW DESIGN INTENT ONLY. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DEVICES, TYPES ANDINSTALLATION. NOTE: DEVICES SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL PLAN AND NOT ON THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS ORSPECIFICATIONS SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO ARCHITECT'S ATTENTION FOR CLARIFICATION.

2. SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DEVICE/FIXTURE TYPES, SIZES, INSTALLATION AND SPECIFICATIONS.

3. ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID SHALL BE CENTERED IN ROOMS OR STRUCTURAL BAYS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

4. CEILING HEIGHTS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM FLOOR LINE DESIGN ELEVATION TO FINISHED CEILING

5. CENTER RECESSED LIGHTS, ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DEVICES AND SPRINKLER HEADS WHEN SHOWN IN CEILING TILE.WHERE RECESSED LIGHTS ARE SHOWN OFF-CENTER IN A 2X4 SCORED CEILING TILE, CENTER THE FIXTURE WITHIN THE 2X2PORTION OF THE TILE.


7. MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS SHALL COORDINATE ALL DEVICES REQUIRING ACCESS INNON-ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS AS NEEDED. (E.G. MECHANICAL VAV BOXES, PLUMBING CLEANOUTS,ETC.)

8. ALL CEILING FINISHES ADJACENT TO OR WITHIN THE LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION DISTURBED OR DAMAGED BY CONSTRUCTIONSHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT CEILING FINISH.

9. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLERS AND SMOKE/HEAT DETECTORS TO SATISFY CURRENT BUILDINGCODE REQUIREMENTS.

10. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS OF LIGHT FIXTURES, SPEAKERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, EXIT LIGHTS, ACCESS PANELS,SPRINKLER HEADS, HVAC DUCTS, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, SURVEILLANCE EQUIPMENT AND OTHER SUCH CEILING ITEMS WITHMECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND OTHER TRADES. NOTIFY ARCHITECT PROMPTLY OF IF ANY LOCATIONS CONFLICT WITHARCHITECTURAL PLANS.

NACP-2EL. 9'-6"

ACP-1EL. 9'-6"

GYP. BD. PT-1EL. 6'-10"

GYP. BD. PT-1EL. 6'-10"

PT-5 ON EXIST FINISH

PT-5 ON EXIST FINISH

GYP. BD.; PT-1EL. 8'-2"

ACP-1EL. 8'-6"

GYP. BD. PT-1EL. 9'-00"

GYP. BD.; PT-1EL. 9'-0"

GYP. BD. PT-1EL. 8'-6"

GYP. BD. PT-1EL. 8'-6"

MTL PNL 3EL. 10'-0"

13A500

7

7

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN KEYNOTE AND LEGEND

PATCH/PREP EXISTING PLASTER CEILING AND WALL SURFACES AS REQ'D TO RECEIVE NEW CEILINGAND WALL FINISH.

REFER TO THEATRICAL DRAWING FOR THEATRICAL LIGHTING SCOPE IN THIS AREA.

ALL EXPOSED STRUCTURE, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TO MATCH EXISTING WALL &CEILING PAINT.

PATCH/INFILL EXISTING PLASTER CEILING AS REQ'D AT EXISTING ABANDONED OPENING/GRILLLOCATIONS.

NEW ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS - REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.

EXISTING UNDERSIDE OF CATWALK. PT-6

COILING COUNTERTOP DOOR - SEE DETAIL XX/AXXX

NEW ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

01

02

01

01

01

01

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 10

:59:16

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

KBL A200

MAIN LEVEL REFLECTED CEILINGPLAN - AREA A1



AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text


1/8"= 1'-0"

UPPER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA A101A210

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

3

2

1.0

4

14' 0"

14' 0"14' 0"

6' 10"

17' 3"

15' 7"

17' 6 1/2"

17' 3"15' 3/8"

14' 0"

16' 3"

17' 3"

17' 3"

16' 3"

15' 6 1/2"

16' 6 1/2"

16'-0"

17'-0"

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN GENERAL NOTES

1. CEILING PLANS SHOW DESIGN INTENT ONLY. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DEVICES, TYPES ANDINSTALLATION. NOTE: DEVICES SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL PLAN AND NOT ON THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS ORSPECIFICATIONS SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO ARCHITECT'S ATTENTION FOR CLARIFICATION.

2. SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DEVICE/FIXTURE TYPES, SIZES, INSTALLATION AND SPECIFICATIONS.

3. ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID SHALL BE CENTERED IN ROOMS OR STRUCTURAL BAYS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

4. CEILING HEIGHTS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM FLOOR LINE DESIGN ELEVATION TO FINISHED CEILING

5. CENTER RECESSED LIGHTS, ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DEVICES AND SPRINKLER HEADS WHEN SHOWN IN CEILING TILE.WHERE RECESSED LIGHTS ARE SHOWN OFF-CENTER IN A 2X4 SCORED CEILING TILE, CENTER THE FIXTURE WITHIN THE 2X2PORTION OF THE TILE.


7. MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS SHALL COORDINATE ALL DEVICES REQUIRING ACCESS INNON-ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS AS NEEDED. (E.G. MECHANICAL VAV BOXES, PLUMBING CLEANOUTS,ETC.)

8. ALL CEILING FINISHES ADJACENT TO OR WITHIN THE LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION DISTURBED OR DAMAGED BY CONSTRUCTIONSHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT CEILING FINISH.

9. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLERS AND SMOKE/HEAT DETECTORS TO SATISFY CURRENT BUILDINGCODE REQUIREMENTS.

10. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS OF LIGHT FIXTURES, SPEAKERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, EXIT LIGHTS, ACCESS PANELS,SPRINKLER HEADS, HVAC DUCTS, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, SURVEILLANCE EQUIPMENT AND OTHER SUCH CEILING ITEMS WITHMECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND OTHER TRADES. NOTIFY ARCHITECT PROMPTLY OF IF ANY LOCATIONS CONFLICT WITHARCHITECTURAL PLANS.

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN KEYNOTE AND LEGEND

PATCH/PREP EXISTING PLASTER CEILING AND WALL SURFACES AS REQ'D TO RECEIVE NEW CEILINGAND WALL FINISH.

REFER TO THEATRICAL DRAWING FOR THEATRICAL LIGHTING SCOPE IN THIS AREA.

ALL EXPOSED STRUCTURE, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TO MATCH EXISTING WALL &CEILING PAINT.

PATCH/INFILL EXISTING PLASTER CEILING AS REQ'D AT EXISTING ABANDONED OPENING/GRILLLOCATIONS.

NEW ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS - REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.

EXISTING UNDERSIDE OF CATWALK. PT-6

COILING COUNTERTOP DOOR - SEE DETAIL XX/AXXX

NEW ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS.

1

2

3

4

ACP-1EL. 9'-6"

ACP-1EL. 9'-6"

4

4

4

4

3

32 2 2

5

1 8 1 8 1 5

5

5

5

5

EXISTING

EXIST PLASTERPT-5

ACP-2

EXIST PLASTERPT-5

EXIST PLASTERPT-5

ACP-2

EXIST PLASTERPT-5

ACP-3EL. VARIES

EXPOSEDPT-1

6 6

ACP-1EL. VARIES

EXISITING ACPEL. 16'-0"

6

7

EXIST PLASTERPT-5

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

01

0101

01

01

01

01

01

01

01No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 10

:58:35

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

KBL A210

UPPER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILINGPLAN - AREA A1



AutoCAD SHX Text


1

T.O. FOOTINGSEE STRUCT.

F.F.E.100'-0"

23'-4

"

2'-4 1

/2"10

'-0"

6'-0"

1'-7 1

/2"

T.O. FASCIA111'-8"

B.O. SOFFIT110'-0"

1'-8"

1'-8"

SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

BUILDING SECTION @ VESTIBULE01A400

1


F.F.E.100'-0"

T.O. FASCIA111'-8"

11'-8

"

23'-4

"

10'-0

"

B.O. SOFFIT110'-0"

1'-8"

SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

BUILDING SECTION @ CANOPY02A400

S.4

B.O. SOFFIT119'-4"

T.O. STEEL120'-11 1/2"

T.O. PARAPET123'-4"

SILL113'-4"

T.O. FASCIA111'-8"

B.O. SOFFIT110'-0"

SILL102'-4"

23'-4

"

2'-4 1

/2"7'-

8"6'-

0"1'-

7 1/2"

1'-8"

1'-8"

2'-4"

SILL102'-4"

SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

BUILDING SECTION @ VESTIBULE03A400

2

15'-4"


T.O. STEEL120'-10 1/2"

T.O. PARAPET123'-4"

B.O. SOFFIT119'-4"

SILL113'-4"

2

GG.

3 4

3'-6"

SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

WALL SECTION @ VESTIBULE04A400 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

BUILDING SECTION @ VESTIBULE06A400SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

WALL SECTION @ VESTIBULE05A400

2

15'-4"

T.O. STEEL120'-11 1/2"

T.O. PARAPET123'-4"


B.O. SOFFIT119'-4"

SILL113'-4"

3 4

3'-6"5'-4"

8'-0"

3'-4"

5'-8"

17'-0

"

2

15'-4"

T.O. PARAPET123'-4"

3'-11 5/8" 1'-1 1/4" 4'-11 5/8"

2'-8"9 1/4"

2'-5"

8"

2'-8"1'-0"

2'-5"

8"

1'-1 1/4"3'-6"

3'-3"

1'-1 1/4"3'-6"

3'-3"

1'-1 1/4"3'-0"

3'-3"

EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY - 2· COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM

W/ SUBGIRTS AS REQUIRED· 3" 20 GA. Z FURRING 24" O.C. HORIZ.· 3" (R-12.6) SEMI-RIGID INSULATION· MEMBRANE WEATHER BARRIER· 5/8" GYP SHEATHING· 6" METAL STUDS· SPRAY FOAM INSULATION (R-15)· 5/8" GYP BOARD

REFER TO ROOFING DRAWINGS FORCOPINGS, KEEPERS, BLOCKING ANDROOF MEMBRANE TRANSITIONS.

CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM - REFER TO BP-2

CURTAIN WALL SUPPLIER SHALLCOORDINATE FLASHING AND END DAMNCONDITION WITH ROOFING DRAWINGS

CEMENTIOUS COATING SYSTEM ASREQ'D

INSULATION COATING SYSTEM ATTHRU-WALL BEAM CONDITIONEXTEND 2'-0” MIN. IN EITHERDIRECTION - REFER TO SPECIFICATION(TYP.)

INTUMESCENT COATING SYSTEM ATINTERIOR AND EXTERIOR STEELCOLUMNS (TYP.)


FOUNDATION INSULATION - REFER TOSPECIFICATIONS



CURTAIN WALL SUPPLIER SHALLCOORDINATE FLASHING AND END DAMNCONDITION WITH ROOFING DRAWINGS









STOREFRONT SYSTEM - REFER TO BP-2



ALUMINUM WALL PANEL SUPPLIER SHALLCOORDINATE FLASHING CONDITIONSWITH ROOFING DRAWINGS





EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY - 1· FACE BRICK W/ BRICK TIES· AIR SPACE· 3" (R-12.6) SEMI-RIGID INSULATION· MEMBRANE WEATHER BARRIER· 12" CMU· AIR SPACE· FACE BRICK W/ BRICK TIES

EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY - 1· FACE BRICK W/ BRICK TIES· AIR SPACE· 3" (R-12.6) SEMI-RIGID INSULATION· MEMBRANE WEATHER BARRIER· 12" CMU· AIR SPACE· FACE BRICK W/ BRICK TIES

REFER TO ROOFING DRAWINGS FORCOPINGS, KEEPERS, BLOCKING AND

ROOF MEMBRANE TRANSITIONS.


CURTAIN WALL SUPPLIER SHALLCOORDINATE FLASHING AND END DAMN

CONDITION WITH ROOFING DRAWINGS


INSULATION COATING SYSTEM ATTHRU-WALL BEAM CONDITION

EXTEND 2'-0” MIN. IN EITHERDIRECTION - REFER TO SPECIFICATION

(TYP.)

INTUMESCENT COATING SYSTEM ATINTERIOR AND EXTERIOR STEEL

COLUMNS (TYP.)



EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY - 2· COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM

W/ SUBGIRTS AS REQUIRED· 3" 20 GA. Z FURRING 24" O.C. HORIZ.· 3" (R-12.6) SEMI-RIGID INSULATION· MEMBRANE WEATHER BARRIER· 5/8" GYP SHEATHING· 6" METAL STUDS· SPRAY FOAM INSULATION (R-15)· 5/8" GYP BOARD

· CONCRETE SLAB - SEESTRUCTURAL

· POLY MOISTURE BARRIER· GRANULAR CUSHION (TYP.)

SEE STRUCTURAL



SEE STRUCTURAL



SEE STRUCTURAL



SEE STRUCTURAL

12A420

01A420

06A420

SIM

02A420

03A420

01A420

06A420

11A420

12A420

07A420

10AA500

10AA500

02A420

SIM

01A420

SIM

07A420

SIM

03A420

08A420

13A420

K L M N O PI J Q

1/8"= 1'-0"

BUILDING SECTION @ AUDITORIUM07A400

12A500

15A500

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 10

:37:52

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

KBL A400

BUILDING SECTIONS



3/28/2019 BP-3 ADDENDUM No. 102

0202

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02


02

02

AutoCAD SHX Text


(WD-1, ST-2) CURVED TO MATCHRADIUS OF STAGE W/ 1/2 "EASED EDGE.

1X2 (WD-1, ST-2) TRIM

CONTINUOUS HINGE

EXISTING STRUCTURE OVERFORMER PIT

PERFORATED METAL ACCESSPANEL

CAM LOCK

TRESPA PANEL (PNL-1) ON 2 12" METALSTUD AND 3/4 " PLYWOOD BACKING -ALIGN FACE OF TRESPA PANELS WITHFACE OF BURNISH BLOCK BELOW

EXISTING WALL

TERR-T-1 BASE ON 8" CMU

1/2"

2"1'-

4"8 3

/4"1/2

"

1 1/2"= 1'-0"

SECTION AT STAGE15A500

1/8"= 1'-0"

INTERIOR ELEVATION1A500

K L M N O P

N KLMOP

L M N O P

LMNOP

1/8"= 1'-0"

INTERIOR ELEVATION2A500 1/8"= 1'-0"


1/8"= 1'-0"



1/8"= 1'-0"



1'-0" 1'-

0" 1'-0" 1'-

0"

1'-0"1'-

0"1'-0"1'-

0" 1'-6"

1'-6"

OPEN TO BEYONDOPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

OPEN TO BEYOND

REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

REFER TOELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS

BOX BOOM - REFERTO DETAIL 11/A500

BOX BOOM - REFERTO DETAIL 11/A500

METAL PANELGUARDRAIL

METAL HANDRAIL

3'-0"

3'-6"

1/8"= 1'-0"


14A500

13A500

2'-5"

EXISTING CERAMICBASEEXISTING CERAMIC BASE

EQEQ.EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.

EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.

(8) EQUAL PANELS ON THE THIS PLANE

ALIGN 14" REVEAL WITH BOTTOM OF WINDOW TRIM



AWP-1 @ SIDE PANELAWP-1 @ SIDE PANEL

02

START TILE

02

02

02 02

LOCATED AT BOTTOM EDGE, SIDE EDGES ANDOUTSIDE CORNERS OF CTW-2 TYP.

02

LOCATED AT BOTTOM EDGE, SIDE EDGESAND OUTSIDE CORNERS OF CTW-2 TYP.

LOCATED ON ALL SIDES OFCOLUMNS..

02

CONCESSIONS TICKETSAUDITORIUM AUDITORIUM

ADMINISTRATION

8" ALUMINUM PIN LETTERS 8" ALUMINUM PIN LETTERS8" ALUMINUM PIN LETTERS

STAGE NOSING

3/4"

1 1/2"

1/2"

2'-2 3

/4"1/2

"6"

2"

WOOD STAGE TRIMPERFORATED STEEL ACCESS PANEL

- 3/16" HOLES ON 1/4" STAGGERED CENTERS- 51% OPEN AREA- 1" SOLID BORDER ALL SIDES- POWDER COAT FINISH.

12" O.D. ALUMINUM REVEALS

TRESPA PANEL (PNL-1) ON 34"PLYWOOD BACKING

POWER/DATA OUTLET - CENTER INPANELS - REFER TO A/V ANDELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

RB-2 BASE ON 8" CMU

3/4"= 1'-0"

STAGE ELEVATION DETAIL14A500

15A500

3/4"= 1'-0"

SOFFIT DETAIL 10AA500 3/4"= 1'-0"

SOFFIT DETAIL 10BA500

EXISTING TUBE STEEL SUPPORT BEYOND - PREPAND PAINT W/ INTUMESCENT COATING SYSTEMWHERE EXPOSED.


5/8" GYP BD ON 5/8" FR PLYWOOD AND 3-5/8" MTLSTUD FRAMING AS REQ'D.


3/4"= 1'-0"

CONTROL BOOTH DETAIL12A500

1'-0"

4

1'-6" 1'-2"

8"1'-

9"

8 5/8"

1'-0" 4" 2'-4"

1'-6"1'-2"

8"1'-

9"

9"

9 3/4" 2 1/4"

2'-5"

2'-5"

2'-6"

3'-0"

SOLID SURFACE (SSM-1) WALL CAP

SOLID SURFACE COUNTER TOP(SSM-1) W/ SUPPORT BRACKETS ASREQ'D - SEE SPECIFICATIONS

2'-4"

2'-8"

4"

SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

SECTION @ ADMIN ENTRANCE13A500

STEEL CHANNEL

1 1/2" STEEL PIPERAILING WELDED TO

BOX BOOMASSEMBLY

1 1/2" VERTICAL STEELPIPE - SECURE AT TOP

TO ADJACENT WALL

1 1/2" HORIZONTAL STEELPIPE

ADJUSTABLE PIPE CLAMP -MUTUAL HARDWARE

#HR2019FNS OR APPROVEDEQUAL (2 CLAMPS PER

HORIZONTAL PIPE)

NOTE:PAINT ALL STEEL COMPONENTSOF BOX BOOM PT-12 BEFOREINSTALLING ANY CLAMPS -HORIZONTAL PIPE ELEVATIONSTO BE ADJUSTABLE BY OWNER

WELD PIPES TO TOPOF STEEL CHANNEL

FLOOR ELEVATION

SIDEWALL

STEEL TIE BACKS -ANCHOR BACK TO SIDE

WALL

EXISTING CEILING

EXISTING SOFFIT

DEMOLISH EXISTINGACOUSTICAL PLASTER SYSTEMAS REQ''D.

STRUCTURAL STEEL BEYOND -REFER TO STRUCTURE

GYP BD CEILING W/ FIBERGLASSBATT INSULATION FOR STC 48 -REFER TO RCP

STOREFRONT SYSTEM

NEW CONCRETE SLAB, REFERTO FINISH PLAN.

NEW CONC. FOOTING - REFERTO STRUCT.

SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0"

TYPICAL BOX BOOM ELEVATION11A500

EXISTING FIRE RESISTANCE RATEDPARTITION TO REMAIN - FIELD VERIFYMOUNTING CONDITIONS AND SHOREAS REQ'D.

NEW SOFFIT - WALL TYPE A3 W/FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION FORSTC RATING OF 48.

DEMOLISH EXISTING RADIUSED CMUWALL - REFER TO DEMOLITION PLANS.

10BA500

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 11

:28:23

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

CC A500

INTERIORELEVATIONS


3/28/2019 BP-3 ADDENDUM No. 101

010101

01


02

02

02 02

02 02

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-6

AutoCAD SHX Text

PNL-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TR-5

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

PNL-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TR-5

AutoCAD SHX Text

PNL-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TR-5

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

PNL-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

PNL-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-6

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

PNL-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TR-5

AutoCAD SHX Text

AWP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-6

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR-T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR-T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

TR-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TR-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

2'-0"

AutoCAD SHX Text

2'-0"

AutoCAD SHX Text


1/6"= 1'-0"MAIN LEVEL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - AREA A101

A700

A104STORAGE

108BVEST.

A108CVEST.

HR A107

CONCESSIONS

A106TICKET

A108EBOOTH

CONTROL

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

3

2

1.0

4

A105STORAGE

A102LOBBY

A101VESTIBULE

A132MECH.

A133ADMIN.

A108AUDITORIUM

A113STAGE

A103STORAGE

INTERIOR FINISH PLAN GENERAL NOTES

1. REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE, FINISH PLANS, INTERIOR WALL FINISH PLAN, ENLARGED FINISH PLANS,REFLECTED CEILING PLANS, ELEVATIONS, DETAILS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

2. ALL LOUVERS, VENTS, GRILLES AND OTHER MISC. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCHSURFACE ON WHICH THEY APPEAR. UNO.

3. ALL HALLOW METAL FRAMES TO BE PT-3, UNO.

4. WHEN THE FINISH TAB STATES VARIES OF THE FINISH SCHEDULE, THIS REFERS TO 2 OR MORE FINISHES. PLEASE REFER TOELEVATIONS, RCP, OR ENLARGED FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

5. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAKING SMOOTH, TRANSITIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT FLOORING MATERIALS. THEMAXIMUM HEIGHT IS 1

4".

6. ALL GYP BD WALLS TO BE PAINTED PT-2 UNO.

7. PAINT AND WOOD STAIN DRAW DOWNS MUST BE SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY INTERIOR DESIGNER.

8. NO RESILIENT BASE LOCATED AT BRICK, CMU OR BURNISHED BLOCK WALLS, TYP.

9. ALL FLOOR FINISHES SHALL CHANGE AT CENTER LINE OF DOOR, UNO.

10. NO ADDITIONAL BASE LOCATED ON STOREFRONT WALLS.

FINISH PLAN KEYNOTE LEGEND

CONC -1 LOCATED UNDER NEW AUDITORIUM SEATING. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS.

REFER TO ELECTICAL DWGS AND THEATRICAL SEATING DRAWINGS TO LOCATE PLACEMENT OF CARPET.

NEW COLUMN WRAP - PNL-1 & TR-5 AT All OUTSIDE CORNERS.

NEW THEATRICAL SEATING - REFER TO THEATRICAL DOCUMENTS -

START THE CARPET LAYOUT AT CENTER LINE OF THE COLUMN. TYP. INSTALL CARPET IN AN ASHLARPATTERN. LENGTHWISE ALONG AISLES.

REFINISH AND STAIN STAGE FLOORING - ST-2

NEW STAGE APRON- FLOOR TO STAGE TOP TRIM - PNL-1 WITH RB-2 BASE, SEE DETAIL.

NEW STAGE APRON TRIM, MATCH WD-1, ST-2.

REFINISH STAIRS TO MATCH ST-2.

REUSE SALVAGED STAIRS.

EXISTING TERRAZZO FLOOR FINISH TO REMAIN AND REMAIN UNDESTURBBED AND PROTECTED DURNINGCONSTRUCTION.

3 COURSES OF TERR-T-1, INSTALL FLUSH WITH EXISTING TERRAZZO

FOLLOW CURVE OF DEMOLISHED CMU WALL..

INSTALL CPT-M-1 OVER EXISTING TERRAZZO.

EXISTING TERRAZZO LINES

1

2

3

4

5

LEGEND

EXIST. WALL TO REMAIN

EXIST. WALL TO BE REMOVED

NEW WALL

EXIST. DOOR AND FRAMETO BE REMOVED

6

7

9

10

8

10

10

7

7

7

8

6

41

3

41

41

8

5

5

5

5

2

2

2

2

9

9

9

11

11

12

12 12

12

12

12

12

11

13

13

1114

14

6

6

15

15

01

01

01

3

02

02

02

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 11

:36:47

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

SMJ A700

MAIN LEVEL FLOOR FINISH PLAN- AREA A1



AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

00

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR-T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

QT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

QT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

RFT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

RFT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

RFT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR-T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR -T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

TERR-T-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text


No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 11

:40:31

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

KBL A701

MAIN LEVEL FINISH SCHEDULE


01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

01

02

01

01

01


AutoCAD SHX Text


1/6"= 1'-0"MAIN LEVEL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - AREA A101

A700

A104STORAGE

108BVEST.

A108CVEST.

HR A107

CONCESSIONS

A106TICKET

A108EBOOTH

CONTROL

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

3

2

1.0

4

A105STORAGE

A102LOBBY

A101VESTIBULE

A132MECH.

A133ADMIN.

A108AUDITORIUM

A113STAGE

A103STORAGE

INTERIOR WALL FINISH PLAN GENERAL NOTES

1. REFER TO INTERIOR FINISH AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE, FINISH PLANS, ENLARGED FINISH PLANS, REFLECTED CEILING PLANS,ELEVATIONS, DETAILS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

2. ALL LOUVERS, VENTS, GRILLES AND OTHER MISC. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCHSURFACE ON WHICH THEY APPEAR. UNO.

3. ALL HALLOW METAL FRAMES TO BE PT-3, UNO.

4. WHEN THE FINISH TAB STATES VARIES OF THE FINISH SCHEDULE, THIS REFERS TO 2 OR MORE FINISHES. PLEASE REFER TOELEVATIONS, RCP, OR ENLARGED FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

5. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAKING SMOOTH, TRANSITIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT FLOORING MATERIALS. THEMAXIMUM HEIGHT IS 1

4".

6. ALL GYP BD WALLS TO BE PAINTED PT-2 UNO.

7. PAINT AND WOOD STAIN DRAW DOWNS MUST BE SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY INTERIOR DESIGNER.

8. NO RESILIENT BASE LOCATED AT BRICK, CMU OR BURNISHED BLOCK WALLS, TYP.

9. ALL FLOOR FINISHES SHALL CHANGE AT CENTER LINE OF DOOR, UNO.

10. NO ADDITIONAL BASE LOCATED ON STOREFRONT WALLS.

11. NO PAINT ON EXISTING BRICK.

INTERIOR WALL FINISH PLAN KEYNOTE KEYNOTES

NO PAINT ON EXISTING BRICK.

SEE ELEVATIONS FOR WALL FINISHES.

NEW COLUMN WRAP, PNL-1, TERRA -T-1, 12" BASE, TR-5 ON OUTSIDE CORNERS.

LOW WALL PT- 6 WITH SSM-1 AT TOP CAP.

SSM-1 @ COUNTER TOP

STN-1 @ COUNTER TOP

CTW-1, FLOOR TO CEILING

EXISTING TILE BASE TO REMAIN ON BRICK WALL.

PT -7 AT EXISTING AND NEW PIPE HAND AND GUARD RAILS.

ADD ADJACENT WALL AND BASE FINISHES TO COLUMNS.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

8

1

1

1

1

2

2

2 2

4

5

6

6

7

8

82

9

9

9

9

9

3 TYP.

2

8

8

2

8

01

10

10

10

10

01

01

01

01

01

01

10

01

01

No. Date

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:



PROJECT




612.343.1010 office612.338.2280 fax


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Key Plan

Project

Drawn byChecked by

Date

Drawing Number



4/5/20

19 11

:49:10

AM

Keon

Blas

ingam

e

MOHAMMED LAWAL

3/11/2019 24228

17.1044.03

2/25/2019

KBL

2010




A1

A2A3

C

B

EF

D

G

SMJ A750

MAIN LEVEL WALL FINISH PLAN- AREA A1



AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

00

AutoCAD SHX Text

SSM-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A103

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXPOSED

AutoCAD SHX Text

RFT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

EX BRICK

AutoCAD SHX Text

EX BRICK

AutoCAD SHX Text

EX BRICK

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A104

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXPOSED

AutoCAD SHX Text

RFT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

VEST

AutoCAD SHX Text

A108B

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

SEE RCP

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A105

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXPOSED

AutoCAD SHX Text

RFT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

TICKET

AutoCAD SHX Text

A106

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

ACP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-3

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

VESTIBULE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A108C

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

SEE RCP

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

ADMIN

AutoCAD SHX Text

A133

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-4

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-4

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

SEE RCP

AutoCAD SHX Text

VARIES

AutoCAD SHX Text

VERIFY

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCH EXIST GLADD CURVE THAT IS

AutoCAD SHX Text

LOCATED AT EXIST TERRAZZO

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

2 ADJACENT ADMIN AREAS

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

REFER RCP

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

VERIFY

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONCESSIONS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A107

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

NACP-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

QT-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

QTB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

MECH

AutoCAD SHX Text

A132

AutoCAD SHX Text

-

AutoCAD SHX Text

-

AutoCAD SHX Text

-

AutoCAD SHX Text

-

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXPOSED

AutoCAD SHX Text

SC-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

-

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

VESTIBULE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A101

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

SEE RCP

AutoCAD SHX Text

CPT-M-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

RB-1

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

W

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

B

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A113

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

SEE RCP

AutoCAD SHX Text

SEE A700

AutoCAD SHX Text

EXIST

AutoCAD SHX Text

EX BRICK

AutoCAD SHX Text

PT-6

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text

CTW-2

AutoCAD SHX Text


O

P

Q

4 5 6 7 8

T

P.1

Q.1

Q.8

R.2

R.8

O.1

R

S

21

4.5

3

EXIST TOF 93' - 8"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

33' -

0"

28' -

0"

EXIS

T TOF 9

5' - 4

"

15' - 4" 15' - 4" 3' - 6" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0"

U

CF6-0CP1SC1

CF6-0CP1SC1

CF6-0CP1SC1

CF6-0CP1SC1

CF6-0CP1SC1

CF6-0CP1SC1

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

CF4-0

CP1

SC2

MP1

MP1

WF3-0

WF3-0

MW1

MW

1

1

EXIST TOF 93' - 8"

EXIST TOF 94' - 4"

EXIST TOF 95' - 0"

TOF 93' - 8"TOF 96' - 0"

TOF 93' - 8"TOF 96' - 0"

TOF 96' - 0" TOF 93' - 8"

TO

F 9

3' -

8"

TOF 95' - 0"

TOF 95' - 0"

TOF 95' - 0"

TOF 95' - 0"

TOF 94' - 8"

TOF 94' - 4"

19S3.00

19S3.00

10S3.00

21S3.00

22S3.00

TOF 94' - 10"

EXIST TOF 94' - 10"

S

S

S

S

S S

3' - 2"

4' -

0"2'

- 0"

2' - 6"

8" 3' - 4"

8"

2' - 6"

2' -

0"

4' -

0"

8" 1' - 0" 15' - 10" 2' - 6" 1' - 0"

TO

F 9

5' -

8"

20S3.00

23S3.00

TOP 98' - 4"

TOP 98' - 8"

1 1

MW1WF2-0

MW

1

4"

4"

8"

4"

4"

4" 4"

8"

4"4"

WF3-0

5' -

0"7'

- 8"

7' -

8"5'

- 0"

3' -

8"2'

- 4"

11S3.00

SS

INTERIOR NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL STUD & BRICK WALL, SEE ARCH

INTERIOR NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL STUD & BRICK WALL, SEE ARCH

SC3

CF3-0

SC3

CF3-0

SC3

CF3-0

SC3

CF3-0

R.6

TOF

99' -

0"

TOF

99' -

0"

TOF

99' -

0"

TOF

99' -

0"

11' -

8"

MP1

O

P

Q

4 5 6 7 8

T

P.1

Q.1W12X26

Q.8W12X26

R.2W12X26

R.8W12X26

W12X26

O.1

W12X26

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

R

S

21

4.5

3

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' - 4" 15' - 4" 3' - 6" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0"

U

W10

X17

W10

X17

3' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 3' - 10" 1' - 6"

16S4.00

15S4.00

W12X26

1' -

2"1'

- 6"

2' -

4"

BP1

BP

1B

P1

14' -

0"

12' -

8"

1' -

4"

8"8"

22S4.00

17S4.00

21S4.00

18S4.00

24S4.00

24S4.00

23S4.00

BP1

4" 4"

20S4.00

5' -

0"7'

- 8"

7' -

8"5'

- 0"

3' -

8"2'

- 4"

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

3' -

10"

1' -

2"

W10X17

BP1

W10

X17

W10

X17

18S4.00

2' - 0" 19' - 0" 1' - 0"

5' - 0" 5' - 4" 5' - 0"

1' - 10"

8"

W10

X17

W10

X17

W10

X17

13' - 2"

2' - 5" 9"

EXIS

T W

8X24

SHOP WELD BEAM TO FACE OF COLUMN W/ 3/16" FILLET WELD ALL AROUND

R.6

W8X

15

W8X

15

W8X

15

W8X

15

W8X15 W8X15 W8X15W8X15

W8X15W8X15W8X15W8X15

9' -

2"

TOB=108'-11"

TO

B=1

08'-1

1"

TO

B=1

08'-1

1"

TO

B=1

08'-1

1"

TO

B=1

08'-1

1"

TOB=108'-11" TOB=108'-11" TOB=108'-11"

TOB=108'-11"TOB=108'-11"TOB=108'-11"TOB=108'-11"

1S5.00

2S5.00

APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF EXISTING RADIUS STEEL STUD WALL

2 THUS

L1

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. SEE SHEET S1.00 FOR STRUCTURAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS.2. SEE SHEET S3.00 FOR TYPICAL FOOTING AND FOUNDATION DETAILS.3. SEE SHEET S5.00 FOR SCHEDULES.4. TOP OF SLAB ELEVATION = 100'-0" (MATCH EXISTING).5. TOP OF CONCRETE PIER = 99'-0".6. PROVIDE 4" SLAB ON GRADE W/ MICRO FIBER REINFORCING (MINIMUM 1.5 POUNDS PER

CUBIC YARD).7. PROVIDE 2-#5 VERTICAL @ 8"OC AT EACH OPENING JAMB AND BEAM BEARING. SEE 5/S3.00 FOR

TYPICAL JAMB REINFORCING LAYOUT. SEE PIER SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL REINFORCMENT REQUIREMENTS.

8. PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR ALL PIPES THAT INTERSECT BUILDING FOUNDATIONS. STEP OR THICKEN FOOTINGS AS SHOWN IN 1/S3.00 AND 2/S3.00. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH CIVIL AND MECHANICAL.

9. FOOTINGS FOR WALLS NOT NOTED SHALL BE 12" THICK WITH A MINIMUM PROJECTION OF 4" EACH SIDE. REINFORCE WITH 2-#5 CONTINUOUS. ADD 1-#5 CONTINUOUS FOR EACH 6" WIDTH OVER 24".

10. PLACE ALL STOOP SLABS ON MINIMUM 4'-0" DEPTH OF CLEAN GRANULAR NON-FROST SUSEPTIBLE FILL MATERIAL.

11. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS OF RAMPS, SLAB SLOPES, STEPPED SLABS AND PARTITION WALLS.

12. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS.

N

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. SEE SHEET S1.00 FOR STRUCTURAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS.2. SEE SHEET S5.00 FOR SCHEDULES.3. TOP OF DECK = 111'-5 1/2".4. 1 1/2" - 20 GAUGE WIDE RIB ROOF DECK.5. FOR MECHANICAL OPENINGS IN BEARING WALL, SEE BLOCK WALL LINTELS SECTION IN

STRUCTURAL NOTES.6. PROVIDE 2-5/16" WEB STIFFENER PLATES AT STEEL BEAMS RUNNING OVER COLUMNS OR

WALLS. CENTER ON SUPPORT.7. SEE 1/S4.00 FOR TYPICAL DECK ATTACHMENT TO JOISTS.8. SEE 2/S4.00 FOR TYPICAL ROOF OPENING FRAMING. COORDINATE WITH

ARCHITECTURAL/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR OPENING LOCATION AND SIZE.9. SEE 6/S4.00 FOR STEEL BEAM BEARING PLATES AT CMU WALLS.10. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS.

N

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. SEE SHEET S1.00 FOR STRUCTURAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS.2. SEE SHEET S5.00 FOR SCHEDULES.3. TOP OF DECK = 121'-3" (MATCH EXISTING).4. 3" - 20 GAUGE ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK.5. FOR MECHANICAL OPENINGS IN BEARING WALL, SEE BLOCK WALL LINTELS SECTION IN

STRUCTURAL NOTES.6. PROVIDE 2-5/16" WEB STIFFENER PLATES AT STEEL BEAMS RUNNING OVER COLUMNS OR

WALLS. CENTER ON SUPPORT.7. SEE 1/S4.00 FOR TYPICAL DECK ATTACHMENT TO BEAMS.8. SEE 2/S4.00 FOR TYPICAL ROOF OPENING FRAMING. COORDINATE WITH

ARCHITECTURAL/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR OPENING LOCATION AND SIZE.9. SEE 6/S4.00 FOR STEEL BEAM BEARING PLATES AT CMU WALLS.10. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS.

N

O

P

Q

4

5

T

Q.1

Q.8

R.2

R.8

W12X16

W12X16

W12X16

W12X16

W10

X15

W12

X16

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

R

S

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

EXIS

T W

33X1

69

W10X15

W10X15

W10X15

W10X15

2

4.5

3

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' -

4"

15' - 4" 3' - 6"

U

EXIS

T W

24X

68

EXIS

T W

24X

68

13S4.00

10S4.00

4 LOCATIONS

11S4.00

12S4.00

14S4.00

4"

1' - 11"

1' -

11"

4"

7' - 8" 7' - 8" 3' - 6"

EXIST W12X19

EXIST W12X19

EXIS

T W

12X

19

EXIST W12X19

EXIST W12X19

EXIST W12X19

EXIS

T W

12X

19

EXIS

T W

16X

26

EXIS

T W

16X

26

EXIS

T W

16X

26

EXIS

T W

16X

26

EXIS

T W

16X

26

EXIS

T W

16X

26

EXIST W16X26

EXIST W16X26

EXIST W24X55

EXIST W8X18

5' -

0"7'

- 8"

7' -

8"5'

- 0" L2

W10

X15

W10

X15

W10

X15

BP1 BP1

W10X15

L2

N

KEY PLAN

F

E

B

A2 DG

C

A1

A3

DATE

PROJECT #

DRAWN BY

CHECKED BY

2019 BKBM EngineersAll rights reserved.This document is an instrument of service and is the property of BKBM Engineers and may not be used or copied without prior written consent.

C

BKBMENGINEERS

6120 Earle Brown Drive, Suite 700

Minneapolis, MN 55430Phone: (763) 843-0420

Fax: (763) 843-0421www.bkbm.com

I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the state of Minnesota.

Date Lic. No.

2/25/2019

18521.00

TWD

APM

Cooper HighSchoolAuditorium/EntryRenovation8230 47th Ave N,New Hope, MN 55428

ENTRYFRAMINGPLANS

S2.10

1FOUNDATION PLAN2

LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN

KEYNOTES

1 STEP BOTTOM OF FOOTING TO MATCH EXISTING FOOTING AS REQUIRED AND PROVIDE 2- #5x2'-6" DOWELSINTO EXISTING FOOTING. DRILL AND ADHESIVE ANCHOR 6" EMBEDMENT.

Revisions

No. Description Date

1 Design Development 1/28/2019

2 Bid Package No. 2 2/25/2019

3 BP-2 Addendum No.1 3/8/2019


5 BP-3 Addendum No. 1 3/28/2019

6 BP-3 Addendum No. 2 4/4/2019

3HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN

NO CONTROL JOINT

2S+0.25T 2S 2S

SS

ST

T

CONT REINF

UNLESS NOTED:S=8" FOR MASONRY WALLSS=12" FOR CONC WALLST = SCHEDULED FOOTING THICKNESS

TYPICAL DETAIL FOR STEPPING FOOTING

0.25T

SLEEVE AND PIPE THROUGH WALL.

SLEEVE TO BE 4" LARGER THAN PIPE.

6"4'

- 0"

MA

XFT

G

D + 1'-6"

DETAIL A DETAIL B

D =

SLE

EV

E S

IZE

AB

NOTES:1. USE THIS DETAIL FOR PIPES UP TO 4'-0" BELOW FOOTING.2. FOR PIPES DEEPER THAN 4'-0" BELOW FOOTING USE

STEPPED FOOTING DETAIL TO STEP FOOTING TO WITHIN 4'-0" MAXIMUM.

EXCAVATION FOR PIPING, SEE SPECIFICATION FOR BACKFILL REQUIREMENTS.

EXCAVATION SHALL NOT EXTEND BELOW THIS LINE.

NOTE:IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE SHORING, SHEATHING, ETC. TO MAINTAIN THE SIDES OF THE EXCAVATION FROM CAVING IN UNTIL ALL WORK AND BACKFILL IS COMPLETE.

10'-0" MIN

1

2

2

1

.

.

D 1'-6"

1'-6" SLA

B T

HIC

KN

ES

SC

UT

1/4

OF

SE

E P

LANSAWCUT JOINT WITHIN 12

HOURS AFTER PLACING SLAB.

TYPICAL CONTROL JOINTSEE STRUCTURAL NOTES FOR JOINT SPACING

TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTSEE STRUCTURAL NOTES FOR JOINT SPACING

CONTRACTOR MAY CHOOSE METHOD

PROVIDE 3/4"Øx1'-2"@18"OC SMOOTH BAR, GREASE ONE END, CENTER ON JOINT.

SE

E P

LAN

1' - 0" 1' - 0"

SE

E P

LAN

5" M

IN

4 1/2x1/4x0'-4 1/2" DIAMOND PLATE@18"OC.

1' - 0" 1' - 0"

(MIN 2-#5@8"OC)

SEE PLAN, FOR LINTEL

MASONRY CONTROL JOINT, SEE 6/S4.10 & 7/S4.10 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE CONTROL JOINT WITHIN MASONRY PIER

TYPICAL CONDITION AT EACH SIDE OF MASONRY LINTEL BEARING

MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS AT OPENING JAMBS

SEE PLAN

PIER WIDTH

2' - 0" MIN

PIER REINFORCING TO EXTEND TO 2" CLEAR OF STRUCTURE ABOVE

8" MIN

TYPICAL MASONRY CONTROL JOINT

BOND BM W/2-#5 CONT, TYPICAL AT FLOOR/ROOF BEARING. REINFORCING TO RUN CONTINUOUS THROUGH JOINT, TYP.

VERT REINF EA SIDE OF JOINT TO MATCH WALL REINF WITHIN 1/2 TYPICAL REINF SPACING

MASONRY CONTROL JOINT, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR JOINT MATERIAL. LOCATE JOINTS AT MAXIMUM OF 24'-0" OC.

GROUT CORES SOLID EA SIDE OF JOINT AS REQUIRED BY ARCHITECT

NOTE: IF PIER SHOWN ON PLAN, CONTROL JOINT SHALL NOT BE LOCATED IN PIER.

RAKE JOINT AND CAULK

RAKE AND CAULK

RAKE AND CAULK

NOTE: SEE DRAWINGS/SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONTROL JOINT SPACING

1/2 OF WALL REINFORCING SPACING, MAX (TYPICAL)

BUILDING PAPER

CONCRETE FILL


PREFORMED GASKET

SASH UNITS EACH SIDE OF GASKET


SPECIAL CONTROL JOINT UNITS

CMU CONTROL JOINTS

48 BAR DIA MIN

PROVIDE CORNER BARS TO MATCH BOND BEAM REINFORCING

BOND BEAM REINFORCING

48 B

AR

DIA

MIN

MIN

1' - 0"

MIN

1' - 0"

BOND BEAM REINFORCING

PROVIDE CORNER BARS TO MATCH BOND BEAM REINFORCING

#4@12"OC EACH WAY, PROVIDE 3" CLEAR TO ALL BARS

#4x3'-0"@12"OC DWLS, EQUAL LEGS

BOND BEAM W/ 2-#5 CONT

#4x3'-0"@12"OC DWLS, EQUAL LEGS

SEE ARCH FOR JOINT SIZE AND LOCATION

#4x3'-0"@12"OC DWLS, CENTER ON JOINT

8"

CONCRETE FOOTING W/ 2-#5 CONT (EACH SIDE OF STOOP)

1' - 8"

1' -

0"

7"

SLOPE 1/4" / FT

NOTE: ALL REINFORCING IN EXTERIOR SLAB SHALL BE EPOXY COATED

#4x3'-0" DOWELS @ 12"OC(2" CLEAR TOP)

SIDE WALK, SEE CIVIL

AT VENEER CONDITION:GALVANIZED BENT PLATE 3 1/2"x7 1/2"x3/8" LLV BOLTED TO CMU WALL W/ 3/4"Øx4 3/4" EMBED EXPANSION BOLTS @ 16"OC AND WITHIN 4" OF EACH END. IF SUPPORTED BRICK HEIGHT EXCEEDS 16'-0", PROVIDE EXPANSION BOLTS @ 8"OC. HOLD BENT PLATE BACK 1/2" FROM EACH END OF MASONRY OPENING

2"

4"

LIN

TEL

DE

PTH

, SE

E S

CH

ED

ULE

4" M

AX

CLO

SE

D B

OTT

OM

BE

AM

BLO

CK

W/

8" L

INTE

L/B

ON

D

WHEN TOP BARS ARE SCHEDULED, PROVIDE FLOW THROUGH BOND BEAM WITH SCHEDULED BARS 4" FROM TOP OF LINTEL

STIRRUPS AS REQUIRED BY SCHEDULE. PROVIDE 6" HOOKS TOP AND BOTTOM OF VERTICAL REINFORCING. ROTATE STIRRUPS AS NECESSARY TO FIT WITHIN WALL

CMU WALL, SEE PLAN

FLOOR OR ROOF SYSTEM, SEE PLAN

CMU WALL, SEE PLAN

1' - 0" MAX 1' - 4" MIN 1' - 0" MAX

8" B

ON

D B

EA

MN

O P

EN

ET

RA

TIO

NS

IN

TH

IS D

EP

TH

NOTES:1. DO NOT CUT VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING. LOCATE PENETRATIONS BETWEEN

VERTICAL REINFORCING. PROVIDE MIN 1" COVER BETWEEN VERTICAL REINFORCING AND EDGE OFOPENING. ACCEPTABLE TO ADJUST TYPICAL VERTICAL REINFORCING SPACING UP TO 8" MAX TO ALLOW PENETRATIONS BETWEEN REINFORCING. (ADJUSTING PIER VERTICAL REINFORCING IS NOTACCEPTABLE.)

2. PROVIDE MIN 16" BETWEEN ADJACENT PENETRATIONS. MULTIPLE PENETRATIONS WITHIN 16" OFEACH OTHER ARE CONSIDERED A SINGLE OPENING. SEE STRUCTURAL NOTES FOR STEEL LINTELTO SPAN OVER MULTIPLE PENETRATIONS.

3. SEE STRUCTURAL NOTES FOR STEEL LINTELS FOR PENETRATIONS WIDER THAN 12"

MA

X

1' -

0"

RAILING, SEE ARCH

6"

EXISTING CLAY TILE

6" CONCRETE WALL, SEE PLAN NOTES FOR REINF

8"

4"

4" CONCRETE SLAB W/#4@12"OC EACH WAY

#4x3'-0" @12"OC DOWELS, EQUAL LEGS, TYP

RIGID INSULATION40 PSI DENSITY

EXISTING SOG

#3x1'-6"@18"OC DRILL & ADHESIVE ANCHOR INTO SLAB (EMBED 6")

6"

NEW STEEL BEAMS, SEE PLAN. INSTALL PRIOR TO INSTALLING RAMP ABOVE. CENTER BEAMS UNDER NEW 6" CONCRETE WALLS

EXISTING STRUCTURAL SLAB

NOTE: SEE 13/S3.00 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

ADHESIVE ANCHOR DOWELS (4" EMBED)

EXISTING SLOPED SLAB, SEE PLAN

NEW STEEL BEAM, SEE PLAN.INSTALL & GROUT PRIOR TO INSTALLING CONCRETE RAMP ABOVE

EXISTING CONCRETE WALL.

16S3.00

EACH END

1 1/

2"4"

1 1/

2"

1 1/2" 6" 1 1/2"

7"x1/2"x0'-9" PLATE W/ 4- 3/4"Ø CONCRETE SCREW ANCHORS (4" MIN EMBED) INTO EXISTING CONCRETE WALL

SINGLE 3/8" SHEAR PLATE

1/4"

1/4"

1"

DRY PACK SOLID BETWEEN BEAM & SLAB W/ NON-SHRINK GROUT 5,000 PSI

EXISTING CONCRETESTEPS

#3x1'-6" @ 18"OC DRILL & ADHESIVE ANCHOR INTO EXISTING SLAB(EMBED 6") TYP

SLOPE, SEE PLAN

SEE 13/S3.00

1 1/

2" M

IN

6"

4"

EXISTING UTILITY TUNNEL

GRID

6" 6"

CONTRACTOR NOTE:LIMIT CONSTRUCTION LOADING TO 100 PSF ON TUNNEL SLAB WITHOUT SHORING

CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE, SEE PLAN

#4x4'-0" W/ STD HOOK @ 12"OC, CENTERED IN SLAB

REPLACE EXISTING DRAIN TILE ALONG TUNNEL WALL


CMU WALL REINF,SEE PLAN

CONCRETE FOOTING,SEE PLAN

VENEER, SEE ARCH

4" 5" 7"

GRID

#4x2'-0"@18"OC DRILL & ADHESIVE ANCHOR INTO EXISTING SLAB(6" EMBED)

4' - 0"

EXTENT OF REPLACEMENT TO BE DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR FOR FOUNDATION INSTALLATION

SLAB ON GRADE, SEE PLAN




BOND BREAK

VENEER, SEE ARCH 4" 4" 8" 4" 4"


EXISTING CMU WALL

NEW CONCRETE FOOTING W/ 2- #5 CONT

VENEER, SEE ARCH 4" 4" 8" 4" 4" 1' - 0"

1' -

0"

6"

#5@48"0C W/ DOWELS TO MATCH

EXISTING BRICK

CONCRETE SLAB, SEE CIVIL

EXISTING FOOTING

#5 W/ STD HOOK @ 48"OC, DRILL & ADHESIVE INTO EXISTING FOOTING (EMBED 6")

CORREGATED TIES FROM NEW WALL TO EXISTING WALLAT EVERY OTHER COURSE




BOND BREAK

VENEER, SEE ARCH 4" 4" 1' - 0" 4" 4"

#4@12"OC EACH WAY, PROVIDE 3" CLEAR TO ALL BARS

EXISTING #4x3'-0"@12"OC DWLS, EQUAL LEGS

SEE ARCH FOR JOINT SIZE AND LOCATION

EXISTING#4x3'-0"@12"OC DWLS, CENTER ON JOINT

8"

EXISTING FOOTING

7"

SLOPE 1/4" / FT

NOTE: ALL REINFORCING IN EXTERIOR SLAB SHALL BE EPOXY COATED

#4x3'-0" DOWELS @ 12"OC(2" CLEAR TOP)

SIDE WALK, SEE CIVIL



#4x2'-0"@18"OC DRILL & ADHESIVE ANCHOR INTO EXISTING SLAB(6" EMBED), TYP

NOTE: EXTENT OF SLAB ON GRADE REPLACEMENT TO BE DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT


3' -

4"

8"

#4@48"OC




EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE




EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE

4"

4" M

AX

CLO

SE

D B

OTT

OM

BE

AM

BLO

CK

W/

8" L

INTE

L/B

ON

D

LINTEL, SEE PLAN. EXTEND A MIN 8" EACH SIDE PAST STEEL SLEEVE DIAMETER

VENEER, SEE ARCH

ROUND STANDARD STEEL PIPE SLEEVE FOR ROUND DUCT OPENING, MORTAR IN W/ CMU & VENEER. COORDINATE SIZE W/ MECH

DATE

PROJECT #

DRAWN BY

CHECKED BY


C

BKBMENGINEERS





Date Lic. No.

2/25/2019

18521.00

TWD

APM


SECTIONS ANDDETAILS

S3.00

1DETAIL

2DETAIL

3DETAIL

4DETAIL

5DETAIL

6DETAIL

7DETAIL

8DETAIL

10SECTION

12SECTION

9SECTION

13SECTION

14SECTION

15SECTION

16DETAIL

17SECTION

18SECTION

21SECTION

22SECTION

19SECTION

23SECTION

20SECTION

11SECTION

24SECTION

Revisions




3 BP-2 Addendum No.1 3/8/2019



25SECTION

26SECTION

27SECTION

ROOF DECK SPAN DIRECTION

ABEAM SPANNING PERPENDICULAR TO WALL

BBEAM SPANNING PARALLEL TO WALL C

ELEVATION

SHORE BEAM 10,500#

2 - SPAN MINIMUM

SHEET LENGTH3 - SPAN PREFERRED

1.5" ROOF DECK

36/9 PATTERN

36/7 PATTERN

36/5 PATTERN

36/4 PATTERN

36/3 PATTERN

END LAP - 5/8"Ø PUDDLE WELD

SIDE MARGIN (LONGITUDINAL EDGE)3/8"x1 1/2" SEAM WELD

SIDE LAP, TYP - #10 TEK SCREWS

36" COVERAGE

.

.

SPACING OF FASTENERS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY SEE DECK FASTENER SCHEDULE FOR DIMENSIONS.

INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS - 5/8"Ø PUDDLE WELD

0" AT COMPOSITE DECK2" MIN END LAP

3" ROOF DECK

24/4 PATTERN

24" COVERAGE

DECK FASTENER SCHEDULE

DECK TYPE

INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS AND END LAPS

SIDE MARGINS

SIDE LAPS

3" ROOF DECK

24/4 PATTERN TYP

16"OC MAX

#10 TEKS @ 16"OC

1.5" ROOF DECK

36/4 PATTERN TYP

12"OC MAX

#10 TEKS @ 12"OC

NOTE: OTHER POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS MAY BE USED IF SPACING PROVIDES EQUIVALENT DIAPHRAGM CAPACITY. RECEIVE WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM ARCHITECT.

DIM 'S'

CENTERLINE JOIST OR PURLIN

JOIST TOP CHORD OR PURLIN TOP FLANGE

4 FRAMING ANGLES (TOP OF ANGLES FLUSH WITH TOP OF BEAMS OR JOISTS). SEE SCHEDULE FOR SIZES.

COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF OPENINGS WITH ARCH AND MECH PRIOR TO FABRICATION

4 CLIP ANGLES L4x4x1/4x0'-5" (PLACE 1/4" ABOVE FRAMING ANGLES) TIGHT TO TOP EDGE OF JOIST OR BEAM.

AT JOIST FRAMING-LOCATE CLIP ANGLES AT TOP CHORD PANEL POINTS OR PROVIDE STIFFENER PER 3/S4.00. ANGLE 'A' MAY BE OMITTED WHEN DIMENSION 'Y' IS 6" OR LESS.

ANGLE 'B' (TYP)

ANGLE 'A'

DIM

'X'

'Y'

3/16TYP

3/16TYP

DIM 'S' ANGLE 'A'

0' TO 6' 0' TO 4'

0' TO 6' 4' TO 8'

6' TO 10' 0' TO 4'

6' TO 10' 4' TO 8'

L3x3x1/4 L3x3x1/4

L4x3x1/4 (LLV) L4x3x1/4 (LLV)

L3x3x1/4 L5x3x1/4 (LLV)

L5x3x1/4 (LLV) L5x3x1/4 (LLV)

DIM 'X' ANGLE 'B'

OPENING IN NEW ROOF DECK

4"+

4"+

MAX

4"

MAX

4"

ATTACH ALL CONCENTRATED LOADS (PIPING, MECH ROOFTOP EQUIP CURBS, ETC) TO THE JOIST WITHIN 4" OF THE JOIST PANEL POINT OR PROVIDE STIFFENER ANGLES AS SHOWN. FOR PIPING EXCEEDING 20 PLF OR EQUIVALENT GROUPINGS, NOTIFY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

PIPES EXCEEDING 10 PLF PARALLEL TO JOIST SHALL BE CENTERED BETWEEN JOIST AND A SPREADER MEMBER INSTALLED. FOR PIPING EXCEEDING 20 PLF OR EQUIVALENT GROUPINGS NOTIFY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

PIPE OR OTHER EQUIPMENT

STIFFENER ANGLES 2-L2x2x1/8

STIFFENER ANGLES2-L2x2x1/8

1/8TYP

CONCENTRATED LOADS ON JOIST

MIN LAP

6"

MIN LAP

6"

CENTERLINE ANGLE SPLICE

2x2x5/16 BENT PLATE

CONT EDGE ANGLE, SEE SECTIONS FOR SIZE AND THICKNESS

3/16 4EACH END

SEE PLAN FOR BEARING PLATE SIZE.

CSIM

3/16 2TYP

C5/16" END PLATE (TYP)

GREASE BEAM BEARING. PROVIDE 3x1/4x3 PLATE EACH SIDE. DO NOT WELD PLATE TO BEAM AND LEAVE 1/2" GAP MIN TO END PLATE.

NOTE: PROVIDE BOND BEAM W/2-#5x3'-4" LONG BELOW BEARING PLATE (MIN)

5/16" END PLATE (TYP)

SEE PLAN FOR TYPICAL NOTES. PLACE SIDE PLATES TIGHT TO FLANGE.

CLEAR END OF PLATEEXTEND BEAM 1"

1/2"

NOTE: IF BEAM BEARS ON WALL BOTH ENDS PROVIDE SLIDING CONNECTION AS SHOWN AT ONE END ONLY.ELIMINATE 3x3 SIDE PLATES AT SECOND END AND PROVIDE MIN 3" WELD BETWEEN FLANGE AND BEARING PLATE.

3"

1/2"

3"

L3x3x1/4, COPE TOP FLANGE AS REQUIRED TO PLACE ANGLE TIGHT TO EXISTING GYP DECK. PLACE ANGLE PRIOR TO CUTTING DECK.

1/4 1

1/4 1

EXISTING STEEL JOIST

3" ROOF DECK, SEE PLAN

EXISTING 3" ROOF DECKLAP DECK W/ EXISTING & WELD TO EXISTING STEEL BEAM

1"

EXISTING STEEL BEAM, SEE PLAN

GRID

CONT 20 GAUGE x 9" PLATE W/2- #10 TEK SCREWS @ 12"OC

COLD-FORMED STUDS,SEE ARCH. WELD STUDS TO BEAM, CONNECTIONS BY STUD SUPPLIER

GLAZING, SEE ARCH

ALLOW FOR 2" VERTICAL MOVEMENT

L3x3x1/4 KICKER @ 72"OC MAX

3/16 2TYP

3" ROOF DECK,SEE PLAN

EXISTING 3"ROOF DECK

1"

EXISTING STEELBEAM, SEE PLAN

STEEL COLUMN, SEE PLAN

STEEL BEAM, SEE PLAN

PL 3 1/2"x5/16"x5 1/2"W/ 2- 3/4"Ø A325 BOLTS

1/4

1/4

GRIDGRID

EXISTING BEAM & HANGER AT GRID R

SEE 13/S4.00

"A" PLATE, SEE SCHEDULE

BEAMSIZE

"C"-3/4"Ø A325N BOLTS,EACH SIDE OF WEB3" GAGE

W8-W10

W14

"A" PLATE

3/8"x3"

W16

3/8"x3 1/2"

1/2"x 4 1/2"

"C"BOLTS

2

3

4

"t" "L"

"t" "L"

3/16

3/8" END PLATEFINISH TO BEAR

WELD

3/16" 4"

3/16" 4"

1/4" 4"

"t" "L"

CONNECTION TO ANGLES BY STUD SUPPLIER

COLD-FORMED STUDS,SEE ARCH

CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

3/16 2@12TYP

WELD DECK TO ANGLE PLATE PER 1/S4.00

GRID

GLAZING, SEE ARCH


FULL DEPTH, SHEAR PLATE

SEE PLAN

CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

3/16 2

3/16 2

CONT L3x3x1/4


COLD-FORMED STUDS, SEE ARCH

SEE 5/S4.00 FOR CONNECTION



CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

3/16 2@12TYP

WELD DECK TO ANGLE PLATE PER 1/S4.00

GRID

GLAZING, SEE ARCH


SEE PLAN

CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

L3x3x1/4 AT EACH STUD


3/16 2TYP


GRID11"

1" EXPANSION JOINT

7" 5"BOND BEAM W/ 2-#5 CONT

EXISTING ROOF DECK

EXISTING STEEL BEAM


BEARING PLATE, SEE PLAN

3/16 2

3/16 2

DO NOT CONNECT DECK TO ANGLE

CONT L4x4x1/4

EMBED PLATE 3"x1/4"x1'-0" W/2- 1/2"Øx5" HEADED STUDS. SPACE EMBEDS @ 48"OC & WITHIN 1'-0" OF CORNERS

3/16 2

3/16 2

L3x3x1/4 CONT, SEE 4/S4.00 FOR ANGLE SPLICE. WELD DECK TO ANGLE PER 1/S4.00

3/16 2

VENEER, SEE ARCH

GRID

CONNECTION TO ANGLE BY STUD SUPPLIER


3/16 4TYP

WELD DECK TO BENT PLATE PER 1/S4.00

GRID

SEE PLAN

1"

CONT L3x3x3/8

SEE 5/S4.00 FOR CONNECTION

L3x3x3/8 CONT, SEE 4/S4.00 FOR ANGLE SPLICE. WELD DECK TO ANGLE PER 1/S4.00



GRID

GLAZING, SEE ARCH



3/16 2TYP

GLAZING, SEE ARCH

3/16 2@12TYP

SEE PLAN

CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

L3x3x1/4 AT EACH STUD



GRID

GLAZING, SEE ARCH


3/16 2TYP

GLAZING, SEE ARCH

3/16 2@12TYP

CONT L3x3x1/4

CONT L3x3x1/4



CONT 5/16" BENT PLATE W/ 4" VERTICAL LEG

SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN

CONT 5/16" BENT PLATE W/ 4" VERTICAL LEG

FULL DEPTH SHEAR PLATE

EXISTING COLD-FORMED STUDS


GRID

EXISTING CONCRETE

EXISTING BRICK

EXISTING CMU

ROOF DECK, SEE PLAN

GRID

EXISTING CONCRETE REMAINS IN PLACE

EXISTING TUBE STEEL HANGER

GLAZING, SEE ARCH

GLAZING, SEE ARCH


COLD-FORMED STUDS, SEE ARCH. CLIP STUDS TO CONT STEEL PLATE, CONNECTIONS BY STUD SUPPLIER

COLD-FORMED STUDS, SEE ARCH. CLIP STUDS TO CONT STEEL PLATE, CONNECTIONS BY STUD SUPPLIER

CONT 1/2"x9" PLATE TOP & BOTTOM

3/4"Ø A36 THREADED RODS W/ DOUBLE NUTS @ 24" OC STAGGERED. DRILL 1"Ø HOLES IN EXISTING CONCRETE, GRP EXISTING CONCRETE TO AVOID REINFORCEMENT PRIOR TO DRILLING

4" ± 3" ±



PLANSEE


CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH

3/16 2@12TYP

WELD DECK TO BENT PLATE PER 1/S4.00

GRID


3/16 2TYP

CONT L4x3x1/4 LLH


GRID

BOND BEAM W/ 2- #5 CONT

VENEER, SEE ARCH

CMU WALL, SEE PLAN

FLOW THROUGH BOND BEAM, CUT TO MATCH ROOF SLOPE POUR INTERGRALLY W/ LOWER BOND BEAM

ROOF DECK, SEE PLAN

3"x3/8" CONT PLATE W/ 1/2"Øx4" HEADED STUDS @ 24"OC. WELD DECK TO PLATE PER 1/S4.00


CMU WALL, SEE PLAN

4" 5" 7"1" EXPANSION JOINT

EXISTING 2"-20 GAUGE COMPOSITE METAL DECKW/ 4 1/2" NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE (6 1/2" TOTAL THICKNESS) T/SLAB = 109'-2"

EXISTING W8x24

GRID

VENEER, SEE ARCH

BOND BEAM W/ 2- #5 CONT

DO NOT WELD BEAM TO BEARING PLATE, SEE 6/S4.00 FOR 3"x3" SIDE PLATES

GROUT SOLID A MINIMUM2 CORES/3 COURSES

EXISTING CMU

EXISTING 2"-20 GAUGE COMPOSITE METAL DECKW/ 4 1/2" NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE (6 1/2" TOTAL THICKNESS) T/SLAB = 109'-2"

GRID

1" EXPANSION JOINT

PERFORM SELECTIVE DEMO TO PROVIDE POCKET IN EXISTING CMU/BRICK FOR NEW BEAM BEARING. REMOVE GROUTED CELL IF ENCOUNTERED

4" 4" 1' - 0" 2"

8"

2"

ROOF DECK, SEE PLAN



DO NOT WELD BEAM TO BEARING PLATE, PROVIDE SIDE PLATES EACH SIDE OF BEAM, SEE 6/S4.00

5/16" END PLATE

EXISTING VENEER

VENEER,SEE ARCH

CORREGATED TIES FROM NEW WALL TO EXISTING WALLAT EVERY OTHER COURSE


SEE ARCH FOR WHERE COLD-FORMED STUDS OCCUR, CLIPTO EXISTING BRICK & DO NOT ATTACH TO ROOF DECK

DATE

PROJECT #

DRAWN BY

CHECKED BY


C

BKBMENGINEERS





Date Lic. No.

2/25/2019

18521.00

TWD

APM


SECTIONS ANDDETAILS

S4.00

1STEEL DECK ATTACHMENT

2DETAIL

3DETAIL

4DETAIL

6DETAIL

7SECTION

8NOT USED

9NOT USED

13SECTION

10SECTION

5SECTION - MOMENT CONNECTION

11SECTION

12SECTION

14SECTION

18SECTION

16SECTION

17SECTION

21SECTION

22SECTION

15SECTION

19NOT USED

20SECTION

23SECTION

24SECTION

Revisions






UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. PROVIDE BP1 WHERE BEARING PLATES ARE NOT NOTED. CONFIRM WITH ENGINEER PRIOR TO

PLACEMENT.2. SEE 6/S4.00 FOR TYPICAL BEAM BEARING DETAILS.

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. SEE DETAIL 12/S3.00 FOR TYPICAL BRICK SUPPORT ANGLE AT LINTELS.2. USE LINTEL BLOCKS FOR LINTELS.3. BEAR LINTELS 8" MINIMUM EACH SIDE OF OPENING.4. DO NOT PLACE CONTROL JOINTS WITHIN 24" OF JAMBS.5. PROVIDE LINTEL TYPE L1 WHERE LINTEL IS NOT SHOWN. CONFIRM WITH ENGINEER PRIOR TO

PLACEMENT.

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. PROVIDE TYPE W1 REINFORCING WHERE REINFORCING IS NOT SHOWN. CONFIRM WITH ENGINEER

PRIOR TO PLACEMENT.2. PROVIDE DOWELS FROM FOOTING INTO MASONRY WALLS TO MATCH MASONRY WALL

REINFORCING SIZE AND SPACING. EXTEND DOWELS TO 3" CLEAR BOTTOM OF FOOTING. HOOK DOWELS AT BOTTOM OF FOOTING. PROJECT 30" INTO WALL.

3. SEE 5/S3.00 FOR TYPICAL JAMB REINFORCING AND LAYOUT. SEE PIER SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED.

4. WALL REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FOOTING TO TOP OF WALL.

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. PROVIDE 4-3/4"Ø HEADED ANCHOR RODS WITH HEX NUT AT BOTTOM. EXTEND 9" INTO CONCRETE TO TOP OF NUT.2. PROVIDE 1" NON-SHRINK GROUT BELOW BASE PLATE.3. PROVIDE 1/2" COLUMN CAP PLATES.

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:1. PROVIDE HOOKED DOWELS TO MATCH VERTICAL REINFORCING.2. SEE 5/S3.00 FOR TYPICAL JAMB REINFORCING LAYOUT.3. PROVIDE PIER TYPE MP1 FOR BEAM BEARINGS AND OPENING JAMBS WHERE PIER IS NOT SHOWN.

CONFIRM WITH ENGINEER PRIOR TO PLACEMENT.4. REINFORCING SHOWN AT LOWEST LEVEL EXTENDED FROM TOP OF FOOTING TO BASE OF ROOF

PARAPET.5. PROVIDE FIRST TIE MAXIMUM OF ONE-HALF TIE SPACING ABOVE TOP OF FOOTING AT CONCRETE

PIERS.6. EXTEND TIES TO WITHIN ONE-HALF TIE SPACING OF TOP OF PIER. PROVIDE MINIMUM OF 2 TIES

WITHIN 5" OF TOP OF PIER.

CLASS 'A' TENSION LAP SPLICE TABLE

BAR SIZE

#3

#4

#5

#6

#7

#8

#9

#10

#11

fc(psi)

1'-6" 1'-5" 1'-4" 1'-3" 1'-1" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0"

2'-0" 1'-10" 1'-9" 1'-7" 1'-5" 1'-4" 1'-3" 1'-2"

1'-5"1'-6"1'-8"1'-10"2'-0"2'-2"2'-4"2'-6"

3'-0" 2'-9" 2'-7" 2'-5" 2'-2" 2'-0" 1'-10" 1'-9"

2'-6"2'-8"2'-10"3'-2"3'-6"3'-9"4'-0"4'-5"

2'-10"3'-0"3'-3"3'-7"4'-0"4'-3"4'-7"5'-0"

3'-2"3'-5"3'-8"4'-0"4'-6"5'-2"5'-8"

3'-6"3'-9"4'-1"4'-6"5'-0"5'-9"6'-4"

3'-11"4'-2"4'-6"4'-11"5'-6"6'-4"7'-1"

4'-10"

5'-4"

5'-10"

NOTES:1. THESE TABLES SHOW LENGTHS FOR PLAIN, BOTTOM ASTM A615 GRADE 60 BARS IN NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE,

MEETING THE SPACING AND COVER LIMITATIONS GIVEN BELOW. MULTIPLY THESE LENGTHS BY ALL OF THE APPLICABLE FACTORS GIVEN FOR OTHER CONDITIONS. SPECIFIC EMBEDMENT, LAP, OR PROJECTION LENGTHSSHOWN ON DRAWINGS GOVERN OVER THESE TABLES.

2. SPACING AND COVER REQUIREMENTS.a. CLEAR SPACING BETWEEN BARS AT SPLICE ≥2db AND CLEAR COVER ≥db OR b. CLEAR SPACING BETWEEN BARS AT SPLICE ≥db AND CLEAR COVER ≥db AND STIRRUPS/TIES OVER FULL LENGTH OF SPLICE. STIRRUPS/TIES TO BE SPACED SUCH THAT:

s x n≤16 FOR #3 TIES/STIRRUPSs x n≤32 FOR #4 TIES/STIRRUPSs x n≤50 FOR #5 TIES/STIRRUPS

db = BAR DIAMETER IN INCHES, s = SPACING OF TIES/STIRRUPS, n = NUMBER OF BARS SPLICED AT A GIVEN LOCATION.3. MULTIPLY GIVEN SPLICE LENGTHS BY ALL THE FOLLOWING APPLICABLE FACTORS:

a. MULTIPLY BY 1.5 IF SPACING OR COVER REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT MET.b. MULTIPLY BY 1.3 FOR TOP BARS. TOP BARS ARE DEFINED AS HORIZONTAL BARS WITH MORE THAN 12" OF FRESH CONCRETE BELOW THE BAR.c. MULTIPLY BY 1.2 FOR #3 OR #4 EPOXY COATED BARS SPACED 4" MIN OC WITH 1 1/2" MIN CLEAR COVER.d. MULTIPLY BY 1.31 FOR OTHER EPOXY COATED TOP BARS.e. MULTIPLY BY 1.5 FOR OTHER EPOXY COATED BARS - EXCEPT TOP BARS.f. MULTIPLY BY 1.3 FOR LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE.g. MULTIPLY BY fy/60 FOR BARS WITH YIELD STRESS >60 KSI.

4. USE CLASS 'B' TENSION LAP SPLICES UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE.5. COMPRESSION LAP LENGTH, ONLY WHERE NOTED, TO BE 30db. INCREASE TO 44db FOR Fy = 75 KSI, AND 57db FOR Fy = 90KSI.

CLASS 'B' TENSION LAP SPLICE TABLE

#3

#4

#5

#6

#7

#8

#9

#10

#11

fc(psi)

2500 3000 3500 4000 5000 6000 7000 80001'-11"

2'-7"

3'-3"

3'-11"

5'-8"

6'-6"

7'-4"

8'-3"

9'-2"

1'-10"

2'-5"

3'-0"

3'-7"

5'-3"

6'-0"

6'-9"

7'-6"

8'-2"

1'-8"

2'-3"

2'-9"

3'-4"

4'-10"

5'-6"

6'-3"

6'-11"

7'-7"

1'-7"

2'-1"

2'-7"

3'-1"

4'-6"

5'-2"

5'-10"

6'-6"

7'-1"

1'-5"

1'-11"

2'-4"

2'-10"

4'-1"

4'-8"

5'-3"

5'-9"

6'-4"

1'-4"

1'-9"

2'-2"

2'-7"

3'-9"

4'-3"

4'-9"

5'-3"

5'-10"

1'-2"

1'-7"

2'-0"

2'-4"

3'-5"

3'-11"

4'-5"

4'-11"

5'-5"

1'-2"

1'-6"

1'-10"

2'-3"

3'-3"

3'-8"

4'-2"

4'-7"

5'-0"

BAR SIZE

2500 3000 3500 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000

SINGLE PLATE CONNECTION TABLE

BEAM SIZE

# OF BOLT ROWS

Ø RnCOPED

Ø RnUNCOPED

REMARKS

W8x10-W8x31,W10x12-W10x22

2 19(13K FOR W8x10, 17K FOR W8x13)

25

W8x35-W8x48,W10x26-W10x54

2 25 25

W8x58-LARGER,W10x60-LARGER

2 25 25

W12x14-W12x30W14x22-W14x30

3 39(32K FORW12x14, 36K FOR W12x16)

43


3 43 43

W16x26-W16x40,W18x35-W18x40

4 58 62


4 62 62

ALL W21 AND W24 5 80 80 USE ONLY WHERE NOTED FOR W24'S

ALL W27 AND W30 6 95 95 USE ONLY WHERE NOTED

ALL W33 AND W36 7 111 111 USE ONLY WHERE NOTED

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:*ASSUMES AISC STANDARD CONNECTION CONFIGURATION.1. ALL BOLTS 3/4"Ø A325-N. PLATE WELDS 2-1/4" FULL LENGTH FILLET WELDS.2. ALL PLATES 5/16" THICK ASTM A36. ALL BEAMS ASTM A992.3. FOR COPED BEAMS Leh=1 1/2" MINIMUM. Lev=1 1/4" MINIMUM (PARAMETERS PER AISC 14TH EDITION).

MAXIMUM COPE LENGTH = 5". MAXIMUM COPE DEPTHS = 20% OF BEAM DEPTH.4. HORIZONTAL SHORT SLOTTED HOLES PERMITTED IN BEAM WEB.5. COORDINATE PLATE LENGTH WITH DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE BOLT LOCATIONS FOR ERECTION

PURPOSES.6. BEAMS REQUIRING ADDITIONAL BOLTS WILL BE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS THUS: "SP-X" (X=NUMBER OF

ROWS OF BOLTS).7. CAPACITIES SHOWN REPRESENT MINIMUM CONNECTION CAPACITY FOR THE RANGE OF SIZES GIVEN.

1/8" MIN

UNCOPED BEAM END COPED BEAM END

1/8

"1

/8"

7/8

"

1/8

"

d/5 MAX

1/8

"

d/5 MAX

1 1/2" MIN. 1 1/2" MIN.1/8"

d

1 1/4"MIN.

1 1/4"MIN.

WEB STIFFENER REQUIRED FOR DOUBLE COPED BEAMS IF COPE LENGTH >0'-3"

(MAX CAPACITY=7K W/OUT STIFFENER)











BOLTED - DOUBLE ANGLE CONNECTION TABLE

BEAM SIZE

# OF BOLT ROWS

Ø RnCOPED

Ø RnUNCOPED

REMARKS

W8x10-W8x31,W10x12-W10x22

2 19(13K FOR W8x10, 17K FOR W8x13)

40(30K FOR W8x10, 35K FOR W10x12)

W8x35-W8x48,W10x26-W10x49

2 27 51(46K FOR W10x26)

W8x58-LARGER,W10x54-LARGER,

2 41 61

W12x14-W12x26, W14x22

3 36(32K FOR W12x14)

58(53K FOR W12x14)

W12x30-W12x40W14x26-W14x43,W16x26-W16x40,W18x35-W18x40

3 43 66

W12x45-LARGER,W14x48-LARGER,W16x45-LARGER,W18x46-LARGER

3 58 88

ALL W27 AND W30 5 136 156

ALL W33 AND W36

10 308 308

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE:*ASSUMES AISC STANDARD CONNECTION CONFIGURATION.1. ALL BOLTS 3/4"Ø A325-N. 2. ALL ANGLES MINIMUM 5/16" THICK ASTM A36. ALL BEAMS ASTM A992.3. FOR COPED BEAM Leh=1 1/2" MINIMUM. Lev=1 1/4" MINIMUM (PARAMETERS PER AISC 14TH EDITION).

MAXIMUM COPE LENGTH = 5". MAXIMUM COPE DEPTH 20% OF BEAM DEPTH.4. HORIZONTAL SHORT SLOTTED HOLES PERMITTED IN BEAM WEB AND OUTSTANDING ANGLE LEGS.5. COORDINATE ANGLE LENGTHS WITH DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE BOLT LOCATIONS FOR ERECTION

PURPOSES.6. BEAMS REQUIRING ADDITIONAL BOLTS WILL BE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS THUS: "DA-X" (X=NUMBER OF

ROWS OF BOLTS).7. CAPACITIES SHOWN REPRESENT MINIMUM CONNECTION CAPACITY FOR THE RANGE OF SIZES GIVEN.

1/8" MIN

UNCOPED BEAM END COPED BEAM END

1/8

"1

/8"

7/8

"

1/8

"

d/5 MAX

1/8

"

d/5 MAX

1 1/2" MIN. 1 1/2" MIN.1/8"

d

1 1/4"MIN.

1 1/4"MIN.

ALL W21 AND W24 4 81 123

6 187 187

BEAMS AS NOTED 7 193(165K FOR W24)

217

BEAMS AS NOTED 8 222 247

BEAMS AS NOTED 9 256 278

BEAMS AS NOTED













UNCOPED CAPACITY ASSUMES tw=0.36






STEEL COLUMN, SEE PLAN

PL 3 1/2"x5/16"x5 1/2" W/2- 3/4"Ø A325 BOLTS, TYP

1/4

1/4TYP

GRID

GRID

STEEL BEAMS, SEE PLAN

PL 9"x1/2"x1'-2" W/ 4- 3/4"Ø CONCRETE SCREW ANCHORS, 6" GAGE (EMBED 6"). GPR EXISTING COLUMN TO AVOID REINFORCEMENT PRIOR TO DRILLING

EXISTING 14"x14" CONCRETE COLUMN

EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM/SLAB

EXISTING STEEL STUD FRAMING, SEE ARCH

EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE

NEW STEEL STUD FRAMING,SEE ARCH

DEFLECTION TRACK, ALLOW FOR VERTICAL MOVEMENT

EXISTING VERTICAL STUD WALL TO BEAR ON NEW HORIZONTAL STUDS. VERTICAL REACTION = 180#/LF

PROVIDE A MINIMUM 1" GAP

NEW STUDS BY STEEL STUD SUPPLIER, SEE ARCH

GRID

EXISTING CONCRETE

8"

GLAZING, SEE ARCH


3/16

8"

FIELD VERIFY

PL12"x1/2"x1'-0"

4- 3/4"Ø A36 THREADED RODS W/ DOUBLE NUTS. DRILL 1"Ø HOLES IN EXISTING CONCRETE, GRP EXISTING CONCRETE TO AVOID REINFORCEMENT PRIOR TO DRILLING

TYP1 1/2"

3"Ø STD PIPE

DATE

PROJECT #

DRAWN BY

CHECKED BY


C

BKBMENGINEERS





Date Lic. No.

2/25/2019

18521.00

TWD

APM


SCHEDULES

S5.00

CONTINUOUS WALL FOOTING SCHEDULE

MARK

FOOTING SIZE

REINFORCINGWIDTH THICKNESSWF2-0 2' - 0" 1' - 0" 2-#5 BOTTOM

WF3-0 3' - 0" 1' - 0" 3-#5 BOTTOM

COLUMN FOOTING SCHEDULE

MARK

FOOTING SIZE

REINFORCINGWIDTH LENGTH THICKNESSCF3-0 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" 4-#4 EACH WAY, BOTTOM

CF4-0 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 1' - 2" 4-#5 EACH WAY, BOTTOM

CF6-0 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 1' - 6" 4-#6 EACH WAY, BOTTOM

PIER SCHEDULE

MARK SIZE CO

NC

MA

S

REINFORCING REMARKSCP1 24"x24" X 8-#8 VERT & #4 TIES @ 12"OC

MP1 16"xWALL WIDTH X 2-#5@8"OC

STEEL COLUMN SCHEDULE

MARK SIZE BASE PLATE (WHERE REQUIRED)SC1 HSS 6x6x3/8 12"x3/4"x1'-0"

SC2 HSS 8x8x3/8 14"x1"x1'-2"

SC3 HSS4x4x1/4 10"x1/2"x0'-10"

WALL REINFORCING SCHEDULE

MARK REINFORCINGMW1 #5@48"OC, CENTER IN WALL

LINTEL SCHEDULE

MARK SIZE REMARKSL1 16" DEEP CMU BEAM W/ 2-#5 BOTTOM SEE 12/S3.00

L2 8" DEEP CMU BEAM W/ 2-#5 BOTTOM SEE 27/S3.00

BEARING PLATE SCHEDULE

MARK SIZE REMARKSBP1 7"x3/4"x1'-0" W/ 2- 1/2"Øx4" HEADED STUDS

Revisions





5 BP-3 Addendum No. 1 3/28/2019


1SECTION

2SECTION

3

2

1.0

4

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

1

22

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

1

22

20

20

20

21

20

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

21

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

20

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

20

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

20

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

21

20

EXIST. HP-A13

EXIST. A1E-7, SEC 2

EXIST. A1E-7, SEC 1

1

K

K

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1

1

1

15

WP

EXIST. A1E-6 #1,2

1

1

1

1

F

OC

C

108"

108"

108"

OC 108"

FDM

FDM

FDM

FDM

FDM

S

VK

OC

18

SECURITYPANEL

C

C

SSS

S CR SCR

S CR SCR

FDM

F S

OC

C

OC

F S

OC

FS

CF S

C

S

FS

F

F

EXIST.SECURITYPANEL

F S

S SS

S SS

S SS

1

1 1

3

3

3

21

22 21

22

4 4

11

1

1

1

11 1

1

3

21

2

10

19

10 10 10

9 9 9 9

7

7

7

77

77

77 7

77

7 7

7

19

13

20

21

20

21

13

19

19

18

18

18

30

30

30

30

30 30

30

10

10

10

8 8 88

13

14

16

1417

14

14

14

28

28

28

28

12

12

12

20

20

14

14

14

19

19

8

8

20

28

277

TV

TV

23

24 25

1

26EXIST. PANELEM-HP-3

232323

23

2323

23 23 23

2323232323

23 23 23 23 23

14

17

14

14

14

14

14

14

17

17

17

88

8

88

8

8

8

8

8

5

11

118

76

6

66

7

7

28

28

28

28

2811

7

7

6

6

6

6

6

17

3

7 7 7 7

7

7 7 7 7

7

292929292929

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

E121

DEMOLITION PLAN - MAIN LEVEL - AREA A1 2COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATIONS

NEW HOPE, MN

03-11-2019

18-192.01

03-11-2019

MINNESOTA

Date:

Checked By:

Drawn By:

Sheet Number:

Revision Number:

Sheet Size:

DWG. Scale:

Project No.:

Project Title:

STATE OF

I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION ORREPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECTSUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSEDPROFESSIONAL ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE

PRINT NAME:

REG. NO.: Revision DATE: ByDate:No.RevisionByNo. Date: 30x42

AS NOTED

NICHOLAS T. OELKE

47135

BKS

BTL

DEMOLITION PLAN - MAIN LEVEL - AREA A11

E121 1/8"=1'-0"

NORTH

0 4' 8' 16'

NORTH

NO ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK WILL BE REQUIRED IN THIS ROOM / AREA UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSTHROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE. PROTECTION OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IS THERESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

EXISTING CEILING / SURFACE MOUNTED CABLE TRAY SHALL REMAIN. PROTECT CABLE TRAY ANDCONTENT'S THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.

EXISTING PANELBOARD SHALL REMAIN. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF THE PANELBOARDTHROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PHASE. UPON COMPLETION OF THE CONSTRUCTION PHASECLEAN THE PANELBOARDS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR, PAINT (TOUCH-UP) ALL SCRAPES / SCRATCHES, ANDPROVIDE UPDATED PANELBOARD DIRECTORY.

EXISTING POLE AND LUMINAIRE TO REMAIN. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE EXISTING POLE MOUNTEDLUMINAIRE CONTINUITY THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.

REMOVE THE EXISTING POLE, LUMINAIRE, AND CONCRETE BASE TO FACILITATE THE INSTALLATION OFTHE NEW ENTRY ADDITION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL ANDDISPOSING OF THE ABANDON CONCRETE BASE. SALVAGE AND PROTECT THE POLE AND LUMINAIRE FORRELOCATION / RE-INSTALLATION.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING LIGHT SWITCH.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING LUMINAIRE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING EXIT SIGN.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING RECESSED SOFFIT LUMINAIRE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE AND REINSTALL THE WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE, AND RE-INSTALL THE EXISTING LUMINAIRES. THE ELECTRICALCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE LUMINAIRES TO SAFE GUARDAGAINST DAMAGE.

PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF THE EXISTING LUMINAIRE AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLSCHEME THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PHASE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SEAL(WRAP) THE EXISTING LINEAR LUMINAIRES PRIOR TO THE START OF DEMOLITION. UPON COMPLETION OFTHE ENTRY WORK THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN AND RELAMP THE LINEAR LUMINAIRES.IT SHALL BE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE LAMP TYPE AND QUANTITYPRIOR TO BID.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, DISCARD, AND REPLACE THE EXISTING RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE. RE-USETHE EXISTING CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS FOR INSTALLATION OF THE NEWRECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING RECEPTACLE, COVERPLATE, AND CONDUCTORS.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE, AND REINSTALL THE EXISTING REMOTE FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATORPANEL. RE-USE AND/OR MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUITS, AND JUNCTION BOXES AS NECESSARY FORTHE RELOCATION OF THE REMOTE FIRE ALARM ANNUNICATOR PANEL.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, DISCARD, AND REPLACE THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM DEVICE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICE.

DISCONNECT AND REMOVE THE EXISTING SECURITY EQUIPMENT.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE, AND RE-INSTALL THE EXISTING SECURITY CAMERAS. THE FIELDVERIFICATION AND PROTECTION OF THE EXISTING SECURITY CIRCUITING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITYOF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE, AND REINSTALL THE CEILING MOUNTED LOW VOLTAGE ITEMS.

PROVIDE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK REQUIRED IN THIS AREA. REMOVE ALL CONDUIT,CONDUCTORS (REGARDLESS OF VOLTAGE), J-BOXES, PULL BOXES, FITTINGS, HANGERS, RECEPTACLES,AND OTHER RELATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. REFER TO THEARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WORK PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANYWORK.

THEATRICAL RELATED DEMOLITION WORK - REFER TO THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, THE THEATRICALDRAWINGS, AND THE AUDIO VISUAL CONSULTING DRAWINGS FOR THE EXTENT OF THE THEATRICALDEMOLITION WORK REQUIRED. DISCONNECT, REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL ABANDONED THEATRICALSYSTEMS. REMOVE ALL CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS (REGARDLESS OF VOLTAGE), J-BOXES, PULL BOXES,FITTINGS, HANGERS, RECEPTACLES, AND OTHER RELATED THEATRICAL / ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTUNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PATCH AND/ORRESTORE ALL DAMAGED SURFACES BACK TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OFTHE DEMOLITION WORK.

DISCONNECT AUDITORIUM SEAT LIGHTING. DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE EXISTING FLOORBOX. CUT OUT, REMOVE, AND PATCH THE ABANDONED FLOOR BOX LOCATION. REMOVE ALL WIRING, ANYEXPOSED CONDUIT, PULL BOXES, HANGERS, FASTENING DEVICES, AND ACCESSORIES BACK TO POINT OFORIGIN. CUT-OFF EMBEDDED CONDUIT FLUSH WITH THE ADJACENT CONCRETE FLOORS AND/OR WALLS.ABANDONED PENETRATIONS SHALL BE PATCHED AND SEALED.

EXISTING DATA/VOICE TERMINATION CABINET SHALL REMAIN.

EXISTING TV (VIDEO) TERMINATION BOARD SHALL REMAIN.

EXISTING WALL MOUNTED SECURITY CAMERA / EQUIPMENT TERMINATION CABINET SHALL REMAIN.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE SMALL ROTARY SWITCH CONTROLLING THE STAGE LIP LEDSTRIP LIGHT. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS, J-BOXES, FITTINGS, HANGERS, ANDOTHER RELATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OTHERWISE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE INTEGRAL EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK ASSOCIATED WITHTHIS LUMINAIRE. CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO THE GENERATOR POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. PROVIDEONE (1) UL924 RELAY AT EACH EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE. RECONNECT THE EXISTING NORMAL POWERWIRING AT THE LUMINAIRE TO THE UL924 RELAY FOR NORMAL POWER CIRCUIT SENSING.RECONFIGURATION AND/OR MODIFICATION OF THE EXISTING CIRCUITING WILL BE NECESSARY. REUSE /MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS AS NECESSARY FORCONNECTION TO THE GENERATOR CIRCUIT. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL RACEWAYS, EXTENSIONS, HANGERS,SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, ACCESSORY FITTINGS, CONDUCTORS OR SPLICES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETEAND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

DISCONNECT AND REMOVE THE ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS. CUT OUT, REMOVE AND PATCH THEABANDONED JUNCTION BOXES.

EXISTING WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE TO REMAIN.

KEYED NOTES:1

2

GENERAL NOTES:A. INSPECTION OF SITE - BEFORE SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL ON THE WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

SHALL EXAMINE THE SITE OF THE PROPOSED WORK AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITHEXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS AFFECTING THE PERFORMANCE OF THEIR WORK. NO EXTRACOMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF A MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THE AMOUNT OF WORKINVOLVED. OR FOR THE LACK OF KNOWLEDGE ON EXISTING CONDITIONS, WHICH COULD HAVE BEENDISCOVERED OR REASONABLE ANTICIPATED PRIOR TO BIDDING.

B. THE PURPOSE OF THIS DRAWING IS TO GIVE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR A RUDIMENTARYUNDERSTANDING OF THE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK INVOLVED IN THE DEMOLITION PHASE OF THEPROJECT. IN ADDITION TO THE DEVICES SHOWN, REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT,CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS, J-BOXES, FITTINGS, AND HANGERS. NO EXISTING RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BEUTILIZED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTE OTHERWISE.

C. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED CONDUIT WHERE POSSIBLE. CUT-OFF EMBEDDED CONDUIT AND FASTENERSFLUSH WITH THE ADJACENT CONCRETE FLOORS AND/OR WALLS. ABANDONED PENETRATIONS SHALL BEPATCHED AND SEALED TO PREVENT ENTRANCE OF MOISTURE OR FOREIGN MATTER INTO THE SPACE.

D. ROBBINSDALE SCHOOL DISTRICT RETAINS THE RIGHT TO KEEP ANY DEMOLISHED ELECTRICALEQUIPMENT AS IT SO CHOOSES. THIS MATERIAL SHALL BE COORDINATED AND CLEARLY DENOTED PRIORTO THE BEGINNING OF THE DEMOLITION PHASE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLYDISMANTLE AND STOCKPLIE THE SALVAGED MATERIAL ON SITE FOR REMOVAL BY THE ROBBINSDALESCHOOL DISTRICT STAFF. ITEMS NOT SALVAGED BY THE OWNER BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THECONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE DISPOSED OF IN A LEGAL MANNER.

E. ELECTRICAL CONTRATOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TOTHE START OF DEMOLITION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE OWNER, A LIST OFELECTRICAL ITEMS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY PRIOR TO THE START OF THEIR WORK. ANY DEFICIENCIESIN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM NOT NOTED, SHALL BECOME THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'SRESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER

3

4

5

6

11

10

9

8

7

12

13

14

16

17

18

19

20

15

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

1 BTL03-28-2019 ADDENDUM #1


30

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A3'

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Kj

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Ki

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Kh

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

3f

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

3e

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Kh

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Kk

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Kl

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

Km

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A270

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A279

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

E280

AutoCAD SHX Text

VESTIBULE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A233

AutoCAD SHX Text

CIRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

A282

AutoCAD SHX Text

AUDITORIUM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A240

AutoCAD SHX Text

CIRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

A281

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A236

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A280

AutoCAD SHX Text

WOMENS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A129

AutoCAD SHX Text

MENS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A130

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAIR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A237

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A236

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A235

AutoCAD SHX Text

LOBBY

AutoCAD SHX Text

A200

AutoCAD SHX Text

FAAP

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

K

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

A1

AutoCAD SHX Text

A2

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

E2

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

A3

AutoCAD SHX Text

KEYPLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

E1

3

2

1.0

4

1

1

1

1

EXIST. A2E-4#1

EXIST. A2E-3#2

EXIST. A2E-3#1

EXIST. HP-A21

EXIST. LD-A21EXIST. A2E-4#2

5

5

EXIST.A2E-2

1

1

2

22

2

2

2

4

2

WALKWAY AISLEBELOW - SHOWNFOR REFERENCEONLY

WALKWAY AISLEBELOW - SHOWNFOR REFERENCEONLY

3 3 3

333

675

10

10

10

10

8 8

8 8

8 8

VP

11

9

9

9

99

9 9

9

9

9

99

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

12

1E131

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

E131

DEMOLITION PLAN - UPPER LEVEL - AREA A1 2COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATIONS

NEW HOPE, MN

03-11-2019

18-192.01

03-11-2019

MINNESOTA

Date:

Checked By:

Drawn By:

Sheet Number:

Revision Number:

Sheet Size:

DWG. Scale:

Project No.:

Project Title:

STATE OF


PRINT NAME:


AS NOTED

NICHOLAS T. OELKE

47135

BKS

BTL

DEMOLITION PLAN - UPPER LEVEL - AREA A11

E131 1/8"=1'-0"

NORTH

0 4' 8' 16'

NORTH

NO ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK WILL BE REQUIRED IN THIS ROOM / AREA UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSTHROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE. PROTECTION OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IS THERESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

EXISTING PANELBOARD SHALL REMAIN. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF THE PANELBOARDTHROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PHASE. UPON COMPLETION OF THE CONSTRUCTION PHASECLEAN THE PANELBOARDS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR, PAINT (TOUCH-UP) ALL SCRAPES / SCRATCHES, ANDPROVIDE UPDATED PANELBOARD DIRECTORY.

2” RECESSED EMERGENCY EGRESS LUMINAIRE TO REMAIN.

SURFACE MOUNTED, MINI-INVERTER (EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM) AND REMOTE TEST SWITCH TOREMAIN.

THEATRICAL RELATED DEMOLITION WORK - REFER TO THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, THE THEATRICALDRAWINGS, AND THE AUDIO VISUAL DRAWINGS FOR THE EXTENT OF THE THEATRICAL DEMOLITION WORKREQUIRED. DISCONNECT, REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL ABANDONED THEATRICAL SYSTEMS. REMOVE ALLCONDUIT, CONDUCTORS (REGARDLESS OF VOLTAGE), J-BOXES, PULL BOXES, FITTINGS, HANGERS,RECEPTACLES, AND OTHER RELATED THEATRICAL / ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PATCH AND/OR RESTORE ALL DAMAGEDSURFACES BACK TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OF THE DEMOLITION WORK.

EXISTING VIDEO PROJECTOR SHALL REMAIN.

EXISTING PROJECTION SCREEN TO REMAIN.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE AND DISCARD THE EXISTING EMERGENCY EGRESS LUMINAIRE AT CATWALKLEVEL.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE AND REINSTALL THE EXISTING LUMINAIRES. THE ELECTRICALCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE LUMINAIRES TO SAFE GUARDAGAINST DAMAGE.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE INTEGRAL EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK ASSOCIATED WITHTHIS LUMINAIRE. CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO THE GENERATOR POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. PROVIDEONE (1) UL924 RELAY AT EACH EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE. RECONNECT THE EXISTING NORMAL POWERWIRING AT THE LUMINAIRE TO THE UL924 RELAY FOR NORMAL POWER CIRCUIT SENSING.RECONFIGURATION AND/OR MODIFICATION OF THE EXISTING CIRCUITING WILL BE NECESSARY. REUSE /MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS AS NECESSARY FORCONNECTION TO THE GENERATOR CIRCUIT. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL RACEWAYS, EXTENSIONS, HANGERS,SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, ACCESSORY FITTINGS, CONDUCTORS OR SPLICES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETEAND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

EXISTING DIMMING RACKS TO BE DEMOLISHED.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, STORE AND REINSTALL THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES MOUNTED ON THISWALL TO FACILITATE THE REMOVAL AND RECONSTRUCTION OF THE WALL. MODIFY THE EXISTINGCONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR REINSTALLATION.

2

3

4

5

KEYED NOTES:1


SHALL EXAMINE THE SITE OF THE PROPOSED WORK AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITHEXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS AFFECTING THE PERFORMANCE OF THEIR WORK. NO EXTRACOMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF A MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THE AMOUNT OF WORKINVOLVED. OR FOR THE LACK OF KNOWLEDGE ON EXISTING CONDITIONS, WHICH COULD HAVE BEENDISCOVERED OR REASONABLE ANTICIPATED PRIOR TO BIDDING.

B. THE PURPOSE OF THIS DRAWING IS TO GIVE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR A RUDIMENTARYUNDERSTANDING OF THE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK INVOLVED IN THE DEMOLITION PHASE OF THEPROJECT. IN ADDITION TO THE DEVICES SHOWN, REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT,CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS, J-BOXES, FITTINGS, AND HANGERS. NO EXISTING RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BEUTILIZED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTE OTHERWISE.

C. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED CONDUIT WHERE POSSIBLE. CUT-OFF EMBEDDED CONDUIT AND FASTENERSFLUSH WITH THE ADJACENT CONCRETE FLOORS AND/OR WALLS. ABANDONED PENETRATIONS SHALL BEPATCHED AND SEALED TO PREVENT ENTRANCE OF MOISTURE OR FOREIGN MATTER INTO THE SPACE.

D. ROBBINSDALE SCHOOL DISTRICT RETAINS THE RIGHT TO KEEP ANY DEMOLISHED ELECTRICALEQUIPMENT AS IT SO CHOOSES. THIS MATERIAL SHALL BE COORDINATED AND CLEARLY DENOTED PRIORTO THE BEGINNING OF THE DEMOLITION PHASE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLYDISMANTLE AND STOCKPLIE THE SALVAGED MATERIAL ON SITE FOR REMOVAL BY THE ROBBINSDALESCHOOL DISTRICT STAFF. ITEMS NOT SALVAGED BY THE OWNER BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THECONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE DISPOSED OF IN A LEGAL MANNER.

E. ELECTRICAL CONTRATOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TOTHE START OF DEMOLITION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE OWNER, A LIST OFELECTRICAL ITEMS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY PRIOR TO THE START OF THEIR WORK. ANY DEFICIENCIESIN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM NOT NOTED, SHALL BECOME THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'SRESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER

6

7

8

9


10

11


EXISTING PHOTO - UPPER LEVEL - MECHNICAL A3052

E131 1/8"=1'-0"

12

AutoCAD SHX Text

MECHANICAL

AutoCAD SHX Text

A305

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

304

AutoCAD SHX Text

UPPER MUSIC &

AutoCAD SHX Text

DRAMA

AutoCAD SHX Text

PROP STOR.

AutoCAD SHX Text

UPPER

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A270

AutoCAD SHX Text

AUDITORIUM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A240

AutoCAD SHX Text

SOUND BOOTH

AutoCAD SHX Text

A354

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

UPPER

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

A1

AutoCAD SHX Text

A2

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

E2

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

A3

AutoCAD SHX Text

KEYPLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

E1

HR

3

2

1.0

4

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

2

20

20

20

21

20

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

19

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

21

20

EXIST. HP-A13EXIST. A1E-7, SEC 2

EXIST. A1E-7, SEC 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

11 1

1

1

1

1

1

11

11

1

1

1

E E E E

A1E-6 #1,2

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

A

15

E

2222

A

15

A

15

A

15

B

15

B

15

2

OC

OC

OC

OCOC

1

F

F

a

a

bbb

b

b

bbb

PP

153

P

15

P

3

P

15

P

15

P

15

P

15

P

15

P

15

P

3

P

3

A

15

1

a

b

1

E

2

E

2

11

11

11

11

11

11

c

c

EM

7 78

26

EM

26

EM

26

26

26

26

26

26

26

26

11

D

555 5 5 44

44

44

4

6

6

D

D

D

OC

15

EM

EM

bbb

A

15

EM

b

OC b

15

A

A

A

15

A

15

a

OCc,e

EM EM

EMEM

DD

15

DD

3

DD

3

DD

15

DD

15

DD

3

DD

3

DD

15

DD

15

DD

3

DD

3

DD

15

DD

15

DD

3

DD

3

DD

15

EM EM EM EM

EMEMEMEM

15

3

a a a a a

a a a a a a

OC10

OC

10

15

15

15

15

99

9

9

9

9

C

23

C

23

18

18

12

13A2E-4#2/40,42

11

12

13A2E-4#2/39,41

12

13A2E-4#1/1,3,5

12

13A2E-4#1/2,4,6

C

23

C

23

12 13

A2E-4#2/36

12 13

A2E-4#2/35

21

21

14

14

A2E-4#2/38

A2E-4#2/37

20

20

20

20

18

18

18

19

19

18

18

LSa

24

LSa

24

a

a

22TYPICAL

EMEM

3

33

3

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

E

2

A

15

A

15

3

25

dLVD

aLVD b

LVD

10

E

2

2317

2317

2317

2E221

EM EM

EM EM

EM EM

EM EM

23

23

LVD

19

19

23

23

23

LVD

23

23

B

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15

W

15EXIST. PANELEM-HP-3

18

23

27

27

27

c

20

18

23

C

23

18 23

C

23

20

18 23

C

23

20

19

19

20

C

23

18

23

2317

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

E221

LIGHTING PLAN - MAIN LEVEL - AREA A1 2COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATIONS

NEW HOPE, MN

03-11-2019

18-192.01

03-11-2019

MINNESOTA

Date:

Checked By:

Drawn By:

Sheet Number:

Revision Number:

Sheet Size:

DWG. Scale:

Project No.:

Project Title:

STATE OF


PRINT NAME:


AS NOTED

NICHOLAS T. OELKE

47135

BKS

BTL

LIGHTING PLAN - MAIN LEVEL - AREA A11

E221 1/8"=1'-0"

NORTH

0 4' 8' 16'

NORTH

NO LIGHTING WORK WILL BE REQUIRED IN THIS ROOM / AREA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OFTHE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IN THIS AREA THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.

PROVIDE NEW EXIT SIGN. CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO AN UNSWITCHED HOT CONDUCTOR FROM THE NEAREST AVAILABLE EMERGENCYLIGHTING CIRCUIT. COORDINATE THE PROPER LUMINAIRE MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS AND CHEVRON ORIENTATION IN THE FIELD.PROVIDE PENDENT MOUNTING KIT WHEN REQUIRED. MOUNT THE TOP EDGE OF THE EGRESS LUMINAIRE BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THEADJACENT LUMINAIRES IN THE SPACE. PROVIDE A CLEAR AND UNOBSTRUCTED SITE LINE TO LUMINAIRE.

EMERGENCY EGRESS LUMINAIRE SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE NEAREST AVAILABLE EMERGENCY LIGHTING CIRCUIT. LUMINAIRE SHALLSHARE THE SAME CONTROL SEQUENCE AS THE ADJACENT LUMINAIRES IN THE SPACE. PROVIDE ONE (1) UL924 RELAY AT EACH LUMINAIRE/ CIRCUIT. RECONNECT THE EXISTING NORMAL POWER WIRING OF THE LUMINAIRE TO THE UL924 RELAY FOR NORMAL POWER CIRCUITSENSING. RECONFIGURATION AND/OR MODIFICATION OF THE EXISTING CIRCUITING WILL BE NECESSARY. REUSE / MODIFY THE EXISTINGCONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL EMERGENCY EGRESSSYSTEM.

EXISTING LUMINAIRE TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN AND PROTECT THE CONTINUITY AND CURRENT CONTROL SCHEME OF THE EXISTINGLUMINAIRES UNAFFECTED BY THE REMODEL. FIELD VERIFICATION AND PROTECTION OF THE EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITING SHALL BE THERESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

RE-INSTALL THE EXISTING LINEAR LUMINAIRE UPON COMPLETION OF THE ENTRY WORK. LUMINAIRES SHALL BE REINSTALLED IN THEIRORIGINAL LOCATIONS, AND BE RECONNECTED TO THE ORIGINAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT. PROVIDE ANY ADDITIONAL RACEWAY, HANGERS,SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, FITTINGS, AND CONDUCTORS THAT ARE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

REINSTALL THIS EXISTING LUMINAIRE IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE CEILING GRID REINSTALLATION. REUSE / MODIFY THE EXISTINGCONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS AS NECESSARY FOR REINSTALLATION OF THE LUMINAIRE. PROVIDEADDITIONAL RACEWAYS, EXTENSIONS, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, ACCESSORY FITTINGS, CONDUCTORS OR SPLICES REQUIREDFOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

NO EXPOSED WIRING/CABLING IN THIS AREA. ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING/CABLING (LIGHTING CONTROL, FIRE ALARM, SECURITY, TEMP.CONTROL, ETC.) SHALL BE CONCEALED / INSTALLED IN J-BOXES AND CONDUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

INSTALL LUMINAIRES IN THIS SPACE TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. WHERE REQUIRED PROVIDE TRAPEZE UNISTRUTSUSPENSION TO STRADDLE DUCTWORK AND PIPING IN THIS ROOM FOR SUPPORT OF LUMINAIRES.

PROVIDE OCCUPANCY/ VACANCY SENSOR (OC) TO UNDERSIDE OF FINISHED CEILING (VISIBLE FROM INSIDE THE ROOM). INTEGRATE THEOCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSOR INTO THE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM. COORDINATE THE OCCUPANCY SENSOR ORIENTATION / LOCATIONWITH THE MANUFACTURE PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE ROUGH-IN.

PROVIDE A WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY / VACANCY SENSOR. COORDINATE THE OCCUPANCY SENSOR LOCATION WITH THEMANUFACTURE PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE ROUGH-IN.

PROVIDE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN FOR THE THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL STATION. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR DEVICELOCATION.

PROVIDE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN FOR THE THEATRICAL CONTROL (DMX NODE) DEVICE. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR DEVICELOCATION.

PROVIDE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN FOR THE THEATRICAL DISTRIBUTION (TD) DEVICE. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR DEVICELOCATION. RE-USE / MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS FOR INSTALLATION OF REQUIREDLIGHTING CIRCUITS. ALL CIRCUIT NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FIELD VERIFY ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERS ANDASSOCIATED PANELBOARD AVAILABILITY AND ADJUST ACCORDINGLY.

PROVIDE TWO (2) DEDICATED, 20 AMP, 120 VOLT, DUPLEX RECEPTACLES FOR THE THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL CABINET. REFER TOTHE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR DEVICE LOCATION.

CONNECT NEW LUMINAIRE TO THE ORIGINAL (EXISTING) LIGHTING CIRCUIT SERVING THIS AREA. INTERCEPT AND EXTEND THE EXISTINGLIGHTING CIRCUIT SERVING THIS THIS AREA. RE-USE / MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORSFOR INSTALLATION OF THE NEW LUMINAIRE. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL RACEWAY, WIRING, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, AND FITTINGSNECESSARY TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL LIGHTING SYSTEM.

PROVIDE A BLANK COVERPLATE ON THE EXISTING LUMINAIRE J-BOX. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED CONDUCTORS BACK TO THEIR POINT OFORIGIN.

AUDITORIUM SEAT LIGHTING - PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED, LOW PROFILE CARPET TO FLOOR AISLE RACEWAY AS MANUFACTURED BYTEMPO INDUSTRIES, LPS SYSEM - PART # 3300BK-RW-SB. COORDINATE THE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS WITH THE SEAT ANDAISLE RACEWAY MANUFACTURE PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANY ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE ALL ASSOCIATED CONTROL WIRING, RACEWAYS,JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE AND FULLY OPERATIONAL LIGHTING SYSTEM. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ASHOP DRAWING SHOWING THE PROPER LIGHTING COMPONENTS, LOCATIONS (INCLUDING DIMENSION IF CRITICAL) ORIENTATIONS ANDQUANTITIES. PROVIDE INLINE RACEWAY JUNCTION BOX (TEMPO INDUSTRIES, LPS SYSTEM - PART # 3300BK-RW-JBX) FOR EACHILLUMINATED CHAIR END-CAP. CONNECT THE PRE-WIRED 3/8" FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT WHIP (SUPPLIED BY THE SEATING MANUFACTURE)TO THIS RECESSED INLINE RACEWAY JUNCTION BOX. COORDINATE CONTROL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO STARTING ROUGH-IN WITH THETHEATRE CONSULTANT.

PROVIDE DIMMING TRANSFORMER FOR THE SEAT LIGHTING AND THE LOW VOLTAGE PATHWAY LIGHTING. COORDINATE TRANSFORMERLOCATION WITH MANUFACTURE GUIDELINES PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. INSTALL 3/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN THE LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERAND AN IN-GRADE RECESSED J-BOX TO ACCOMMODATE THE LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONNECTION FROM THE AISLE LIGHTING RACEWAY.CONNECT TRANSFORMER TO NEAREST AVAILABLE POWER CIRCUITING.

CUT, REMOVE, AND REPLACE THE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR TO FACILITATE THE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW JUNCTION BOX ANDCONDUIT REQUIRED FOR THE NEW LOW PROFILE CARPET TO FLOOR AISLE RACEWAY. COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS WITHTHE LOW PROFILE CARPET TO FLOOR AISLE RACEWAY MANUFACTURE PRIOR TO THE FLOOR REMOVAL. ALL CONCRETE CUTTING ANDREPAIR SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

AUDITORIUM AISLE LIGHTING - PROVIDE A CONTINUOUS, SURFACE MOUNTED, LOW PROFILE, AISLE LUMINAIRE AS MANUFACTURED BYTIVOLI LIGHTING. - FANTASMA WALL CONTINUOUS SERIES. MOUNT LUMINAIRE 16" ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR LINE. COORDINATE THEELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS WITH THE MANUFACTURE PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANY ROUGH-IN.PROVIDE ALL ASSOCIATED CONTROL WIRING, RACEWAYS, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE AND FULLY OPERATIONAL LIGHTINGSYSTEM. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A SHOP DRAWING SHOWING THE PROPER LIGHTING COMPONENTS, LOCATIONS(INCLUDING DIMENSION IF CRITICAL) ORIENTATIONS AND QUANTITIES. COORDINATE THE CONTROL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO STARTINGROUGH-IN WITH THE THEATRE CONSULTANT.

PROVIDE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN FOR THE THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL CONSOLE DEVICE. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FORDEVICE LOCATION.

ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN THE ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK. COORDINATE THE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-INREQUIREMENTS AND RECEPTACLE PLACEMENT WITH THE ARCHITETURAL DRAWINGS. ALL JUNCTION BOXES AND RACEWAYS SHALL BECONCEALED WITHIN THE ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK / FRAMEWORK. COORDINATE ANY MILLWORK DISCREPANCIES WITH THE ARCHITECTPRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE ROUGH-IN.

CONNECT NEW LUMINAIRE TO THE NEAREST AVAILABLE THEATRICAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT. CONCEAL CONDUIT WITHIN EXISTING MASONRYWALL CAVITY. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CUTTING AND SOAPING OF THE MASONRY WALL TO COMPLETETHE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN.

DAYLIGHT SENSOR. COORDINATE THE DAYLIGHT SENSOR LOCATION WITH THE MANUFACTURERS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

REINSTALL THE EXISTING POLE AND LUMINAIRE. PROVIDE NEW CONCRETE BASE. EXTEND / MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT AND WIRINGTO THE REVISED POLE AND LUMINAIRE LOCATION.

DISCONNECT, REMOVE, AND DISCARD THE INTEGRAL EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK ASSOCIATED WITH THIS LUMINAIRE. CONNECTLUMINAIRE TO THE GENERATOR POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. PROVIDE ONE (1) UL924 RELAY AT EACH EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE.RECONNECT THE EXISTING NORMAL POWER WIRING AT THE LUMINAIRE TO THE UL924 RELAY FOR NORMAL POWER CIRCUIT SENSING.RECONFIGURATION AND/OR MODIFICATION OF THE EXISTING CIRCUITING WILL BE NECESSARY. REUSE / MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT,HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS AS NECESSARY FOR CONNECTION TO THE GENERATOR CIRCUIT. PROVIDE ADDITIONALRACEWAYS, EXTENSIONS, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, ACCESSORY FITTINGS, CONDUCTORS OR SPLICES REQUIRED FOR ACOMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

REINSTALL EXISTING LUMIANIRE. RAISE LUMINAIRE HEIGHT APPROXIMATELY 8"-10". COORDINATE NEW HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TOROUGH-IN. RE-USE / MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS FOR INSTALLATION OF THE EXISTINGLUMINAIRE. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL RACEWAY, WIRING, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, AND FITTINGS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE ACOMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL LIGHTING SYSTEM.

2

3

4

5

LED AISLE LIGHT WIREWAY DETAIL2

E221 NONE

LOW PROFILE CARPER TO FLOOR WIREWAY

LOW PROFILE IN-LINE RACEWAY JUNCTION BOX

JUNCTION BOX

AISLE

KEYED NOTES:1

GENERAL NOTES:A. INSPECTION OF SITE: BEFORE SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL ON THE WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE THE SITE OF THE

PROPOSED WORK AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS AFFECTING THEPERFORMANCE OF THEIR WORK. NO EXTRA COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF A MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THE AMOUNT OFWORK INVOLVED OR LACK OF KNOWLEDGE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS WHICH COULD HAVE BEEN DISCOVERED OR REASONABLEANTICIPATED PRIOR TO BIDDING.

B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TO THE START OF DEMOLITION.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE OWNER, A LIST OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY PRIOR TO THE STARTOF THEIR WORK. ANY DEFICIENCIES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM NOT NOTED, SHALL BECOME THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'SRESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

C. WHERE OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND/OR VACANCY SENSORS ARE SHOWN PROVIDE SENSORS TO ACCOMMODATE DESIGN INTENT AND ROOMGEOMETRY. OCCUPANCY SENSOR AND/OR VACANCY SENSOR LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. REFER TO SPECIFIC MANUFACTURE'SINSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. IF PENDANT / CHAIN MOUNTED LUMINAIRES ARE PRESENT, SENSOR LOCATION ANDCOVERAGE SHOULD BE REVIEWED WITH MANUFACTURE FOR PROPER LOCATION.

D. WHERE THE NEW LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM IS CALLED OUT TO BE INTER-TIED WITH AN EXISTING CONTROL SYSTEM IN THE PRESENTBUILDING THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THE INTER-CONNECTION AS WELL AS THE MEANS OF THEINTER-CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING SYSTEM.

E. ALL CIRCUIT NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FIELD VERIFY ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERS AND ASSOCIATED PANELBOARDAVAILABILITY AND ADJUST ACCORDINGLY. PROVIDE NEW UPDATED TYPE-WRITTEN DIRECTORIES REFLECTING ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERSAND PANELS USED, WITH NEW AND/OR FIELD REVISED/RELOCATED CIRCUITS CLEARLY INDICATED. NEW DIRECTORIES SHALL INCLUDEDATE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION, EXAMPLE: 2019 AUDITORIUM REVISIONS. PLACE NEW DIRECTORIES OVER OLD. THE RECONFIGURATIONAND DOCUMENTATION OF EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

F. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL DIVISION 26 WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS PROJECT. THE DIVISION 26CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL THEATER EQUIPMENT, BRANCH CIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYS SHOWN IN THEAUERBACK-POLLOCK-FRIEDLANDER THEATER DOCUMENTS

6

7

8

9

10

12

13

11

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

PRE-WIRED AISLE STANDARD WITH 3/8"FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT SUPPLIED BYSEATING MANUFACTURER

25


26


27

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A113

AutoCAD SHX Text

LOBBY

AutoCAD SHX Text

A102

AutoCAD SHX Text

VESTIBULE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A101

AutoCAD SHX Text

CIRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

A282

AutoCAD SHX Text

AUDITORIUM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A108

AutoCAD SHX Text

CIRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

A281

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAIR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A237

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A279

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

E280

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A236

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A280

AutoCAD SHX Text

WOMENS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A129

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A236

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A235

AutoCAD SHX Text

MECH.

AutoCAD SHX Text

A132

AutoCAD SHX Text

ADMIN.

AutoCAD SHX Text

A133

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONCESS.

AutoCAD SHX Text

A107

AutoCAD SHX Text

TICKET

AutoCAD SHX Text

A106

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A105

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A104

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

MENS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A130

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

A1

AutoCAD SHX Text

A2

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

E2

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

A3

AutoCAD SHX Text

KEYPLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

E1

3

2

1.0

4

11

1

EXIST. A2E-4#1

EXIST. A2E-3#2

EXIST. A2E-3#1

EXIST. HP-A21

EXIST. LD-A21EXIST. A2E-4#2

EXIST.A2E-2

1

1

1 1

1

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

33

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

EXIST.PANEL

30,32,34,

4

EXIST.PANEL

392

4

EXIST.PANEL

413

4

EXIST.PANEL

42

36,38

5

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

E331

POWER PLAN - UPPER LEVEL - AREA A1 2COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATIONS

NEW HOPE, MN

03-11-2019

18-192.01

03-11-2019

MINNESOTA

Date:

Checked By:

Drawn By:

Sheet Number:

Revision Number:

Sheet Size:

DWG. Scale:

Project No.:

Project Title:

STATE OF


PRINT NAME:


AS NOTED

NICHOLAS T. OELKE

47135

BKS

BTL

POWER PLAN - UPPER LEVEL - AREA A11

E331 1/8"=1'-0"

NORTH

0 4' 8' 16'

NORTH

NO ELECTRICAL WORK WILL BE REQUIRED IN THIS ROOM / AREA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROTECTAND MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IN THIS AREA THROUGHOUT THECONSTRUCTION PHASE.

PROVIDE ONE (1) DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (20 AMP, 120-VOLT CIRCUIT) AT CONTROL BOOTH.REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR DEVICE LOCATIONS. THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR ISRESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL EQUIPMENT, BRANCH CIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYSREQUIRED IN THE THEATER DOCUMENTS.

PROVIDE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN FOR AUDIO / VIDEO COMPONENT. REFER TO THE AUDIO VISUALDOCUMENTS FOR DEVICE LOCATIONS. THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDINGALL EQUIPMENT, BRANCH CIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYS REQUIRED IN THE AUDIO VISUALDOCUMENTS.

ALL CIRCUIT NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FIELD VERIFY ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERSAND PANELBOARD AVAILABILITY AND ADJUST ACCORDINGLY. PROVIDE NEW UPDATED TYPE-WRITTENDIRECTORIES REFLECTING ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERS AND PANELS USED, WITH NEW AND/OR FIELDREVISED/RELOCATED CIRCUITS CLEARLY INDICATED. NEW DIRECTORIES SHALL INCLUDE DATE ANDPROJECT DESCRIPTION, EXAMPLE: 2019 AUDITORIUM REVISIONS. PLACE NEW DIRECTORIES OVER OLD.THE RECONFIGURATION AND DOCUMENTATION OF EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITING SHALL BE THERESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

REINSTALL THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES REMOVED FROM THIS LOCATION DURING DEMOLITION.RE-USE / MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT HANGERS AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR REINSTALLATION.

KEYED NOTES:1


SHALL EXAMINE THE SITE OF THE PROPOSED WORK AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITHEXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS AFFECTING THE PERFORMANCE OF THEIR WORK. NO EXTRACOMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF A MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THE AMOUNT OF WORKINVOLVED OR FOR THE LACK OF KNOWLEDGE ON EXISTING CONDITIONS, WHICH COULD HAVE BEENDISCOVERED OR REASONABLE ANTICIPATED PRIOR TO BIDDING.

B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TOTHE START OF DEMOLITION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE OWNER, A LIST OFELECTRICAL ITEMS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY PRIOR TO THE START OF THEIR WORK. ANY DEFICIENCIESIN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM NOT NOTED, SHALL BECOME THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'SRESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ALL DAMAGED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORSASSOCIATED WITH THIS PROJECT AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

D. ALL CIRCUIT NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FIELD VERIFY ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERSAND ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD REQUIRED AND ADJUST ACCORDINGLY. PROVIDE NEW UPDATEDTYPE-WRITTEN DIRECTORIES REFLECTING ACTUAL CIRCUIT NUMBERS AND PANELS USED, WITH NEWAND/OR FIELD REVISED/RELOCATED CIRCUITS CLEARLY INDICATED. NEW DIRECTORIES SHALL INCLUDEDATE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION, EXAMPLE: 2019 AUDITORIUM REVISIONS. PLACE NEW DIRECTORIESOVER OLD. THE RECONFIGURATION AND DOCUMENTATION OF EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITING SHALL BETHE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

E. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL DIVISION 26 WORK REQUIRED UNDER THISPROJECT. THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL THEATER EQUIPMENT,BRANCH CIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYS SHOWN IN THE THEATER DOCUMENTS.

F. REFER TO THE AUDIO VISUAL DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL DIVISION 26 WORK REQUIRED UNDER THISPROJECT. THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL EQUIPMENT, BRANCHCIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYS REQUIRED IN THE AUDIO VISUAL DOCUMENTS.

2

3

4



5

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A270

AutoCAD SHX Text

AUDITORIUM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A240

AutoCAD SHX Text

SOUND BOOTH

AutoCAD SHX Text

A354

AutoCAD SHX Text

MECHANICAL

AutoCAD SHX Text

A305

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

304

AutoCAD SHX Text

UPPER MUSIC &

AutoCAD SHX Text

DRAMA

AutoCAD SHX Text

PROP STOR.

AutoCAD SHX Text

UPPER

AutoCAD SHX Text

MECHANICAL

AutoCAD SHX Text

A303

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A302

AutoCAD SHX Text

CLASSROOM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A301

AutoCAD SHX Text

A302

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A380

AutoCAD SHX Text

CLASSROOM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A301

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

A1

AutoCAD SHX Text

A2

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

E2

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

A3

AutoCAD SHX Text

KEYPLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

E1

HR

3

2

1.0

4

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

2

20

20

20

21

20

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

19

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2

1

2

0

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

2

1

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

19

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

19

2

0

1

9

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

1

9

2

0

2

0

2

0

1

9

21

20

EXIST. HP-A13EXIST. A1E-7, SEC 2

EXIST. A1E-7, SEC 1

1

11 1

11

111

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EXIST.PANELEM-HP-3

A1E-6 #1,2

1

11

1

1

1

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

SDC

SEL

S XS

SDC

SEL

S XS

1

1

1

FAAP

23

IC

7

54" SCR

20

SRC

10

20

IC

S

8

5

15 S

C

17

11F

F KB48"

90"WP

21

(2)4 F

F

SCD

S LESS

X

S CR

S

S

(2)

F

C17

C

17(2)

S

F

SCR

20

F

F

EXIST. SECURITYPANEL

S CD

SLE S S

X

SCR

S SX

20

S CD

SLE

S

S

S

S

CLG.

S

(2)

24

14 15

26

27(2)

27(2)

27(2)

27(2)

27(2)

27(2)

25(2)

25(2)

(2)

FDM

FDM

FDM

FDM

FDM

FDM

(2)

109

12

11

S

19

18

2013

16

(2)4 CLG.

(2)4 CLG.

18

18

18

18

18

F

F

1

1

2

10

(2)108"

22

6

3

TV

28

TV

28

2

2

18

18

2

(2)

4

CLG.

10 1010

10 1010

2

2

R.8R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

E421

TECHNOLOGY PLAN - MAIN LEVEL - AREA A1 2COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATIONS

NEW HOPE, MN

03-11-2019

18-192.01

03-11-2019

MINNESOTA

Date:

Checked By:

Drawn By:

Sheet Number:

Revision Number:

Sheet Size:

DWG. Scale:

Project No.:

Project Title:

STATE OF


PRINT NAME:


AS NOTED

NICHOLAS T. OELKE

47135

BKS

BTL

TECHNOLOGY PLAN - MAIN LEVEL - AREA A11

E421 1/8"=1'-0"

NORTH

0 4' 8' 16'

NORTH

NO ELECTRICAL WORK WILL BE REQUIRED IN THIS ROOM / AREA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROTECT AND MAINTAIN THECONTINUITY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IN THIS AREA THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.

PROVIDE TWO (2) 2” MIN EMPTY CONDUIT / SLEEVE ABOVE THE ACOUSTICAL CEILING FOR ROUTING OF TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING.EXTEND SLEEVES 3" BEYOND BOTH SIDES OF THE WALL. TERMINATE EACH END OF THE CONDUIT / SLEEVE WITH A NON-METALLICBUSHING.

PROVIDE ONE (1) 2-GANG JUNCTION BOX, WITH TWO (2) 1 1/4" EMPTY CONDUITS FOR DATA CONNECTIONS TO MODULAR OFFICEFURNITURE. PROVIDE DOUBLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX. COORDINATE GENERAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS WITH THE FURNITURECONSULTANT / OWNER PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ROUGH-IN.

PROVIDE TWO (2) CAT 6 DATA CABLES FOR WIRELESS ACCESS POINT. LABEL CABLE ON BOTH ENDS PER DESIGNATED SCHEME, COIL20'-0" OF SLACK CABLE AND TERMINATE TO A BISCUIT JACK. VERIFY FINAL LOCATION BASED ON CONTRACTOR PROVIDED RF SIGNALSTRENGTH TESTING.

PROVIDE SCHOOL "LOCK-DOWN" PUSH BUTTON TO THE UNDERSIDE OF THE MODULAR OFFICE FURNITURE. INTERFACE PUSH BUTTONTO LENEL SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. PROVIDE REQUIRED ELECTRONICS AND PROGRAMMING FOR A COMPLETE ANDOPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

PROVIDE PUSHBUTTON TO UNLOCK DOOR #A101-A. PUSHBUTTON SHALL BE LOCATED AT MAIN OFFICE RECEPTION DESK AND SHALLINTERFACE TO LENEL SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. PROVIDE REQUIRED ELECTRONICS AND PROGRAMMING FOR A COMPLETEAND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

PROVIDE AUDIO / VIDEO INTERCOM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM. PROVIDE A RECESSED, VANDAL PROOF, COLOR VIDEO, IN A STAINLESSSTEEL DOOR STATION AS PER SPECIFICATIONS.

PROVIDE VIDEO INTERCOM MASTER ANNUNCIATOR WITH COLOR VIDEO AS PER SPECIFICATIONS TO INTERFACE WITH INTERCOMS ATMAIN ENTRANCE AND THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING. LOCATE ADJACENT TO DOOR UNLOCK PUSHBUTTON. PROVIDE CABLING,CONNECTIONS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

PROVIDE LENEL READER ELECTRONICS AND REQUIRED WIRING / CONNECTIONS FOR THE ABILITY TO REMOTELY LOCK / UNLOCK THEDOUBLE DOORS THROUGH THE DISTRICT LENEL SECURITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE SYSTEM. DOORS SHALL BE PROGRAMMED TOAUTOMATICALLY (OR MANUALLY) LOCK / UNLOCK PER OWNER'S SCHEDULE. COORDINATE WITH OWNER FOR PROGRAMMINGREQUIREMENTS AND INSTALL AS A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

INTERIOR CAMERA - CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERA AND MULTI-FUNCTIONAL POWER BOXWITH EITHERNET CONVERTER. PROVIDE AXIS CAMERA - MODEL #P1427E. DELIVER CAMERA TO OWNER (ROBERT MENSON -763-504-8119) FOR PROGRAMMING. PROVIDE MOUNTING BRACKET AS VIDEALARM - MODEL #PWM20G AND VIDEOLARM - MODEL#110-P4854S R2 OR APPROVED EQUAL. PROVIDE CAT 6 CABLING (W/ YELLOW JACKET) FOR COMMUNICATION TO CAMERA. ROUTECABLING TO VIDEO SURVEILLANCE ENCLOSURE LOCATED IN THE MAIN TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM B101. LABEL CABLEON BOTH ENDS PER OWNERS DESIGNATED LABELING SCHEME. IF CAMERA INSTALLATION REQUIRES MORE THAN 300'-0” OF CABLEEND-TO-END PROVIDE A CAMERA END POE POWER INJECTOR MODULE MOUNTED NO MORE THAN 3'-0” AWAY FROM THE CAMERA.INSTALL THE POE POWER INJECTOR MODULE WITHIN A SURFACE MOUNTED 4” x 4” x 4” STEEL, NEMA 4 RATED BOX.

EXTERIOR CAMERA - CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERA AND MULTI-FUNCTIONAL POWER BOXWITH EITHERNET CONVERTER. PROVIDE AXIS CAMERA - WITH HEATER - MODEL #Q1765LE. DELIVER CAMERA AND HEATER TO OWNER(ROBERT MENSON - 763-504-8119) FOR PROGRAMMING. PROVIDE MOUNTING BRACKET AS VIDEOLARM - MODEL #PWM20G ANDVIDEOLARM - MODEL #110-P4854S R2. PROVIDE CAT 6 CABLING (W/ YELLOW JACKET) FOR COMMUNICATION TO CAMERA. ROUTE TOVIDEO SURVEILLANCE ENCLOSURE LOCATED IN THE MAIN TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM B101. LABEL CABLE ON BOTHENDS PER OWNERS DESIGNATED LABELING SCHEME. IF CAMERA INSTALLATION REQUIRES MORE THAN 300'-0" OF CABLE END-TO-ENDPROVIDE A CAMERA END POE POWER INJECTOR MODULE MOUNTED NO MORE THAN 3'-0" AWAY FROM THE CAMERA. INSTALL THE POEPOWER INJECTOR MODULE WITHIN A SURFACE MOUNTED 4" x 4" x 4" STEEL, NEMA 4 RATED BOX. PROVIDE A 120 VOLT CONNECTIONFOR CAMERA HEATER.

PROVIDE CAT 6 CABLING (W/ YELLOW JACKET) FOR VIDEO SURVELLANCE CAMERA ROUGH-IN (FUTURE CAMERA BY OWNER). CABLESHALL HOMERUN TO THE NEW PATCH PANEL LOCATED IN THE WALL MOUNTED VIDEO SURVELLANCE SYSTEM ENCLOUSURE LOCATEDIN THE MAIN DATA ROOM B101. LABEL CABLE ON BOTH ENDS PER OWNERS DESIGNATED LABELING SCHEME, COIL 20'-0" OF SLACKCABLE AND TERMINATE THIS END WITH A BISCUIT JACK. IF CAMERA INSTALLATION REQUIRES MORE THAN 300'-0" OF CABLEEND-TO-END PROVIDE A CAMERA END POE POWER INJECTOR MODULE MOUNTED NO MORE THAN 3'-0" AWAY FROM THE CAMERA.INSTALL THE POE POWER INJECTOR MODULE WITHIN A SURFACE MOUNTED 4" x 4" x 4" STEEL, NEMA 4 RATED BOX.

PROVIDE LOCKABLE ENCLOSURE FOR VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM SERVICES. WALL MOUNTED CABINET 6" BELOW THE CEILING /BAR JOIST / EXPOSED STRUCTURE. PROVIDE ENCLOSURE MANUFACTURED BY MIDDLE ATLANTIC PRODUCTS (OR EQUAL) - MODEL#DWR-21-22PDN WITH VERTICALLY MOUNTED PLUGSTRIP. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL CABLING TO THIS ENCLOSURE FOR SECURITYCAMERA CABLING.

EXISTING DATA/VOICE TERMINATION CABINET SHALL REMAIN.

EXISTING TV (VIDEO) TERMINATION BOARD SHALL REMAIN.

EXISTING CEILING / SURFACE MOUNTED CABLE TRAY, PROTECT CABLE TRAY AND CONTENTS THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRECONSTRUCTION PHASE.

PROVIDE A NEW 'PRIMEX' WIRELESS CLOCK IN THIS LOCATION. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE THEEXACT CLOCK PLACEMENT WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

INSTALL NEW PAGING SYSTEM SPEAKER. RE-USE AND/OR MODIFY THE EXISTING CONDUIT, AND JUNCTION BOXES. PROVIDE NEWWIRING, ADDITIONAL RACEWAYS, EXTENSIONS, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, AND ACCESSORY FITTINGS AS NECESSARY FOR ACOMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL PAGING SYSTEM. RETURNING THE ORIGINAL PAGING SYSTEM BACK TO A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONALSYSTEM.

EXTERIOR SPEAKER. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE THE EXACT SPEAKER PLACEMENT WITH THEARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

PROVIDE AND INSTALL A COMPLETE CARD READER / SECURITY SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED. SEE SECURITY DETAILS ON SHEET E700 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PROVIDE ALL RACEWAY, WIRING, HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES, SUPPORTS, FASTENERS, AND FITTINGSNECESSARY TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SECURITY SYSTEM.

FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCKABLE KEY BOX. CONNECT TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AS A SUPERVISORY SIGNAL. COORDINATE EXACTREQUIREMENTS WITH THE OWNER / CITY PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

PROVIDE DATA RECEPTACLE FOR OWNER PROVIDED VIDEO MONITOR. COORDINATE VIDEO MONITOR LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIORTO ROUGH-IN.

FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL.

PROVIDE DATA RECEPTACLE FOR AUDIO / VIDEO COMPONENT. REFER TO THE PETERSON AUDIO VISUAL CONSULTING DOCUMENTSFOR DEVICE LOCATIONS.

DATA DEVICE SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN THE ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK. COORDINATE THE ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTSAND DEVICE PLACEMENT WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. ALL JUNCTION BOXES AND RACEWAYS SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHINTHE ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK / FRAMEWORK. COORDINATE ANY MILLWORK DISCREPANCIES WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TOPROCEEDING WITH THE ROUGH-IN.

EXISTING WALL MOUNTED SECURITY CAMERA / EQUIPMENT TERMINATION CABINET SHALL REMAIN.

DATA CABLE INSTALLED IN THE WIREMOLD WALLSOURCE SERVICE BOX - RE-USE / MODIFY THE EXISTING DATA CONDUIT, HANGERS,AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR INSTALLATION OF A NEW DATA RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE. COORDINATE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES.

COAXIAL CABLE (T.V.) INSTALLED IN THE WIREMOLD WALLSOURCE SERVICE BOX - RE-USE / MODIFY THE EXISTING COAXIAL CONDUIT,HANGERS, JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUCTORS FOR INSTALLATION OF A NEW RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE. COORDINATE WORKWITH OTHER TRADES.

KEYED NOTES:

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

2

13

KEYED NOTES:1

GENERAL NOTES:A. INSPECTION OF SITE: BEFORE SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL ON THE WORK, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE THE SITE OF

THE PROPOSED WORK AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS AFFECTING THEPERFORMANCE OF THEIR WORK. NO EXTRA COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF A MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THEAMOUNT OF WORK INVOLVED OR LACK OF KNOWLEDGE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS WHICH COULD HAVE BEEN DISCOVERED ORREASONABLE ANTICIPATED PRIOR TO BIDDING.

B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE OPERATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TO THE START OFDEMOLITION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE OWNER, A LIST OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS NOT OPERATING PROPERLYPRIOR TO THE START OF THEIR WORK. ANY DEFICIENCIES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM NOT NOTED, SHALL BECOME THEELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ALL DAMAGED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS PROJECTAT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

D. REFER TO THE THEATER DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL DIVISION 26 WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS PROJECT. THE DIVISION 26CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL THEATER EQUIPMENT, BRANCH CIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYS SHOWNIN THE THEATER DOCUMENTS.

E. REFER TO THE AUDIO VISUAL DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL DIVISION 26 WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS PROJECT. THE DIVISION 26CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL EQUIPMENT, BRANCH CIRCUITING, CABLING, AND PATHWAYS REQUIRED IN THEAUDIO VISUAL DOCUMENTS.

F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE LABELING FOR THE SURVEILLANCE CAMERA LOW VOLTAGE CABLE (COPPER AND FIBER)AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE. COORDINATE WITH DISTRICT (ROBERT MENSON, 763-504-8119) FOR LABELING SCHEME. CONTRACTORREQUIRED TO PROVIDE END-TO-END TESTING OF EACH LOW VOLTAGE CABLE WITH TEST RESULTS MATCHING IDENTIFICATION TAGINSTALLED IN FIELD. TESTING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TIA/EIA 568-B.

G. FOR LOCATION OF CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN.

H. FOR LOCATION OF WALL MOUNTED DEVICES REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHTSAND LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS.

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28



AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A1'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'E'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A2'

AutoCAD SHX Text

MATCHLINE AREA 'A3'

AutoCAD SHX Text

CIRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

A282

AutoCAD SHX Text

CIRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

A281

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAIR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A237

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A236

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A279

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

E280

AutoCAD SHX Text

CORRIDOR

AutoCAD SHX Text

A280

AutoCAD SHX Text

WOMENS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A129

AutoCAD SHX Text

MENS

AutoCAD SHX Text

A130

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A236

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A235

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A228

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A227

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A226

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A224B

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A223

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A222

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A225

AutoCAD SHX Text

A202B

AutoCAD SHX Text

A202C

AutoCAD SHX Text

A202D

AutoCAD SHX Text

A232

AutoCAD SHX Text

GUIDANCE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A215

AutoCAD SHX Text

A203A

AutoCAD SHX Text

A203

AutoCAD SHX Text

A204

AutoCAD SHX Text

A205

AutoCAD SHX Text

A216

AutoCAD SHX Text

NURSE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A214

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A221

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A220

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A219

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A218

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A217

AutoCAD SHX Text

TOILET

AutoCAD SHX Text

A214A

AutoCAD SHX Text

A225A

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A224A

AutoCAD SHX Text

SPEECH

AutoCAD SHX Text

E257

AutoCAD SHX Text

SCENE SHOP

AutoCAD SHX Text

E276

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

E277

AutoCAD SHX Text

DRESSING

AutoCAD SHX Text

E257B

AutoCAD SHX Text

LIFT

AutoCAD SHX Text

E280B

AutoCAD SHX Text

DRESSING

AutoCAD SHX Text

E257A

AutoCAD SHX Text

CUSTODIAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

A224

AutoCAD SHX Text

LOBBY

AutoCAD SHX Text

A102

AutoCAD SHX Text

VESTIBULE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A101

AutoCAD SHX Text

MECH.

AutoCAD SHX Text

A132

AutoCAD SHX Text

ADMIN.

AutoCAD SHX Text

A133

AutoCAD SHX Text

CONCESS.

AutoCAD SHX Text

A107

AutoCAD SHX Text

TICKET

AutoCAD SHX Text

A106

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A105

AutoCAD SHX Text

STORAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A104

AutoCAD SHX Text

STAGE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A113

AutoCAD SHX Text

AUDITORIUM

AutoCAD SHX Text

A108

AutoCAD SHX Text

OFFICE

AutoCAD SHX Text

A229

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

A1

AutoCAD SHX Text

A2

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

E2

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

A3

AutoCAD SHX Text

KEYPLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

E1

COOPER HIGH SCHOOLAUDITORIUM/ENTRY RENOVATIONS

NEW HOPE, MN

03-11-2019

18-192.01

03-11-2019

MINNESOTA

Date:

Checked By:

Drawn By:

Sheet Number:

Revision Number:

Sheet Size:

DWG. Scale:

Project No.:

Project Title:

STATE OF


PRINT NAME:


AS NOTED

NICHOLAS T. OELKE

47135

BKS

BTL



AutoCAD SHX Text

E700

AutoCAD SHX Text

ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES

AutoCAD SHX Text

2

STAGE LEVEL

STAGE CEILING

TD-09PSP

(16)@20A CIR.

TC-14DMX

MULTICABLE TERMINATION(WORK OF DIV. 26)

1ST ELECTRIC PLUG STRIP(FURNISHED BY 116163,INSTALLED BY DIV. 26)

TO CONTROL RACKREFER TO TL6.01

(WORK OF DIV. 26)TD-17

TB(8)@20A CIR.

TC-27ET-TB

TERMINAL BOXESFURNISHED BY 116163,

INSTALLED BY DIV. 26

TD-14TB

(8)@20A CIR.

TD-11PSP

(16)@20A CIR.

TC-16DMX


HEAVY DUTY RJ-45CONNECTOR

(WORK OF 116133)

3RD ELECTRIC PLUG STRIP(FURNISHED BY 116163,INSTALLED BY DIV. 26)


(WORK OF DIV. 26)TD-19TB

(8)@20A CIR.

TC-29ET-TB



TD-16TB

(8)@20A CIR.

TD-10PSP

(16)@20A CIR.

TC-15DMX

2ND ELECTRIC PLUG STRIP(FURNISHED BY 116163,INSTALLED BY DIV. 26)




(8)@20A CIR.

TC-28ET-TB



TD-15TB

(8)@20A CIR.

MULTICABLE AND ETHERNETCABLE TERMINATION

(WORK OF DIV. 26)










TO DIMMER RACK(WORK OF DIV. 26)TO DIMMER RACK

(WORK OF DIV. 26)TO DIMMER RACK(WORK OF DIV. 26)

TO DIMMER RACK(WORK OF DIV. 26)




(WORK OF DIV. 26)


(WORK OF DIV. 26)


(WORK OF 116133)


(WORK OF 116133)

EXISTING MULTICABLE,AND NEW ETHERNET IN SINGLEEXISTING CABLE CRADLE (CABLEPROVIDED AS WORK OF 116133) ZIPTIE ETHERNET CABLE TO MULTICABLE

EXISTING MULTICABLE,IN EXISTING CABLE CRADLE

(CABLE PROVIDED AS WORK OF116133)







THEATRICALLIGHTINGBATTEN WIRINGDIAGRAM

NO SCALE1THEATRICAL LIGHTING BATTEN WIRING DIAGRAM

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

1910

:03:50

AMEm

ilyBr

ainerd

MOHAMMED LAWAL

2/25/2019 24228

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

KBLTL602

LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES

8.7.

6.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONDUIT, WIRE, MOUNTING, POWER FEEDS ANDPOWER TERMINATIONS BY DIVISION 26 UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED.REFER TO DIVISION 26 SPECIFICATIONS ANDDRAWINGS FOR PANELBOARD DESIGNATIONS.DEVICES & CONTROL WIRE TERMINATIONS BYTHEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTRACTOR EXCEPT ASNOTED.EXACT SIZES OF BACK BOXES AND FINAL WIRE TYPESAND QUANTITIES TO BE VERIFIED BY LIGHTINGCONTRACTOR.

FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS.

EXPOSED ELEMENTS TO BE FINISHED FLAT BLACKUNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.NO CONDUIT OR CONDUIT SUPPORTS PERMITTED ONHORIZONTAL RAILINGS, OVERHEAD RIGGING GRIDS,OR ACROSS THEATRICAL LIGHTING POSITIONS.THEATRICAL LIGHTING CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WIRETYPES AND COUNTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

THE LIGHTING SYSTEM SHOWN ON THIS SHEET ISBASED ON A "DIMMER PER CIRCUIT" CONCEPT. EACHRECEPTACLE IS WIRED TO THE DIMMER MODULEWITH THE ASSIGNED DMX NUMBER.

PARALLEL CIRCUITS MUST HAVE INDIVIDUAL HOTAND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS WHICH HOMERUN TOTHE RELAY PANEL.

NO COMMON NEUTRALS PERMITTED IN WIRINGDEVICES. EACH CIRCUIT MUST HAVE AN INDIVIDUALHOT AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR WHICH HOMERUNTO THE RELAY PANEL.

9.

10.

11.

TD#TB

CIRCUITSCIRCUIT NO.

THEATRE LIGHTINGDISTRIBUTION DEVICE-TERMINAL BOX.

LIGHTING SYMBOL KEY

THEATRICAL CONTROL (TC) PANELS & RECEPTACLES

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE-CONTROL RACK

LSLS

TC#CR

(2) 20A CIRCUIT

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE-CONSOLE CONNECTION PANEL

LSLS

TC#CC

(2) 20A CIRCUIT

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE-DMX NODE.

TC#DMX

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE-ETHERNET TERMINAL BOX

TC#ET-TB

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE -5-BUTTON PRESET PANEL

TC#PP

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE -1-BUTTON ENTRY PANEL

TC#EP

THEATRICAL DISTRIBUTION (TD) DEVICES

TD#FSP

CIRCUITSCIRCUIT NO.

THEATRE LIGHTINGDISTRIBUTION DEVICE-SWITCHED FOLLOWSPOTPOWER RECEPTACLE

TD#PSP

CIRCUITSCIRCUIT NO.

THEATRE LIGHTINGDISTRIBUTION DEVICE-PLUGGING STRIP WITHPIGTAILS

LIGHTING SYSTEM POWERDUPLEX RECEPTACLE20A/120V CONVENIENCEOUTLET CIRCUIT(WORK BY DIV 26)

LS

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE - HOUSELIGHTING CONTROLTOUCHSCREEN

TC#HL

DEVICES WORK OF 11 61 63 U.O.N.

TD#PBR

CIRCUITSCIRCUIT NO.

THEATRE LIGHTINGDISTRIBUTION DEVICE-PLUGGING BOX WITHRECEPTACLES

THEATRE LIGHTINGCONTROL DEVICE -WIRELESS ACCESS POINT

TC#WAP

NOTE: A COMPLETE BUILDING SURVEY WAS NOTAVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF ISSUE OF THESE DRAWINGS.CONTRACTOR SHALL BE REQUIRED TO FIELD VERIFY ALLEXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS RELATED TOTHE WORK OF THIS SECTION PRIOR TO COMPLETINGSHOP DRAWINGS AND INSTALLING EQUIPMENT.OBSTRUCTIONS WHICH IMPEDE THE INSTALLATION OFTHE EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN SHALL BE MODIFIED BY THECONTRACTOR TO ALLOW PROPER INSTALLATION.

2

00'

-0"

DA

TUM

11'

-3"

MA

INC

UR

T AIN

22'

-6"

1ST

ELE

CT R

IC3

3'-0

"G

EN

ER

AL

PU

RP

OSE

678'

-0"

BO

RD

ER

9

8'-8

"M

ID-S

TAG

ETR

AVEL

ER

1013

'-0"

GE

NE

RA

LP

UR

PO

SE

12

11'-6

"2N

DE

LEC

T RIC

15'-6

"W

OR

KLI

GH

TS

131417

'-6"

BO

RD

ER

18'-6

"U

PS

TAG

ET R

AVE

LER

1521

'-0"

3RD

ELE

CT R

IC

1623

'-0"

GE

NE

RA

LP

UR

PO

SE

1725

'-0"

GE

NE

RA

LP

UR

PO

SE

44'

-0"

WO

RK

LIG

HTS

56'

-0"

GE

NE

RA

LP

UR

PO

SE

89'

-8"

GE

NE

RA

LP

UR

PO

SE

1114

'-6"

GE

NE

RA

LP

UR

PO

SE

1826

'-6"

CY

CLO

RAM

A

NEW JAW/JAW TURNBUCKLE(REFER TO 11 61 33)

NEW 1-1/2" SCH. 40 PIPE BATTEN(REFER TO 11 61 33)

NEW 1/4" BOLT WITH NUT ANDLOCKWASHER (TYP.)(REFER TO 11 61 33)

SLOTTED HOLES AT BOLTLOCATIONS.

NEW DEVICE TYPE 'PSP'(REFER TO 11 61 63)

UPSTAGE

ETC TYPE 21 PIPE HANGER BRACKET AT 5'-0"O.C. MAX. (COORDINATE WITH CIRCUITLOCATIONS SO AS NOT TO OBSCURECIRCUITING) (REFER TO 11 61 33)

NEW RIGGING SYSTEM CONNECTION(REFER TO 11 61 33)

THEATRICALRIGGINGENLARGEDPLANS

1/4" = 1'-0"1BASE BID BATTEN LAYOUT

52'-0

"BA

TTEN

LEN

GTH

3'-0"

INDICATES CLEAR ZONE FOREXISTING PLUMBING, HVAC,AND ELECTRICAL.

24'-0"3'-0"

63'-0

"MA

IND

RA

PE

DE

AD

-HU

NG

BATT

EN

NEW ELECTRICS BATTEN ONEXISTING FIXED SPEED WINCH(TYP. OF 3)

MAIN DRAPE DEAD-HUNG. EXISTINGBATTEN TO BE RE-HUNG AT NEWELEVATION.

DEAD-HUNG TRAVELER. EXISTING BATTENTO BE RE-HUNG AT NEW ELEVATION.(TYP. OF 2)

REPLACE SIDE TAB BENTLOOP CHAIN WITH WIREROPE LIFT LINE. (SIM. OPP.)

MAIN DRAPERY IN STORED POSITION

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

198:3

9:43A

MEm

ilyBr

ainerd

MOHAMMED LAWAL

2/25/2019 24228

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

KBLTR500

1. THEATRICAL RIGGING CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD.

2. ALL EQUIPMENT BY THEATRICAL RIGGINGCONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

3. ALL FASTENERS TO HAVE LOCKWASHERS OROTHER APPROVED SELF-LOCKING HARDWARE.

4. ALL EXPOSED ELEMENTS TO BE FINISHED FLATBLACK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

5. THEATRICAL RIGGING CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLMOTOR SIZES, LOADS, POWER REQUIREMENTS, ANDCONTROL WIRE SIZES AND COUNTS.

6. ALL CONDUIT, WIRE, POWER FEEDS, JUNCTION/PULLBOXES AND FINAL TERMINATIONS BY DIVISION 26.

7. NO CONDUIT OR CONDUIT SUPPORTS PERMITTEDON HORIZONTAL PIPES OR CATWALK RAILINGS, ALLCATWALK RAILINGS TO BE COMPLETELY CLEAR OFALL OBSTRUCTIONS FROM TOP OF KICK PLATE TOTOP OF UPPER HORIZONTAL RAILING.

8. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED TO PROVIDEINFORMATION REGARDING THEATRICAL EQUIPMENTONLY. REFER TO APPLICABLE ARCHITECTURAL ORENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ARCHITECTURALAND ENGINEERING INFORMATION RELATING TO THEBUILDING.

RIGGING GENERAL NOTES

EXISTING SIDE TAB TO BE RE-HUNG ATNEW ELEVATION. ALLOW CLEARANCEFOR ROOF DRAIN SYSTEM

NEW STEEL WIRE ROPE LIFT LINE

NEW COPPER OVAL SWAGE SLEEVE WITH SHRINK WRAP TUBE

NEW GALVANIZED STANDARD THIMBLE

NEW COTTER PIN TYPE JAW & JAWTURNBUCKLE WITH SAFETY NUTS OR SAFETYWIRE

NEW PIPE CLAMP -MIN. 18" THICK STEEL PLATE WITH 5

16"GRADE 5 BOLTS AND NYLON-INSERT LOCKNUTS.

EXISTING BATTEN RE-HUNG

3" = 1'-0"2ELECTRICS PLUG STRIP MOUNTING DETAIL

NOTE: REUSE EXISTING WIREROPE LIFT LINE.

3" = 1'-0"3SIDE TAB MOUNTING DETAIL

NOTE: RE-USE EXISTING MOUNTING BRACKETAT JOIST.

1-1/2"" = 1'-0"4CABLE TIE-OFF POINT DETAIL

ROOF/RIGGING BEAM(WORK OF DIV. 5)

12" DIA. LOFT BLOCK (BEYOND)

DMX DEVICE(WORK OF 11 61 63)

TYPE 'TB' - TERMINAL BOX(WORK OF 11 61 63)

MULTICABLE AND DMX DROPCABLES(WORK OF THIS SECTION)

UNISTRUT P1000 ATTACHEDTO CEILING (WORK OF THIS SECTION)

UNISTRUT M2350 HANGER ANDSHACKLE FOR STRAIN RELIEFATTACHMENT (WORK OF THIS SECTION)

HEAVY DUTY, CLOSED MESHEDSINGLE EYE STRAIN RELIEFPICK-UP ("KELLEMS" OR EQUAL)(TYP.) (WORK OF THIS SECTION)

MULTICABLE TERMINATION INTERMINAL BOX WORK OF DIV. 26

2

THEATRICALRIGGINGSCHEDULES

NO SCALE1THEATRICAL RIGGING LINESET SCHEDULE

NO SCALE2THEATRICAL RIGGING DRAPERY SCHEDULE

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

199:5

7:00A

MEm

ilyBr

ainerd

MOHAMMED LAWAL

2/25/2019 24228

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

KBLTR600

1. THEATRICAL RIGGING CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD.

2. ALL EQUIPMENT BY THEATRICAL RIGGINGCONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

3. ALL FASTENERS TO HAVE LOCKWASHERS OROTHER APPROVED SELF-LOCKING HARDWARE.

4. ALL EXPOSED ELEMENTS TO BE FINISHED FLATBLACK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

5. THEATRICAL RIGGING CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLMOTOR SIZES, LOADS, POWER REQUIREMENTS, ANDCONTROL WIRE SIZES AND COUNTS.

6. ALL CONDUIT, WIRE, POWER FEEDS, JUNCTION/PULLBOXES AND FINAL TERMINATIONS BY DIVISION 26.

7. NO CONDUIT OR CONDUIT SUPPORTS PERMITTEDON HORIZONTAL PIPES OR CATWALK RAILINGS, ALLCATWALK RAILINGS TO BE COMPLETELY CLEAR OFALL OBSTRUCTIONS FROM TOP OF KICK PLATE TOTOP OF UPPER HORIZONTAL RAILING.

8. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED TO PROVIDEINFORMATION REGARDING THEATRICAL EQUIPMENTONLY. REFER TO APPLICABLE ARCHITECTURAL ORENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ARCHITECTURALAND ENGINEERING INFORMATION RELATING TO THEBUILDING.

RIGGING GENERAL NOTES

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY HEIGHT WIDTH FULLNESS MATERIAL LINING COLOR TRACK TYPE NOTES

MAIN CURTAIN 2 16'-0" 31'-6" 100% SEWN IN 25oz IFR VELOURIFR "AVORA"POLYESTER BY ARCH

MANUAL CORDOPERATED

FINISHED OVERALL WIDTH OF MAIN DRAPEWITH 2'-0" OVERLAP IS 61'-0"

BORDER 2 6'-0" 52'-0" 50% SEWN IN 22oz IFR VELOUR -- BLACK --

MID-STAGE TRAVELER 2 16'-0" 26'-0" 50% SEWN IN 22oz IFR VELOUR -- BLACKMANUAL CORD

OPERATEDOVERALL WIDTH OF TIED IN MID-STAGETRAVELER WITH 2'-0" OVERLAP IS 50'-0"

UP-STAGE TRAVELER 2 16'-0" 26'-0" 50% SEWN IN 22oz IFR VELOUR -- BLACKMANUAL CORD

OPERATEDOVERALL WIDTH OF TIED IN MID-STAGETRAVELER WITH 2'-0" OVERLAP IS 50'-0"

CYCLORAMA 1 17'-0" 52'-0" 0% LENO -- WHITE --SIDE TABS 6 16'-0" 8'-0" 50% SEWN IN 22oz IFR VELOUR -- BLACK WALK-ALONG

NO SCALE3ORIGINAL RIGGING SCHEDULE - PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY

2

2

2

STAGE LEVEL

STAGE CEILING

TD-09PSP

(16)@20A CIR.

TC-14DMX


1ST ELECTRIC PLUG STRIP(FURNISHED BY 116163,INSTALLED BY DIV. 26)


(WORK OF DIV. 26)TD-17

TB(8)@20A CIR.

TC-27ET-TB



TD-14TB

(8)@20A CIR.

TD-11PSP

(16)@20A CIR.

TC-16DMX



(WORK OF 116133)

3RD ELECTRIC PLUG STRIP(FURNISHED BY 116163,INSTALLED BY DIV. 26)



(8)@20A CIR.

TC-29ET-TB



TD-16TB

(8)@20A CIR.

TD-10PSP

(16)@20A CIR.

TC-15DMX

2ND ELECTRIC PLUG STRIP(FURNISHED BY 116163,INSTALLED BY DIV. 26)




(8)@20A CIR.

TC-28ET-TB



TD-15TB

(8)@20A CIR.


(WORK OF DIV. 26)










TO DIMMER RACK(WORK OF DIV. 26)TO DIMMER RACK

(WORK OF DIV. 26)TO DIMMER RACK(WORK OF DIV. 26)





(WORK OF DIV. 26)


(WORK OF DIV. 26)


(WORK OF 116133)


(WORK OF 116133)










THEATRICALRIGGINGBATTEN WIRINGDIAGRAMNO SCALE1

THEATRICAL RIGGING BATTEN WIRING DIAGRAM

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

1910

:01:11

AMEm

ilyBr

ainerd

MOHAMMED LAWAL

2/25/2019 24228

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

KBLTR601

2

A104STORAGE

108BVEST.

A108CVEST.

H

A107CONCESSIONS

A106TICKET

A108EBOOTH

CONTROL

A105STORAGE

A102LOBBY

A101VESTIBULE

A132MECH.

A133ADMIN.

A108AUDITORIUM

A113STAGE

A103STORAGE

101A

101B

101C

101D

101H

101G

101F

101E

132

133B

133A

107A

108A108B

106A

105

108C108D

104

106B107B

20

2021

21

22

20

2021

21

22

2020

202 1

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

2021

20

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

20

1920

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2019

2121

2121

2121

2121

2021

2021

2021

2120

2121

20

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2 222

2222

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2 222

2222

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2 222

2222

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2 222

222 2

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2222

2222

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2222

2222

2020

2020

2020

2022

222 2

2222

2 222

2222

2222

2222

2220

202 0

2 020

2020

2222

2222

2222

2220

202 0

2 020

2020

2222

2222

2222

2220

202 0

2 020

2020

2222

2222

2222

2220

202 0

2020

202 0

2222

2222

2222

2220

202 0

2020

202 0

2222

2222

2222

2220

2 02 0

2020

2020

2222

2222

2222

2220

2 02 0

2020

2 020

2222

2222

2222

2220

2 02 0

2020

2 020

2020

2020

2020

2020

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

19

1920

2019

2020

1920

2020

19

2121

2221

2221

2221

2221

2121

2121

2221

2221

2221

2121

2121

2221

2221

2221

2122

2221

2222

2221

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

2021

2120

2121

2021

2120

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

19

1920

2020

2019

2020

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

19

2020

2020

2020

2020

2020

2021

20

2020

2020

2120

2120

2120

2120

2021

2021

2120

2121

2021

2120

2121

2121

2121

2121

2122

2122

21

2121

2121

2121

2121

2122

2122

21

2020

2120

2120

2120

2120

2120

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

1920

2020

2020

1920

2020

2020

2019

1920

2020

2020

1920

2020

2020

2019

1920

2020

1920

2020

1920

2020

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

1920

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

1920

2019

2020

1920

2019

2020

2019

2120

R.8 S.4R.2Q.8Q.1P.1O.1

1/8" = 1'-0"1THEATRICAL SEATING PLAN - MAIN LEVEL

NOTE "A":IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH CODE REQUIRED MINIMUMAISLE ACCESSWAY DIMENSIONS AND TO PROVIDE FORPATRON COMFORT, THE MAXIMUM SEAT ENVELOPE(DIMENSION FROM FRONT OF SEAT TO BACK) SHALL NOTEXCEED 20.5".

NOTE "B":SEAT SPACING FOR DUAL ACCESS ROW PER 1028.10.2.1.THE LONGEST DUAL ACCESS ROW CONTAINS 14 SEATS.MINIMUM AISLE ACCESSWAY REQUIRED =12".34" ROW TO ROW SPACING MINUS 20.5" SEAT ENVELOPE =13.5" AISLE ACCESSWAY PROVIDED.

NOTE "C":SEAT SPACING FOR SINGLE ACCESS ROW PER 1028.10.2.2.THE LONGEST SINGLE ACCESS ROW CONTAINS 2 SEATS.MINIMUM AISLE ACCESSWAY REQUIRED = 12".34" ROW TO ROW SPACING MINUS 20.5" SEAT ENVELOPE =13.5" AISLE ACCESSWAY PROVIDED.

NOTE "D":LEVEL OR RAMPED AISLE (slope not exceeding 1:12) WITHSEATING ON BOTH SIDES PER SECTION 1028.6.1PARAGRAPH 4 REQUIRES 0.20" OF WIDTH FOR EACHOCCUPANT SERVED. THERE ARE 232 OCCUPANTSSERVED (WORST CASE). (232)(0.20) = 46.4" CALCULATEDMINIMUM WIDTH. THE WIDTH PROVIDED IS 48".

NOTE "E":LEVEL OR RAMPED AISLE (slope not exceeding 1:12) WITHSEATING ON ONE SIDE PER SECTION 1028.6.1PARAGRAPH 4 REQUIRES 0.20" OF WIDTH FOR EACHOCCUPANT SERVED. THERE ARE 61 OCCUPANTS SERVED(WORST CASE). (61)(0.20) = 12.2" CALCULATED MINIMUMWIDTH. PER SECTION 1028.9.1 PARAGRAPH 5 MINIMUMREQUIRED WIDTH IS 36" AND 45" OF WIDTH IS PROVIDED.

NOTE "F":COMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL PER SECTION 1028.8SHALL NOT EXCEED 30 FEET FROM THE POINT WHERE THEOCCUPANT IS SEATED TO A POINT WHERE THE OCCUPANTHAS A CHOICE OF TWO DIRECTIONS OF TRAVEL TO TWOEXITS. PATRONS IN DUAL ACCESS HAVE A CHOICE OFTWO DIRECTIONS IMMEDIATELY UPON STANDING. THECOMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL DISTANCE IS ZEROFEET WHICH DOES NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED.

NOTE "G":COMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL PER SECTION 1028.8SHALL NOT EXCEED 30 FEET FROM THE POINT WHERETHE OCCUPANT IS SEATED TO A POINT WHERE THEOCCUPANT HAS A CHOICE OF TWO DIRECTIONS OFTRAVEL TO TWO EXITS. INDICATED DISTANCE IS 12'-6"WHICH DOES NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED.

48OCCUPANTS

60OCCUPANTS

64OCCUPANTS

225OCCUPANTS

221 OCCUPANTS

61OCCUPANTS

58OCCUPANTS

236OCCUPANTS

65OCCUPANTS

NOTE "A"

NO

TE"B"

NO

TE"B

"

2'-10"TYP.ROW SPACING

NO

TE"C

"

NO

TE"C

"

232 OCCUPANTS4'-0

"

NO

TE"D

"

4'-0

"

NO

TE"E

"

3'-9

"

3'-9

"

NO

TE"B

"

NOTE "G"

4'-0"

4'-0

"

3'-10"

3'-10"

4'-0"

3'-2

"

3'-2"

3'-10"

NO

TE" F"

NO

TE"F"

NO

TE"F

"

4'-8

"4'

-9"

2'-1

0"

3'-4

"3'

-4"

EXIT

EXIT

EXIT

EXIT

EXIT

EXIT

NOTE "H":EGRESS DOOR PER SECTION 1005.3.2 SHALL PROVIDE0.2" OF WIDTH FOR EACH OCCUPANT SERVED. THEREARE 236 OCCUPANTS SERVED (WORSE CASE FORCENTER AISLES). (236)(0.20) = 47.2" CALCULATEDMINIMUM REQUIRED WIDTH. 57" OF WIDTH IS PROVIDED.

NO

TE"H

"

NO

TE"J

"

NOTE "J":EGRESS DOOR PER SECTION 1005.3.2 SHALL PROVIDE0.2" OF WIDTH FOR EACH OCCUPANT SERVED. THEREARE 61 OCCUPANTS SERVED (WORSE CASE FOR SIDEAISLES). (65)(0.20) = 13" CALCULATED MINIMUMREQUIRED WIDTH. 34" OF WIDTH IS PROVIDED.

WHEELCHAIR SPACES REQUIRED BY MNAC1108.2.2.1=8. 8 SPACES ARE PROVIDED.

1.

WHEELCHAIR COMPANION SEATS ARE PROVIDEDADJACENT TO WHEELCHAIR SPACES PER MNAC1108.2.3 AND 802.7.

3.

AISLE ADJACENT TRANSFER SEATS REQUIRED BYMNAC 1108.2.5 = 6 (5% OF TOTAL AISLE SEATS ANDTHERE ARE 106 TOTAL AISLE SEATS).8 TRANSFER SEATS ARE PROVIDED.

4.

WHEELCHAIR SPACES ARE DISPERSED ASREQUIRED BY MNAC 1108.2.4 AND 802.10.

2.

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


ARCHITECTSSTAMP

Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

1910

:15:52

AMEm

ilyBr

ainerd

MOHAMMED LAWAL

2/25/2019 24228

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

KBL

ACCESSIBILITY NOTES

SEATING LAYOUT INDICATES DESIGN INTENT ONLY.FINAL LAYOUT ON SHOP DRAWINGS INCLUDINGCHAIR DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES ARE THESOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE THEATRICALSEATING CONTRACTOR.CLEAR AISLE DIMENSIONS INDICATED ON THEDRAWINGS ARE TO BE FOLLOWED WHENPREPARING SHOP DRAWINGS. THESEDIMENSIONS ARE BASED ON PROJECT CODEREQUIREMENTS.VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS INFIELD PRIOR TO PREPARATION OF SHOPDRAWINGS.WHEN LAYING OUT SEATS IN ROWS WHICHCONTAIN VARYING WIDTH SEATS, ADHERE TO THEFOLLOWING GUIDELINES WHERE POSSIBLE:

- A NARROWER SEAT IS TO BE MOUNTEDADJACENT TO AN AISLE.- A WIDER SEAT IS TO BE MOUNTED ADJACENTTO SIDE WALLS OR RAILINGS.- THE REMAINING VARYING WIDTH SEATS ARETO BE DISTRIBUTED THROUGHOUT THE ROWSO THAT NARROW SEATS ARE NOT MOUNTEDADJACENT TO ONE ANOTHER.- WHERE POSSIBLE, SEATS SHOULD BESTAGGERED FROM ROW TO ROW.

AISLE LIGHT FIXTURES PREWIRED BY SEATINGCONTRACTOR AND TERMINATED BY DIVISION 16.AISLE LIGHT JUNCTION BOX, WIRE, AND CONDUITPROVIDED BY DIVISION 26AISLE LIGHT TRANSFORMER(S) SUPPLIED BYSEATING CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLED BYDIVISION 26.

ALL EQUIPMENT BY SEATING CONTRACTORUNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

SEAT NOTES

CHAIR WIDTHTRANSFER ARM

FIXED SEAT

5'-6"

4'-0

"

DOUBLEWHEELCHAIR SPACE(WITH MINIMUM CLEARDIMENSIONS)

SEAT TOTALS

22

AISLE LIGHT

INDICATES ADA SEAT TYPET = DESIGNATED AISLE SEAT (TRANSFER ARM)C = WHEELCHAIR COMPANION

T

3'-0"

4'-0

"

SINGLEWHEELCHAIR SPACE(WITH MINIMUM CLEARDIMENSIONS)

GENERAL NOTES

CODE COMPLIANCE NOTES

19" SEATS20" SEATS21" SEATS22" SEATSWHEELCHAIRS

TOTAL

91379

92126

8

696

AISLE LIGHTS TO PROVIDE A MINIMUMILLUMINATION OF ONE FOOTCANDLE AT THEWALKING SURFACE (DIMMABLE TO NO LESSTHAN 0.2 FOOTCANDLE DURINGPERFORMANCES) AND COMPLYING WITH THEREQUIREMENTS OF MNBC SECTION 1006.2

8.

CODES REFERENCED ARE:THE MINNESOTA BUILDING CODE 2015 EDITION AND

THE MINNESOTA ACCESSIBILITY CODE 2015 EDITIONINCORPORATING CHAPTER 11 OF THE

INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2012 EDITIONAND INCORPORATING THE ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2009 EDITION

OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: ASSEMBLY GROUP A-1

THEATRICALSEATINGPLAN - MAINLEVEL

TS100

FLOOR SLAB INFILL(HATCHED)



FLOOR SLAB CUT TOCREATE LEVEL AREA FORWHEECHAIR SPACES ANDROW OF SEATS BETWEEN NOTE "G"

2'-1

0"

4'-0"

CC

CC

CC

CC

T

T

T

T

T

T

TT

4'-0"

4'-0"

1

NOTE: SEATING PROVIDED BYOWNER. SHEET INCLUDEDFOR REFERENCE ONLY.

2

2

2

2

IMPORTANT - THESE AV PLANS REPRESENT INFRASTRUCTURE ONLY, THE ACTUAL AV SYSTEMS WILL BE BID INDEPENDENT OF THIS PROJECT

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

19 9:

44:48

AM

David

Pete

rson

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

DP

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

19 9:

45:02

AM

David

Pete

rson

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

DP

MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - AV DEMOLITIONSCALE: 1/8"=1'-0"1 UPPER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - AV DEMOLITION

SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0"2

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

19 9:

45:42

AM

David

Pete

rson

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

DP

MAIN FLOOR PLAN - AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMSSCALE: 1/8"=1'-0"1

CONTROL PLATFORM DETAIL PLAN - AV SYSTEMSSCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"3

LONGITUDINAL ROOM SECTION - AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMSSCALE: 1/8"=1'-0"4

CONTROL PLATFORM DETAIL PLAN - LEGENDSCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"2

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

19 9:

46:01

AM

David

Pete

rson

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

DP

MAIN FLOOR PLAN - AV INFRASTRUCTURESCALE: 1/8"=1'-0"1

CONTROL PLATFORM - AV INFRASTRUCTURESCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"2

License #:Date:

Signature:

Printed Name:


Project

Date

rawing Number

4/4/20

19 9:

44:11

AM

David

Pete

rson

17.1044.03

3/11/2019

DP

AUDIO OUTPUTS - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMNO SCALE1 DATA DISTRIBUTION - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NO SCALE2

PRODUCTION INTERCOM - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMNO SCALE3

Date post:	09-Mar-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times